FAMOS

Users Manual

Rev. 1

15.05.2008

FAMOS Version 6.0

2008 imc Mesysteme GmbH

imc Mesysteme GmbH, Voltastrasse 5, 13355 Berlin

Table Of Contents

FAMOS Users Manual

1.1 Customer Support - Hotline ................................................................................................................................... 12 1.2 Important Notes ................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2.1 Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................................... 1.2.1.1 Guarantee of Year 2000 conformity .................................................................................................................................................. 1.2.1.2 Quality Management .................................................................................................................................................. 13 13 13

1.3 imc Guarantee and Software-License Agreement ................................................................................................................................... 14

1.3.1 imc ......................................................................................................................................................... Software License Agreement 14

1.4 Product Improvement ................................................................................................................................... 16

Introduction
2.1 Foreword ................................................................................................................................... 17 2.2 Additional Help Resources ................................................................................................................................... 17 2.3 System Requirements ................................................................................................................................... 18 2.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 18 2.5 Start ................................................................................................................................... 19 2.6 Start with Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 19
2.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.6.2 Registry-Key for Configurations Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.6.3 Opening a measurement value file ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.6.4 Running a Sequence/ Dialog ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.6.5 Executing Operations ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.6.6 Running a project ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.6.7 Starting Data Browser ......................................................................................................................................................... 19 20 21 22 22 22 23

User Interface
3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 24 3.2 Variables List ................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.2.2 Operation ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.2.3 Options ......................................................................................................................................................... 25 25 27

3.3 The Functions List ................................................................................................................................... 28

3.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.3.2 Operation ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 29

3.4 Editor Box ................................................................................................................................... 31

3.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.2 Editing Text ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.3 Commands for Editing Text ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.4 Active line, executing formulas ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.5 Help and Assistant ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.6 Bookmarks ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.7 Options: Editor ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.8 Options: Colors ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.9 Printing in the editor box ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.9.1 Page setup .................................................................................................................................................. 3.4.9.2 Print preview .................................................................................................................................................. 3.4.9.3 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 31 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 37 38 39 39

3.5 Output Box ................................................................................................................................... 40 3.6 The Plug-in box ................................................................................................................................... 41

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

3.7 File Menu ................................................................................................................................... 41 3.8 Variable Menu ................................................................................................................................... 42 3.9 Sequence Menu ................................................................................................................................... 44 3.10 Sequence Menu, more commands ................................................................................................................................... 45 3.11 Extra Menu ................................................................................................................................... 48 3.12 Project Menu ................................................................................................................................... 49 3.13 Window Menu ................................................................................................................................... 50 3.14 "?" (Help) Menu ................................................................................................................................... 51 3.15 Administering Favorites ................................................................................................................................... 51
3.15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.15.2 Creating a new favorite ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.15.3 Setting / changing properties of favorites ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.15.4 Organizing favorites ......................................................................................................................................................... 51 52 52 53

3.16 Customizing the User Interface ................................................................................................................................... 54

3.16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.16.2 Changing sizes ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.16.3 Hiding windows ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.16.4 Load configuration ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.16.5 Save configuration ......................................................................................................................................................... 54 54 54 55 55

Tutorial
4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 56 4.2 Starting FAMOS ................................................................................................................................... 56 4.3 Specifying Directories ................................................................................................................................... 57 4.4 Loading Files ................................................................................................................................... 58 4.5 Showing Variables ................................................................................................................................... 59 4.6 Zooming ................................................................................................................................... 59 4.7 Unzooming ................................................................................................................................... 60 4.8 Measuring ................................................................................................................................... 60 4.9 Viewing Variable Properties ................................................................................................................................... 61 4.10 Interpolation ................................................................................................................................... 62 4.11 More Waveforms in Curve Window ................................................................................................................................... 64 4.12 Changing a Formula ................................................................................................................................... 67 4.13 Single Values ................................................................................................................................... 67 4.14 Calculations ................................................................................................................................... 68 4.15 Waveform Editor ................................................................................................................................... 69 4.16 Saving Results ................................................................................................................................... 69 4.17 Deleting Variables ................................................................................................................................... 70 4.18 Spectrum ................................................................................................................................... 70 4.19 Complex Waveforms ................................................................................................................................... 71 4.20 Creating Sequences ................................................................................................................................... 72 4.21 Executing Sequences ................................................................................................................................... 73 4.22 Changing Sequences ................................................................................................................................... 74 4.23 Saving Sequences ................................................................................................................................... 74
FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

4.24 Favorites ................................................................................................................................... 74 4.25 Using the File Browser to load files ................................................................................................................................... 75 4.26 Loading and Displaying Files from a Directory ................................................................................................................................... 77 4.27 Loading and Displaying Files from Different Directories ................................................................................................................................... 78

File Management
5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 79 5.2 Loading Files ................................................................................................................................... 80
5.2.1 FAMOS Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.2.2 DSP Format (DIGISKOP(c)) ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.2.3 WFT Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.2.4 ASCII Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.2.5 Binary format ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.2.6 Excel (XLS)-Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 82 85 86 88 91 95

5.3 Saving Files ................................................................................................................................... 98

5.3.1 Saving Individually ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.3.2 Saving Together ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.3.3 FAMOS Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.3.4 ASCII Format (export template) ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.3.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 5.3.4.2 Administering ASCII-export templates .................................................................................................................................................. 5.3.4.3 Defining ASCII export templates .................................................................................................................................................. 5.3.5 ASCII Format (3.2 compatible) ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.3.6 Excel (XLS)-Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.3.6.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 5.3.6.2 Administering EXCEL-export templates .................................................................................................................................................. 5.3.6.3 Defining EXCEL export templates .................................................................................................................................................. 98 98 99 99 99 100 101 110 112 112 113 114

5.4 Default Directories ................................................................................................................................... 122

Variables
6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 124 6.2 Variable Names ................................................................................................................................... 125 6.3 Data................................................................................................................................... 126 Types
6.3.1 Normal Waveforms ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3.2 Single Values ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3.3 XY-Waveforms ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3.4 Complex Waveforms ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3.5 Text Variables ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3.6 TimeStamp-ASCII ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3.7 Data Groups ......................................................................................................................................................... 126 127 128 128 130 130 131

6.4 Structured Waveforms ................................................................................................................................... 131

6.4.1 Segments ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.4.2 Events ......................................................................................................................................................... 132 132

6.5 Indexing Variables ................................................................................................................................... 132 6.6 Data................................................................................................................................... 133 Formats 6.7 Showing Variables ................................................................................................................................... 135
6.7.1 Showing Variables Individually ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7.2 Showing Variables Together ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7.3 Loading Curve Configurations ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7.4 QuickView-Window ......................................................................................................................................................... 135 135 135 136

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents 6.7.5 Showing Variables in an Existing Curve Window ......................................................................................................................................................... 136

6.8 Showing and Changing Characteristics ................................................................................................................................... 137

6.8.1 Properties Dialog ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8.2 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Waveforms) ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8.3 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Texts) ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8.4 Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Groups) ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8.5 Dialog Properties/ Structure ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8.6 Dialog Properties/ Display ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.8.7 Dialog Properties/ Data Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 137 138 140 141 142 143 144

6.9 Deleting Variables ................................................................................................................................... 145 6.10 Group/ Ungroup variables (data groups) ................................................................................................................................... 145 6.11 Permanent variables and temporary variables ................................................................................................................................... 146 6.12 Exporting/ Importing Variables ................................................................................................................................... 146 6.13 Playing Back Variables ................................................................................................................................... 146 6.14 Constants and Predefined Variables ................................................................................................................................... 147 6.15 Units ................................................................................................................................... 148 6.16 Memory management / Data Manager options ................................................................................................................................... 151

Functions
7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 154 7.2 Formulas ................................................................................................................................... 154 7.3 Data................................................................................................................................... 157 Groups as Function Parameters 7.4 Indirect Use of Text Variables ................................................................................................................................... 158 7.5 Error and Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................... 158 7.6 Data................................................................................................................................... 160 Format of Results 7.7 Options / Functions Dialog ................................................................................................................................... 160 7.8 Function Assistant ................................................................................................................................... 161 7.9 imc Kit Interface ................................................................................................................................... 162
7.9.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.2 Registering Kits ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.3 Calling External Kit Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.4 Curve Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.5 File Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.6 Dialog Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.7 Report Generator Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.8 Sound Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.9 Format Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9.10 Other Kits available ......................................................................................................................................................... 162 163 164 164 164 165 165 165 165 165

7.10 Standard DLL Interface ................................................................................................................................... 166

7.10.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.10.2 Registering DLL's in FAMOS ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.10.3 Calling external DLL functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.10.4 Tips for users of previous FAMOS versions ......................................................................................................................................................... 166 166 172 174

Function Reference Sequences

9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 176

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

9.2 Sequences and the editor box ................................................................................................................................... 177 9.3 Administering Sequences ................................................................................................................................... 178
9.3.1 Creating a new sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3.2 Loading a sequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3.3 Saving sequences ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3.3.1 Write- and Read-Protection for Sequences and Dialogs .................................................................................................................................................. 9.3.4 Closing sequences ......................................................................................................................................................... 178 179 180 181 183

9.4 Testing and Running Sequences ................................................................................................................................... 183

9.4.1 Run ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.2 Run line ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.3 Start (Debug) ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.4 Continue ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.5 Single step ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.6 Single step in subsequence ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.7 Response to errors ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.8 Canceling / interrupting sequence runs ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.9 Breakpoints ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4.10 Sequence-Status ......................................................................................................................................................... 184 184 184 184 184 184 185 185 185 186

9.5 Sequence commands ................................................................................................................................... 187 9.6 Sequences with Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 188
9.6.1 Concept ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6.2 Call ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6.3 Multiple Parameters ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6.4 Comments ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6.5 Process Directories ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6.6 Incrementing Numbers ......................................................................................................................................................... 188 189 189 189 190 190

9.7 Use ................................................................................................................................... 191 of Text Variables 9.8 Dialogs During Execution of Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 194

Sequence Commands (Reference)

10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 195 10.2 Overview of Commands by Group ................................................................................................................................... 195 10.3 Alphabetical Overview of Commands ................................................................................................................................... 197 10.4 Application ................................................................................................................................... 199 10.5 ASCII ................................................................................................................................... 200 10.6 ASCOption ................................................................................................................................... 201 10.7 ASCSave ................................................................................................................................... 202 10.8 Binary ................................................................................................................................... 203 10.9 Clipboard ................................................................................................................................... 205 10.10 Comment ................................................................................................................................... 205 10.11 Control ................................................................................................................................... 206 10.12 CurveSetup ................................................................................................................................... 207 10.13 Delete ................................................................................................................................... 208 10.14 DSPLoad ................................................................................................................................... 209 10.15 ELSE ................................................................................................................................... 210 10.16 END ................................................................................................................................... 210 10.17 ExitSequence ................................................................................................................................... 211

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

10.18 Export ................................................................................................................................... 212 10.19 FAMOS ................................................................................................................................... 212 10.20 FASLoad ................................................................................................................................... 213 10.21 FFTOption ................................................................................................................................... 214 10.22 IF................................................................................................................................... 215 10.23 Import ................................................................................................................................... 217 10.24 Layout ................................................................................................................................... 217 10.25 LDIR ................................................................................................................................... 218 10.26 Load ................................................................................................................................... 219 10.27 MDIR ................................................................................................................................... 221 10.28 Pause ................................................................................................................................... 221 10.29 Rename ................................................................................................................................... 222 10.30 Request ................................................................................................................................... 223 10.31 Save ................................................................................................................................... 224 10.32 SDIR ................................................................................................................................... 225 10.33 Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 226 10.34 Show ................................................................................................................................... 227 10.35 TimeCopy ................................................................................................................................... 228 10.36 TimeSet ................................................................................................................................... 228 10.37 WFTLoad ................................................................................................................................... 229 10.38 WHILE ................................................................................................................................... 230 10.39 Xdelta ................................................................................................................................... 231 10.40 Xunit ................................................................................................................................... 232 10.41 Xoffset ................................................................................................................................... 233 10.42 Yunit ................................................................................................................................... 233

Data Editor
11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 235 11.2 Start ................................................................................................................................... 235 11.3 Interface Elements ................................................................................................................................... 235 11.4 Context Menus ................................................................................................................................... 236 11.5 Opening and Closing Table ................................................................................................................................... 236 11.6 Activating Tables and Columns ................................................................................................................................... 236 11.7 Showing a Variable ................................................................................................................................... 237 11.8 Inserting and Deleting Columns ................................................................................................................................... 239 11.9 Positioning the Input Cell, Scrolling and Marking ................................................................................................................................... 240 11.10 Entering and Changing Individual Values ................................................................................................................................... 240 11.11 Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete ................................................................................................................................... 241 11.12 Insert Values ................................................................................................................................... 241 11.13 Creating a New Variable ................................................................................................................................... 242 11.14 Go To... ................................................................................................................................... 242

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

11.15 Value Search ................................................................................................................................... 242 11.16 Copying a Selection to Clipboard ................................................................................................................................... 243 11.17 Show Curve ................................................................................................................................... 244 11.18 Characteristic Values ................................................................................................................................... 244 11.19 Height and Width of Cells, Font ................................................................................................................................... 245 11.20 Configure Scale Column ................................................................................................................................... 245 11.21 Configure Data Column ................................................................................................................................... 247 11.22 Display Modes ................................................................................................................................... 247 11.23 Scroll-Linking of Tables and Curve Window ................................................................................................................................... 250 11.24 Printout ................................................................................................................................... 251 11.25 Transfer to Report Generator ................................................................................................................................... 253
11.25.1 Drag & Drop ......................................................................................................................................................... 11.25.2 Copying and Pasting ......................................................................................................................................................... 254 254

DDE Interface
12.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 256 12.2 FAMOS as DDE Client ................................................................................................................................... 256
12.2.1 DDE Client Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.2.2 Send Control Commands ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.2.3 Send Data (FAMOS) ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.2.4 Send Data (Text) ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.2.5 Send Text ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.2.6 Request Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.2.7 Request Text ......................................................................................................................................................... 257 258 258 258 258 259 259

12.3 ''DDE Settings'' Dialog ................................................................................................................................... 259 12.4 FAMOS as DDE Server ................................................................................................................................... 261
12.4.1 Sending Instructions ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.4.2 DDE Info Request ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.4.3 Sending and Requesting Data Variables ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.4.4 Sending and Requesting Text Variables ......................................................................................................................................................... 261 261 262 262

File Browser
13.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 263 13.2 The Folder List ................................................................................................................................... 264 13.3 The File List ................................................................................................................................... 265 13.4 Display options ................................................................................................................................... 266 13.5 Loading Files ................................................................................................................................... 267
13.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 13.5.2 Specifying and Configuring a File Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 13.5.3 Options for Loading with the File Browser ......................................................................................................................................................... 13.5.4 Selecting / Deselecting Files for Loading ......................................................................................................................................................... 13.5.5 Response to Change of Directory ......................................................................................................................................................... 267 268 268 269 270

13.6 Deleting Files ................................................................................................................................... 270 13.7 Additional options ................................................................................................................................... 271

Project Management
14.1 Concept ................................................................................................................................... 273
FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

14.2 The Project Explorer ................................................................................................................................... 273 14.3 Creating a new project ................................................................................................................................... 274 14.4 Loading and running a project ................................................................................................................................... 274 14.5 Special Characteristics of an Active Project ................................................................................................................................... 275
14.5.1 Opening files relevant to a project by command ......................................................................................................................................................... 14.5.2 Saving project-relevant files by command ......................................................................................................................................................... 14.5.3 Manual opening of project-relevant files ......................................................................................................................................................... 14.5.4 Manual saving of project-relevant files ......................................................................................................................................................... 275 276 276 277

14.6 Project properties ................................................................................................................................... 277 14.7 Save, Close, Delete ................................................................................................................................... 278 14.8 Current/ Last session ................................................................................................................................... 278

User-Defined Dialogs
15.1 Introduction and Terminology ................................................................................................................................... 279
15.1.1 Design ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.1.2 Programming ......................................................................................................................................................... 279 280

15.2 The Dialog-Editor ................................................................................................................................... 280

15.2.1 Calling the Dialog-Editor ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.2 Main window ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.3 Creating, opening and saving a dialog ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.4 Changing a dialogs size ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.5 Adding dialog elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.6 Selecting dialog elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.7 Dialog element properties ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.8 Moving dialog elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.9 Aligning elements with each other ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.10 Elements overlapping each other ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.11 Changing the size of elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.12 Deleting elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.13 Clipboard ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.2.14 Grid ......................................................................................................................................................... 280 281 282 282 282 282 283 286 286 287 287 287 288 288

15.3 Programming ................................................................................................................................... 288

15.3.1 Principles ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.3.2 Editing event-sequences ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.3.3 Testing and running dialogs ......................................................................................................................................................... 288 289 290

15.4 Dialog Elements ................................................................................................................................... 291

15.4.1 Button ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.2 Text box ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.3 Single-line edit box ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.4 Multi-line edit box ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.5 Check boxes ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.6 Groupbox ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.7 Image ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.8 Slider control ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.9 Datepicker ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.10 Timepicker ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.11 Listbox (single selection) ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.12 Listbox (multiple selection) ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.13 Droplist ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.14 Combobox ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.15 Treeview ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.16 Tableview ......................................................................................................................................................... 291 292 293 295 295 296 296 296 298 299 299 300 301 302 303 304

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

10

Table Of Contents 15.4.17 Curve Window ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.18 Menu- and Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4.19 Status bar ......................................................................................................................................................... 305 307 309

Data-Browser
16.1 Basic concepts and terms ................................................................................................................................... 310
16.1.1 Data selection ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.1.2 Assigning the channels to measurements ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.1.3 Selection/Numbering ......................................................................................................................................................... 311 311 312

16.2 Elements of the main window ................................................................................................................................... 313

16.2.1 Toolbox ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.2.2 Files list ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.2.2.1.................................................................................................................................................. Load a single file 16.2.2.2.................................................................................................................................................. Load multiple files 16.2.2.3.................................................................................................................................................. Load a whole folder 16.2.2.4.................................................................................................................................................. File list options 16.2.3 Measurements and Channels lists ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.2.3.1.................................................................................................................................................. Numbering and Locking 16.2.3.2.................................................................................................................................................. Example of numbering/locking 16.2.3.3.................................................................................................................................................. Sorting 16.2.3.4.................................................................................................................................................. Filtering 16.2.3.5.................................................................................................................................................. Remove measurement 16.2.3.6.................................................................................................................................................. Rename measurement 16.2.3.7.................................................................................................................................................. Key combinations for making selections 16.2.3.8.................................................................................................................................................. Drag&Drop from the Measurements/Channels lists 16.2.4 Data Bindings (References) ......................................................................................................................................................... 314 316 317 318 319 319 321 321 323 324 324 325 325 325 326 328

16.3 Toolbox ................................................................................................................................... 329

16.3.1 Curve Window ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.3.2 Standard ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.3.2.1.................................................................................................................................................. Label 16.3.2.2.................................................................................................................................................. Image 16.3.2.3.................................................................................................................................................. Table 16.3.2.4.................................................................................................................................................. Line 16.3.2.5.................................................................................................................................................. Pushbutton 16.3.2.6.................................................................................................................................................. Editbox (single line) 16.3.2.7.................................................................................................................................................. Editbox (multi line) 330 331 331 333 334 335 336 338 339

16.4 Databinding ................................................................................................................................... 340

16.4.1 Placeholder ......................................................................................................................................................... 341

16.5 QuickStart ................................................................................................................................... 342

16.5.1 Starting the Data-Browser ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.5.2 Loading data ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.5.3 Dragging a channel onto the page ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.5.4 Curve window ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.5.5 Selecting other channels ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.5.6 Adding a label/ binding to a variable ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.5.7 Creating a sequence/ opening a panel ......................................................................................................................................................... 342 343 345 347 348 349 350

16.6 Menues ................................................................................................................................... 351

16.6.1 Menu: Panel ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.6.2 Menu: Edit ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.6.3 Menu: Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.6.4 Menu: View ......................................................................................................................................................... 16.6.5 Menu: '?' ......................................................................................................................................................... 352 353 354 355 356

16.7 Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 356

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Table Of Contents

11

Application Examples
17.1 Low-Pass Filter, First Order ................................................................................................................................... 359 17.2 Analysis Using the "Smo" Function ................................................................................................................................... 364 17.3 Transfer Function Calculation ................................................................................................................................... 369 17.4 Error Correction with a Fitted Line ................................................................................................................................... 371 17.5 Correlation Coefficient ................................................................................................................................... 372 17.6 AC................................................................................................................................... 374 Power Calculation 17.7 Tolerance Test ................................................................................................................................... 376 17.8 Histogram Test for ADC ................................................................................................................................... 378 17.9 Convolution, Digital Filter ................................................................................................................................... 382 17.10 Analysis Using the "Chrct" Function ................................................................................................................................... 384 17.11 Digital Filter ................................................................................................................................... 386 17.12 Report Generator ................................................................................................................................... 392

Appendix
18.1 Concepts and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................... 399 18.2 Constants and Predefined Variables ................................................................................................................................... 400 18.3 Units ................................................................................................................................... 401 18.4 Maximum Values ................................................................................................................................... 402 Index 403

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

12

FAMOS Users Manual

FAMOS Users Manual

1.1 Customer Support - Hotline
In case of problems or questions, our customer service will be happy to help: Germany:

imc Mesysteme GmbH

Phone: ( +49 (30) 46 70 90 - 26 Fax: 4 +49 (30) 46 31 57 6 WWW: http://www.imc-berlin.de e-mail: [email protected] For our international partners see http://www.imc-berlin.de/en/ and click to International Distributors When requesting telephone consultation, please be prepared to state the serial numbers for your device and for your software's data carrier, and have this manual present. Thanks!

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

FAMOS Users Manual

13

1.2

Important Notes Please be sure to read!

Dear system user, 1. Before using, please always verify that this manual version matches the software version which you have obtained. If it does not, or if you discover any discrepancies, please contact our Customer Support right away (see: imc Customer Support - Hotline). 2. Please also be advised that the software you have obtained, as well as the associated Users Manual are directed toward competent and instructed users and not uninitiated one-time users. 3. Please also be aware that continuously and rapidly advancing developments in the field of software can cause portions of the Users Manual to become outdated and make it necessary to obtain updates. If you notice any discrepancies of this type, we request that you contact our Customer Support by the telephone number above. 4. We also request you contact our hotline number if you find material in the manual which you believe could be misunderstood and thereby lead to personal injury. Your partners at imc Mesysteme GmbH.

1.2.1
1.2.1.1

Guidelines
Guarantee of Year 2000 conformity

We certify that our software products imcDevices, imc-CRONOS, LOOK, FAMOS1, SEARCH, Filter Design, FRAME and Online-FRAME as well as our hardware products busDAQ, SPARTAN, imc CRONOS-PL(SL), imc C-Series, imc C1, imc F1 and F2 and imc-CRONOS meet the "C-EURO YEAR 2000" requirements. There should be no problems in the interpretation of dates. All data recorded after the year 1980 (the year DOS was introduced) will be correctly interpreted until the year 2079. This means in particular (i.a.): Processing of the date will at no time lead to system interruptions. Date-based processing operations return the same results regardless of the value for the data supplied, whether prior to 2000 A.D. or after (up until 2079 A.D.), unless otherwise defined. The value for the date is defined either explicitly or by an unequivocal algorithm or by a derivable rule, in all interfaces and memory areas.
1Some FAMOS sequences return the year number in two digits (see Manual "FAMOS Function Reference"). Your application may require testing for this circumstance.

1.2.1.2

Quality Management

imc Mesysteme GmbH holds DIN-EN-ISO-9001certification since May 1995. imc's conformity to the world-wide accepted standard DIN EN 9001 is attested to by the Certificate issued May, 1998 by the accredited TV CERT certification body of TV Rheinland Anlagentechnik GmbH. The certificate registration number of imc Mesysteme GmbH is 0910085152.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

14

FAMOS Users Manual

1.3

imc Guarantee and Software-License Agreement

imc Limited Warranty*
Subject to the general terms and conditions of imc Mesysteme GmbH.
*The specifications stated in this documentation are subject to change without prior notice. imc may hold rights to patents, trademarks, copyrights and other intellectual property, to which the statements in this documentation refer. This does not imply that the purchaser of this imc product receives any of these rights, excepting such which are explicitly provided for in the written license agreement.

1.3.1

imc Software License Agreement Important Notes

Special contract stipulation Before opening the enclosed disk package, please read carefully all of the following conditions. They govern the use of the enclosed software products and documentation for operation of the imcDevices system. By opening this sealed disk package, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this agreement. Below are the contractual conditions for your, the purchaser's ("the licensee"), use of imc products. Please read carefully the following text in its entirety.

Conditions of Agreement
1. Objects of Agreement The objects of this agreement are the computer program saved on the data storage medium (CD) and its documentation. In the following, the computer program is referred to as the "software". imc makes no claim that the software runs error-free in all applications and with all platforms. The imc software is thus only to be considered the object of this agreement when used in the manner specified by the documentation. 2. Grant of License imc grants you, for the duration of this agreement, the single right to use the enclosed copy of the imc software on a single computer (i.e., on a single CPU) and to be used only at one site. If this single computer is a multi-user network, the user rights are valid for all users of this network. You may make copies of the program solely for backup purposes, provided you reproduce and include the copyright notice on any backup copy. As licensee, you are allowed to physically transfer the software (saved on a CD) from one computer to another computer, under the stipulation it only be used on one computer at any moment. Software is "in use" on a computer when it is loaded into temporary memory (i.e. RAM) or installed into permanent memory on a computer (i.e. hard disk, CD-ROM, etc.). A more extended use is not permitted by this agreement. 3. Special Restrictions The licensee is forbidden, to distribute copies of the software and/or documentation to third parties; to provide use of the program through a computer service business, network or other data transfer channel; to translate, reverse-engineer or alter the software and its documentation; c) to rent, lease, or grant sublicenses or other rights to the program; d) without the prior written consent of imc. a) b)

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

FAMOS Users Manual 4. Rights of Possession The purchase of this product only entitles you, the licensee, to ownership of the physical data carrier where the software is saved. You do not acquire any rights to the software and documentation. imc reserves all publishing, copying, processing and management rights for the software and documentation. 5. Copyright imc owns this software program and its documentation. Both the program and documentation are copyrighted with all rights reserved by imc. For software not equipped with copy protection, you may make one single copy of the program solely for backup purposes, provided you reproduce and include the imc copyright notice on the backup copy. The copyright incorporated in the software is not to be removed or altered in any way. It is strictly forbidden to copy or reproduce the software and documentation: a) entirely or partially, b) in its original form, c) in an altered form, d) in combination with other software or, e) contained in other software. This software product is licensed to you as a unit. You are not entitled to separate it into components with the intent to use these simultaneously in different computers. 6. Transfer Of User Rights The software license may only be transferred to a third party with the prior written consent of imc and only under the conditions of this contract. It is explicitly forbidden to rent, lease, or grant sublicenses or other rights to the program without the prior written consent of imc. 7. Duration Of License Agreement The duration of the contract is indefinite. Your license to use the program and documentation will automatically terminate if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement. If this license is terminated, you agree to destroy all copies of the program and documentation, or any altered versions thereof, in your possession. 8. Compensation In Case Of License Termination imc draws attention to the fact that you will be held liable for any damage which may ensue following termination of this license agreement. 9. Software Updates And Improvements imc reserves the right to update and improve the software as deemed appropriate. 10. Additional Provisions Subject to the general terms and conditions of imc Mesysteme GmbH.

15

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

16

FAMOS Users Manual

1.4

Product Improvement
Dear Reader! We at imc hope that you find this manual helpful and easy to use. To help us in further improving this documentation, we would appreciate hearing any comments or suggestions you may have. In particular, feel free to give us feedback regarding the following: Terminology or concepts which are poorly explained Concepts which should be explained in more depth Grammar or spelling errors Printing errors Please send your comments to the following address: imc Mesysteme GmbH integrated measurement & control Customer Service Department Voltastrasse 5 D - 13355 Berlin

Telephone: +49 (30) 46 70 90 - 26 Fax: +49 (30) 46 3 15 76 e-mail: [email protected]

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Introduction

17

Introduction
2.1 Foreword
FAMOS (Fast Analysis and Monitoring of Signals) is a software program for analysis and evaluation of measurement results. With an extensive range of functions conceived especially for the needs of measurement and control applications, FAMOS eliminates much of your routine work in a comfortable fashion. With FAMOS, you can process large waveforms quickly and efficiently and create computational procedures using standard mathematical notation. No specialized programming expertise is required! Furthermore, FAMOS offers powerful means for displaying your data in charts or tables and for printing these in individually designed reports. One of the most difficult problems when processing data is reading data with a special file format into an analysis program. FAMOS is not only able to process data recorded using an imc system (e.g. MUSYCS or -MUSYCS, CRONOS) and existing in the FAMOS data file format, but can also read various binary and ASCII data formats. To accomplish this, FAMOS provides the File Assistant, which can help you create an import filter so that any kind of data can be read in to FAMOS. On imc's home page you can find a large number of ready-made import filters, e.g. for many other instrumentation suppliers' standard formats. FAMOS is principally conceived for use in offline evaluation of data and cannot be used to control measurement instruments FAMOS can be expanded with add-on modules and function libraries. Expansions are available which, for example, make it possible to design digital filters or to classify measurement data. Furthermore you can add your own self-written function libraries to FAMOS. Required Reading The following chapters contain important information concerning the installation and operation FAMOS. We highly recommend going through this manual - even if you are familiar with Windows applications in general. You'll probably discover many new features which you were previously not aware of! Note Some screen shots appearing in the text were adopted from older FAMOS versions. Therefore, the appearance of the user interface as depicted in this manual may be slightly different from the actual appearance of the user interface of your system.

2.2

Additional Help Resources

To supplement this manual, additional information and help are available in the form of online help files, which are included with the installation of FAMOS. Along with the context-sensitive FAMOS Online Help, which mainly presents excerpts of the manual, you can also find other help topics specially tailored to beginners or to users who changed from other FAMOS versions. The imc Start menu contains the calls to the display of these help topics. Here you will additionally find the complete manuals in PDF format in the submenu "Manuals". Information on the hardlock Use this resource to find help if you encounter problems with the installation or recognition of the FAMOS hardlock (dongle). If these notes don't solve the problem, please contact the imc Hotline. FAMOS Update-Info This section is particularly interesting for users who are already familiar with previous FAMOS versions. Here you can find an overview of the technical innovations implemented in this version as well as notes which simplify learning the difference. FAMOS ReadMe This presents info on changes and extensions in FAMOS which were implemented after this manual went to print.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

18

Introduction

2.3

System Requirements
Supported operating systems: Windows2000 SP4 with Update Rollup 1, Windows XP SP2, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista Addtional runtime environment: Microsoft .NET 2.0 SP1 Runtime Environment (included in the delivery) The following minimum system configuration is required: PC with Pentium microprocessor or higher 256 MB RAM (or minimum requirement of the operating system respectively) Hard disk with at least 200 MB available disk space CD-ROM drive Modern graphics card and appropriate color monitor with usable screen resolution of at least 800 x 600 pixels and High-Color (16-bit color resolution) color output Mouse or trackball The following items are not required, but can greatly improve the performance of FAMOS: Extended memory >= 1 GB True Color (32-bit color resolution), screen resolution 1024*768 or better Color printer Large, fast hard disk with more than 2GB available disk space.

2.4

Installation
Windows must be correctly installed before installing FAMOS. To install FAMOS, start the program "setup.exe" from the root directory of the installation CD. Alternatively you can select the "Software" icon and subsequently the command "Install". Your first step in installing the software will be to specify the base directory onto which all it's files will be copied. The base directory must be on the PC's local hard drive. FAMOS cannot be installed on a network drive. This base directory will be structured with various subdirectories where, for example, sample files will be deposited. The subdirectory \BIN, for instance, contains all executable files and program libraries; the subdirectory "\SEQ" sample sequences (macros); the subdirectory "\DAT" has measurement data files containing information in various data formats. At installation, you must also supply a name for the program group; the installation program will then supplement the Windows Start menu with a corresponding entry. If, for instance, you specify "imc" as your group name, you will be able to call the program from the submenu "Start/ Programs/ imc".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Introduction

19

2.5

Start
Start FAMOS either via the corresponding entry in the Windows Start menu, or by clicking on the shortcut on the Windows-Desktop which was created during the installation, or directly by calling the file "FAMOS. exe" from the Windows Explorer. FAMOS comes with a dongle (hardlock) for copy protection, which, depending on the model, should be connected to any USB or parallel interface. Your PC should not have any problems recognizing the dongle. If an error message appears when starting FAMOS stating that the dongle is not present, read the help file "Hints about the dongle", which can be found in the program group placed in the start menu by the installation process, to learn about possible error sources. If you have further inquiries, please contact the imc Hotline. We now recommend working through the Tutorial chapter.

2.6
2.6.1

Start with Parameters

Overview
It is possible to set parameters which initiate certain processes upon starting FAMOS, or which influence the general functioning of the application. The following options are defined: /C /L /D /F /S /E /P /B /X Set registry key for configuration file Open measurement data file Open and display measurement data file Establish file format for /L and /D Run FAMOS sequence or dialog Execute FAMOS operation Load and start FAMOS project Open Data Browser and load panel In conjunction with /S or /P: Close FAMOS after running

You can select the above options either when calling FAMOS by typing command text (Windows input prompt or "Start/ Run"), or, more easily, by creating a program shortcut. To make a new FAMOS shortcut having starting parameters, first create a shortcut to the file "FAMOS. exe". For information on creating program shortcuts, please refer to your documentation for Windows. Once the shortcut exists, a right-click on its icon calls its context menu, in which you must select the item "Properties". In the dialog which then appears, enter the desired parameter in the entry box "Target" which is on the index card "Shortcut". Observe the following rules on command line syntax: Between the option appendage and the parameter text (e.g., file name), there must be at least one space. If the parameter text contains spaces, it must be written inside quotation marks. If the parameter text itself contains quotation marks, they must be preceded by a '\' character.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

20

Introduction Example

The settings shown above instruct FAMOS to look for the configuration settings with the key "Peter". The sequence "Eval" is to be run when FAMOS is started. Hint: If FAMOS has already been started, the open FAMOS window is made active and the command line is implemented (except in the case of /C).

2.6.2

Registry-Key for Configurations Data

Syntax /C keyname Explanation The configuration settings for FAMOS are saved to the Windows system registry when the application is closed. At the next start, the registry is referred to and the settings indicated there are implemented. The settings are saved separately for each user. Therefore, if you wish to work with many different configurations, you can simply log in to Windows under different names. Another possibility would be to specify an additional key under which configuration data are to be deposited in the registry. As the default, all configuration data are stored under the keys HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software imc Measurement and Control Default With the command line option switch "/C", followed by a name, you can replace the valid subkey "Default" with a subkey having the name you entered. In this way, it's possible to create multiple shortcuts which each call FAMOS with a different starting configuration.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Introduction Example c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /C PetersConfigurations

21

2.6.3

Opening a measurement value file

Syntax /L FileName /D FileName /F FileFormat Explanation These option appendages cause measurement data files to be opened. The switch /L opens the file, while /D opens the file and displays its contents in a curve window. As the default, FAMOS file format is used at a session's start. The switch /F lets you specify a different format: /F BIN /F ASC /F NIC /F DIG /F FormatName Binary format ASCII-format Nicolet WFT-format Digiskop-format User-defined import filter

If you enter a file name as the parameter text without supplying a complete path, the default directory stated under FAMOS is used. If the file name contains spaces, it must be written inside quotation marks. With the standard formats The valid file format options, such as options for reading binary and ASCII files, remain as they are set for FAMOS. With user-defined format, the syntax for the /F-parameters is identical with the corresponding entry for the function FileOpenFAS: If importing is accomplished by means of an import filter created using the File Assistant, the import filter's name (*.fas) is specified as the /F-parameter: /F ImportFilter.fas On the other hand, if importing is accomplished by means of an expansion library, The format is specified as follows: /F "#DLLName|FilterName|Parameter" All specifications needed for this are available from the expansion library's maker; while <FilterName> and <Parameter> can often be omitted. Further information on the topic is provided with the description of the function FileOpenFAS. Example c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /D slope.dat /L c:\imc\ascii\tab.asc /F ASC /L c:\lecroy\c1.001 /F lecroy.fas /D "c:\imc\dat\Datei 12.5.96.dat" /D "c:\1.mat" /F "#MatLab_Imp.DLL"

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

22

Introduction

2.6.4

Running a Sequence/ Dialog

Syntax /S SequenceFile Parameter1 Parameter2 .. [/X] Specifying parameters is optional. /S DialogDatei [/X] Explanation This option switch instructs FAMOS to open and execute the specified sequence- or dialog file file upon starting. If the sequence needs to know certain parameters to run, these must be entered after the file name. Unless a full directory path is entered, FAMOS looks for the file in the default sequence directory. With dialog files, it's absolutely necessary to supply the filename extension (.dlg). If you enter parameters, or if the filename contains spaces, the entire call must be written inside quotation marks. If the text of the call itself contains quotation marks, these must be preceded by the '\' character. You can also enter the switch /X. By this means, FAMOS is closed as soon as the dialog or sequence has been run. The parameter is ignored if FAMOS was already open before. Example c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\famos c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /S c:\imc\seq\evaluate.seq /S "evaluate slope.dat" \X /S "evaluate2 \"Joe Blow\"" /S "c:\My Dialogs\Dialog1.dlg" \X

2.6.5

Executing Operations

Syntax /E OperationsText Explanation It is also possible to pass a command to FAMOS, which it must execute when it starts, as a parameter. As the parameter text, you can enter any command which can be entered in the FAMOS Input Box. This option appendage is included in the application out of considerations of compatibility; most purposes can be achieved more conveniently by writing the commands involved in a sequence file and then using the option appendage "/S". If the operations' text contains spaces, the text must be written inside quotation marks; and if the text itself contains quotation marks, they must be preceded by a '\' character. Example c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /C Conf1 /E "SEQU eval.seq" c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /E erg=Ramp (0,1,100) c:\imc\bin\famos.exe /E "Name =\"Herbert\""

2.6.6

Running a project
/P ProjectFolder [/X]

Syntax Explanation With this switch, FAMOS is instructed to load and run the specified project upon starting. You can also enter the switch /X. By this means, FAMOS is closed as soon as the dialog or sequence has been run. The parameter is ignored if FAMOS was already open before. Example: c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /P "c:\projects\evaluation" /X

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Introduction

23

2.6.7

Starting Data Browser

/B PanelDateiName

Syntax Explanation With this switch, FAMOS is instructed to start the Data-Browser and load the specified panel file. If the filename contains spaces, the entire call must be written inside quotation marks. If the text of the call itself contains quotation marks, these must be preceded by the '\' character. Example c:\imc\bin\FAMOS /B "C:\imc\Seq\Evaluation.panel"

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

24

User Interface

User Interface
3.1 Introduction
When you start FAMOS, the main window appears as it was at the end of the last session. To restore the default configuration, click "Window" in the menu bar [1] and select "Load configuration/ Default". Then the main window will assume the following appearance.

FAMOS: application window

The main toolbar [2] is found under the menu bar and contains soft keys (screen buttons) for fast access to the most important functions. Below the menu bar and toolbar you have the "work space" composed of five boxes. Above left is a box with the title "Variables". This box contains the variables list [3]. Any variables presently loaded in FAMOS are registered in this list. Below the variables list is the function list [4], displaying the available functions and commands. These are arranged in major groups, which always include "Standard" (offering the core FAMOS functions) and "Favorites" (a list which the user can compile of frequently used functions and formulas). By clicking on a group's index, it is possible to move from group to group. Beside the functions list you have the output box [6]. Here, output for the user's attention, such as help texts, warnings and calculation results, is displayed. Above this is the editor box [7]. Formulas are entered here in standard mathematical notation and calculation is started by pressing the button labeled Execute [10]. In the same box, it is also possible to program and execute sequences (macros). Due to the large number of commands which apply to the editor box, it has its own toolbar [8]. At the upper right is the Plug-in box [9]. This is where expansion modules having their own user interfaces are displayed. The File Browser plug-in is always present for fast access to the measurement files. By default, this box is minimized, meaning that only its icon is visible. Status messages and short explanatory notes about the menu options appear in the status line [5] under the output box.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface The general position of these boxes is set permanently, but how large each one is or whether it is visible can be adjusted as desired. You can grab with the mouse the dividing lines between boxes and shift them, and you can use the buttons in the boxes' respective title bars [9] to minimize or maximize them. Any boxes not needed at the moment can be hidden entirely. Reference Section 'Customizing the user interface'

25

3.2
3.2.1

Variables List
Overview
All variables currently being used in FAMOS are shown in this list. The names of the variables (and for single values, their actual values) are displayed next to a symbol representing the variable type.

Variable list

For more information on FAMOS variables, for instance a description of the individual data types, refer to the Chapter "Variables". The Variables list represents the centerpiece of FAMOS' operating design. Most of the basic FAMOS functions either change the contents of the Variables list (e.g., loading of measurement files or execution of math functions) or they take effect upon the current selection in the Variables list (e.g. the display of waveforms in the curve window or saving of waveforms).

3.2.2

Operation

Selection Many menu items, especially in the "Variables" menu, take effect on the variables currently selected in the list. To select a variable, simply click on its entry with the mouse. If the variables list currently has the input focus, entering a letter selects the next variable in the list starting with that letter. Multi-selection To select a group of entries which are not adjacent to each other in the list, click on each desired entry while holding down the CTRL-button. To select a group of adjacent entries, there are the following options: Select the first item in the group of desired entries and next select the last item while holding down the SHIFT-key Use the arrow keys while holding down the SHIFT-key Click on an entry not selected and then brush the mouse cursor over the region containing the desired entries while holding down the mouse button Copying a name to the editor box

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

26

User Interface If you double-click on a variable, its name is copied into the editor box. This fact can be used to save time spent in writing formulas. Drag & Drop If you click on a selected entry and move the mouse while holding down its button, this activates the Drag&Drop-mode (denoted by a change in the mouse cursor's appearance). It is then possible to drag the variables selected at the moment to different positions. The appearance of the mouse pointer is constantly updated as is moves over the screen, reflecting whether its current position is a legitimate site to drop the variable. You can drop a variable by releasing the mouse button while the pointer is at one of the following positions: in the editor box ; this inserts the variable into the formula line at the mouse position. on a function name in the function box; this opens a Formula Assistant dialog pertaining to the selected function and when applicable, designates the variable as the first parameter of the function. in a curve window: this causes the curves for the dropped variables -if applicable- to be displayed along with any curves already present; see section 5-7 "Displaying variables". in the Waveform Editor: the variable(s) are displayed in the selected column(s) in the Waveform Editor. in the Report Generator: the variables are transferred into the current document. Either a new curve-, textual or tabular item is created or an existing report-item is updated to reflect the new variable's content. Context menu Clicking on the variable list with the right mouse button opens a context menu offering commands which operate on the current variable selection, as well as providing options for registering variables in the Variables list:

Sort Alphabetically: variable names are displayed in alphabetical order. Otherwise, the variables are indicated in the order in which they were loaded into FAMOS. If the option Show Channels is set, data objects (variables) contained in data groups are independently registered in the list. Double-clicking on the [+]- symbol (variable "Group 2" in illustration) "opens" and "closes" data groups individually. Show Components: the individual components of two-component data objects (complex and XYwaveforms) are indicated independently. As a default, the contents of text variables and single values are also displayed directly in the variable list. This can suppressed via the "Options/ Display" dialog. The remaining commands from the context menu are also available from the sub-menu "Variables" of the main menu.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

27

3.2.3

Options

The FAMOS Options menu (under "Extra/ Options") has a "Variable list" dialog containing settings for the display and operation of the variables list. Some of these controls are also available in the context menu.

Dialog : Options/ Variable list

Display variables alphabetically If this option is active, the variables are ordered alphabetically by their names. Otherwise, the list is ordered according to the times at which the variables were created in FAMOS. Display channels in groups If this option is activated, entries for the data objects which belong to data groups are displayed in the list. By clicking in the [+]-symbol next to a group's entry, it is possible to collapse or expand the data group. Display components If this option is activated, then the individual components of 2-component data types (complex and XYdata) are also displayed. Single values: display contents If this option is activated, the values of single value variables are displayed alongside their names. Text variables: display contents If this option is activated, the content of text variables are displayed alongside their names. Show Comment If you choose this option, the comment will be displayed in the variable list right to the variable name, as seen in this example:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

28

User Interface

Comment in the variable list ("Sine wave with interfering noise")

About comments, see also chapter Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Waveforms). [DEL]-key deletes selected variables If this option is activated, the DEL-key on the keyboard can be used directly to delete variables from the list (the same function as the menu item "Variable/ Delete") as long as the Variable list has the input focus.

3.3
3.3.1

The Functions List

Overview
The Functions list presents all available functions and commands. These are divided into a number of main groups.

Standard This group contains all the internal FAMOS-functions and commands. These approx. 260 functions are divided among about 25 sub-groups. A short description if the functions in each group can be found at the end of each of the chapters 'Functions' and 'Sequences'. Reference Chapter 'Functions', Chapter 'Sequences' Kit This group contains all functions provided by imc extension libraries (so-called "Kits"). These Kits must be explicitly registered in FAMOS in order to be ready for uses ("Extra/ Options/ Extensions/ Register Kits"). If no Kit is registered, this group is not displayed. Reference Chapter 'Functions', Section 'imc-Kit Interface' DLL Along with imc-Kits, general WINDOWS-libraries (so-called DLLs) can be integrated into FAMOS. The DLL-functions registered in FAMOS ("Extra/ Options/ Extensions | Register DLL functions") are then listed

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface in this group. If no DLL-function is registered this group is not displayed. Reference Chapter 'Functions', Section 'Standard DLL Interface' Favorites The Favorites list can be compiled by the user himself. Here, functions and formulas used often can be placed here for ease of access. The Favorites can be organized in hierarchical groups as desired. Reference Section 'Administering Favorites' Symbols The list entries are represented by special symbols indicating their respective types: Function (internal or from Kit or DLL) Sequence-command Constants Group (collapsed) Group (expanded) Kit or DLL Favorites-entry (formula or command) Executable Favorites-entry Favorites-entry (project)

29

3.3.2

Operation

Selecting a group A different main group can be accessed by simply clicking on the corresponding card rider. If the Functions window is too narrow to display all the riders, arrow buttons are displayed at the right edge of the row of riders. Clicking on these arrow buttons shifts the next card in the corresponding direction into view. The combination of keys "CTRL" + "TAB" switches forward to the next group present; the combination of keys "SHIFT"+ "CTRL"+ "TAB" switches backwards to the previous group. Context menu Right-clicking the mouse once over the functions list calls the context menu. This contains commands and options affecting the functions list. What commands are available depends on which main group is currently selected; for instance, in the Favorites-list there are additional commands for creating and changing entries.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

30

User Interface

Configuring the display The functions list can either be organized as a hierarchical tree diagram in which the entries appear as members of groups or as a continuous alphabetical list. The switch between these two display modes is made via context menu using the commands "Tree display" and "List ordered by...". To expand or collapse a group in tree display, click on the [+] or [-] -symbol in front of the group name or double-click on the group name. The menu item "Expand tree" in the context menu expands all groups; whereas "Collapse tree" closes all groups. Copy to input window Double-clicking on a function entry copies the function name with argument brackets into the active Editor window. If the current selection in the functions list is a function's entry (and not a group's name), you can use the command "Copy to input window" as an alternative. If the function list currently has the input focus, just pressing the <ENTER> key has the same effect. You can also use Drag&Drop to take an entry from the function list to the desired position in the editor (or: input) box. Here, too, a parameter mask is copied to the editor box, if appropriate. Function Assistant To open the Function Assistant, hold the <Shift> key while clicking on the desired function. A dialog appears in which you can specify various parameters of the desired function. Alternatively, you can use the combination of keys <SHIFT> + <F1> or the context menu. Reference Chapter: Functions, Section: 'Function Assistant' Help text When the selection in the Function list is changed, the help text for the current selection, if available, is automatically posted in the output box. Alternatively, the combination of keys CTRL+F1 or the context menu command "Show help" can be used to have the help text for the current function displayed. Notes on the Favorites list The menu item 'Add to favorites' adopts the current selection in the Favorites list. If the Favorites list itself is active, the context menu contains additional items for creating, deleting and editing favorites. How to administer the favorites is described in the chapter 'Administering Favorites'. Transferring entries from the Favorites to the editor box, as well as calling the help texts and the Assistant (if available) are accomplished in the manner already described. As a special feature, operation of the Favorites list supports the combination of keys CTRL + ENTER (or CTRL + double-click) as the call for the Favorites-Properties dialog, and the ability to edit the order and grouping of the favorites through the use of Drag&Drop.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface Reference Section 'Administering Favorites'

31

3.4
3.4.1

Editor Box
Overview
The editor box is for entering and executing formulas and also for administering, entering, testing and executing complete sequences. Sequences are macros consisting of a sequence of individual commands an/or formulas. In this section, we will concentrate on the basic operation of the editor for entering text and executing individual formulas. Reference See the chapter 'Sequences' for a detailed description of how to administer (meaning: load and save) sequences. Sequences can also be components of user-defined dialogs (so-called 'event-sequences'). For details, see the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs'.

Editor box

The standard interface designated "Input" is always present. It is primarily used for entering formulas and executing them by command. The content of this interface is automatically saved upon exiting FAMOS and restored at the start of the next session. If sequences are also loaded to FAMOS, the title bar displays a row of riders bearing the names of the sequences. To switch to the display of another sequence, click on the corresponding rider or use the combination of keys CTRL+TAB or SHIFT + CTRL + TAB, to move forwards or backwards, respectively, between the displays. If the window is too narrow to display all the riders, arrow buttons are displayed at the right edge of the row of riders. Clicking on these arrow buttons shifts the next card in the corresponding direction into view. Right-clicking the mouse on the title bar opens a context menu primarily containing commands for administering (Load/ Save/ Close) and executing sequences. The commands are also available from the FAMOS main menu, in the submenu "Sequence".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

32

User Interface

Reference See the chapter 'Sequences' for a detailed description of these commands. Below the title bar is the toolbar. This contains often-used commands affecting the editor box. To learn the function of a certain symbol, move the mouse cursor over the symbol and wait a short time to see a small window containing a short description (called a "tool-tip") appear. All of the commands offered here can also be accessed from the FAMOS main menu, in the submenu "Sequence", or they can be called via one of the two context menus. Below the toolbar is the actual input box. Right-clicking the mouse over the input box opens a context menu containing commands mainly concerning text editing:

In the editor box, you can enter formulas and commands completely "by hand", or, as already described, they can be transferred from the variable list and function list at a click of the mouse, or compiled using Drag&Drop.

3.4.2

Editing Text

The editor box supports the usual Windows shortcut keys and editing commands, such as the use of the Clipboard (Copy/ Past) and multi-step Undo/ Redo. Additionally, the editor has special functions intended to make entering formulas and sequences easier. These include, for instance, configurable color-coded syntax (where particular syntax elements are visually distinguished by a special color), parameter-tips (while typing in a function, a small window appears indicating what parameters are expected), automatic formatting according to the process structure, automatic indenting of new lines as well as bookmarks and breakpoints for use in testing sequences.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface Function and variable names can also be directly adopted from the corresponding list (by doubleclicking on the corresponding list entry or by using Drag&Drop). Commands for editing text are presented in the next chapter.

33

3.4.3

Commands for Editing Text

The commands described below are available via the FAMOS main menu, in the submenu "Sequence" and/or the context menu of the editor box. Undo This reverses the effect of the last command executed. Redo Restores the state prior to the last "Undo" command executed. Cut

Place the mouse cursor at the beginning of the text you wish to cut out and drag the cursor while holding down the mouse button over the region to be cut out. Alternatively, you can mark the text to cut out using the cursor buttons while holding down the SHIFT key. The text so highlighted is removed to the Clipboard. Copy

Place the mouse cursor at the beginning of the text you wish to copy and drag the cursor while holding down the mouse button over the region to be copied. Alternatively, you can mark the text to copy using the cursor buttons while holding down the SHIFT key. The text so highlighted remains in place and a copy of it is written to the Clipboard. Paste

Place the mouse cursor at the position in the text box at which you wish to insert it. The text stored in the Clipboard is inserted by selecting the menu item "Paste". Select all The entire contents of the editor box are selected, for example, for the purpose of subsequently deleting or copying the whole text. Breakpoint on/off A breakpoint is inserted in the line containing the cursor, or an existing breakpoint is removed. The use of breakpoints to test sequences is described in detail in the chapter "Sequences". Find Select this menu item to locate a particular text in a sequence. Enter the text to be found in the "Search for:" dialog box and activate the options buttons according to your requirements. Then click on the button "Continue search". Find next Repeats the search for text set in the last call of the menu item "Find...". Replace Enter the text to be replaced into the text box "Search for:" and enter the replacement text in the text box "Replace with:" and activate the desired option buttons. Click on the "Continue" button and then on "Replace", to replace the located text, or again on "Continue" to find the next position of the text. Click on "Replace all" to replace all instances of the same text. Format automatically

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

34

User Interface Performs automatic formatting of the sequence displayed, meaning that the indentations of the lines are set automatically. The indentation depends on the logic of the sequence's procedural structure, for instance, a condition (IF- or WHILE- command) commences a block of commands concluded by an ENDcommand. Insert boilerplate Inserts a pre-defined chunk of text at the current cursor position. The available boilerplate texts are defined in the text file "Famosbps.txt" in the FAMOS/BIN-folder (e.g. "c:\imc\bin\famosbps.txt") and can be edited by the user using a word processor (such as "Notepad"). See also the notes in the file header. Insert / Overwrite-mode Hitting the INS-key toggles between insert and overwrite mode. The current mode is indicated in the FAMOS status bar.

3.4.4

Active line, executing formulas

Every command or formula must be placed on a separate line; spaces are allowed. Only one line is defined as "active". The "active line" is the command line to be carried out next. This line is denoted by colored shading, as well as by an arrow button appearing at its left. Clicking on this button causes the command line it points to to be carried out; thus for further reference we will call this button the "Execute"-button. To set the active line, the following methods are available: Double-clicking on the desired lie Editor context menu - "Set active line" Set cursor on desired line and press ALT + ENTER To execute the active line, the following methods are available: Click on the "Execute"-button Title bar context menu - "Run line" Title bar context menu - "Single step" or F9: the command line is executed and the next line is activated Setting and executing in one step: Combination of keys CTRL+ENTER (The line with the cursor becomes the new active line) When sequences are run and in single-step mode, the position of the active line is changed automatically.

3.4.5

Help and Assistant

If you place the cursor on a function name and press the combination of keys CTRL + F1, a short help for this function is displayed. On the other hand, if you use the combination of keys SHIFT + F1, the Function-Assistant is called. A dialog appears which is helpful for setting the function's parameters. Once they are given, the parameters are immediately adopted in the dialog's corresponding input boxes. The help and Assistant are also both available via the context menu. When typing in the parameters for a function or while moving the cursor over a function call in the command text, a small window appears providing brief information on the parameters expected (a socalled parameter-tip). The parameter at the cursor's position is written in boldface.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

35

3.4.6

Bookmarks

When entering and testing long sequences, it's sometimes useful to be able to highlight certain command lines, so that it's possible to jump back to them at will. Such a highlight is called a bookmark, and the necessary commands are available in the "Advanced" submenu in the editor box context menu. Up to 10 bookmarks can be defined, and numbered (0..9) for identification purposes. A bookmark is indicated by a corresponding symbol to the left of a command line:

Editor box with 2 bookmarks set

To set a bookmark, position the cursor at the desired line use the combination of keys CTRL + number (number = 0...9). To delete the bookmark, press the CTRL key together with the desired bookmark's number again. To jump to a particular bookmark, use the combination of keys ALT + (bookmark ID number). To find the next bookmark, use the combination of keys CTRL + F2 (to go forwards) or SHIFT + F2 (backwards). The combination of keys CTRL+SHIFT+F2 deletes all defined bookmarks. All of these commands are also accessible via the context menu. Optionally, the bookmark positions can be saved along with the actual sequence and thus be restored upon re-opening of the sequence; see the next topic for details.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

36

User Interface

3.4.7

Options: Editor

The menu item "Extra / Options / Editor" calls a dialog offering a variety of pre-settings for the editor box:

Dialog: Options / Editor

Change font With this button, the standard Windows dialog for setting the font is called. Generally, selecting a proportional font is not recommended, since the different widths of individual characters makes it difficult to achieve a uniform indent. Instead, select a font with a fixed character width, such as "Fixedsys" or "Courier". Tabulator width Sets the tabulator width for text readout. The specification in the input box pertains to the average width of a character in the selected font. Indent automatically If this option is activated, the indentation of the previous line is used when a new line is created (in other words, after pressing the ENTER key). Parameter-Tip These options affect the display of the parameter tip for functions described in the last section. If the option "Display automatically" is active, the tip window automatically appears whenever the cursor is positioned above a function name or over the corresponding parameter list. The controls "display after" and "display duration" regulate the delay time and the maximum duration of the display; expressed in seconds. Backup copy when saving If this option is active, then whenever a sequence is saved under an already existing name, a backup copy of the sequence is created and has the extension ".seq.bak".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface Save breakpoints and bookmarks If this option is active, the positions of any breakpoints and bookmarks in a sequence are saved along with the sequence and are available again the next time the sequence is loaded to the system.

37

3.4.8

Options: Colors

Selecting the menu item "Extra / Options / Colors" accesses a dialog which lets you set the colors used in input and output windows:

Dialog: Options / Colors

By default, syntax elements such as function names, strings, comments etc. are color-coded. This is intended as an aid for understanding the structure of the text. If you deactivate the option "Color-code syntax elements", the color coding is completely disabled. The button "Return to default!" restores the default settings. Otherwise it is possible to set any desired color for each separate syntax element type.

3.4.9

Printing in the editor box

The contents of the editor box (generally the source code text of a sequence) can be printed out.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

38

User Interface Page setup

3.4.9.1

The menu item "Sequence / Page setup" calls a dialog, in which you can make settings affecting the printout of sequences (or generally, the printout of editor box contents). You can specify that a header and footer should be made, as well as specify the orientation and margins.

Dialog: Page setup

Header / Footer Enter the desired text for the header and footer. The header and footer are each separated from the actual text body by a horizontal line. Both header and footer are left-justified. Along with permanent text, placeholders can also be set, which are filled during printout. The following placeholders are defined: &f &p &t &d &tf &df Sequence filename (complete path) Current page number Current system time Current system date File modified time File modified date

Orientation Select either landscape or portrait format. Margins Enter here the desired margin size; the given margins are kept free when the file is printed out. The effect of the controls in this dialog can be checked before printout using the menu item "Print preview".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface 3.4.9.2 Print preview

39

The menu item "Sequence / Print preview" provides a preview of a finished printout. The printout's appearance is mainly influenced by the valid paper format, the font which is set and the settings for the margins, orientation, as well as the header and footer.

Editor box: Page preview

Here you can view the individual pages of the printout one by one and check the formatting. If you are satisfied with the results, you can start the printout directly. Use the button "Close" in the window's title bar to return to the normal interface. 3.4.9.3 Print

Menu item "Sequence / Print..." starts printout of the active editor box contents. First, however, a dialog appears offering the opportunity to set the printer to use, the portion of the document to print and the number of copies desired.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

40

User Interface

Editor box: Print...

The button "Properties" accesses an additional dialog where more options for the printer can be set. This dialog is provided by the printer manufacturer and its appearance and functionality thus depends on the particular printer used. By pressing the button "OK", the dialog is closed and printout begins.

3.5

Output Box
Messages to the user are displayed in the output box. Functions post error messages, warnings and sometimes their computational results to this field.

Output box with error message

In addition, brief descriptions for FAMOS functions and commands can be displayed here. The brief help text for a function can be accessed when the function's name in the function list is highlighted, or if the cursor is positioned in a function name in the editor box, by pressing the combination of keys CTRL + F1, or via the context menu.

Output box with function help

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

41

3.6

The Plug-in box

The Plug-in box displays the separate user interfaces of expansion modules which come with their own user interface. The File Browser Plug-in is always available for quick access to measurement files. By default, this box is minimized, meaning that only its title bar (at the upper right in the FAMOS-main window) is visible. Other available Plug-ins include the ODS-Browser Plug-in (access to ASAM-ODS data sources) and the Video Player Plug-in (playback of video files with synchronized coupling to the curve windows).

Plug-in box with File Browser

If more plug-ins are installed, corresponding index card riders appear in the rider bar above the box. Switching between plug-ins is accomplished by clicking on the corresponding rider. If the box is too narrow to display all riders present, arrow buttons appear at the right edge of the rider bar. Clicking on these buttons allows you to access riders which are not currently in view. The combination of keys "CTRL" + "TAB" proceeds to the next available plug-in; the combination of keys "SHIFT"+ "CTRL"+ "TAB" proceeds to the last one. Below the rider bar, the user interface for the respective plug-in is displayed. Reference Operation of the File Browser is described in detail in the chapter 'File Browser'.

3.7

File Menu
The following is a short description of the FAMOS main menu commands. Most of the menu items are described in detail in pertinent chapters of this manual. General FAMOS functions and file management functions are found in the "File" menu.

Load...

One or several waveforms are loaded from files and the data sets contained in the files are indicated in the Variable List. Reference

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

42

User Interface Chapter 'File Management', 'Loading Files' Save Individually Variables selected in the Variable List are each saved in a file. Reference Chapter 'File Management', 'Saving Files' Save Together...

Variables selected in the list are stored together in one file. Reference Chapter 'File Management', 'Saving Files' Last files

A submenu with a list of the last files to have been opened. Selecting an entry leads to the corresponding file being re-opened. Restart The variable list is emptied, i.e. all variables are deleted.. All open sequences are closed. Directories for loading and storing files are reset to the Default set-up. This function is equivalent to ending and then subsequently restarting FAMOS. End This closes FAMOS. Alternatively, the system menu or the combination of keys ALT + F4 may be used to close FAMOS. If changed variables or sequences have not yet been saved, a cautionary message will appear.

3.8

Variable Menu
This menu contains various options for processing variables. Some of these commands are also accessible from the context menu of the Variable list.

Show

Variables selected in the variables list are each graphically displayed in a curve window. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing Variables' Show Together

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

43

Variables selected in the variables list are graphically displayed in one curve window. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing Variables' Properties..

A dialog box appears as a stack of several file cards, on which information about variables selected in the variables list is displayed. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' Delete

Variables selected in the variable list are deleted. Group Variables selected in the variable list are assembled into one data group. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Group/ Ungroup Variables (Data Groups)' Ungroup Data groups selected in the variable list are dissolved and the channels formerly contained in the groups reappear in the list as independent variables. When a single channel not its corresponding group is selected, only this channel is released from the group, the group itself remains intact. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Group/ Ungroup Variables (Data Groups)' Export! Variables selected in the variables list are exported so that they can be imported by other imc applications. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Exporting/ Importing Variables'. Import A variable exported from another imc application is imported and entered in the variables list. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Exporting/ Importing Variables'. Make Permanent While working with the file browser, variables may be created which have the property of being temporary. Such files are indicated in the variables list with their own special symbol:

Temporary variables differ from permanent ones in that, among other things, they are automatically deleted whenever the current directory in the file browser is changed. This menu item is blocked if none of the selected variables is temporary.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

44

User Interface Reference Chapters 'File Browser', 'Variables'

3.9

Sequence Menu
This menu offers commands for the administration, editing and execution of sequences. All the commands are explained in detail either in this chapter in the section "Editor box", or in the chapter "Sequences".

Sequences can also be components of user-defined dialogs ('event-sequences'). Some of the commands then don't refer to the sequence currently displayed, but to the entire dialog. See the chapter 'UserDefined Dialogs' for details on editing event sequences. All these commands are also available from one of the two editor box context menus (right-click over the title bar or over the input area), and some are also available in the editor box toolbar. Load...

Opens a dialog for selecting files, loads the selected sequence- or dialog file and displays it in the editor box. New

A new, empty sequence is created with a default name and displayed in the editor box. Close The active sequence or dialog in the input box is closed. Save

The active sequence or dialog is saved under its current name. Save as... The active sequence in the editor box is saved under a filename to be set by the user. Execute> Opens a submenu offering commands for executing sequences.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

45

Run

The sequence or dialog currently in the editor box is run completely. Run line The current command line in the current sequence is run. Start (Debug) The current sequence or dialog currently in the editor box is run completely; any breakpoints set are observed. Continue

Execution of the sequence is continued from the current position (active command line). Any breakpoints set are observed. Single step

The active command line of the active sequence is executed and then the next line becomes active. Single step in subsequence The active line of the active sequence is executed, then the next line becomes active. If the current command is the call to a subsequence (SEQUENCE-command), the subsequence is loaded, displayed, and its first line activated. If the current command is a dialog call (DIALOG-function), the dialog is started and interrupted before the first line of the first event sequence is carried out. Additional commands for sequences are presented in the next chapter.

3.10

Sequence Menu, more commands

Sequence status

If the current position of a sequence run's progress is in a subsequence, various information is displayed here, e.g. about the parameters passed, and if applicable, the number of the sequence run, if the sequence was called with wildcard parameters. Edit> Opens a submenu offering sequence editing commands.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

46

User Interface

Undo Reverses the effect of the last action in the editor box. Redo Restores the state prevalent before previous "Undo" command. Cut

Removes highlighted text in editor box to Clipboard. Copy

Makes a copy of the highlighted text in the editor box in the Clipboard. Paste

Inserts Clipboard contents at cursor position in the editor box. Select all The entire contents of the editor box are selected, for example, for the purpose of subsequently deleting or copying the whole text. Format automatically Performs automatic formatting of the sequence displayed, meaning that the indentations of the lines are set automatically. The indentation depends on the logic of the sequence's procedural structure. Insert boilerplate > Inserts a pre-defined chunk of text at the current cursor position. The available boilerplate texts are defined in the text file "Famosbps.txt" in the FAMOS/BIN-folder (e.g. "c:\imc\bin\famosbps.txt") and can be edited by the user using a word processor (such as "Notepad"). See also the notes in the file header. Loop Inserts a loop (WHILE..END). Condition Inserts a condition (IF...END). Alternative Inserts a condition with an alternative branch (IF.. ELSE.. END). Advanced > Opens a submenu offering additional commands.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

47

Delete all breakpoints Deletes all breakpoints in current sequence. Set bookmark... Sets a bookmark in the command line in which the cursor is currently positioned. Goto bookmark... Finds a particular bookmark in the current sequence. To next bookmark Goes to next bookmark; the search begins in the line in which the cursor is currently positioned. To previous bookmark Goes to previous bookmark; the search begins in the line in which the cursor is currently positioned. Delete all bookmarks All bookmarks are deleted from the current sequence. Find Conducts a search for particular text in the current input box. Find next Repeats the last text search. Replace Conducts a search for particular text in the current input box and replaces all instances of the specified text found. Page setup... This menu command calls a dialog, in which you can specify settings affecting the printout of sequences. For instance, you can set a header, footer, or margins Page preview Provides a preview of a printout. Print... Prints out the current sequence. Last sequences > Submenu with a list of the sequences most recently loaded. If you select one of these entries, the corresponding sequence is re-loaded and displayed in the editor box.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

48

User Interface

3.11

Extra Menu

This menu contains commands for creating special work space, for starting FAMOS extensions and for calling the FAMOS Options dialog.

Waveform Editor Calls the FAMOS Waveform Editor for tabular display and processing of waveforms and data sets. Reference Chapter 'Data Editor' Data-Browser

Calls the Data-Browser for quick and easy visualization of measurement data. QuickView Window A curve window appears with a graphic representation of the variables selected in the variable list. If changes are made to the variable list selections, the QuickView Window is updated to reflect the current selections. This provides a way to gain a quick overview of the graphic appearance of certain variables. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing Variables' Dialog-Editor

Calls the FAMOS Dialog-Editor for creating and editing user-defined dialogs. Reference Chapter: 'User-Defined Dialogs' DDE A dialog appears to control other applications from FAMOS via DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange). Commands may be sent to other applications and data may be transferred, as well. Reference Chapter 'DDE-Interface'

The imc Report Generator is called using this menu item. This allows you to prepare results for printing by creating tailor-made documents out of texts and graphics. Reference

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface Documentation for Report Generator File Assistant This calls the imc File Assistant. Because measurement data are stored in various formats, reading a special file format into an analysis program is often the Number One Problem in evaluating the data. The imc File Assistant allows you to design your own file formats. Using the format design file which it then creates, FAMOS can read your data with as much ease as data in a standard format. Reference 'File Assistant' Manual Filter Design Filter Design is an optionally available software package for FAMOS. If it is installed in the FAMOS working directory, it can be started using this option. Filter Design provides you with a graphical tolerance band scheme for developing recursive IIR and FIR digital filters. These can be used in FAMOS for filtering waveforms over the "Dfilt" function. Options

49

Calls the FAMOS Options dialog. This dialog compiles all FAMOS presettings, organized in categories.

3.12

Project Menu

This menu offers various functions for creating and managing FAMOS projects. Reference Chapter: 'Project management'

Project-Explorer Starts the Project-Explorer. The Project-Explorer is the headquarters for the management of FAMOS projects. Here, you can created, open, run and delete projects. Execute Starts the execution of the project open at the moment. Save Saves all setting for the current project. Close The project open at the moment is closed. Properties In the dialog which appears, you can specify which additional settings belong to the current project. Save current session

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

50

User Interface Saves the current state of the active FAMOS session. This includes, for example, the contents of the Variables list, the curve windows and sequences open, the layout of the various FAMOS windows and the input box's contents. Open last session Counterpart of the command "Save current session". The last session saved is restored.

3.13

Window Menu

This menu contains the various functions available for arranging individual boxes in the application window as well as for controlling the curve window display.

Load curve configuration This lets you load a curve configuration previously save using the curve window's menu item "Save as...". The curve window is opened with the saved settings. The waveforms displayed in the curve window at the time it was saved are referred to in the configuration record by name, but their data points are not saved as part of the configuration. If a waveform having the name referred to in the configuration exists, it is automatically displayed right away. And if a variable having that name is only later generated, for instance, as the result of a formula of when a file is loaded, that variable will also be displayed immediately in the curve window having the relevant configuration. Reference Manual 'Curve Window' Close curve window All curve windows currently opened by FAMOS are closed. Optimize curve windows When curve configurations are first loaded, or as a result of subsequent deletion of waveforms, curve windows come about which are "missing" waveforms. The curve window is programmed to display waveforms which are currently not available to FAMOS. The curve window notes the name of these waveforms so that it can automatically display them as soon as they are generated. This menu item can be used to remove all currently unused entries from the curve windows. If appropriate, any empty axes and coordinate systems are also removed from the curve window, or empty curve windows are closed. Curve window list > Opens a submenu listing all currently open curve windows by their titles. The selection of such a menu item activates the corresponding curve window and brings it into the foreground. Customize configuration...

Opens a dialog which the visibility of the individual boxes of the main window can be switched on or off. Reference Chapter 'Customizing the User Interface'. Load configuration>

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

51

This menu item serves to restore a predefined box arrangement in the main window. Some arrangements are permanently pre-defined, others can be defined and named by the user himself (menu item "Save configuration"). Reference Chapter 'Customizing the User Interface'. Save configuration > The current arrangement of the main window is saved. Up to 3 different arrangements can be saved by the user and later restored by using the menu item "Load configuration". Reference Section 'Customizing the User Interface'

3.14

"?" (Help) Menu

Help topics Select this menu item or press function key F1 to call up the integrated on-line help. An overview of the available help topics is displayed. Find... The integrated On-line help is called up and starts with a dialog in which a search topic can be entered. Info This dialog provides information about the currently loaded version of FAMOS.

3.15

Administering Favorites

3.15.1 Overview
The functions and commands available are indicated in the function list on the index cards "Standard", "Kit" and "DLL". The user has the additional option to compile a list of favorites under the index card "Favorites". Here, it is possible to store functions, formulas and sequence calls and projects which are used frequently, to that they can be accessed quickly. It is possible to store both complete, ready-to-go formulas and formula masks in which only the currently applicable parameter needs to be entered. The favorites list can be organized in any hierarchical structure desired. A "Favorites" entry has the following distinguishing properties: The title. The favorite is listed by this name. The type. This can be either a formula or instruction, or a project. If it's a formula or instruction, the actual instructions text must be specified. This can be, for instance, a function call with partly or totally completed parameter list, a complete formula or instruction. If it's a project, the project's folder path must be supplied. The "Execute" property. This determines what is supposed to happen when a favorite is selected. "Instruction" type: If this option is not activated, the instructions text is simply copied to the editor box (just like selection of a built-in function from the "Standard" function list). This is sensible in cases, for example, where the instructions text contains a function call which must yet be completed with current parameter specifications. However, if this option is activated, the instructions are executed immediately. This naturally makes sense if the favorite is a complete formula or instruction. The option can be sensibly employed, for instance, to start a sequence by means of the SEQUENCE-command. "Project" type: If this property is set, the project is run immediately upon being opened.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

52

User Interface The short description. This is displayed in the favorites list to the right of the title. The help text. If applicable, this is displayed in the FAMOS output box.

3.15.2 Creating a new favorite

To store an entry for a new favorite, there are the following possibilities: If a function from one of the other index cards, "Standard", "DLL", or "Kit" is to serve as the basis for the favorite, select the desired function and then select the context menu item "Add to favorites". Then, once you switch to the Favorites index card, you see a copy of the selected entry at the end of the favorites list. Using the context menu item "Properties", it is then possible to edit the entry. To use an existing favorite as the basis for a new one, use the command "Duplicate entry" form the favorite list's context menu. The new entry appears at the end of the favorites list and the dialog for editing the properties is called. To define a totally new favorite, select the command "New entry" from the favorite list's context menu. The dialog for defining a favorite the appears.

3.15.3 Setting / changing properties of favorites

If you select either of the items "New entry..." or "Properties..." from the favorite list's context menu, the dialog for defining a favorite appears:

Dialog: Define favorites

Designation Enter here the title for your favorite. It appears in the favorites list under this name. Formula / Instruction Activate this option if the favorite is meant to be a formula or instruction. In this text box, you can specify the text to be linked with this favorite. The cursor position is also noted. When the favorite is later selected and the assigned text is copied into the active editor box, the cursor it positioned at this location, for instance, where an updated parameter value is to be entered into the prepared formula line. In the context menu of this input box, you will find the command "Insert current operation line". This command copies the active line in the FAMOS editor box to this box.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface Execute! This option determines what happens when the favorite is selected from the favorites list (by doubleclicking on its entry, for instance). Formula/instruction: If this option is not activated, the instructions text is simply copied to the editor box (just like selection of a built-in function from the "Standard" function list). This is sensible in cases, for example, where the instructions text contains a function call which must yet be completed with current parameter specifications. However, if this option is activated, the instructions are executed immediately. This naturally makes sense if the favorite is a complete formula or instruction. the option can be sensibly employed, for instance, to start a sequence by means of the SEQUENCE-command. Project: If this option is not selected, the project is only loaded. This corresponds to the button "Open project" in the Project Explorer. If the option is selected, the project is not only opened but run, which means that the sequence "autostart. seq" or the dialog "autostart.dlg" is started in the project folder. This corresponds to the button "Run project" in the Project Explorer. In the context menu of this input box, you will find the command "Insert current operation line". This command copies the active line in the FAMOS editor box to this box. Tool tip The text entered here is displayed in the Favorites list to the right of the title. Help text Here you can determine a help text for the favorite. It will be displayed in the FAMOS output window. In the context menu of this input box, you will find the command "Insert current help text". This command copies the current contents of the FAMOS output box to this box. Delete The favorites entry is completely deleted. OK / Cancel The changes made are applied or rejected, respectively.

53

3.15.4 Organizing favorites

The Favorites list can be organized in any hierarchical structure desired. Creating a group To create a new group, select the command "New group" from the context menu. A new group entry is created at the end of the list and an attached input box is opened in which you can enter the name for the group, and confirm the entry by pressing the ENTER-key. Changing the group name Select the desired group and select from the context menu the command "Properties..". An attached input box appears, in which you can edit the name. Order / Grouping in Favorites list The order and grouping of the Favorites list can be changed by means of the Drag&Drop technique. Click on an entry with the mouse and drag it while holding down the mouse button to the new position desired. While the cursor is moving, it takes on the appearance either of a horizontal line or of a frame around a group entry. The horizontal line means that the entry being dragged could be deposited at exactly the current position The frame means that the entry being dragged would be deposited in the framed group when the mouse button is released. Deleting and entry To delete an entry, select it from the list and then select the command "Delete" from the context menu.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

54

User Interface

3.16

Customizing the User Interface

3.16.1 Overview
The basic arrangement of the FAMOS main window's individual elements (Variables list, function list, editor box etc.) is fixed (e.g. the Variables list is at the upper left, the function list at the lower left). The size and visibility of the individual boxes, however, can be changed. Thus, it is possible to adapt the user interface to different applications. For example, if you use the File Browser to get a visual overview of the data records, you often don't need the controls for entering and executing operations. Thus, you can minimize the Functions list, the editor box and the output box to gain space. On the other hand, if you wish to enter and test sequences, you don't necessarily need to have the Plug-in window with the File browser. You can save configurations along with the fixed arrangements already provided, so that you can call them up later.

3.16.2 Changing sizes

To change the arrangement in the FAMOS main window, you can grab and move the border line between 2 boxes with the mouse. Additionally, each title bar comes with buttons for minimizing, maximizing and restoring windows (depending on the window's current state). "Minimize" means that the window is reduced to a minimum height, while the current window width remains unchanged. "Maximize" means that the window extends in the vertical direction as much as possible while the width remains unchanged. Minimizing / maximizing a window results in neighboring windows being automatically re-sized correspondingly (example: when the Variables list is minimized, the Functions list is maximized). "Restore" means that the window position before the last minimizing/maximizing is restored. Instead of using the buttons, it is also possible to use the combination of keys CTRL+F9 to switch between the maximum and normal view.

3.16.3 Hiding windows

Any windows or boxes not needed can be completely hidden. To do this, select the command "Customize configuration" from the "Window" menu, or the corresponding toolbar icon.

A dialog appears in which the visibility of individual boxes can be switched on or off.

Dialog: Arrange windows

Not all combinations are possible, at least one window must be visible on each of both the right and left side of the main window.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User Interface

55

3.16.4 Load configuration

To restore a pre-defined window configuration saved by the user himself, select the menu item "Window / Load configuration" or the arrow button next to the "Customize configuration" symbol in the tool bar.

A submenu appears in which you can select the desired configuration.

Default Restores the default arrangement. The Plug-in box is minimized; all other boxes are visible. Variables list | File Browser All boxes are minimized except for the Variables list and the Plug-in box. In the Plug-in box, the File Browser is activated. This arrangement corresponds to the "File window" mode of earlier FAMOS versions. Without Plug-in window The plug-in window is hidden, all other windows are still visible. (User-defined) Up to three arrangements can be defined by the user and saved using the menu item "Save configuration".

3.16.5 Save configuration

To save the current arrangement of the boxes, select the menu item "Window / Save configuration". Up to 3 user-defined arrangements can be stored and retrieved later using the command "Load configuration".

After one of the menu entries has been selected, an input box appears into which a title for the configuration can be entered.

A configuration thus saved then appears under the name given here in this submenu and in the submenu under "Load configuration". The "&" - character in the title plays a special role. It denotes that the next character is to serve as a keyboard shortcut for accessing this configuration; in the menu display, the next character appears underlined.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

56

Tutorial

Tutorial
4.1 Introduction
This chapter has been provided to acquaint you with some of the main features in FAMOS. After working through this chapter, you should be familiar with the basic functions. When performing more complex tasks, please refer to the relevant chapters for more detailed information. The tutorial will demonstrate how to load a waveform from a file and how to perform analysis using formulas. You will also display waveforms in graphs and create an automatic sequence. Efficient use of the File Browser for quick loading of files and for comparing data files . Many of the commands used below can be called in several ways - via the FAMOS main menu, or via the respective context menu (right-click of the mouse), via the corresponding icon in the toolbar or by a combination of certain keys. In order to familiarize you with all of these options, they are each used in turn in the discussion below, or at least mentioned as alternatives. If you encounter unfamiliar terms in the discussion below, refer to the chapters 'User-Interface', 'Appendix' and the help for MS-Windows.

4.2

Starting FAMOS
After successfully installing, start FAMOS either by accessing the entry installed in the Windows Start Menu or directly by calling the file FAMOS.EXE. The main window appears.

FAMOS: Main window in standard set-up

If the main window appears differently from the illustration here, select "Window" / "Load configuration" / "Default" in order to restore the default configuration. The workspace below the menu bar and tool bar is divided into 5 boxes:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial Variable list, displaying all waveforms and variables currently being processed. Function list, displaying all available functions and commands. Plug-in window, in which the separate user interfaces of extension modules are displayed. The File Browser plug-in is permanently available for fast access to measurement files. By default, this window is minimized, meaning that only its title bar is visible. Editor window, for entering and executing individual operations and sequences (macros) Output window, displaying help texts, error messages and warnings The basic arrangement of these boxes is fixed (e.g., the variables list is always at the upper left), but the size and visibility of the boxes can be altered. For instance, it's possible to grab the border between 2 boxes with the mouse and move it, or use the corresponding buttons to minimize or maximize a box.

57

4.3

Specifying Directories
Select the item "Options" in the "Extra" menu. The dialog which then appears presents all the presettings influencing FAMOS' behavior. These are organized in various sections which can be selected from the list at left. Select from here the entry "Folders". A dialog box appears, in which you can set the default folders.

Default Directories Dialog

The selected directory may be changed either in the input box or by calling a dialog with "Browse", which searches existing directories or can create a new directory. When FAMOS is first installed in, for instance, directory C:\IMC, the default directories are: "Load data files from:" "Save data files:" "Sequences:" "Curve configurations:" "Reports:" "Definition files:" "Projects:" C:\IMC\DAT C:\IMC\DAT C:\IMC\SEQ C:\IMC\CCV C:\IMC\DRB C:\IMC\DEF C:\IMC\DEF

If unwanted directories are entered, simply change the appropriate entries. Confirm changes with <OK>, otherwise <Cancel>.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

58

Tutorial

4.4

Loading Files
Select menu item "Load..." in the menu "File". A dialog appears for loading a file. Set the file format "FAMOS" below left in the format list. All waveform examples are listed in the directory box. Double-click on "slope.dat" or select the entry and then press <OK> to load the file.

Dialog "Load FAMOS file"

The dialog box is closed and the file opened. The variable slope appears in the list.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

59

4.5

Showing Variables
Select the entry slope in the variable list by clicking on it once. Press function key F4 or select item "Show" in menu "Variable". A curve window displaying the waveform appears, with the variable's name as the title.

Curve window with variable "slope"

Move and enlarge the curve window somewhat and shift it away from the lower right corner of the screen.

4.6

Zooming
Select "Zoom" in the menu "Edit". The mouse cursor takes the shape of a vertical arrow. Move the arrow to the middle of the displayed curve. Press and hold down the left mouse button. Move the mouse. A color-negative rectangle is spread onto the area between the initial mouse-click and the current pointer position.

Curve window with zoomed section

Select a range and release the mouse. The selected range is enlarged.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

60

Tutorial

Curve window with zoomed waveform

To enlarge the curve section even more, simply repeat the process. Reference 'Curve Window' documentation, section 'Zoom'

4.7

Unzooming
Select item "Unzoom" in the curve window menu "Edit". The whole waveform can be seen again.

4.8

Measuring
To open the "Measure" window, select "<>/ Measure". Two measurement cursors (crosshairs) appear in the curve window. Each of these can be moved using right and left mouse buttons respectively. The data values at the crosshair positions are displayed in the measurement value window. The x-value of the left crosshair is indicated by "xl = ..." and likewise with the right crosshair ("xr = ..."). The difference between the two x-values is indicated by "dx = ..." (dx = xr - xl). In the same way, "yl" and "yr" display the y-values of the two crosshairs. To move a crosshair, simply press the right or left mouse button and drag the it to the desired position. The crosshair follows the path of the waveform.

Measure Window

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

61

Curve window with measurement cursors (crosshairs)

As soon as you release the mouse button, the measurement results are displayed in the "Measure" window. By pressing both mouse buttons simultaneously, you can make different measurements results at a constant dx. To quit the "Measure" mode, simply close the "Measure" window. Reference 'Curve Window' documentation, section 'Measure'

4.9

Viewing Variable Properties

The "Properties" dialog in FAMOS enables you to view and/or edit the waveform characteristics, structure, display parameters and data format. To see how this works, load the FAMOS variable slope.dat and select it from the variables list by clicking on it once. Next, choose "Variable/ Properties" (or hit the F5 key or the corresponding toolbar icon) to open the "Properties" dialog:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

62

Tutorial

Dialog: Properties

Properties which cannot be edited are displayed in the background color (usually gray). To exit this dialog, select <Cancel>.

4.10

Interpolation

When you zoom in on small regions of a sampled data curve, you will set that the curve moves in "steps" from point to point. This can be seen in the FAMOS variable slope.dat, for example. The reason for this is simple - a sampled data waveform consists of a finite number of points. When displayed in the curve window, the individual points are connected "stair-like" using straight lines. However, this is not necessarily the last word. You can "interpolate" the curve using the interpol function. Enter the following formula in the editor window on a new line:

This creates a variable Interpol. This new variable has a point density ten times greater than the waveform slope. "IPOL" is the name of the FAMOS function which performs such interpolation. This function has 2 parameters, the waveform to be interpolated (here: "Slope") as well as the interpolations factor (here: 10). The result of this calculation is then assigned to the newly created variable "INTERPOL". Enter the formula by proceeding as follows: first, type Interpol = If it's not already active, select the index "Standard" in the functions box at the lower left, in order to display the list of internal (meaning: permanently available) FAMOS functions and commands. The list shows the functions either in hierarchical tree structure (dividing the functions into separate groups) or as an alphabetically ordered, continuous list. The display mode can be switched via the menu items "Tree display", and "List..." in the context menu (called by right-clicking the mouse over the functions list). Select tree display and find the function group "5> Interpolation, Approximation". Double-clicking on this entry or clicking on the [+]-symbol expands the list, displaying the functions it contains. Double-clicking on the entry IPOL copies the function name along with its corresponding parameter mask to the current position

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial in the editor window. Interpol = IPol(,) Now double-click on slope in the variable list. Interpol = IPol(SLOPE,) Click once with the mouse between the comma and the right parenthesis and type in 10. The formula is now complete. Now, we can test the formula. The line just entered must be denoted as the active formula. To do this, double-click on this line, which then is shaded light gray, and to the left of the line a little arrow button then appears.

63

Thus, the currently active line is denoted in an unmistakable way, and by clicking on the button, the formula in this row is carried out. Click on the button circled to execute the formula. If the formula was entered incorrectly, an error message appears. Correct the formula before attempting to execute it again. Alternatively, you can use the combination of keys "CTRL" + "ENTER" to activate and execute the line with the input cursor. Once the formula has been successfully calculated, the entry Interpol appears already selected in the variables list. Use function key F4 or the appropriate button in the tool list to view waveform Interpol.

Curve window with variable 'INTERPOL'

Close the curve window and activate the window slope. Select "<>/ Unzoom" to view the entire curve. Remarks Function and variable names can also be entered in the editor window using drag & drop. Refer to chapter 'User Interface', sections 'Variables List' and 'Function List'. As an alternative to the methods of manually entering formulas named, the parameterizing Assistant can be used. To access this, select the function "IPOL" in the functions list and use the combination of keys "SHIFT" + "F1", or select the corresponding menu item in the function list's context menu. If you select a function in the functions list or set the cursor on a function name in the input box, then by pressing the combination of keys "CTRL+F1", you can access a short description of the function, which appears in the output box. Here, too, the respective context menu can be used

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

64

Tutorial as an alternative. Reference Chapter 'Functions', Section 'Function Assistant'.

4.11

More Waveforms in Curve Window

For better comparison of two curves, display both in the same curve window. To do this, right-click in the curve window. In the context menu which then appears, select the item "More Waveforms...". In the following dialog, you can select additional variables and configure their appearance in the same curve window.

FAMOS: Dialog "More waveforms in curve window"

All waveforms available for selection are listed in the list at right. The waveforms already displayed are indicated in the list at left. Click on the waveform interpol in the right list and drag the mouse while keeping its button pressed to the left list below the variable slope. interpol is entered in the left box as the second curve. By the same procedure, the leftmost of the three screen buttons can be dragged onto the interpol entry, in order to cause this waveform to be displayed in the curve window, sharing the x-axis of slope, but featuring its own y-axis.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

65

Curve window with two curves

Click on the screen button <OK>. The dialog is closed and the curve window redrawn, with two y-axes for two curves (shown below in a strongly zoomed view, to better distinguish between curves). Hint The same result could be achieved by employing Drag & Drop on the waveform's entry in the variables list; depositing the entry in the middle of the curve window.

In order to compare two curves, it is useful to set the same value range for both curves. Double-click between labels of the right (2nd) y-axis or select the menu item "Axes"in the curve window menu "Y". A dialog box for scaling the axis appears.

FAMOS: Dialog for scaling y-axes

Select "Range selection/ Like previous axis" (base axis is the left y-axis). Select "Dots" in the menu "Style".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

66

Tutorial We also wish to change the line style with which the curve "INTERPOL" is drawn. To do this, push the button "Topic" and from the menu which appears, select the item "Lines...".

Select from the axes list at left the waveform "INTERPOL". Then select under "Line type" the item "Dots". Select <OK> to end the dialog box. The curve window is redrawn. The right y-axis is deleted; the left yaxis applies to both curves, and is scaled according to the setup in the dialog box for selecting the range. The second curve (waveform interpol) is represented by a dotted line.

Curve window with two curves (common axis)

Hint The same result can also be achieved using the previously discussed dialog "More waveforms in curve window", by selecting the y-axis in the axes list and clicking on the Delete icon. Zoom into close range to see the dots clearly. To make the two separate waveforms yet more distinct, display the waveform slope (1st curve) in a stairstep display. To do this, select the menu item "Configuration/Lines". From the axes list which appears at the left of the dialog, select the item "SLOPE". Select "Steps" in the menu "Line type" selection list and then select <OK>. Zoom in the new curve display.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

67

Curve window with two curves in different display types

Here, the function "IPol" was used to interpolate the waveform slope through cubic splines.

4.12

Changing a Formula

Change the formula to get a lower interpolation factor. INTERPOL = IPol(SLOPE, 3) Use BACKSPACE or DELETE to delete characters. Press ENTER to execute the formula. Displayed curves are updated.

Curve window with two curves in different display types

4.13

Single Values

Calculate the maximum of the waveform slope. Enter the following formula in the editor box on a new line: Maxim = Max(SLOPE) The function "Max" is found in the group "8> Statistics". After the formula has been executed by pressing "CTRL + RETURN", a further entry appears in the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

68

Tutorial variable list:

The dice symbol shows that the value is a single value, occupying no extent of time, in contrast to the waveforms slope and interpol. If the value of the variable "Maxim" is not displayed, activate the option "Single value: show content" in the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list...". The value can also be displayed in a single value window by pressing F4.

Single value window

4.14

Calculations

A new waveform is to be made by freeing the waveform slope of its mean value: FREE = SLOPE - Mean(SLOPE) The function "Mean" (in function group "8> Statistics") calculates the arithmetic mean of the specified waveform. This mean value is subtracted from the waveform slope. Execute this formula and display the waveform "FREE" by clicking on the curve symbol in the tool bar.

Curve window with one variable

You will notice that the waveform "FREE" has the same shape as the waveform slope, but all its values have been decreased by the mean value of slope.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

69

4.15

Waveform Editor

Select "FREE" in the variable list. Then select "Waveform Editor" in the menu "Extra". A new window appears. A table listing the individual numerical values of the waveform "FREE" is found in the left column.

Waveform Editor

Use the scroll bar on the right side to view further numerical values. Close the window. Reference Chapter 'Data Editor'.

4.16

Saving Results

Select "FREE" in the variable list and "Save Individually..." in the menu "File". A dialog box appears for entering a file name under which the variable should be stored. Set file format to "FAMOS". The file "FREE.DAT" is created by selecting <Save>. This waveform may be reloaded later.

Dialog "Save File"

Reference Chapter 'File Management'.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

70

Tutorial

4.17

Deleting Variables

The variables "FREE", "Maxim" and interpol are no longer needed and should be deleted from the variable list. First select these variables in the variables list, then select "Delete" in the menu "Variable". The only entry remaining is the variable slope.

4.18

Spectrum

Load file "SIN3.DAT" just as the file "SLOPE.DAT" was loaded at the beginning of the tutorial. Display the waveform by pressing function key F4.

Curve window with variable "sin3"

The waveform contains several periods of a sine-shaped signal, which has a strong third harmonic (second harmonic oscillation). The distortion of the signal around its zero passages is typical for such a curve. Enter the following formula to calculate the spectrum of the variable "SIN3": SPECTRUM = Spec(SIN3) The function "Spec" is found in the function group "2> FFT, Correlations, Third-octave analysis". Doubleclick on this line in the functions list, as well as on the variable "SIN3" in the variable list. Complete the formula using the keyboard. Execute the formula. "SPECTRUM (MP)" appears in the variables list. A complex variable was generated in Magnitude / Phase (MP) representation. Press function key F4 to display the spectrum magnitude in the curve window.

The magnitude of the spectrum exhibits a strong fundamental wave and a somewhat smaller second

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial harmonic oscillation. Note that the fundamental wave has a somewhat smaller amplitude than the signal "SIN3". The amplitudes of the oscillations correspond to those which would be exhibited by a selective voltmeter.

71

4.19

Complex Waveforms

If "Spectrum.M" and "Spectrum.P" are not indicated in the variables list, move the mouse pointer into the variable box and right-click the mouse. Click on "Show Components" in the context menu. This menu item is checkmarked if and when it is active. Additional entries now appear in the variable list: "SPECTRUM.M" and "SPECTRUM.P". These are the magnitude and phase components, respectively, of the complex waveform. Select the entry "SPECTRUM.P" in the variable list by clicking once. Press function key F4 to display the phase of the spectrum in a curve window.

Curve window with phase spectrum

The phase spectrum should be displayed from -180 to +180. Double-click in the space between the y-axis labeling in the curve window SPECTRUM.P. A dialog appears for scaling the y-axis. Under "Range selection", select "Fixed Range: min, max" from the menu "Range", and enter in the associated text boxes Minimum = -180 degrees, Maximum = 180 degrees and Tick selection = "Ticks at fixed distances" 180 with Small ticks= 3.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

72

Tutorial

Dialog for scaling the y-axis

Click on <OK> to close the dialog.

Curve window with phase of spectrum, scaled

FAMOS now attempts to display the specified range from -180 to +180 with appropriate axis labels.

4.20

Creating Sequences

A sequence (also called a macro) is a series of operations which FAMOS executes automatically in the specified order. Frequently used series of operations can be automated by creating sequences. Suppose, for example, the "frequency" of signal "SIN3" should be determined. Here we will define the "frequency" as the maximum oscillation occurring in the spectrum of the signal. First open a new, empty sequence. Right-click the mouse over the editor box's title bar and select the item "New" in the context menu which then appears. Alternatively, you can use the combination of keys "CTRL"+"N" or the corresponding icon at the upper left of the editor box's toolbar. A new index then appears in the editor box's title bar, "Unnamed0". This is then active and the sequence it pertains to (which is empty at the moment) is displayed. Any other sequences, whether newly created or opened, would be displayed in the same way; to move between sequences, simply click on its index in the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial title bar. First, activate the standard editor box (with the index all the way to the left) and select the previously entered formula SPECTRUM = Spec(SIN3) using the mouse. Via the context menu or by means of "CTRL"+"C", copy the formula text to the Windows Clipboard. Switch back to the new sequence and enter the formula text into the sequence as the first line by way of the context menu or "CTRL"+"V".

73

Sequence Editor (with command)

Now enter the following formula in the next line: Freq = Pos( spectrum.m, Max (spectrum.m)) The x-position of the maximum of the spectrum's magnitude is determined. Execute this formula once as a test by double-clicking in the command line and then clicking on the arrow key (appearing at the left of the command currently in readiness), or alternatively, CTRL + ENTER. Correct any errors if an error message appears. Now enter the line SHOW freq in the text window. This command displays the variable "FREQ" in the curve window. You have created a sequence consisting of three commands.

Sequence Editor

4.21

Executing Sequences

First delete the variables created in the sequence. Select entries "SPECTRUM...MP" and (if present) "FREQ" and then select "Delete" in the menu "Variable". Now select from the context menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse over the editor box's title bar) the menu item "Execute". Here, too, you have the alternative to use the keyboard ("F7") or the corresponding icon in the editor box's toolbar. The sequence is now carried out, starting from the first line. At the end of the sequence, a single value window is displayed indicating the calculated frequency.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

74

Tutorial

4.22

Changing Sequences

The procedure introduced for determining the frequency works only for signals with relatively small mean values. Therefore, the signal's mean value shall be removed. Change the first line in the Sequence Editor as follows: SPECTRUM = Spec( SIN3 - Mean(SIN3))

Sequence Editor

The calculated waveform "SPECTRUM" should automatically be deleted because it is used as an intermediate result in the sequence. Enter the following line at the end of the editor box: Delete spectrum
This command deletes the variable "SPECTRUM". Restart the sequence.

4.23

Saving Sequences

Select "Sequence/ Save" in the sequence window. Store the sequence under "FREQU.SEQ". Close the sequence just created, for instance, by using the menu item "Sequence/ Close". The sequence created can now be processed directly. Enter the command SEQUENCE FREQU.SEQ in the editor box and execute it. The file "FREQU.SEQ" is opened in the background and the sequence it contains is executed.

4.24

Favorites

Formulas or sequences used frequently can be entered into a list of favorites, in order to save on time spent typing. Activate the "Favorites" index above the functions list. Open the context menu by rightclicking the mouse over the list and select the menu item "New Entry". In the dialog which then appears, enter a short, descriptive name under "Designation", e.g. "Execute Freq.seq". The actual text is entered in the formula box. You can, for example, enter the formula manually, or use "Copy" and "Paste" to get it from the editor box, or even easier, use the formula input box's context menu to transfer in the currently active line in the editor box. Now you can also enter a short description and a help text.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

75

Dialog for definition of "Favorites"

Also, the option "Execute!" is activated, and the dialog closed by pressing <OK>.

Favorites list with new entry

The new entry is now shown in the Favorites list; double-clicking on it is enough to have the sequence "FREQU.SEQ" carried out. Reference Chapter 'User Interface', Section 'Administering Favorites'

4.25

Using the File Browser to load files

For loading files we have used the command File/ Load" up to now. You can also load files directly from the File browser plug-in, instead. Especially when you wish to load and compare files belonging to different directories, this method is the quickest and easiest. Up to now, the Plug-in box, and thus also the File Browser, were in minimized mode at the upper right corner of the main window. First click on the "maximize" symbol in the minimized Plug-in window:

Minimized Plug-in box with "Maximize"-button

The box is then maximized (and in consequence, the input/output box below it is minimized). If it's not already active, make the File browser visible by clicking on the "Files" index. Since the list of functions is no longer needed at the moment, minimize it by clicking on the corresponding symbol in the function list's title bar. The main window is now principally composed of the variables list and the File Browser.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

76

Tutorial

FAMOS main window with maximized variables list and File Browser

Hint A similar window configuration can be obtained via the menu item "Window/ Load configuration/ Variables list | File Browser". In the File Browser, the default folder for loading files appears as currently selected.

After double-clicking once more on the entry [Experim] (or a single click on the [+] symbol) and then proceeding to directory [0001], the File Window presents the structure depicted below.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Tutorial

77

The directory structure in this example is by all means typical for modern measurement systems. After configuring a measurement (in this case, the reception of three channels "channel1".."channel3"), the measuring begins. For consecutive measurements (multi-shot measurements), the data received are stored in consecutive directories.

4.26

Loading and Displaying Files from a Directory

By right-clicking the mouse in the file list you can call the context menu.

Access menu item "Load Options". In the dialog which then appears, select the options "Show after loading" and "Original name from file". Deactivate the option "Load channels permanently". Close the dialog with <OK>. Select the three entries "channel1.dat" .. "channel3.dat" and press the screen button Browser's toolbar, or, alternatively, press <Enter>. in the File

The three files are now highlighted in preparation for being loaded. They will be loaded in the preset data format and will each be displayed in their own curve window. The symbol in the list-entry preceding the file-name changes color to indicate the status of these files as "marked for loading". When the directory is changed, the previously loaded waveforms are removed, since these were loaded with the option "Not permanent" deactivated. The attempt to load the files already marked for loading continues if the new directory contains files with the same names. Click, for example, on the directory [0004]. The files "channel1.dat"..."channel3.dat" are present here and are loaded, the display in the curve windows, updated. There is no "channel2" in this directory; the corresponding curve window remains, however, and unchanged. Now click on the directory [0003]. All three file names are represented in this directory and all are loaded and displayed. Suppose you are no longer interested in "channel2". Select it and press <Enter> or double-click on it. The symbol in the list-entry preceding the file-name once more changes color, indicating that this file is no longer marked for loading. It won't automatically be loaded any from now on. With the arrow heads in the toolbar you can easily change between consecutive directories. The double arrows cause the directory to be changed automatically. After a specified time-

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

78

Tutorial delay, the next directory on the level concerned. Select the directory [0010] and then press the right "double arrow head" button. You can observe that at every change of the directory the files "channel1.dat" and "channel3.dat" are loaded. The process stops at the directory [0001], since the last directory on that level in the direction specified by the button has been reached. Hint You will note that at every update of the curve window, the range of the y-axis changes, since this property is by default subject to automatic scaling. By accessing the menu item "Edit / Fix Axes" you can set the freeze the scaling to its current state, so as to gain a better comparison between the different curves. To compare two curves in the same curve window, first configure one of the curve windows according to your wishes, as described above in the section "More Waveforms in Curve Window". The other curve windows, which are no longer needed, can be closed. Then you can continue to scan through the directories. Hint A desirable curve configuration can be saved. Use menu item "File / Save As.." in the curve window. When needed, for instance at your next FAMOS session, you can restore the configuration (menu item "Extra / Load Curve Configuration").

4.27

Loading and Displaying Files from Different Directories

Now close all open curve windows. Hint Menu item "Window / Close Curve Windows!" closes all curve windows at once. The procedure described above did not enable us to display, for example, the waveform "channel1" of the directory [0001] together with the waveform of the same name in directory [0010]. Towards this end, call the dialog for setting the loading options (right-click mouse in the file list, menu option "Load Options.."). Activate the option "Load channels permanently" in the dialog. Then waveforms once loaded will not be deleted from the curve window when the directory is changed. Also select the entry "Append directory name to end" in the list box "Channel naming". This is needed to distinguish between files with otherwise identical names. Since FAMOS requires names to be unambiguous, the last waveform loaded would otherwise replace the already loaded one whose name it shares. Now if you scan through the directories you should observe that the waveforms are entitled by names such as "channel1_0001", "channel1_0002" etc. in the channel list. The option "Show after loading" should be deactivated, since a new curve window would otherwise be opened for every new waveform. The option "Show automatically in previous curve windows", by contrast, causes a new waveform, when loaded, to be displayed in an already existing curve window, if a waveform with same original name is already being displayed there. The waveform "channel1_0002", for example, would be displayed in a curve window already containing "channel1_0001", because the original name ("channel1") is the same. Reference Chapter 'File Browser'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

79

File Management
5.1 Introduction
In this chapter you will learn how to read in data files of various formats to FAMOS and how to save your results in a file. The format in which values are saved in the file must be determined in order to load a file in FAMOS. The format depends on the origin of the file, e.g. the program or measuring device where the file was originally created. As a standard, FAMOS supports the following formats in loading files: FAMOS WFT (Copyright 1988 Nicolet Instrument Corporation) DIGISKOP(c) (Copyright remes GmbH). ASCII BINARY XLS (Microsoft Excel must be installed) Whereas the first three formats show defined, special file formats, the ASCII and BINARY formats can be configured freely. This allows several different formats to be read. Once a file is successfully loaded, waveforms contained in the file are declared as variables in FAMOS and entered in the variable list. In saving variables, the following file formats are supported as a standard: FAMOS ASCII XLS (Microsoft Excel must be installed) When saving in FAMOS format, any number of FAMOS variables with different data types and formats may be filed together in one file. The ASCII format is more restrictive in terms of which data types can be saved, but here, too, multiple waveforms can be stored together in one file. In addition to the set formats, FAMOS can be enhanced by file filters. Import filters can be defined with help of the imc-File Assistant. These filters can be used as easily as using an internal format. From FAMOS 5.0 on, additional file formats are available as optional import extension libraries which can be seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS user's interface. This includes the MATLAB-import, for example, which comes standard with FAMOS. Function libraries, included in imc kits or the standard DLL interface, may also be used. Set standard directories for loading and storing files using menu item "Extra/ Options / Folders...". Reference Chapter 'Sequences' Chapter 'imc Kit-Interface' Chapter 'Standard DLL-Interface' Chapter 'File Browser' Online Help for 'File Assistant' (Manual Shared Components).

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

80

File Management

5.2

Loading Files
Call the dialog for selection of files to be loaded with "File/ Load..." or by clicking on the corresponding button in the tool bar.

Hint: Alternatively, you can also use the integrated File Browser. This provides an especially convenient method of loading files from different directories one after the other. The chapter "File Window" of this manual explains how to call and operate the file window. Choose the files you want to load from the dialog "File/ Load". Several files may be selected simultaneously. Set the desired format here. If the format just set is configurable, a dialog for formatspecific options can be called (Options button). After selection, these files are loaded in the set format and variables are created which are then entered in the variable list. These variables can be processed in FAMOS.

The dialog is very similar to the typical Windows dialog for selecting files. When the dialog is started, the directory last used appears as the default selection. The first time the dialog is called, the standard directory defined in "Options/ Folders" is used. The toolbar at the upper right includes an additional button:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management Clicking on this button with the mouse opens the above menu listing the folders last used. Selecting one of the menu entries takes you to the corresponding folder. The list of available file formats is found at the bottom of the dialog. The currently selected format is also displayed in the title bar of the dialog. If other formats were defined with the imc File Assistant, they are automatically added to the end of the list.

81

If the currently selected file format is configurable, a dialog containing useful setup options for the format can be called up with the button "Options". These option dialogs will be described along with the corresponding file formats. A status bar is found in the lower margin of the dialog. A comment about the currently selected file, if one exists, is displayed in the status bar. If no commentary is present, the date and time of the file's creation is shown. Several files to be loaded may be selected at the same time. If the files appear consecutively in the list, the following is possible: Click with the mouse beside the first file name you want to select and then drag the cursor, with the mouse button still pressed, to beside the last file name. First move the marker with the direction keys to the desired file. Then select all other desired files while holding down the <Shift> key. To select files not listed consecutively, click on the desired entry while holding down the <Ctrl> key. Click on <Open> to end the dialog and load the selected files. Variable names are taken from the file, if present, or the file name. If the variable name may not be used in FAMOS or already exists, a dialog appears for changing the variable name.

Dialog: Neuer Name

A new variable name can be entered in the text box and confirmed with <OK>. If the variable name already exists, select <Overwrite> to replace the existing variable. The screen button <Overwrite All> will cause overwriting to occur in all subsequent instances of duplicate names, for files which are due to be loaded because of multiselection, as well as for the current file. The "Auto-Numbering" button causes all subsequent variables having duplicate names to have a "_" character plus a serial number appended. Press <Cancel> if the file should not be loaded. Reference Following chapters on individual formats Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands LOAD, FASLOAD, FAMOS, ASCII, BINARY, WFTLOAD, DSPLOAD, RENAME FAMOS Function Reference, Group '13> File functions (FAMOS, FAS)', '14> File functions (ASCII)'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

82

File Management

5.2.1

FAMOS Format

To read files in the FAMOS (imc) format, select "FAMOS" in the dialog "Load file..". The FAMOS data format is suitable for all data types supported by FAMOS. The format contains data and all information about data, such as physical units, sampling times, data type, comment, etc. Data themselves are filed in compact binary form. Texts may also be saved. This allows several variables with different types to be saved together in one file. A file comment may be added to the file. This format is used by all other imc applications and devices as the default format. A detailed description of the FAMOS file format is found in the Curve Window documentation. The file comment is displayed in the status bar when selected individually, if it is present in the file. The date and time of the file's creation are displayed if a commentary is not present. Use the button <Options> to call up a dialog with setups for loading the FAMOS format:

Selection dialog This group of options controls the behavior when loading FAMOS files with several data objects present. No dialog The file is always loaded completely, all waveforms in the file are accepted in the variable list without further inquiries. Dialog only when several objects in file If several data objects are present in the selected file, a dialog is displayed with a list of all waveforms or texts found in the file. Select the waveforms you want to load from this list. This dialog is described in detail in the following section. Always call dialog The selection dialog is called each time a FAMOS file is loaded, even if only one waveform is contained in the file. Reduced time waveforms compatible.. This option only applies to waveforms which were recorded using the MUSYCS measurement system

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management (Version 2.X or earlier). FAMOS 3.0 supports direct management of non-equidistant time waveforms (e.g. in data reduction) in a variable containing time tracks and amplitude values. In FAMOS 2.0, time and amplitude tracks had to be managed separately in two variables. Example Loading a 6-channel reduced waveform generated by the imc MUSYCS (Version 2.X or earlier) measurement system provides a time channel and six amplitude channels in FAMOS 2.0. These must then be overlaid. The same file in FAMOS 3.0 normally leads to generation of six xy-waveforms, each of which consists of time and amplitude tracks. This option lets you cancel a default setting and have a variable declared analogously to Version 2.0, and is therefore only applicable if you use sequences based on FAMOS version 2.0. Quick load.. By default, a copy of data contained in the FAMOS Data Manager is created when a file is loaded. Copying large amounts of data requires a noticeable amount of time. By selecting this option, copying is not executed and the variable is managed internally with a reference to this file. This has the following effects: Loading the variable takes little time and is available almost immediately in the FAMOS variable list. Read access to this variable takes longer, if the variable would also have been created in the PC's main memory. The difference is minimal in short waveforms. On the other hand, for long it's more likely that the variable would have had to be relocated to a temporary file, anyhow. In the first write access to the variable, copying the data must be done now because the original file may not be changed under any circumstances. In this case, no time is saved. The file may not be changed by other programs, for example by renaming in the File Manager. The selected options are accepted with <OK>. They also remain when the dialog "Load file" is closed by selecting <Cancel>. Compatibility Activating this screen button opens a dialog which offers additional options for correcting compatibility problems arising when FAMOS (DSF)-files.

83

These options are only applicable to files which were not created using imc equipment or programs, but rather data from such sources as "GOULD Instrument Systems" equipment. Offset correction: Select this option if you notice a misalignment of files in the y-direction when loading. Time correction:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

84

File Management Select this option if when loading files you encounter an error message along the lines of "Invalid entry in | NT - Key" or if the trigger time in the loaded waveform is incorrect (day and month switched). The settings in this dialog apply to manual loading via dialog and or the "Load"-command. Depending on the setup selected in the option dialog, a selection dialog may be displayed when loading FAMOS files. This dialog contains information about the file and a list of all data objects found.

Available information about the file is shown at the head of the dialog, such as time, size of file in bytes and the file commentary (if present). All waveforms present in the file are listed below the dialog. One line consists of a type symbol, the name of the waveform and if present, the comment. You may now select those waveforms in the list with which you want to work in FAMOS. When the dialog is ended with <OK>, waveforms selected at this point are loaded. If the dialog is ended with <Cancel>, the file is ignored completely. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands FAMOS, LOAD Manual 'Function Reference', Functions: FileOpenDSF, FileObjRead, FileClose Chapter 'Variables', section 'Data Types'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

85

5.2.2

DSP Format (DIGISKOP(c))

Select the entry "DIGISKOP" in the dialog "Load File" to read files in DIGISKOP(c) format (defined by the company remes). Once the desired files have been selected and confirmed with <OK>, the following dialog appears for each file. Selection of channels is determined with this dialog.

At the left of the dialog, individual boards or all boards contained in the file group may be selected. Channels contained in the corresponding boards may be selected in the box on the right side of the dialog (the corresponding board is marked by an arrow). Channel names from the file are listed on the left; on the right are the names under which the channel will be loaded in FAMOS. The FAMOS names can be determined by converting automatically into numbered variable names by selecting the button "Names Automatic", by selecting the button "Names from File" with the labels contained in the file, or by selecting the channels individually in the input box "FAMOS Name". Remarks Please note that each variable name in FAMOS must be unique. When several channels are to be read in, it is recommended to use automatic selection of names. Otherwise, FAMOS may overwrite already existing variables with the same name. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command: DSPLOAD

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

86

File Management

5.2.3

WFT Format

Select "Nicolet" in the dialog "Load file" to read files in WFT format (defined by the firm Nicolet Instrument Corporation). When the button <Options> is selected, the following dialog appears for specification of the file section to be read

Dialog for manual loading When this option is selected, the dialog appears when a file is loaded above the FAMOS menu, so that options for the present file may be selected individually. Please note that this option is canceled when the option "Default for 1 time base..." is selected. Please note further that the dialog box automatically appears when a file cannot be loaded with the specified options. The option "Dialog for manual loading" may be inactive. Default for one time base, 1..8 segments When this option is selected, this dialog never appears when WFT files with exactly one time base and maximum 8 segments are loaded and all segments contained are loaded every time. This option should be selected for convenient loading of simple WFT files. Do not select this option if the "Dialog for manual loading" is active and the dialog box should always appear! Reset to default Select this button to shift the dialog to a standard state, from which changes can be made. Compatible with FAMOS 3.2 This option ensures that variables opened are named in a manner compatible with earlier FAMOS versions. In such versions, the resulting variable name was limited to 8 characters and was always derived from the filename. Use channel name from file If a channel name is specified in the file, this option causes it to be used. The option can only be selected if the option "Compatible with FAMOS 3.2" is deactivated. Otherwise, the variable name is derived from the filename. Time base Specify the time base to be read in the text box "Time base". Values of 1 to 3 are permitted, depending on the file.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management Numbering from... In this box you can specify the position within a FAMOS variable name, at which an index number is to be inserted. The numbering pertains to different segments. This option is only enabled if the option "Compatible with FAMOS 3.2" is also enabled. Otherwise, numbering may be appended to the filename in the form of : "_Seg#". Example The following examples, which illustrate "FAMOS 3.2-compatible numbering", use the file names "WAVE" and "WAVEFORM". Rules for numbering Variables are numbered with as many places as necessary to register all segments in the file. For example, if "WAVE" contains 5 segments, they are numbered with "WAVE1"..."WAVE5"; if it contains 150 segments, they are numbered "WAVE001".."WAVE150". If the file name is short enough, numbering is simply appended. A file name may have a maximum of 8 characters. For example, if the file name has 6 characters and contains less than 100 segments, the file is numbered by appending numbers to the name. If the file name is too long to append numbering, the user can enter the position from which numbering should start. A file called "WAVEFORM" set for numbering from the second position, a waveform "W01EFORM" or "W100FORM" could result. If too large a position is specified for numbering, that position is automatically placed at the front. For example, in numbering from the 8th position and a file "WAVEFORM" with 1000 segments, the name "WAVE0001"..."WAVE1000" is selected. No numbering is assigned to a file with only one segment. Selecting segments Additional text boxes allow selection of segments. Selection is often necessary due to memory, clarity and loading duration. The user determines from which segment loading should start, which segment should be loaded and how many segments should be loaded in total. For example, if a file contains 80 segments and you read in from segment 10 each 5th segment total of 4th segments, the following segments are read: 10, 15, 20, 25 The following variables are generated from a file "WAVE": "WAVE10", "WAVE15", "WAVE20", "WAVE25" The number of available segments is displayed in the dialog box. A tone is generated when the dialog is ended and if input errors occurred. The input cursor is set to the corresponding text box. If, during loading, invalid variable names are generated by numbering or file names themselves, or if some of the variables already exist, the program allows these names to be changed. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command: WFTLOAD

87

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

88

File Management

5.2.4

ASCII Format

This option is available to load files in any ASCII formats. Select "ASCII" in the dialog "Load file..". Note: If the ASCII-format to be loaded is used quite frequently, it may be worthwhile to make a special import filter using the imc File Assistant. The effort needed to create the filter can pay off due to the significant extra speed and comfort of using it, especially where files contain multiple channels and also additional characteristics (such as channel name, sampling rate, etc.) also are to be read out. Also, the imc Homepage offers a number of already created import filters for common standard formats. Many programs save data in the form of ASCII files, including spreadsheets, text processing programs, as well as mathematical, data acquisition and data processing programs. To read the data from these files in FAMOS, a flexible ASCII format has been implemented. There is no standard for ASCII, each program uses its own conventions. What all ASCII formats have in common is that data, i.e. the numbers, are listed consecutively and are separated by a string. Texts may be included in the ASCII files at any position. The user may specify in a dialog box how the special ASCII files are to be read in order to read the correct numbers. ASCII files are read according to the following procedure: First, the program searches for a specified character string. A certain number of values or bytes are skipped. The user may specify either values or bytes. Then the numerical values are read. The user can specify which nth value is to be read (e.g. each third); all others are ignored (skipped over). Either a certain number of values (e.g. 100 values) or all values are read. The number of values read determines the length of the waveform generated in FAMOS. Numerical values may be written with a decimal point (e.g. 1.35 V) or decimal comma (e.g. DM 3,75). All characters between numerical values are ignored. The button "Options" in dialog "Load file.." calls the dialog for defining your special ASCII format. This dialog can also be accessed under "Extra/ Options", on the index card "Load file | ASCII".

First search for: First enter the string in the text box which is to be searched for in the ASCII file. If no such string is present, leave this box empty. Skip Enter the number of values or bytes which should be skipped. This must be an integer greater than or equal to zero. Byte / Values

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management Select "Byte" to skip a specified number of bytes; select "Values" to skip a specified number of complete values. Read every nth value Enter in the box which nth numerical value should be read. This must be an integer greater than zero. Read...values Enter in the text box how many values should be read in. This may be a fixed integer greater than zero if the number is to be defined. You may enter "all" or a zero if all numbers are to be read to the end of the file. Decimal comma Select this option when the values have been written with decimal comma instead of a decimal point. To accept the specified format, press the button "OK"; Select "Cancel" to discard any changes. Example All values (without date!) are to be read from the following file: imc Mesysteme GmbH 15.6.89 Dear Madame, Dear Sir, Please read the following values: 1, 2, 3.4, 5e-6. Do not forget these values: 7 88 99 Best regards imc ... Select the following setups: Read from string: values: Skip 0 values Read each 1st value Read all values Decimal comma no The following values are then written in the waveform generated during loading: 1.0 2.0 3.4 0.005 7.0 88.0 99.0 Example The first 5 values in the second column are to be read from the following file: ...... ...All costs in DM ...1.00 10.00 100.00 ...2.00 20.00 200.00 ...3.00 30.00 300.00 ...4.00 40.00 400.00 ...5.00 50.00 500.00 ...6.00 60.00 600.00 ...7.00 70.00 700.00 ...8.00 80.00 800.00 ...9.00 90.00 900.00 ...... Select the following setups: Read from string: Skip Read each Read Decimal comma costs in DM 1. value 3rd value 5 values yes

89

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

90

File Management The following values are written in the waveform: 10.0 Remarks Data read are always created in FAMOS in real 4 byte format (floating point). During reading of ASCII files, units, x-axis scaling, etc. are not read from the files, they are always set to standard values. This can be changed after data are read. It is often convenient to create a small sequence to automate the procedure. Please note that Windows uses the ANSI character set, which does not correspond to the ASCII set for special characters. Files containing special characters may be read incorrectly. For complex or frequently used ASCII-formats, we recommend creating an import filter with the help of the imc File Assistant. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command ASCII, LOAD Manual 'Function Reference', Functions:FileOpenASCII, FileLineRead 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

91

5.2.5

Binary format

Choose this option to load files in any binary format. Select "Binary" from the format list in the dialog "Load file..". Note: If the BINARY-format to be loaded is used quite frequently, it may be worthwhile to make a special import filter using the imc File Assistant. The effort needed to create the filter can pay off due to the significant extra speed and comfort of using it, especially where files contain multiple channels and also additional characteristics (such as channel name, sampling rate, etc.) also are to be read out. Also, the imc Homepage offers a number of already created import filters for common standard formats. Many programs save data in binary form, for example data acquisition and data processing programs. A flexible binary format is implemented to read data from such files in FAMOS. Binary format does not have a standard, each program uses its own conventions. Conventional binary formats group data in a compact block, usually preceded by a header. You may now specify in a dialog box how the special binary format should be read in order to correctly read out the values. Binary files are read according to the following procedure: The program searches for a specified string. A specified number of bytes are skipped. Either a specified number of values are read or all values are read. This determines the length of the waveform generated in FAMOS. A space of defined width in bytes is skipped between the values to be read. This allows information between the values to be skipped. It is also possible to read only ever nth value. The space is always specified in bytes. The data type is highly significant in reading data. Floating pointing-point numbers in 4, 6 or 8 byte representation as well as integers in 1, 2 or 4 byte representation can be read. Floating pointing-point numbers in 4 or 8 byte representation follow the IEEE standard format. In addition, floating pointing-point numbers can be read in a special 6-byte format, as used by TurboPascal (? Borland International, Inc) for the data type REAL. In floating pointing-point numbers, it is not necessary to enter any information about value range, since the entire range of values is already included. Integers in 1-, 2- or 4-byte representation as complement on two, that means with sign, are interpreted, for example for two bytes 0000H 0d ffffH -1d 0001H 1d (H = hex, d = decimal). Integers in 1, 2 or 4-byte representation without sign are interpreted, for example for two bytes 0000H 0d 0001H 1d ffffH 65536d To transform the range of values to the actual range of (physical) quantity, the minimum and maximum of the physical value range can be specified. The number of bits which determine the measurement range can also be defined, i.e. the resolution of the device generating the data. Integers are transformed according to the following rules: Signed (two's complement): Transform = (Range_max - Range_min) * (NumberWS + 2Bits -1) / (2Bits -1) + Range_min

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

92

File Management Unsigned: Transform = (Range_max - Range_min) * NumberUS / (2Bits - 1) + Range_min Abbreviations: NumberWS NumberUS Bits Range_min Range_max Transform Integer with sign (1, 2 or 4 bytes) Integer without sign (1, 2 or 4 bytes) Number of bits which compose the measurement range (specify in dialog) Minimum of the physical value range (specify in dialog) Maximum of the physical value range (specify in dialog) Transformed number written in the FAMOS waveform.

To open the binary format options dialog, click on <Options> in the "Load File dialog. You can also find this dialog under "Extra/ Options", on the index card "Load file | BINARY".

First search for: Enter which string the program should search for first. Leave the box empty if the program should not search for a string. Spacing... Enter the number of bytes which should be skipped between the values. Read...values Enter the number of values to be read. If all values to the end of the file should be read, enter a zero or

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management "all". Floating point Select this option to read floating point numbers (real numbers) from the file. Integer Select this option to read integers. Number of bytes per value Select the corresponding option for the number of bytes which should be represented with the values. In floating pointing-point numbers, choose between 4, 6, and 8 bytes; in integers, select between 1, 2, and 4 bytes. Sign Select this option to read integers present in two's complement representation. Bit Enter in the text box how many bits make up the measurement range when integers are read. The number must be greater than zero and smaller than 8 times the number of bytes. Min. Scale / Max Scale Enter the minimum and maximum of the value range to specify the range of integer values in FAMOS. 80x86 Select this option to read files in Intel format. In this format, the lowest-value byte is located at the first position, as opposed to other formats (e.g. Motorola), in which the highest-value byte is at the first position. Do not select the option "80x86" for these formats. Select the "OK" button to implement the format settings or "Cancel" to discard any changes. The dialog box is not closed if incorrect values, for example, an invalid number of bytes, are entered in the text boxes when "OK" is selected. Example A file to be read in binary format according to the Intel convention has the following content: first come 18 bytes with text "AD-converter channel 1", next, 2 bytes with unknown content, and then 1000 bytes with 500 integers per 2 bytes, originating directly from an AD-converter, i.e. without sign (not in two's complement, measurement range -10V...+10V.). The following setups should then be selected in the dialog box to read the file: Read from string: Skip 20 bytes Spacing 0 bytes Read all values Value type integer Bytes 2 Sign no Bit 12 Range min -10 Range max 10 80 x 86 yes Example A file to be read contains 10000 bytes with integer samples from four channels in Intel format. The values have already been converted into an integer 16-bit format in two's complement by data storage software. The third channel is of interest: an 8-bit channel with a range from 0...5V. The data are arranged as follows: 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1st value 1st value 1st value channel 1 channel 2 channel 3

93

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

94

File Management 2 bytes 1st value channel 4 2 bytes 2nd value channel 1 2 bytes 2nd value channel 2 ... Select the following setups to read the third channel from the file: Read from string: Skip 4 bytes Space 6 bytes Read all values Value type integer Bytes 2 Sign yes Bits 8 Range min 0 Range max 5 80 x 86 yes Example At the beginning of a file, the date and other information is provided, followed by a unique string to initialize data and then the data as real numbers with simple accuracy. 7 bytes with date, e.g. "15.6.89", may vary 1 byte with ID for floating pointing-point values 12 bytes with sampling time in ASCII ("dt = 3.5 ms", may vary) 15 bytes with remark "Data on motor " 6 bytes with unique string: "Data##:" 4000 bytes with 4-byte floating pointing-point values in Intel format Select the following setups to read the file: Read from string: Data##: Skip 0 bytes Space 0 bytes Read all values Value type floating pointing-point Bytes 4 80 x 86 yes Remarks The data are always created in FAMOS in real 4-byte format (floating point). If you want to read a file containing only binary data without preceding information and skip numerical values, please note that a number of bytes are always skipped. To skip numerical values, multiply this value by the number of bytes in a value. For example, to skip ten real numbers in 4-byte representation, the number of bytes to skip is 40. Units, x-axis, scaling, etc. are not read from binary files. They are set to default values which can be changed after the data have been read into FAMOS. It is convenient to create a short sequence to automate the procedure. Remember that Windows uses the ANSI character set, which does not correspond to the ASCII character set. Files containing special characters may be read incorrectly. For complex or frequently used binary formats, we recommend creating an import filter with the help of the imc File Assistant. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands: BINARY, LOAD Manual for imc File Assistant

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

95

5.2.6

Excel (XLS)-Format

This functionality is only available to FAMOS if Microsoft Excel is installed on the same system. The program versions Excel 95 to Excel 2007 are supported. XLS-format is the default file format for the widely circulated spreadsheet program Microsoft Excel. If Excel is installed parallel to FAMOS, XLS-files can be imported to FAMOS directly. For this purpose, Excel is remotely controlled by a mechanism called "OLE-Automation". Excel is started in the background, opens the desired file, transfers the data to FAMOS and is closed again. Constraints Only the first table in an XLS-workbook is imported. Only numbers and values for the date can be imported. Import is performed column-by-column, i.e., the contents of a column make up a FAMOSvariable. The values to be imported must follow "seamlessly" upon each other; an empty cell in a table is interpreted as a column's end. Also make note of the various XLS-format versions. Excel 95, for instance, cannot read XLS-files saved in the Excel 2000-format. To load an XLS-file, select the menu item "Load file", and in the file selection dialog which then appears, the format list entry "EXCEL XLS". Excel-import comes with a number of options; the dialog with the controls for these options can be selected via the menu item "Extra/ Options", on the index card "Load file - Excel XLS", or via the button "Options" in the "Load file"-dialog, if Excel-format is selected in the format selection list.

Dialog: XLS-import options

Range Here you must specify the portion of the table to be read in. All references to cells are to be entered in the "A1"-notation normally used by Excel, where "A" denotes the first column and "IV" the last column (Number 256). This is followed by the row number.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

96

File Management Examples A1 IV65536 Z1 AA10 Upper left cell Column 256, Row 65536 (max values from Excel 97 on) Column 26, Row 1 Column 27, Row 10

From Defines the upper left cell of the table portion to be read in. to Defines the bottom right cell of the table portion to be read in. Read-in begins at the specified starting point (cell) and is carried out column-by-column, i.e. a FAMOSvariable is generated for each column. An empty cell in a column is interpreted as a column's end. Read in stops at the first empty column (in other words, if the cell in the selected starting row is empty or doesn't contain a numerical value). "to> maximum ...": Reads column-by-column, until the selected range is imported or until the first empty column. "to> End automatically:" Reads column-by-column until the first empty column. Scaling: One data set is generated for each EXCEL-column. Here, you can enter how it is scaled. Permanent (x0,dx): A normal waveform is generated and initialized with the x0/dx (or sampling interval/ pretrigger) specified here. 1st column contains scaling: The scaling information for all waveforms is derived from the first column read in. If the option box "Equidistant" is activated the scaling column is assumed to be equidistant (constant distance between 2 adjacent readings) and a normal waveform is generated with the calculated x0/dx. Otherwise, XY-data sets are generated, where the first column is used as the x-component for all further data sets. Designation Affects how the data sets loaded are named. 1st row contains name: The first row to read is assumed to contain the channel name and only afterwards do the actual data begin. Invalid characters for a variable name, such as <SPACE>, parentheses, etc., are replaced by an underline '_'. Permanent name + serial index: The specified name is extended with the index of the data set read in (the first data set has the index 1) Permanent name + column index: The specified name is extended with the Excel column index. This is different from the serial index, if read-in doesn't begin in the 1st column Table name + ...: The name is formed from the Excel spreadsheet name and a number. File name + ...: The name is formed from the Excel filename and a number. Join waveforms into a group If this option is activated, all the channels which are loaded are joined to form a group. The group's name is determined by the selection in the list "Group name". Example The following Excel table is to be imported:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

97

For this purpose, the following options are to be set:

Configuring a sample EXCEL import

Thus, a data group "Workbook2" is created in FAMOS, having 2 channels "Channel_1" and "Channel_2" (both of data type XY). Read-in is stopped at Column 4, since it contains no numerical values; and the column "Temperature" is also not imported. Reference In this section, manual loading of XLS-files is described. The options offered only permit loading of tables having simple structure. For sequences, corresponding functions exist, see FAMOS Function Reference, functions 'FileOpenXLS', 'FileXLSColumnRead' and 'FileXLSCellRead'. The latter function can also be used to read out individual cells, including cells containing text. Thus, sequences can be programmed which import more complex table structures.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

98

File Management

5.3

Saving Files
First select the variables to be saved in the variable list in the main window. Then select "File/ Save Individually" or "File/ Save Together". FAMOS variables can be saved in FAMOS file format, and with some restrictions, in ASCII format. If Microsoft Excel is installed on the same computer, files in Excel-XLS format can also be created. For saving in ASCII- and XLS-format, the user can define so-called export templates by operating a dialog. These templates set, for instance, file and column headers, numerical formats and the presence of scaling columns. Format templates once defined are then available under the selected name for the format selection. From FAMOS 5.0 on, additional file formats are available as optional import extension libraries which can be seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS user's interface. This includes the MATLAB-import, for example, which comes standard with FAMOS. Other file formats, such as an enhanced ASCII or a configurable BINARY format can be generated by imc function libraries, which are used via the Kit interface in FAMOS.

5.3.1

Saving Individually

The selected variables are saved in succession, each in a file.. Select the menu item "File/ Save Individually". A dialog is called up for each variable selected to enter the file name and select the format.

5.3.2

Saving Together

Variables selected are saved together in one file.. Select menu item "File /Save Together" or use the corresponding button in the tool bar in the main window.

Dialog: Save file

In this dialog, enter the file name under which the selected variables should be saved. The folder opened upon starting is the last folder used for saving. At the beginning, the folder belonging to the default FAMOS setting is used. This default setting can be edited in the dialog "Option"/"Folders" and remains intact after the program is closed. The toolbar at the upper right contains

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management an additional button: Clicking on this button with the mouse opens a small menu offering the most recently used folders. Selecting items from this menu is a fast way to moving to another folder.

99

In the format selection list, select the desired file format. Along with "FAMOS", you can also find any ASCII- and XLS export templates you defined personally. In "Save individually" mode, the format "ASCII (3.2 compatible)" is also available. If no filename extension is specified, a default extension is automatically appended. This is ".DAT" for FAMOS-format, ".ASC" for ASCII-(3.2) format and for personally defined ASCII- and XLS export templates the extension defined by the user. A warning message is generated if the selected file already exists. You may either overwrite the existing file or cancel the "Save" command. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands SAVE, FAMOS, ASCSAVE, ASCOPTION FAMOS Function Reference: FileOpenDSF, FileObjWrite, FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite Online Help for 'File Assistant', description of FAMOS file format, (Manual Shared Components).

5.3.3

FAMOS Format

In the "Save as"-.dialog, select the format entry "FAMOS" to save files in FAMOS format The FAMOS format is the standard format for saving variables. All data types and formats can be saved in this format. All additional information, such as name, unit, comment, etc. is saved along with the variables. Any number of variables may be saved together in one file. Waveforms of any type and text can be combined. If the file name is not extended, ".DAT" is automatically used The file may also contain a comment. It is displayed in the file selection dialog when loading and helps make finding files easier. Enter the commentary in the edit box at the lower margin of the dialog "Save file". A detailed description of the FAMOS format is found in the Curve Window documentation. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands SAVE, FAMOS, ASCSAVE, ASCOPTION FAMOS Function Reference: FileOpenDSF, FileObjWrite, FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite Online Help for 'File Assistant', description of FAMOS file format, (Manual Shared Components).

5.3.4
5.3.4.1

ASCII Format (export template)

Overview

Waveforms can also be saved in a configurable ASCII-format and thus made accessible to other programs for further processing. It is also possible, for example, to save multiple waveforms together in a multi-column file, to record extra infos in a file header or in column title, as well as to define numerical formats and column separators. Such a format definition is called an ASCII export template. A template is defined by the user with the help of a dialog, and saved under a permanent name. Under this name, the format can later be selected in the format selection list in the dialog under "File - Save/Export". Thus, it is easy to define the formats you need and access them later as required.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

100

File Management All settings for an export template are recorded in the form of a text file in the FAMOS definitions folder. This file bears the name of the export template, plus the filename extension ".aet". To save a file in ASCII-format, select the command "File/ Save individually" or "File/ Save together". In the file selection dialog which then appears, select from the format list an existing ASCII export template (denoted by the prefix "[ASC]"). The "Options" button accesses a dialog in which settings can be changed, if necessary, and then you can enter a filename and hit the button "Save" to finish. You can also define and use a completely new ASCII export template. Toward this end, select the entry "Define new export template..." in the format list, then "Options" and in the dialog which then appears select the entry "ASCII Export Template". After completed definition of the template, it appears in the format list under the designated name and can immediately be used for saving. When saving structured data types (groups, segmented waveforms, waveforms with events, 2-component waveforms), the individual parts (group channels, events, segments, components) are branched out in the display, appearing in respective rows. Text variables cannot be saved. The definitions dialog for export templates can also be called via the FAMOS options menu, (accessed via "Extra/ Options" in the main menu) under "File - Save/ Export: ASCII". An export template once defined can also be used in sequences. The corresponding function is called FileOpenASCII2(..).

5.3.4.2

Administering ASCII-export templates

From the Options menu (opened via "Extra/ Options" in the main menu), access the dialog "File - Save/ Export: ASCII". This dialog appears as shown below.

Options/ ASCII export templates

Templates: In addition to the entry "Create new template...", this list contains all export templates previously defined by the user which are located in the default definitions folder. Along with the name (under which the template also appears in the format selection list) you will find the user-defined comment and the specified default file extension for the format concerned. To define a new template, double-click on the entry "Create new template...". Then the template definition dialog starts with its default settings. Proceed in the same way to edit an existing template. You can also create a new template based on an old one by first opening the old one and then entering a new name for it. Note: As an alternative, you can call the export template definition dialog from the "Save file" dialog. To do this, first select an existing ASCII export template (denoted by the prefix [ASC]) or the entry "Define

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management new export template, and then hit the "options" button. Open Starts the definition dialog for the template currently selected in the selection list; just as for doubleclicking on a list entry. Rename Calls a dialog in which you can edit the name, comment and file extension for the selected export template.

101

Dialog: Renaming/ saving ASCII-export template

Delete Deletes the selected export template. 5.3.4.3 Defining ASCII export templates

The template definition dialog offers controls for all settings necessary for complete definition of an ASCII export template. Because of the large amount of available options, the dialog is divided into different index cards.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

102

File Management The division of the dialog also reflects the basic structure of an ASCII-file.

Example of an ASCII-file with 2 data sets

In general, it consists of a file header [1], which can contain a permanent text and/or general information. Next, the data set readings follow in adjacent columns [2], [3]. Each column, in turn, can have its own column header [2a], [3a], which can feature indications of the column contents, such as channel name, sampling rate, comments or similar things. Below the column header, the actual numerical values appear [2b], [3b]. The individual columns are separated by a defined separator; in this example, by a semicolon. There is also a distinction between scaling columns [2] and readings columns [3]. A scaling column returns the scaling (e.g. the time axis) for all readings columns to its right. In the case of multi-column files, one scaling column at left can be valid for all subsequent readings columns, or each data set can come with its own scaling column, as illustrated in the example. This basic structure determines what specifications are necessary for describing such a format. The index card "General" covers global settings such as column separators and the decimal character to use with numbers, along with export template specifications. The index card "Data" describes the structure of a readings column, including column header, column width and numerical format. Analogously, the index card "Scaling" controls the arrangement and format of the scaling column(s). The index card "File header" defines the introductory text at the beginning of a file. Under "Miscellaneous", further options mainly affecting only special data types can be found. "Preview" enables you to see in advance how the format as currently defined is applied to sample data sets. Once you have made all settings necessary, you can save the export template definitions to a file by hitting the "Save" button. This file is stored in the default definitions folder. It bears the export template's name, plus the extension ". aet". If the "Save file"-dialog is opened, the definitions folder is searched and all export templates found are added to the format selection list. The button "Close" exits the dialog. If you have made changes previously, a prompt appears asking you to confirm that the template changes are to be saved.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

103

Defining ASCII export templates/ General

The index card "General" covers global settings such as column separators and the decimal character to use with numbers, along with export template specifications. Format-information General specifications describing the export template can be made here.

Name Name by which the template is identified. The format then appears under this name in the format selection list in the dialog "Save file", as well as in the format list in the options dialog under "Options/ File - Save/ Export/ ASCII". In addition, the template itself is saved under this name, supplemented by the extension "aet", in FAMOS' default definitions folder. File extension Default file extension to be used when saving files with this export template. It is appended to the filename, unless another extension is explicitly specified upon saving. Comment Here you can enter brief commentary describing the format. This comment is then displayed in the title bar of the "Save file" dialog, for example, whenever the corresponding format is selected in the format selection list. Example of format information: As per the illustration above, the export template itself is stored under the filename "My Format.aet" in the FAMOS definitions folder. If you wish to use this export template on another computer, you need only copy this file to the corresponding definitions folder. When this format is selected, the "Save file" dialog appears as follows:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

104

File Management

Dialog: Save file with ASCII-format selected

The text in the format selection list consists of a permanent prefix [ASC] denoting an ASCII export template, the selected name and the specified filename extension. The latter is also used as the display filter for the file list. Column separation This group of options determines how individual columns are to be separated from each other. In the list box, you can first select a fixed separator character (Tab, semicolon, Space or comma), or "string". If "String" is selected, you can enter a string in the adjacent input box. A tabulator can be entered as the special character '\t'. The string "\t;\t", for instance, sets the separator between two columns to be the combination <Tabulator>, semicolon, <Tabulator>. If the option "No separator after last column" is selected, the last column remains open, meaning that it is not completed by the selected separator. Decimal separator for numbers Set here whether the decimal marker in numbers is a point (e.g. "3.142" or a comma ("3,142"). With the option "Automatic" active, the valid setting in the Windows Control Panel, under "Regional Settings/ Number" is used.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

105

Defining ASCII export templates/ Data

This index on this index card affect the format of the data readings columns.

Column header In this input box, you can set the title appearing above each individual column of readings. This can be a combination of fixed text and placeholders. Such placeholders represent specific characteristic values belonging to the data set written in the respective column, and are filled with the current texts (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g sampling interval, length) upon saving. A placeholder can be recognized as a fixed designation surrounded by percent signs. %NAME%, for instance, means the name, %YUNIT% the y-unit of the data set recorded. In the selection list at right, all placeholders defined are listed. Double-clicking on the desired entry (or selecting the entry and hitting the [<<]-button) copies the placeholder to the current cursor position in the input box. You can also use the input box's context menu (called by right-clicking in the input box) to insert a placeholder. This also offers a list of available placeholders. If no column header is needed, simply leave the input box empty (or completely delete its contents). Minimum column width Determines the minimum width a data column can have. If the actual contents are narrower than the specified width, the left side is filled with empty spaces and the contents are right-justified. However, if the actual contents are wider, they are still displayed entirely, and the column is widened for the purpose. Numerical format Here, you specify the numerical format and resolution of numerical output. You can choose among exponential notation (e.g. "1.23E3"), decimal notation ("123.4") and "Automatic". Automatic means, in this

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

106

File Management case, that the shortest possible notation is selected for the given numerical value. The "Digits" box is for entering the number of decimal places to be displayed.

Defining ASCII export templates/ Scaling

On this index card, you can find controls for positioning and formatting scaling columns.

Scaling column Here, you can set whether the file comes with any scaling column. In general, the scaling column states the x-position corresponding to a y-value (amplitude) in the data set; a frequent example is a time-axis. This is analogous to the portioning of the (horizontal) x-axis used in graphical data display. How the scaling column is created depends on the data type, according to the scheme below: Normal (equidistantly sampled) data set XY-data set Complex data sets Generated from sampling interval/ pretrigger/ trigger time (or x-delta/x-offset) The data set's X-component is used The frequency (for magnitude/ phase representation) or the independent parameter (for real/ imaginary part-representation)

[None] No explicit scaling column is stored. This can be sensible if the information either isn't relevant or can be derived from other data in the file (e.g. if the sampling rate is specified in the column header of the data column). If this option is selected, all further input controls in this dialog are disabled.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management [Common] A common scaling column (at left) is created for all data sets stored. In consequence, it is possible that gaps can appear in the matrix of data columns if a certain data set has no value assigned to a particular x-position (in other words, there is no interpolation; the corresponding cell simply stays empty). Thus, this display style is sensible only if all the data sets stored have the same scaling (because, for instance, they all are derived from the same measurement with a common time base) or at least all cover approximately the same x-range. [Per waveform] Each data set receives its own scaling column, which appears at the left of its respective data column. Column header In this input box, you define a title which appears above each individual scaling column. To do so, you can combine fixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data set and are filled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g. sampling interval, length). A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed from both sides by the "percent" character. %NAME%, for example, denotes the name, and %YUNIT% the y-unit of the particular data set. In the list box at right, all placeholders already defined are listed. Double-clicking on the entry of the desired placeholder (or selecting the entry and hitting the button [<<]) copies the placeholder to the current input position in the input box. You can also use the context menu (right mouse click) of the input box to insert a placeholder. This also presents a list of all available placeholders. If no column header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents). Minimum column width Specifies the minimum width of the scaling column. If the current content is narrower than the specified width, the left side is filled with empty spaces and the content thus right-justified. If, however, the current content is wider, it is displayed in full and the column is widened accordingly. Scaling in: x-Unit The scaling corresponds to the data set's x-unit. Here, you can set the numerical value and the resolution of the numerical values. You have a choice between exponential notation (e.g. "1.23E3"), decimal notation ("123.4") and "Automatic". Automatic means in this case that the shortest possible notation is used, which depends on what the particular numerical value is. In the 'Digits' box, you specify the number of decimal places to display. Scaling in: Time The scaling output is expressed as absolute time and date. This option, of course, only makes sense if data sets recorded over time and having "s" (seconds) as the x-unit are actually involved. Seconds Here you specify the resolution for the time display. "None" means display of the time of day in terms of "Hours:Minutes", for instance "23:11". For the setting "1 s", the seconds are also indicated ("23:11:59"), "100ms" also indicates tenths of seconds 1/10 ("23:11:59,4"), etc. The separator in front of the fractions of seconds (comma or point) depends on the current system setting for "Decimal symbol" (which is set in WindowXP, for instance, under "Settings/Control Panel/Region and Language Options/Regional Options/ Customize"). Date If this is selected, the date (in abbreviated form, e.g. "11.12.01") is output together with the time of day.

107

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

108

File Management

Defining ASCII export templates / File header

Here you can configure a file header to be entered at the beginning of the file to be saved. File header Enter in this input box the text you wish to have at the beginning of the file. To do so, you can combine fixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data set and are filled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g. sampling interval, length). In the case of placeholders referenced to data-sets, the first data set's characteristic values are used in the file, if multiple data sets are stored. A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed from both sides by the "percent" character. %NAME%, for example, denotes the name, and %YUNIT% the y-unit of the particular data set. In the list box at right, all placeholders already defined are listed. Double-clicking on the entry of the desired placeholder (or selecting the entry and hitting the button [<<]) copies the placeholder to the current input position in the input box. You can also use the context menu (right mouse click) of the input box to insert a placeholder. This also presents a list of all available placeholders. If no file header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents). You can also divide the file header into multiple columns. To do this, use the arrow buttons associated with the "Current column" control, in order to add a column or to switch to another column. Empty columns are "optimized" away upon saving and therefore do not need to be explicitly deleted.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

109

Defining ASCII export templates / Miscellaneous

This index card offers additional options mainly interesting only for special data types.

Switch rows/ columns The rows of the data matrix are switched with its columns, including the column header, which means that what once was the first row becomes the first column. This option makes most sense in the case of segmented waveforms (matrices), for instance. If the option is deactivated, then for a segmented waveform, each segment is written to its own column, but if this option is activated, the values belonging to a single segment are written side by side in a row. Ignore phase in magnitude-phase waveforms If this option is selected, then only the magnitude component of complex data sets in magnitude/phase representation is saved. Placeholder for channel name These options affect how the placeholder for the channel name %NAME% is interpreted in file or column headers. Prefix group name In data sets belonging to groups, the group name is placed before the channel name (and is separated from it by a colon). Append segment/ event index In the case of segmented or event-based waveforms, each column contains one event or segment. If this option is active, the index of the current segment/event is appended (in square brackets). The setting is ignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header or in the header for a common scaling column. Append component identifier In the case of complex or XY-data sets, one component per column is stored. If this option is active, the standard component tag in FAMOS is appended, e.g. ".M" for a complex data set's magnitude or ".X" for the X-component of an data set. The setting is ignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header or in the header for a common scaling column.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

110

File Management

Defining ASCII export templates / Preview

The effect of the currently valid settings is demonstrated by applying them in a preview based on already provided sample data sets.

ASCII export template definition dialog / Preview

Thus, this provides help in predicting the results of the settings you make.

5.3.5

ASCII Format (3.2 compatible)

This format has only been retained for the sake of compatibility to older versions of FAMOS. The possibilities for configuring it are limited and it can only be used in "Save individually" mode. It is generally preferable to use ASCII export templates instead. Waveforms can also be saved in ASCII format. This file may then read by other programs as an ASCII file. A simple ASCII data format is used, which saved individual values in lines without special separating characters. To save data in this format, select the format "ASCII (3.2 compatible) from the format list in the "Save file" dialog. This selection is only available if the dialog is called via the "Save individually" menu item. Use this format only if you want to save data for processing with other programs. Do not use this format if you want to reload the file in FAMOS at a later time. Please note that this format has a very limited use. Only one waveform per file may be filed; additional information, such as commentary are not filed. Storing texts is not possible. To generate complex ASCII formats, refer to the section on "ASCII export templates. To save texts to ASCII-files (for example for protocol-files), you can use the functions for creating rows of ASCII-files ("FileLineWrite"). If no file name extension is specified, ".ASC" is automatically used. A dialog is called using the button <Options> in which the format for the file to be created can be specified in more detail.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

111

Define the ASCII file format to be created in more detailed in this dialog. The dialog is called by selecting ASCII format in "Save file" and the button <Options>. Notation The format of saved numerical values is defined using the option selected in this group. The user may specify that values are always displayed in exponential notation, always in decimal notation or mixed. Mixed means that the shortest display is selected for each individual value. The user may also choose to save values with the standard decimal point or a decimal comma. Precision The entry in the text box indicates the number of significant places to be output in 'Mixed' representation. Otherwise, it corresponds to the number of significant places to be output after the decimal point. The value range allowed is 0..7. Minimum Width Specify here the minimum number of places to be output. The range allowed is 0..99. If the actual width of the number to be output is smaller than the value specified, spaces fill up the number from the left. This can be used to justify the decimal points of all values saved in a column, which significantly increases legibility. Save with header If this option box is selected, a defined block with various information about the saved waveform entered at the beginning of the file. Otherwise, only individual values are saved. This block has the following structure (fixed key words are underlined):

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

112

File Management IMC FAMOS Name: DSIN Time: 10.08.89 17:26:20 Length: 1101 Unit X-axis: 4e-006 s 1st x-value: 0 s Unit Y-axis: V Data: 0.0000 0.2991 .... The waveform is this example has the name DSIN and was generated on 8-10-89. The name is the variable name before the waveform is saved, it may differ from the file name. The waveform consists of 1101 values, recorded at a rate of 4 s, beginning with the specified trigger time. The y-axis has the unit volts, indicating that the curve represents voltage with respect to time. The individual values begin in the line after the key word Data:. Only y-values / Double Column x-> y Specify using these option buttons whether only the y-values should be saved in a vertical column or whether each y-value is saved preceded by its corresponding x-value (separated by a tab). Default This button creates settings which execute storing in ASCII format analog to previous FAMOS versions (<= Version 1.5), without this option dialog. Reference Chapter 'Sequences', commands ASCSAVE, ASCOPTION Manual 'FAMOS Function Reference', Functions FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite

5.3.6
5.3.6.1

Excel (XLS)-Format
Overview

This functionality is only available to FAMOS if Microsoft Excel is installed on the same system. The program versions Excel 95 to Excel 2007 are supported. XLS-format is the default file format for the widely circulated spreadsheet program Microsoft Excel. If Excel is installed parallel to FAMOS, XLS-files can be exported by FAMOS directly. For this purpose, Excel is remotely controlled by a mechanism called "OLE-Automation". Excel is started in the background, advised to receive the data from FAMOS and to store the file and is finally closed again. Constraints Excel can only administer a limited number of data sets of limited length. The maximum number of rows (=maximum length of a data set) is limited to 65536 values (Excel 95: 16384 values). The maximum number of columns is 256 (= number of data sets which can be transferred). Only one table per XLS-file can be exported. Only data sets (not text variables) can be exported. Note also that there are different versions of the XLS-format. Excel 95, for instance, cannot read XLS-files saved in Excel 2000 format. When saving structured data types (groups, event-based and segmented waveforms, 2-component data sets), the individual parts (channels of the group, events, segments, components) are extracted and written out each in its own column. Data export in XLS-format comes with many configuration options. Naturally, it is possible to save multiple data sets together in a table with multiple columns. A table header, column titles and scaling column(s) all can also be defined. Such a format definition is called an XLS export template. A template is defined by the user with the help

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management of a dialog, and saved under a permanent name. Under this name, the format can later be selected in the format selection list in the dialog under "File - Save/Export". Thus, it is easy to define the formats you need and access them later as required. All settings for an export template are recorded in the form of a text file in the FAMOS definitions folder. This file bears the name of the export template, plus the filename extension ".aet". Technically, there is no difference between an XLS export template and an ASCII export template. Only the number of settings available is different, since some specifications needed for ASCII-export are not necessary for Excel-export. To save a file in XLS-format, select the command "File/ Save individually" or "File/ Save together". In the file selection dialog which then appears, select from the format list an existing XLS export template (denoted by the prefix "[XLS]"). The "Options" button accesses a dialog in which settings can be changed, if necessary, and then you can enter a filename and hit the button "Save" to finish. You can also define and use a completely new XLS export template. Toward this end, select the entry "Define new export template..." in the format list, then "Options" and in the dialog which then appears select the entry "XLS Export Template". After completed definition of the template, it appears in the format list under the designated name and can immediately be used for saving. The definitions dialog for export templates can also be called via the FAMOS options menu, (accessed via "Extra/ Options" in the main menu) under "File - Save/ Export: EXCEL". An export template once defined can also be used in sequences. The corresponding function is called FileOpenXLS2(..). 5.3.6.2 Administering EXCEL-export templates

113

From the Options menu (opened via "Extra/ Options" in the main menu), access the dialog "File - Save/ Export: XLS". This dialog appears as shown below.

Options/ EXCEL export templates

Templates: In addition to the entry "Create new template...", this list contains all export templates previously defined by the user which are located in the default definitions folder. Along with the name (under which the template also appears in the format selection list) you will find the user-defined comment and the specified default file extension for the format concerned. To define a new template, double-click on the entry "Create new template...". Then the template definition dialog starts with its default settings. Proceed in the same way to edit an existing template. You can also create a new template based on an old one by first opening the old one and then entering a new name for it.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

114

File Management Note: As an alternative, you can call the export template definition dialog from the "Save file" dialog. To do this, first select an existing XLS export template (denoted by the prefix [XLS]) or the entry "Define new export template, and then hit the "options" button. Open Starts the definition dialog for the template currently selected in the selection list; just as for doubleclicking on a list entry. Rename Calls a dialog n which you can edit the name, comment and file extension for the selected export template.

Dialog: Save EXCEL export template

Delete Deletes the selected export template. 5.3.6.3 Defining EXCEL export templates

The template definition dialog offers controls for all settings necessary for complete definition of an EXCEL export template. Because of the large amount of available options, the dialog is divided into different index cards.

Dialog: Define EXCEL export template

The division of the dialog also reflects the basic structure of an `XLS-file:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

115

Example of an EXCEL-file with 2 data sets

In general, it consists of a file header [Cells A1 to A5], which can contain a permanent text and/or general information. Next, the data set readings follow in adjacent columns. Each column, in turn, can have its own column header [Cells 6 to 8], which can feature indications of the column contents, such as channel name, sampling rate, comments or similar things. Below the column header, the actual numerical values appear [starting at Row 9]. There is also a distinction between scaling columns [Columns A and C and readings columns [Columns B and D]. A scaling column returns the scaling (e.g. the time axis) for all readings columns to its right. In the case of multi-column files, one scaling column at left can be valid for all subsequent readings columns, or each data set can come with its own scaling column. This basic structure determines what specifications are necessary for describing such a format. The index card "General" covers global settings such as column separators and the decimal character to use with numbers, along with export template specifications. The index card "Data" describes the structure of a readings column, including column header, column width and numerical format. Analogously, the index card "Scaling" controls the arrangement and format of the scaling column(s). The index card "File header" defines the introductory text at the beginning of a file. Under "Miscellaneous", further options mainly affecting only special data types can be found. Once you have made all settings necessary, you can save the export template definitions to a file by hitting the "Save" button. This file is stored in the default definitions folder. It bears the export template's name, plus the extension ". aet". If the "Save file"-dialog is opened, the definitions folder is searched and all export templates found are added to the format selection list. The button "Close" exits the dialog. If you have made changes previously, a prompt appears asking you to confirm that the template changes are to be saved.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

116

File Management

Defining EXCEL export templates/ General

This index card contains controls for general descriptive settings for the export template.

Dialog: Define Excel export template/ General

Name Name by which the template is identified. The format then appears under this name in the format selection list in the dialog "Save file", as well as in the format list in the options dialog under "Options/ File - Save/ Export/ EXCEL". In addition, the template itself is saved under this name, supplemented by the extension "aet", in FAMOS' default definitions folder. File extension Default file extension to be used when saving files with this export template. It is appended to the filename, unless another extension is explicitly specified upon saving. Set permanently to "XLS". Comment Here you can enter brief commentary describing the format. This comment is then displayed in the title bar of the "Save file" dialog, for example, whenever the corresponding format is selected in the format selection list. Example of format information: As per the illustration above, the export template itself is stored under the filename "XLS Format #1.aet" in the FAMOS definitions folder. If you wish to use this export template on another computer, you need only copy this file to the corresponding definitions folder. When this format is selected, the "Save file" dialog appears as follows.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management The text in the format selection list consists of a permanent prefix [XLS] denoting an EXCEL export template, the selected name and the specified filename extension. The latter is also used as the display filter for the file list.

117

Defining EXCEL export templates/ Data

This index on this index card affect the format of the data readings columns. Column header In this input box, you can set the title appearing above each individual column of readings. This can be a combination of fixed text and placeholders. Such placeholders represent specific characteristic values belonging to the data set written in the respective column, and are filled with the current texts (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g. sampling interval, length) upon saving. A placeholder can be recognized as a fixed designation surrounded by percent signs. %NAME%, for instance, means the name, %YUNIT% the y-unit of the data set recorded. In the selection list at right, all placeholders defined are listed. Double-clicking on the desired entry (or selecting the entry and hitting the [<<]-button) copies the placeholder to the current cursor position in the input box. You can also use the input box's context menu (called by right-clicking in the input box) to insert a placeholder. This also offers a list of available placeholders. If no column header is needed, simply leave the input box empty (or completely delete its contents).

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

118

File Management

Defining EXCEL export templates/ Scaling

On this index card, you can find controls for positioning and formatting scaling columns.

Scaling column Here, you can set whether the file comes with any scaling column. In general, the scaling column states the x-position corresponding to a y-value (amplitude) in the data set; a frequent example is a time-axis. This is analogous to the portioning of the (horizontal) x-axis used in graphical data display. How the scaling column is created depends on the data type, according to the scheme below.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management Normal (equidistantly sampled) data set XY-data set Complex data sets Generated from sampling interval/ pretrigger/ trigger time (or x-delta/x-offset) The data set's X-component is used The frequency (for magnitude/ phase representation) or the independent parameter (for real/ imaginary partrepresentation)

119

[None] No explicit scaling column is stored. This can be sensible if the information either isn't relevant or can be derived from other data in the file (e.g. if the sampling rate is specified in the column header of the data column). If this option is selected, all further input controls in this dialog are disabled. [Common] A common scaling column (at left) is created for all data sets stored. In consequence, it is possible that gaps can appear in the matrix of data columns if a certain data set has no value assigned to a particular x-position (in other words, there is no interpolation; the corresponding cell simply stays empty). Thus, this display style is sensible only if all the data sets stored have the same scaling (because, for instance, they all are derived from the same measurement with a common time base) or at least all cover approximately the same x-range. [Per waveform] Each data set receives its own scaling column, which appears at the left of its respective data column. Column header In this input box, you define a title which appears above each individual scaling column. To do so, you can combine fixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data set and are filled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g. sampling interval, length). A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed from both sides by the "percent" character. %NAME%, for example, denotes the name, and %YUNIT% the y-unit of the particular data set. In the list box at right, all placeholders already defined are listed. Double-clicking on the entry of the desired placeholder (or selecting the entry and hitting the button [<<]) copies the placeholder to the current input position in the input box. You can also use the context menu (right mouse click) of the input box to insert a placeholder. This also presents a list of all available placeholders. If no column header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents). Scaling in: x-Unit The scaling corresponds to the data set's x-unit. Scaling in: Time The scaling output is expressed as absolute time and date. This option, of course, only makes sense if data sets recorded over time and having "s" (seconds) as the x-unit are actually involved. The time values are converted to EXCEL time format and transferred. Then the EXCEL-column's numerical format us set as time (see EXCEL menu item "Format/ Format cells/ Numbers"). Be aware that time statements in EXCEL only have a resolution of approx. 10ms. If your time axis has a finer resolution, the precision will be reduced upon saving. Seconds Here you specify the resolution for the time display. "None" means display of the time of day in terms of "Hours:Minutes", for instance "23:11". For the setting "1 s", the seconds are also indicated ("23:11:59"), "100ms" also indicates tenths of seconds 1/10 ("23:11:59,4"), etc. Date If this is selected, the date (in abbreviated form, e.g. "11.12.01") is output together with the time of day.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

120

File Management The two specifications Seconds and Date, then, only determine the numerical format displayed initially. The display in EXCEL can be edited later (menu item "Format/ Cell").

Defining EXCEL export templates / File header

Here you can configure a file header to be entered at the beginning of the file to be saved.

File header Enter in this input box the text you wish to have at the beginning of the file. To do so, you can combine fixed text with placeholders. Such placeholders denote specific values belonging to the data set and are filled upon data saving with the current strings (e.g. name, comment, units) or numerical values (e.g. sampling interval, length). In the case of placeholders referenced to data-sets, the first data set's characteristic values are used in the file, if multiple data sets are stored. A placeholder can be recognized as a permanent name bracketed from both sides by the "percent" character. %NAME%, for example, denotes the name, and %YUNIT% the y-unit of the particular data set. In the list box at right, all placeholders already defined are listed. Double-clicking on the entry of the desired placeholder (or selecting the entry and hitting the button [<<]) copies the placeholder to the current input position in the input box. You can also use the context menu (right mouse click) of the input box to insert a placeholder. This also presents a list of all available placeholders. If no file header is needed, just leave the input box empty (or delete all the contents). You can also divide the file header into multiple columns. To do this, use the arrow buttons associated with the "Current column" control, in order to add a column or to switch to another column. Empty columns are "optimized" away upon saving and therefore do not need to be explicitly deleted.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management

121

Defining EXCEL export templates / Miscellaneous

This index card offers additional options mainly interesting only for special data types.

Switch rows/ columns The rows of the data matrix are switched with its columns, including the column header, which means that what once was the first row becomes the first column. This option makes most sense in the case of segmented waveforms (matrices), for instance. If the option is deactivated, then for a segmented waveform, each segment is written to its own column, but if this option is activated, the values belonging to a single segment are written side by side in a row. Ignore phase in magnitude-phase waveforms If this option is selected, then only the magnitude component of complex data sets in magnitude/phase representation is saved. Placeholder for channel name These options affect how the placeholder for the channel name %NAME% is interpreted in file or column headers. Prefix group name In data sets belonging to groups, the group name is placed before the channel name (and is separated from it by a colon). Append segment/ event index In the case of segmented or event-based waveforms, each column contains one event or segment. If this option is active, the index of the current segment/event is appended (in square brackets). The setting is ignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header or in the header for a common scaling column. Append component identifier In the case of complex or XY-data sets, one component per column is stored. If this option is active, the standard component tag in FAMOS is appended, e.g. ".M" for a complex data set's magnitude or ".X" for the X-component of an data set. The setting is ignored if the placeholder is positioned in the file header or in the header for a common scaling column.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

122

File Management

5.4

Default Directories
Determine the default directories for FAMOS in this dialog. Select "Options / Folders".

Dialog: Standard directories

Select the directory you want to change in the list. You may either change the directory in the input box directly or use <Search> to call a dialog to search already existing directories or creating a new one. Load data files from When starting FAMOS, the directory specified here is used as the source directory for loading data files in any format. It is used as the initial directory for the dialog "Load file". The Load file commands and functions (LOAD, WFTLOAD, FASLOAD, FileOpenDSF, etc.) use this directory if no complete path name is specified. The setup is no longer used if you have loaded a file for the first time from another directory or if the directory has been converted with the LDIR command or the SetOption()-function. Save data files to When starting FAMOS, the directory specified here is used as the target directory for saving data files in any format. It is used as the initial directory for the dialog "Save file". The Save file commands and functions (SAVE, ASCSAVE, FileOpenDSF) use this directory if no complete path name is specified. The setup is no longer used if you have saved a file for the first time in another directory or if the directory has been changed with the SDIR command or the SetOption()-function. Curve configuration: Saved curve configurations (*.ccv") are searched for in this directory. Menu item "Extra/ Load Curve Configuration" and kit-functions for remote-controlling the curve window start searches in this directory. Sequences / Dialogs When starting FAMOS, the directory specified here is the default directory for loading and storing sequence- and dialogfiles. It is used as initial directory for the dialogs "Load file" / "Save file" in the sequence window. The command for executing the sequence (SEQUENCE), as well as the function DIALOG, for starting a dialog, uses this directory if no complete path name has been specified. The setup is no longer valid if you have used a sequence for the first time from another directory or if the directory has been converted with the MDIR command or the SetOption() function. Directory for Report Generator Print layout files for the imc Report Generator are searched for in this directory. The functions in the Report Generator kits use this directory. Definition Files Declaration files for external DLL functions are searched for in this directory. In addition, this is the base directory for format definition files created by the imc File Assistant. It is used by the function 'FileOpenFAS' as well as the command 'FASLOAD'. This folder is also used to store userdefined Export Templates (ASCII or XLS).Projects:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Management The folder set here serves as the base folder for new projects to create. It is used, for example, upon starting the Project Explorer. Reference Chapter 'Functions', section 'Standard DLL Interface' Manual 'FAMOS Function Reference', functions: FileOpenDSF, FileOpenFAS, SetOption Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', commands LAYOUT, SDIR. MDIR, LDIR Documentation for Report Generator, File Assistant

123

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

124

Variables

Variables
6.1 Introduction
FAMOS uses a concept of data which is tailored to the needs of measurement and control technology, allowing various data types to be processed and analyzed. All waveforms, values and texts which can be processed in FAMOS are alike designated as variables. The main window displays a list of all existing variables. In addition to the variable's name, the type symbol and -where appropriate- the values of variables are also displayed. As each variable is generated, it is entered into the list, which is initially empty in a FAMOS session. A comprehensive assortment of functions for processing the variables is provided, ranging from basic mathematical operations to complex calculus and including special tools for the manipulation of variables, specifically designed for the needs of measurement and control technology. FAMOS includes a formula interpreter which allows you to construct complex mathematical expressions from the available standard functions. Using the formula interpreter, new data may be calculated or existing data can be modified. The following illustration depicts a list of variables representing all existing types, accompanied by their respective symbols. The types are described in detail in the following chapters.

A typical variable in FAMOS would pass through this sequence of stages: 1. Variable assignment, accomplished by creation using Waveform Editor designation as the result of a formula loading from file importing from other applications 2. Processing variables, e.g. changing data, e.g. as the result of a mathematical operation changing characteristic values, e.g. via dialog use as parameter for functions and commands visualization as a curve or in tables 3. Storage of results by documentation with Report Generator saving in a file transfer to another application

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables 4. Deletion of variables Variables are identified by their names, in which terms they can be entered as parameters into formulas. A variable's name may have up to 255 characters. Each variable consists of the actual (measurement) data and of its assigned properties (also referred to as characteristic values). For instance, the information about the measurement of a voltage over time consists of the actual voltage values (data) as well as name, sampling interval, trigger instant etc. (characteristics).

125

6.2

Variable Names
Variables are identified by their names, whereby no distinction is drawn between upper- and lower case letters. A variable's name can be specified either automatically (loading from file) or by the user. The name, like any variable characteristic, can be changed by the user at will. Use the dialog (menu item "Variable/ Properties") or the command RENAME to rename a variable. A valid variable name may contain a maximum of 255 characters not be the same as another variable's name not contain an character with an ASCII-code < 32 (e.g. Tab, Line break) not contain the characters "<" and ">". Note that names are not case-sensitive; this means that there is no difference between names written with upper- and lower-case letters. A variable name should: not begin with a digit, not contain any mathematical symbols, which refers to the characters: +-()*/^={}[]| not contain spaces, semicolons, quotation marks and commas not be the same as a sequence (macro) command not be the same as the name of a constant. The latter constraints are necessary for the FAMOS formula interpreter to be able to distinguish among variable names, numbers and operators. But if you absolutely must use names which don't adhere to these rules, it's possible to place the names in formulas by writing them within curved brackets. Example LOAD 123 Measurement.asc My Result = sin (123 Measurement) ; Wrong! My Result = sin ({123 Measurement}) ; OK! Variable names can be extended in formulas by an index or by component labels in order to address certain elements of a variable. The section "Indexing variables" of this chapter describes the syntax used in that operation. Attention The use of special characters in names, such as question marks, exclamation points etc. is to be generally avoided. Question marks, for example, are permitted in variable names, but can have undesired consequences in some cases. The adaptation of a variable name as a file name, which is common practice, faces the complication that question marks can not be used in file names. Furthermore, when calling a macrossequence with parameters, you may want to extend the file name using question marks as wildcards (DOS-usage). Names of functions as variable names are not prohibited, but for reasons of clarity not to be

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

126

Variables recommended. Reference Chapter 'Sequences' command RENAME Section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' in this chapter Section 'Indexing Variables' in this chapter

6.3

Data Types
The main characteristic of a variable is its data type. It determines the form of the display in the curve window, the admissibility of the variable as a parameter for mathematical functions, as well as the amount and type of characteristics associated with the variable. FAMOS supports variables with the following data types, i.e., these can be created, processed and stored: 1. Normal waveforms measurement series sampled equidistantly one-dimensional vectors 2. Single values 3. XY-Waveforms reduced time waveforms two-dimensional vectors characteristic curves 4. Complex waveforms magnitude/ phase real/ imaginary parts-representation 5. Text variables 6. TimeStamp-ASCII data sets 7. Data groups Take as an example the case of a curve measuring voltage over time, sampled equidistantly and ready for processing. The voltage curve is a normal waveform. If its mean value is determined, the result is a single value; if its spectrum is determined, the result is a complex waveform. These results may be processed further; the mean value, say, subtracted from the voltage or the spectrum divided by another to get a transfer function. Determining the relative maxima of the voltage curve gives value pairs (time/ voltage) which amount to an xy-waveform. To save this waveform with a function, the file name -as text- is supplied as a parameter. To manage all these variables jointly, it is possible to collect them into a data group under a new name. Not every data type is supported by every mathematical function. For example, the spectrum of an xywaveform cannot be calculated. Waveforms may have a length of anything between 0 (empty waveform) and over 250,000,000 data (= 1,000,000,000 bytes). In practice, the maximum length is limited by the small size of data carriers. Texts can contain at most 255 characters. This also applies to textual characteristics of waveforms, such as name, unit and comments.

6.3.1

Normal Waveforms

A normal waveform is a one-dimensional field (vector) of real numbers with units, names etc. A sequence of sampled values of a measured quantity represents a normal waveform. Suppose that the current values 12 A, 14 A, 16 A, and 18 A were measured at the times 6 s, 7 s, 8 s, and

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables 9 s. Displayed as a value table, the data take the following form: Time in s 6 7 8 9 Current in A 12 14 16 18

127

In graphic representation, the current would be entered along the y-direction, and the time in the xdirection; in compliance with FAMOS' efficient storage method, outlined as follows: The numerical values 12, 14, 16, and 18 for the current are stored. The unit for the y-coordinate, "A", is stored only once for all data. It is not necessary, now, to store all numerical values to define the x-coordinate, because most waveforms are sampled equidistantly, making the time difference between adjacent samplings constant; in this case, 1s. What is stored, then, is the x-offset, which is the x-value of the first sampling (in this case 6s), and the sampling time (delta-x), being the interval between two sampling values; and of course the unit of the x-coordinate. Finally, the waveform has a name, in terms of which it can be addressed and used. This waveform has a length of 4, meaning that it contains four sampling values. The defining attribute, then, of a normal waveform is the presumed equidistantly spaced x-coordinate. This is the case with equidistantly sampled measurements and also with data sets, where the xcoordinate is either not present or not of interest. The actual data in a normal waveform are stored as a one-dimensional vector. The most important characteristic values are the x-value of the waveform's first element of data, and the x-distance between two consecutive values. In a time waveform, this would be the trigger time and sampling rate, which in conjunction with each other determine the corresponding time for each measurement value. You can generate a normal waveform as per the following pattern: NormalWave = Ramp (0, 1, 100)

The registration of a normal waveform in the variable list is shown below: A special case of a normal waveform is an empty waveform, meaning a waveform with a length of 0. It contains no data but has characteristics. This type of waveform is denoted in the variable list with a special symbol. EmptyWave = All0( Ramp (1,1,2 )) Here you see the variable list's symbol of an empty waveform:

6.3.2

Single Values

A single value is a single real number associated with a name and possibly a unit, such as 'Minimum = 3.2 A', or 'Number = 45'. A single value can be interpreted as a special case of a normal waveform; one having the length 1. Numerical values can be specified as whole or real numbers. The symbols "E" or "e" are used to express powers-of-ten, and are read as "ten to the power of ..". Decimal places smaller than unity are to be placed

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

128

Variables after a decimal point not a comma, though the latter is customary in some cultures. The following expressions therefore represent the same number: Number = 187 Number = 0.187E+3 Number = .187e3 Number = 187.00 Integers without sign can be specified in hexadecimal format, for which the prefix 0x is used. Number = 0x0 ;(=0) Number = 0x1 ;(=1) Number = 0xA ;(=10) Number = 0xFF ;(=255) Number = 0xFFFFFFFF ;(=4 294 967 295) Here, the registration of a single value in the variable list:

The display of the numerical value can be optionally suppressed via the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list". Single values are often generated as the result of a function (e.g. in the calculation of a mean value) or supplied to a function as a parameter (e.g. filter cut-off frequency).

6.3.3

XY-Waveforms

XY-waveforms arise where two values must be stored for each data point, namely, the (amplitude) value and additionally the time- or x-value. FAMOS manages this information as two sets of values' components; one set containing all y-values and the other containing the x-values; both sets having, of course, the same length. FAMOS differentiates between: XY-waveforms with monotonous x-trace. This is inherent in all measured quantities recorded over time, as when generated with data-reducing procedures. XY-waveforms with non monotonous x-trace. This is common in characteristic curves. Below you see the registration of xy-waveforms in the variable list:

The waveform components can also be indicated. Select the corresponding item in the context menu (click the right mouse button above the variable list) or in the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list". Generate an xy-waveform using the following formula line: XYData = XYof( Ramp (0,1,100), Ramp (0,1,100)) Refer to the individual components in formulas using the suffixes .x and .y . For example, to double the amplitude of a reduced time-waveform, simply write: XYData.Y = XYData.Y * 2

6.3.4

Complex Waveforms

Complex waveforms result primarily from Fourier transformations or more generally from the calculation of a waveform's spectrum. ComplBP = Spec( Ramp ( 0,1,128 ))

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables As with xy-waveforms, the data are managed in two sets of values' components. An additional parameter, over which both components are plotted, is also present and to be noted. For example, the FFT of a voltage waveform generates a magnitude (unit: V) and a phase (unit: degrees), both over the frequency (unit: hertz). Complex waveforms can be represented in three styles: Magnitude/ Phase (abbreviated MP in the variable list) Phase may be stated in either degrees or radians. You can address the individual components via the suffixes .M and .P. Decibel/ Phase (DP in the variable list) This is the same as the representation in terms of magnitude and phase, however the magnitude is expressed in dB, which amounts to the magnitude's logarithm times twenty. Transfer functions and frequency responses are usually expressed logarithmically (in dB). Here, the magnitude is recorded in decibels, by convention. The phase can be expressed in degrees or radians. You can address the individual components via the suffixes .D and .P. Real/ Imaginary part (RI in the variable list) Individual components can be addressed via the suffixes .R and .I Here, the registration of complex waveforms in the variable list is shown.

129

In the variable list above, the individual components are also registered. Registration of the components in the variable list is optional and can be suppressed using either the context menu (click above the variable list with the right mouse button) or menu item "Extra/ Options/ Variables list". One can easily convert waveforms between the different representation styles by using mathematical functions. Magnitude_phase = FFT( Ramp ( 0,1,128)) Magnitude = magnitude_phase.M decibel_phase = DB( magnitude_phase ) Phase = decibel_phase.P real_imag = RECT( magnitude_phase) RealPart = real_imag.R Please make note of the following, when calculating with complex waveforms: The particular representational style employed for a complex waveform, whether RI, MP or DB, isn't important for a computation. Thus, one complex waveform given in MP, say, can be divided by another one given in RI. A peculiarity of complex waveforms is the fact that both components always have the same xaxis scaling. The y-axis units must relate to each other in a manner appropriate to the particular representational style employed. When using "RI", you need identical units in both y-axes; for styles involving phase, one of the y-axes must have a phase unit.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

130

Variables Phase can take the units "" or "Degrees", by both of which are meant degrees on the scale between 0 and 360. However, the phase can also be stated without any unit or with the designation "Rad", which indicates an expression in radians, with a range between 0 and 2 * Pi. Since the phase of a complex waveform is of crucial importance, care must be taken not to interpret it incorrectly when performing a calculation. If the phase has an invalid unit, the interpretation is indefinite

6.3.5

Text Variables

Text variables are a text consisting of up to 255 characters. An example of their use would be for forming and storing file- and variable names. Certain functions require texts as parameters, for instance functions which set waveform units or comments. Text constants must be enclosed in quotation marks. TXpath = "c:\imc\dat" Comment = "created on 6/13/93 by J. Blow" TXEmpty = "" Here, the registration in the variable list:

The display of the text variables' content can be suppressed via the dialog "Options/ Display". To include special characters in text constants, use the "tilde" character (~) followed by three digits representing the ASCII-code of the special character desired, e.g. Tabulator Carriage return Line Feed Quotation mark Example TxCommand = "LOAD ~034c:\test.dat~034" This produces a text which itself contains quotation marks. TxCRLF = "Filename: ~013~010" Generates a text constant including both CarriageReturn and LineFeed. This combination is used by many text editing programs to begin a new line.

6.3.6

TimeStamp-ASCII

This is a rare and very special data format which imc measurement devices (such as -MUSYCS) can generate. Such data sets contain a list of texts (or generally, blocks of ASCII-code), each of which comes with its own time stamp. In practice, this data type is generated when protocol or alarm lists are created. Appearance in variables list:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables Many typical functions and commands cannot be applied to variables of this type. Such data sets can basically only be processed by the functions of the so-called TimeStampASCII-Kit, which is included in the standard FAMOS package, but is not registered by default. Display of this data in the FAMOS Waveform-Editor is also not possible, but instead, tabular representation can be used in the curve window.

131

6.3.7

Data Groups

Data groups themselves do not contain data in the usual sense, rather, they amount to a list of waveforms or texts assembled into a group with a collective name. This is useful for grouping waveforms with related content, e.g., data stemming from different channels in the same measurement sequence. An entire group can be stored in unison, or it can be directly transferred in unison to mathematical functions. In the latter case, the function acts on each element of the group in succession. A group can consist of waveforms or texts, but not of other groups. Here the registration of data groups in the variable list:

You can choose whether to display the component channels in a group. You can switch the display mode by left-clicking the mouse on the [+] or [-]symbol which appears next to the group icon, or via the context menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse over the variables list; command "Show channels") or via the dialog called via "Extra"/ Options"/ "Variable list". To address a particular channel in a group, place a colon after the group name and then specify the channel, which is identified either by its name or by its index within the group. The index must be set in brackets. The index "1" refers to the first element of the group. MeanK2 = Mean( MeasurementNo123:Channel002) MeanK2 = Mean( MeasurementNo123:[2] ) The channel index refers to the momentary position of a particular channel within the group and isn't a channel's permanent property Thus, it is subject to rearrangements in the group order. Channel2 = MeasurementNo123:[2] Delete MeasurementNo123:Channel001 AlsoChannel2 = MeasurementNo123:[1] In the above example, deleting the first channel has altered the index order of the remaining channels; "Channel2" and "AlsoChannel2" are thus equivalent variables. Waveforms and texts can be added to and removed from groups as desired. Reference FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions by Group', function group '11 Group Management' Chapter 'Functions', section 'Data groups as function parameters'

6.4

Structured Waveforms
Normally, a waveform consists of a collection of values which are associated by a particular measurement series. Example: the moment a predetermined triggering condition is met, measurements are taken at a certain port for a prearranged period of time, and the measurement values are recorded as a waveform designated by a particular name. FAMOS' data management capabilities, however, support more elaborate structuring of waveforms, in

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

132

Variables accommodation to the practical demands of measurement and control technology.

6.4.1

Segments

A waveform may be segmented, with each segment having the same length and the entire waveform's length being a whole number multiple of the segment length. Data management operations can be performed on an individual segment as well as on the complete waveform. Example A measurement device calculates a 1024-point FFT each time a defined triggering condition is met on a channel, and appends the newly-calculated data to an existing data set. If ten measurements were executed, the data set contains a total of 10240 values, organized in 10 segments with a length of 1024 values apiece.

6.4.2

Events

A waveform can also be structured as several events, which, unlike segments, can take different lengths. Thus, an additional list containing the beginning and length of each event must be managed along with the waveform. Various waveform characteristics, such as trigger time and sampling rate, are also managed in the capacity of characteristics of particular events. Example A measurement device executes a measurement series each time a predefined trigger condition is met, and online data reduction is employed. The amount of values actually stored in each measurement series varies. All the measurement series are appended to one waveform. The measuring rate may be changed from one measurement series to the next. In order to later evaluate the accumulated data in a sensible manner, each measurement series (=event) must be stored along with its trigger time, sampling rate and number of values. Of course it would be possible to create separate waveforms instead of storing several events to one waveform. However, when handling large numbers of measurement series, there are cases where organization of data as several events (belonging to fewer waveforms) provides greater efficiency and a helpful overview to the management process. An individual segment or event can be accessed by its index, as explained in the next chapter. Reference Function group 'Data types, Data Format' (Function Reference) Function group 'Event-Waveforms' (Function Reference) Section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' in this chapter

6.5

Indexing Variables
To refer parts of a waveform to a formula, you can use a component-specific suffix (.B, :X etc.), or access a particular element in the waveform using its index. Indexes are stated in brackets after the variable name. Multiple indexes are separated by commas. The index of a waveform's first element is always "1". The most common use of this procedure is to access a specific value (a sample) of an unstructured waveform. This may occur on either side of an assignment; on the right, in order to, say, define a function parameter; or on the left for setting a particular value. An index may be stated as a constant or as a single-value variable. Data = Ramp ( 1,1,100 ) Value at50 = Data[ 50 ] Index = 49 Data[ Index ] = Valueat50 As a result of the above manipulations, the values in positions 49 and 50 in the waveform are now the same.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables Indexes may also be calculated: Data[1] = Data[leng?( Data)] The first and last values of the waveform handled above are now equal. Texts can also be indexed: Directory = "c:\imc\dat" OldDrive = Directory[1] Directory[1]= "d" The text variable 'Directory now contains "d:\imc\dat", the variable 'OldDrive' contains "c". With two-component data-types, you must first state the index of the desired sample and then the component suffix: cplx = FFT( Ramp( 0,1,128 )) cplx1 = cplx[2] ; cplx1 : compl. waveform with length 1 magnitude1 = cplx[2].B ; magnitude1 : single value (magnitude) Invalid indexes cause an error message to appear: Value100 Incorrect index = 0 i[index] = 3 Indexes may also be used to specify a channel in a data group. The bracket should be preceded by a colon in this case: NewGroup:Channel1 = Ramp( 0,1,100 ) NewGroup:SinOfC1 = sin (NewGroup:[1]) SinOf1 = NewGroup:[2] Delete NewGroup:[1] AlsoSinOf1 = NewGroup:[1] Please note that by deleting a preceding channel, the index for channel NewGroup:SinOfC1 has changed. Indexes, separated by a comma, can be combined: ValueNo10 ValueNo10 = NewGroup:SinOfC1[10] = NewGroup:[1,10] = Ramp( 0,1,100 ) = value100[101]

133

In both cases above, the 10th value of the 1st channel is assigned to "ValueNo10". With structured waveforms (involving events or segments), each structural level must be indexed individually. Example Assume a segmented waveform with several segments of length 10. Then: Segment3 SingleValue Group:Channel1 SingleValue = = = = SegmWaveform[3] SegmWaveform[3, 10] SegmWaveform Group:[1,3,10]

In the first line the entire 3rd segment is assigned; thus, "Segment3" has a length of 10. In the second and fourth lines, the last value of the third segment of the waveform, a single value, is assigned.

6.6

Data Formats
Data (numbers) can be stored in various formats. FAMOS differentiates between real and integer formats. Real numbers are stored in a mantissa/ exponent representation. Any number -between a fixed range and subject to a maximum level of precision- can be expressed. The range and precision are determined by the digits available for the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

134

Variables representation of the mantissa and exponent. Real number formats 4 byte real 8 byte real float double 7 decimal places are significant 15 decimal places are significant

An integer format, by contrast, can only express discrete values located within a range whose limits are dictated by the width of the bit string; every possible combination of bits signifies one particular value. For example, a 1-byte integer format without sign can express 256 discrete values from 0 (no bits set) to 255 (all 8 bits set). To represent a physical quantity using integer format in a sensible manner, it is necessary to provide information on how to convert from discrete numbers to physical values; this is done by specifying the range the physical values can take. Example A voltage measurement in the range between 5 and 10 V is recorded and stored in 1-byte integer format. A numerical value of 0 corresponds to 5 V and a numerical value of 255 corresponds to 10 V. Larger or smaller physical values are out of bounds and can't be represented. The maximum resolution for voltage values is 5 V/255 = 0.02 V. Digital data are a special case which can only take values of either 0 or 1, and come without scaling information. They are indicated in the variable list by their own symbol. Representation of digital data in the variable list:

Integer number formats enjoy widespread use in measurement and control technology because they can be directly generated by ADC's. Thus they can be stored and computationally manipulated in a straightforward manner. FAMOS doesn't require you to be constantly alert to the particular data format used in a waveform. The mathematical functions provided will work, regardless of the parameter's data format. The intra-system calculations are always performed using real numbers and the results of most functions are stored in that format, to ensure suitable precision. Nevertheless, the user can convert a data set between the different data formats at will. Converting from a real-number format to an integer format, for example, may be sensible in some cases (subject to the resolution required) where conservation of space in storage or in the data carrier is aimed for. Integer data formats 1 byte with / without sign 2 bytes with / without sign 4 bytes with / without sign digital Reference Section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' in this chapter Chapter 'Functions', 'Options / Functions Dialog' FAMOS Reference Manual, function 'SetDataFormat' 28-1 quantization levels 216-1 quantization levels 232-1 quantization levels values 0 and 1

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables

135

6.7

Showing Variables
This section describes how to display waveforms in a curve window. Please refer to the Curve Window documentation for information about operating a Curve window. If you wish to display waveforms in a numerical format, refer to the chapter "Data Editor" of this manual. Single values and texts can be displayed in the variable list after the variable name. This requires the pertinent check boxes in the dialog "Extra/ Options/ Variables list" to be activated. File-browser offers a practical option to load and display waveforms in a single step. For details, see the chapter 'File Browser' of this manual.

6.7.1

Showing Variables Individually

Select one or several variables from the list. Then select "Show" in the "Variable" menu or click on the corresponding button in the tool bar. The button <F4> may also be used as an alternative. Each variable selected is displayed. If the variable is a single value, the numerical value with unit is displayed in a single-value-window; if the variable is a waveform, the curve is displayed in the curve window. If the variable is a text, a small window containing the text is displayed. Each subsequently selected text variable is displayed in the same window, so that only one text variable can be viewed at any one time. If a variable already displayed is selected, its window emerges into the foreground. The behavior of the curve window can be set in the "Extra/ Options/ Curve window" menu: Never hidden by main window: if this option is selected, the curve windows are always in front of the FAMOS main window. Otherwise, when activating the main window, curve windows in the same region of the screen may be partly or entirely obscured. A list of all curve windows currently open is available in the menu accessed via the menu item "Window"/ "Curve window list". By selecting the desired window in this menu, it is possible to move quickly among the windows. This is the quickest way to find a certain curve window when several are open. Reference All other settings can be accessed directly from the curve window menu bar. Please refer to the Curve Window documentation for detailed information about operating the curve windows. Variables themselves possess characteristics, which determine their representation in the curve windows. For example, a set color and scaling can be assigned to the waveform. Refer to the section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' in this chapter. Representation of variables in tabular form is described in the chapter 'Data Editor'. See also Chapter 'Sequences', command SHOW.

6.7.2

Showing Variables Together

Select several variables from the list and then "Show together" from the variable menu. Alternatively, you can use the key combination SHIFT + <F4>. The currently selected waveforms are then displayed together in one curve window. Otherwise there are no differences from the menu item "Show variable" treated above.

6.7.3

Loading Curve Configurations

By selecting "<>/ Save As...", the current settings in a curve window can be saved in a curve window configuration file. This file then contains the name of the waveform first employing certain configuration settings to be remembered, as well as the particular configuration settings in question. You can retrieve the stored configuration using the menu item "Extra/ Load curve configuration". This generates a curve window featuring the previously stored configuration. The configuration file contains the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

136

Variables name of the waveform which was present when the configuration was stored, but not the curve itself or the appertaining data. If a data file (waveform) with that name still exists, it will automatically be accessed and displayed when the configuration is summoned. If none any longer exists but is due to be generated (e.g. as the result of a computation or by loading a file), it, then, will automatically be displayed in the curve window. A curve configuration can also be retrieved directly from an open curve window by selecting menu item "Load".

6.7.4

QuickView-Window

The QuickView-Window is another method of displaying waveforms in a curve window. Select menu item "Extra/ QuickView-Window".. An additional curve window appears, in which all variables currently registered in the variable list are displayed. If you change the selection in the list by keyboard or mouse, the waveforms displayed in the QuickView-Window are immediately updated to reflect the latest selections. If no waveform is selected, the QuickView-Window remains empty. The QuickView-Window offers a convenient and rapid overview of open waveform files. Example A measurement consisting of several waveforms is loaded into FAMOS. You want to do a quick review of the curve shapes in order to seek out curves fulfilling specific criteria. Open the QuickView window via the menu item "Extra/ QuickView Window". Then select the first waveform in the variable list. Now use the direction keys to scan through the list of waveforms. The currently selected waveform is always displayed in the window. Remarks FAMOS notes the position and size of the QuickView window when it is closed and it reappears in the same way at the next call. To obtain an overview of large amounts of files stored in different folders, you can also use the file browser. Loading and displaying waveforms and, if necessary, switching into the next folder can all be accomplished in one step

6.7.5

Showing Variables in an Existing Curve Window

If you wish to display additional waveforms in a curve window which is already open, then from within this curve window you may stipulate new variables for it to display. This procedure is described in detail in the Curve Window documentation. Another possibility is the method of "Drag&Drop" between the variable list and the curve window, using the mouse. Proceed as follows: 1. Select the desired variable in the variable list. 2. Left-click the mouse on the selected entry in the variables list and keep the mouse button pressed down. 3. Click and hold the left mouse button. 4. While still holding the left mouse button, move the mouse across the desired curve window; this is known as dragging. The mouse pointer is constantly updated, to reflect whether or not the variable may be dropped onto the present position. 5. Release the mouse button with the pointer over the desired curve window. This is known as dropping. Depending on where exactly the drop is performed, the variables' display is arranged in one of the following ways: Above / below a coordinate system: a new coordinate system is generated and the variables are displayed in it. Inside an existing coordinate system: the variables are displayed with a new axis within this coordinate system.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables On one axis: the variables are displayed in the coordinate system with reference to this axis.

137

6.8

Showing and Changing Characteristics

Every variable is associated with supplementary information in addition to the actual data values, for example, there are the characteristics variable name, data type, number format, commentary, trigger and sample time, etc. The characteristics applicable to a specific variable depend on the variable's type. Characteristics can be queried and changed in FAMOS using a dialog of commands and functions. This chapter explains how to show and change the characteristics of a variable using a dialog.

6.8.1

Properties Dialog

Select variables from the variable list and then select "Properties.." in the "Variable" menu. Or alternatively, click on the corresponding button in the tool bar in the main window or use the <F5> button. A dialog appears as a stack of several index cards. The particular make-up of the "characteristics" index card depends on the data type of the current variable. The other index cards are only accessible if the variable in question is of the "waveform" type. Activate a different index card by clicking on its marker tab or by simultaneously pressing the ALT button and the underlined letter in the title of the marker tab. If you have selected several variables in the list, use the screen-buttons ">>" and "<<" to pass from one variable to the next, thereby updating the dialog to reflect the properties of the current variable. The "Cancel" screen-button terminates the dialog, and changes made in the current index card are disregarded. The screen-button "OK", by contrast, closes the dialog while adopting changes which have been made to its settings. Attention When switching to another index card by activating another card or clicking the screen-buttons ">>" and "<<", the changes made in the cardfile are accepted. If you wish to discard the changes, click on "Cancel" before switching cards.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

138

Variables

6.8.2

Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Waveforms)

The dialog "Properties" (for a waveform) appears as follows:

Name The variable's name can be changed here. The name can have 255 characters at most. Refer to the section "Variable names" in this chapter for rules governing valid variable names. Data type The data type of the current waveform is stated here. This box can not be edited. An explanation of the data types offered is to be found in the section "data types" of this chapter. Data format The number format in which the data are filed is stated here. If the waveform has two components, the data format for each component is stated individually. This box also can not be edited. If you wish to change the data format you must click on the marker tab for the index card "Data Format". An overview of available data formats can be found in the section "Data formats" of this chapter. Comment Here you may enter a comment, which may contain a maximum of 255 characters. Group If the waveform in question is assigned to a group, the data group's name is indicated here, otherwise the box remains empty. This box can not be edited. File Name If the waveform was loaded from a file, the file's name will be indicated here, otherwise this box remains empty. The box cannot be edited. Units (X-unit, Y-unit, phase unit..) Here you may redefine the waveform's units. Refer to the section "Units" of this chapter for information on naming the units. The inscription which appears with the "units"- box depends on the particular data type the waveform belongs to. Total size

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables In this non-editable box the total length of the waveform is stated. X0 You can set the x-offset (i.e. the x-coordinate of the first vale) to a new value in this box. Or, for twocomponent waveforms, define the offset of the parameter. X-Delta The sampling time or the increment of the waveform's x-axis can be redefined here. The waveform's numerical values and units do not change. The sampling time is the difference between the x-coordinates of two adjacent points. The sampling time should take a value which is not smaller than the offset by too many powers-of-ten, otherwise the x-axis will not have adequate resolution. Created Redefine the trigger time for the variable using this function. The time is entered and displayed in the format set in the Windows-"Control Panel". The entries of the time and the date should be kept separate by at least one space. Enter the year as a two-digit number in order to save space; the valid range is between 1980 and 2042, thus between 80..99 and 00..42. Fractions of seconds must be separated by a comma or a period. The maximal resolution for the trigger time is 10s. Example: 11.11.95 00:00:00,5 The trigger time has been set to 500s past midnight. Cancel Click on this button to exit without storing any changes. OK Click on this button when exiting to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted if invalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until they are corrected. >>, << If you have selected several variables before opening the dialog, you can flip through the dialogs for the respective variables -one at a time, forwards or backwards in the list- using these buttons. Changes made to a dialog are accepted when exiting it by this method. Reference FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '16 Properties' Chapter 'Sequences', command group "C>" 'Variables, Execution'

139

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

140

Variables

6.8.3

Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Texts)

The dialog "Properties" (text) has the following appearance:

Name The variable's name can be changed here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters Refer to the section "Variable names" in this chapter for rules governing valid variable names. Comment Enter a comment about the variable here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters. Group If the text is assigned to a group, the name of the data group is indicated. Otherwise, the box, which is non-editable, remains empty. File Name If the waveform was loaded from a file, the file's name will be indicated here, otherwise this box remains empty. The box cannot be edited. Length The number of characters in the text is stated in this box. It can not be edited. Content The content of text variables can be changed in this box. The text may have a maximum of 255 characters. Cancel Click on this button to exit without storing any changes. OK Click on this button when exiting the dialog to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted if invalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until they have been corrected. >>, <<

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables If you have selected several variables before entering the dialog, you can flip through the dialogs for the respective variables -one at a time, forwards or backwards in the list- using these buttons. Changes made to a dialog are accepted when exiting it by this method. Reference FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '16 Properties' Chapter 'Sequences', command group "C>" 'Variables, Execution'

141

6.8.4

Properties/ Charact. Dialog (Groups)

The dialog "Properties" (group) has the following appearance:

Name The variable's name can be changed here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters Refer to the section "Variable names" in this chapter for rules governing valid variable names. Comment Enter a comment about the variable here. It may have a maximum of 255 characters. File Name If the waveform was loaded from a file, the file's name will be indicated here, otherwise this box remains empty. The box cannot be edited. Number of channels The number of variables assigned to this group is displayed in this box. The box can not be edited. Channels All channels assigned to this group are listed. Their names and respective data types are stated. By double-clicking on one of the entries you open the "Properties" dialog for the corresponding channel. You can also select several entries and then click on the button <Channel Info>. Cancel

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

142

Variables Click on this button to exit without storing any changes. OK Click on this button when exiting the dialog to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted if invalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until they have been corrected. >>, << If you have selected several variables before entering the dialog, you can flip through the dialogs for the respective variables -one at a time, forwards or backwards in the list- using these buttons. Changes made to a dialog are accepted when exiting it by this method. Channel Info Opens the "Properties" dialog of selections made in the channel list. Reference FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '16 Properties' FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '11 Group Management' Chapter 'Sequences', command group "C>" 'Variables, Execution'

6.8.5

Dialog Properties/ Structure

This dialog card is available only for waveforms. Any structuring of the waveform in question, in, say, events or segments, is indicated here. This index card normally does not apply to unstructured waveforms, for which most dialog elements' boxes are grey.

Segments If the waveforms in question are segmented, this is where an indication of the number and length of the segments will be located. The entries for z0, z-Delta and z-units are used for configuring the z-axis, which is a feature of certain of the curve window's representation styles (waterfall diagrams, color maps), if the corresponding option in the curve window ("Options/ 3D") is active. The entries "z0" and "z-units" can also be used for manipulating the z-axis in the display of unsegmented waveforms, where multiple waveforms are displayed together in a single curve window for purposes of

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables comparison. Events This group of controls is only accessible in the case of event-structured waveforms (where there are multiple trigger events within the waveform). The characteristics x-Offset (Pretrigger), x-Delta (sampling time) and trigger time no longer pertain to the waveform as a whole, but can be specific to each event. The characteristics can be viewed and changed for the event corresponding to the entry in the input box "Info Event #". Hint: Characteristics which are identical for all events are indicated on the index card "Charact.", otherwise the entry in the pertinent box will be "???". To set a characteristic of all the events to a common value, it is therefore enough to replace the corresponding "???" entry with the desired value.

143

6.8.6

Dialog Properties/ Display

This dialog card is available only for waveforms. Here you can assign properties which affect the representation of the waveform.

Colors in Curve Window As a default, the colors in which a waveform is represented is determined by the current settings in the Curve Window. The entry "auto" then appears in the combination box. It is possible, however, to assign a set color to a waveform. In that case the waveform is always displayed in that color in every Curve Window. To accomplish this, open the combination box and select the color from the list. Scaling in Curve Window The default setting, indicated by the entry "auto", determines the scaling of the y-axis from the value range of the waveform. You can also arbitrarily set the scaling. To do this, set the minimum and maximum of the desired range using the corresponding text boxes. This setting will only be employed when the option "automatic" is selected for scaling the axis in the Curve Window. In other words, a set scaling of the axis in the curve window overrides the waveform's characteristic. Reference Manual 'Curve Window, Chapter 'Curve Window/ options'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

144

Variables Manual 'FAMOS Function Reference', functions 'SetDisplayY', 'DisplayY?', 'SetColor', 'Color?'

6.8.7

Dialog Properties/ Data Format

This dialog card is available only for data sets. It shows the data format in which the values of a data set are stored. The following example shows the index card for a complex waveform; in a one-component waveform only one group of dialog boxes would appear.

Data Format In this list box the current data format for the particular component. To change the data format, simply choose the desired format from the list. min/ max If an integer data format is selected, the scaling of data in the physical value range is indicated here. The current settings are displayed if the waveform is already in the integer format. If you have just chosen integer format from the list box, whereas the data set was previously in real format, then sensible values for the conversion are offered as suggestions. Towards that end, the minimum and maximum of the data set are determined. In a subsequent conversion to integer format the full range would be retained at the maximum possible resolution. With large data sets, determining the extreme values can be very timeconsuming. Always retain format and scale If this option is activated, the data format can not be changed by an assignment command. If, for example, one value of an integer format waveform is set to a real number, the data format of the entire waveform would usually be reset to real, in order to avoid any loss of data. This behavior can be suppressed switching on this check box. Cancel Click on this button to exit without storing any changes. OK Click on this button when exiting the dialog to confirm and implement changes. You will be alerted if invalid entries have been made and the dialog cannot be exited until the have been corrected.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables Reference Section 'Data Formats' in this chapter Manual 'FAMOS: Function Reference', functions 'SetDataFormat', 'DataFormat?'

145

6.9

Deleting Variables
Select one or several variables in the variable list and then "Delete" in the "Variable" menu. Alternatively, click on the corresponding button in the tool bar. The variables are then removed from the variable list and thus unavailable to FAMOS. In accordance with the corresponding setting in the dialog "Options" / "Variables list", the "Del"-key can also be used to accomplish the purpose. You can also delete all variables in one step by selecting "Restart" in the "File" menu. If you mark a data group in the variable list for deletion, it will be completely purged including all data sets and texts. Reference Chapter 'Sequence Commands (Reference)', command 'DELETE'

6.10

Group/ Ungroup variables (data groups)

As described in the section "Data types", waveforms and texts can be assembled into groups with a collective name. To accomplish this with existing variables, first select some in the variable list. Then select menu item "Variables/ Group". A dialog appears in which to enter the group name:

Group name You can now enter a new name in the text box. If other groups already exist, they may be selected in the combination box. The selected variables are then added to the existing group. In section "Variable names" the rules governing assignment of names are outlined and those apply to this procedure. Initial digits and spaces, in particular, are prohibited. OK If you have provided a valid name for a group, the current selection of variables is consolidated to a group with that name (if groups were selected, they are disregarded). Cancel The grouping of variables is not carried out. To undo the aggregation of variables into a group, select menu item "Variables/ Ungroup". If a group is then selected in the variable list, all its channels are made autonomous, and the group is canceled. If you select only a particular channel but not the group as a whole, that channel alone is released from the group and the group persists. Specific channels must be indicated in the variable list in order to be selected. If a desired one is not, click

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

146

Variables on the [+] -symbol to the left of the group symbol. The context menu may also be used to switch channel registration on or off (right-click the mouse above the variable list). Reference FAMOS Function Reference, 'Functions By Groups', function group 'Group Management' Section 'Data Types' in this chapter.

6.11

Permanent variables and temporary variables

A variable's life normally extends until it is intentionally deleted by the user; such variables are known as " permanent". Variables which come about as the results of formulas or by being imported via the "Load file" dialog are always of the permanent kind. By contrast, variables can also be "temporary", and such variables are eventually deleted automatically. To date, temporary variables can only be created when working with the built-in File Browser. The variables are automatically deleted when the current folder in the File browser is switched. Temporary variables are denoted in the variables list by a special symbol.

A variable created as a temporary variable can later be transformed into a permanent one. To do this, use the command "Make Permanent" in the "Variable"-menu.

6.12

Exporting/ Importing Variables

Data can be exchanged between various imc applications using the menu items "Variables/ Export" and "Variables/ Import". Export variables by selecting one or several variables in the list. The variable is exported. It remains unchanged within FAMOS, but is now available for import to other imc applications. Import variables by selecting "Import" in the "Variable" menu. A variable previously exported from another imc application can thus be imported to FAMOS. An error message is generated if no variable was exported. Reference Curve Manager manual, chapter 'Curve Window/ Export' Chapter 'DDE-Interface' Chapter 'Sequences', commands 'IMPORT', 'EXPORT'

6.13

Playing Back Variables

The imc Sound Kit is delivered together with FAMOS. If the Sound Kit is registered in FAMOS as "on", the additional menu item "Variables/ Play" is available. When using this option, the selected variables are converted internally to 16-bit monowave files and played back, provided that an appropriate output device (sound card) is connected. Reference Online Help for 'Sound-Kit'. Chapter 'Functions', section 'imc-Kit-Interface'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables

147

6.14

Constants and Predefined Variables

Numerical and textual constants can be entered into formulas directly: Data = Data + 12 Directory = Tadd( "c:\","imc\dat" ) Mean = 123.22 'V' ASCIIcode = 0x64 FAMOS has several predefined constants at its disposal. These constants can be used as single values. No new value can be assigned to them, however, and they are not registered in the variable list. To use predefined constants in formulas without typing them in manually, select the group "A> Constants, predefined variables" in the function list (under the "Standard" index card) and then click on the appropriate function entry. The constant's name is written to the current position in the editor box. Alternatively, you can place the constant's name at the desired position using the Drag&Drop technique with the mouse. Furthermore, there are a number of predefined variables available. The statistics function "Stat(...)" promptly calculates all of them. Afterwards you can insert these variables into formulas. When the statistics function is executed again, the predefined variables are recalculated and obsolete values are overwritten with new ones. Care should therefore be taken to use any desired predetermined variables before calling the statistics function once to often. The predefined variables are not indicated in the variable list. They may not be changed individually in a formula and thus may not appear on the left side of an assigning operator in a formula. Group "A> constants, predefined variables"

Constants and predefined variables in the function list

Predefined constants and variables sRMS Euler InDegr InRad PI 2*PI sMax rms value of waveform (root mean square) Euler number e constant for converting radians to degrees constant for converting degrees to radians circle constant PI 2 * circle constant PI maximum value of waveform

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

148

Variables sMaxPos sMin sMinPos sMean Stdev Reference FAMOS Function Reference: function 'Stat' X-coordinate of the maximum of a waveform minimum value of waveform X-coordinate of the minimum of a waveform arithmetic mean of a waveform standard deviation of a waveform

6.15

Units

Every waveform may have one or more units. Each unit can, if desired, be reset using appropriate functions or commands. You can also use the "Properties" dialog to accomplish this. The maximum length a unit may take is 255 characters. Units are processed, calculated and adapted when mathematical functions are executed, provided that the units you supply are registered SI-units. The following are the fundamental SI-units supported by FAMOS: A cd K kg m s Ampere candela Kelvin kilogram meter seconds electric current light intensity temperature mass length time

The following SI-units are also supported: Unit C C F H Hz J lm lx mol Name Celsius Coulomb Farad Henry Hertz Joule lumen lux moles Physical Quantity temperature electric charge electric capacitance inductivity frequency energy light flux illuminance mass 1 lx = 1 lm/m2 Conversion 1 C = 1 K for temperature differences 1 C = 1 As 1 F = 1 As/V 1 H = 1 Vs/A 1 Hz = 1 1/s 1 J = 1 Nm = 1 Ws

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables N Ohm Pa S T V W Wb Newton Ohm Pascal Siemens Tesla Volt Watt Weber force electric resistance pressure electric conductance magnetic flux density voltage electric power magnetic flux 1 W = 1 VA 1 Wb = 1 Vs 1 N = 1 kgm/s2 1 Ohm = 1 V/A 1 Pa = 1 N/m2 1 S = 1 A/V 1 T = 1 Vs/m2

149

Additional units and pseudo-units, which are recognized but disregarded in calculations: dB Degr empty % Rad percent radians decibels degrees not a unit, indicates logarithmic representation angle, range: 0 ... 360 not a unit not a unit angle, range: 0 2*Pi

When defining units, you may use the units in any arbitrary combination. Be aware, however, that prefixes such as m-, k-, or M- for milli-, kilo-, mega- etc. may not be used, as they would be misinterpreted by FAMOS as arbitrary units and thus not be combined or canceled with the units of other quantities in a calculation. The kilogram is an exception. It must be entered as kg and may not be split up. To add exponents to a unit, use the exponentiation character "^x" (where x is the exponent) followed by the exponent. A reciprocal exponent (i.e. root) can be created using "^1/x" (where x is the root). Example kgm/s^2 m^2 m^3 m/s m/s^2 ms^-2 1/ms 1/s VA (Newton, unit of force) (square meter, unit of area) (cubic meter, unit of volume) (meters per second, unit of velocity) (meters per seconds squared, unit of acceleration) = m/ s^2 (interpreted as 1/(ms)) (1 over seconds, unit of frequency) (Volt Amperes, unit of electrical power)

These units are not supported:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

150

Variables g mA Volt (grams) (milli-Amperes) (correct: "V")

Prohibited units can just as easily be assigned to waveforms, as long as no computations are performed on such waveforms. Otherwise, the units will be incorrectly interpreted and consequently misused. Powers of ten If the numerical values in a waveform would be more sensibly expressed in units with a powers-of-ten prefix (kilo-, Mega-, etc.), use the basic form of the unit but supply the appropriate power-of-ten as a factor. For example, a waveform consisting of values in the milliampere range can be multiplied by 0.001 and expressed in Amperes. In graphic representation of waveforms, prefixes such as milli and kilo are popular, as they help avoid graphically representing powers-of-ten. The following prefixes are in use: p n m K M G 10-12 10-9 10-6 10-3 10+3 10+6 10+9 pico nano micro milli kilo mega giga

Not all units can be combined with all prefixes, as illustrated in the following example: Remarks Milli-seconds (ms) exist, but not kilo-seconds; rather "E+3s". A coordinate axis with a value range of 0.001s to 0.020s is labeled with the numerical values from 1...20 and the unit "ms". Units are aggregated through multiplication and can cancel each other out through division. Thus the multiplication of a waveform with values of a current with a waveform consisting of voltages, including the corresponding units "A" and "V", yields a product-waveform with units of power, "W". Squaring a waveform consisting of distances and taking the unit "m" yields a waveform of areas and the unit "m^2". Division of a waveform of voltages by a single value taking the unit "A" for a current yields a waveform labeled with the unit "Ohm", representing resistances. Units of numbers When entering formulas, write units immediately after the numerical values. Thus, it is not necessary to first create a single value and then assign a unit to it by calling a function. Units must be enclosed in single quotation marks and positioned directly after the entry for the value. Remarks x = y * 3.5 'V' Mean = GInt (Wave, 2E-3 's') / 2E-3 's' Where "Wave" is a normal waveform.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables User-defined units To prevent units from being computed with each other, enclose the units in double quotation marks. The units will then be interpreted as user-defined and disregarded by the FAMOS-algorithm which calculates with units. Power1 = 220'V' * 1.01'A' Power2 = 220'"V"' * 1.01'A' ;--- or also --YUNIT U1 V YUNIT U2 "V" Power1 = U1 * 1.01'A' Power2 = U2 * 1.01'A' Power1 is assigned the unit 'W', but Power2 the unit 'VA'. Reference Curve Window documentation, chapter 'Curve Window/ Export' Section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics' in this chapter FAMOS Function Reference, Chapter 'Functions'; function group '16 Properties'

151

6.16

Memory management / Data Manager options

FAMOS' memory requirements during run-time mainly consist of the storage space needed for administering variables (waveforms). For this purpose, FAMOS first uses the working memory (RAM, virtual working memory) made available by the system. If this isn't sufficient, the waveforms are transferred to the hard drive as temporary files. The memory necessary for storing a waveform can be estimated roughly on the basis of the waveform's length and data format; e.g., 10 channels having 1000000 readings each and 2 Bytes per reading take about 20 Megabytes of memory. The size of waveforms which can be processed by FAMOS is limited to 2 Gigabytes. The resulting maximum number of readings per waveform depends on the data format used; for instance, waveforms in Double (real, 8Bytes) can have approx. 250 million readings. Also, storage of a single waveform cannot be distributed onto multiple drives; the whole waveform must fit on one of the ones available. By default, the "C" drive is used for storage of temporary files. This setting can be changed, and you can even make a list of drives, as well as exert influence the memory requirements . The corresponding settings dialog is fund under "Extra" / "Options/ Miscellaneous/ Data Manager".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

152

Variables

Options / Data Manager dialog

Note that changes made in this dialog only take effect at the start of a FAMOS session; no variables may have been created beforehand. Drives for temporary files You can specify up to 5 drives on which FAMOS can keep files for data sets and intermediate results. FAMOS accesses these temporary files when making graphics displays of and when performing calculations with waveforms. To guarantee fast running of FAMOS, it makes sense to specify a highspeed drive on which the waveforms are to be kept. Therefore, enter your fastest drive at the top of the list, and after that the other hard drives and virtual drives available to your system. Only hard drives should be specified; drives on removable media (e.g. USB sticks, memory cards) are not suitable for temporary files. If there is not enough space for a data set on a drive, FAMOS tries to save it on the next drive in the list. If none of the specified drives nor the working memory has enough space available, FAMOS returns corresponding error messages. The temporary files are always stored in folder "\tmp" of the respective drive. Exception: If it is the same drive in which the Windows default folder for temporary files is located (set as the environmental variable "TEMP"), then that folder is used. At least one drive has to be specified. Entry in the System Registry Alternatively, a different path can be specified in the System Registry (see regedit.exe). If a valid folder is specified there, it will be used first (instead of the "tmp" folder of the first drive). Only if no more sufficient space is available there, the remaining drives will be used. The entry in the Registry must be made before imc software is started. ACHTUNG Incorrect use of the Registry Editor may cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Variables operating system. Check carefully that you have opened the correct Registry path. How to do Start the Registry-Editor. For that click on the Windows "Start"-Button, select "Run" and enter "regedit", confirm with "OK". Now open the Registry.Key:

153

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\imc Measurement and Control\Default\CurveDataManager\Curves Create a new "String Value" named "TmpDir" (right click on the key entry "Curves"). Change the value to the desired path, e.g. "j:\mytemp" (doubleclick on "TmpDir"). Make sure that the specified path is present. Here too: you must not use drives on removable media. Example

Registry entry for temporary files

Automatic FAMOS always first requests the memory it needs from the operating system. Only if this is no longer able to provide any free space (RAM or virtual working memory), temporary files are used to hold the data. Maximum memory to occupy: FAMOS limits the memory demanded of the operating system to the specified maximum. If more memory is needed, data are sourced out to temporary files, even if the system has sufficient space available. This option can, under certain circumstances, improve system performance in cases where equally memory-intensive applications are running alongside FAMOS. Setting a limit ensures that other applications not having their own memory management, and thus dependent on the operating system's working memory, get a share of the system memory.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

154

Functions

Functions
7.1 Introduction
FAMOS provides the user with multitude of functions for processing and analyzing data. These include simple mathematical functions such as square roots and trigonometry, as well as complex analysis functions such as integration, differentiation or calculation of spectra, and even statistical functions such as histograms or calculation of standard deviation. A variety of manipulation functions specially designed for measurement technology are included, such as joining of waveforms, resampling, creation of curve portions, smoothing, determination of function values, changing length of waveforms and waveform approximation. The integrated formula interpreter allows the user to construct complex mathematical formulas from the basic functions available. New waveforms can be calculated or existing waveforms may be changed using formulas. Formulas can be entered and executed in the Input box in the FAMOS main window. Sequences (macros) can also be created. Sequences consist of a series of formulas, which are automatically executed in succession. Several possibilities exist for enhancing FAMOS to meet the demands of your special applications. In addition to supplemental library programs and optional software upgrades available from imc, you can integrate your own user-defined function libraries. imc Kit Interface imc offers special function libraries, also known as "Kits", whose functions are also available when operating FAMOS, thus allowing the program to be enhanced for special applications. These kits provide functions such as classification of data or loading and storing special data formats. Reference Section 'imc Kit Interface' in this chapter Plugin-interface Alongside the Kits, which are generally function libraries not having their own user interface, there are also so-called plug-ins for special applications. These come with a dialog-based user interface which fits right into the FAMOS main window. The File Browser plug-in is already provided, and further, future plug-ins include, for example, a video player plug-in synchronized monitoring of video and measurement data, and an ASAM-ODS-Browser. Standard DLL Interface Functions from Windows-DLLs (DLL = Dynamic Link Library, standard format for function libraries under Windows) can be used in FAMOS. The user can use all the functions provided by MS-Windows itself as a programming interface. The user can also include his own DLLs, which must not have the defined imc-Kit interface. Reference Section 'Standard DLL Interface' in this chapter Filter Design: This program offers the user the possibility of using tolerance range information to design recursive and transversal filters which can be employed in FAMOS as digital filter functions.

7.2

Formulas
Formulas must be defined in order to execute mathematical functions. Formulas are entered in the editor box or in the sequence window. A typical formula consists of a target variable name, an assignment operator and a mathematical expression. For example: Number = 10 * 2 "Number" is the name of a variable to be created, "=" is the assignment operator, and "10 * 2" is the mathematical expression. In this formula, the mathematical expression is first evaluated, resulting in the value 20. This value is then assigned to the variable "Number". A new single value variable "Number" has

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions been created. A comment may follow a formula. Comments start with a semicolon. Data = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) ;This is a comment! ;This too! The name of a variable already existing may be selected as the target variable. The existing variable name is either partly or totally overwritten. Create a new text variable: var = "c:\imc\dat" The text variable is overwritten: var = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) A new data group is created in which the first channel is defined: NewGroup:Channel1 = var A new channel is added to an existing data group: NewGroup:Channel2 = var+2 An existing channel in a data group is overwritten: NewGroup:Channel1 = 123 Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Variable Names' Chapter 'Variables', section 'Data types: data groups' The editor box may only contain one formula per line. If you have entered a formula, you can have the function carried out by activating the line it is on (e.g. by double-clicking on it) and then clicking on the "Execute" button which appears to the left of the currently activated line. Next, you can enter the next formula on the next line of the editor box (or you can overwrite the current line if you no longer need it). Any number of parentheses may be used in a mathematical expression. Each parenthesis must have a closing partner. For example: Number = 2 * (3 + min (Wave) - 1) + (-(-1)) "Wave" designates a normal waveform whose minimum value is calculated. The minimum value is increased by 3 and decreased by 1. The result is then multiplied by 2. The expression (-(-1)) simplifies to +1 . If the minimum function yields a value of 1, the variable "Number" is assigned the value 7. The program does not distinguish between lower and upper case letters in function and variable names. Please note that in physical units, upper and lower case letters can have a decisive effect! The following formulas are equivalent: Spectrum = dB (fft (Wave)) SPECTRUM = DB (FFT (WAVE)) In this example, "Wave" is a normal waveform whose spectrum is calculated in decibels. A legible combination of capital and small letters is recommended. Lines written in capital letters only are often more difficult to read. Spaces may be used in formulas between all names and characters to improve legibility. The following formulas are equivalent: Spectrum = dB (fft (Wave)) Spectrum = dB ( fft ( Wave ) ) Numerical values may be specified as integers or real numbers. The characters "E" or "e" are used to express powers of ten, read as "ten to the power of". Numerical values may also be specified in hexadecimal, use the prefix "0x". A decimal point is used to introduce places after the decimal, commas are not allowed. The following formulas are equivalent: Number Number Number Number Number = = = = = Number Number Number Number Number + + + + + 163 0.163E+3 .163e3 163.00 0xA3

155

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

156

Functions In each of these cases, the number is increased by 163. All data types may be combined in formulas, as long as the expression makes sense. For instance, adding complex waveforms is allowed, but the spectrum of a XY-waveform cannot be defined. Note the declaration of individual mathematical functions for details about which data types can be used with each function. Some functions do not yield a function value. They are also labeled as procedures. They change the parameter itself or evaluate predefined variables. SetUnit( Data, "Second", 0 ) Stat (3 * cos (Data)) An assignment operator may not be used in procedures since the function does not return a value which can be assigned. Thus, there is no target variable. When executing a mathematical function, any SI units are automatically converted or canceled against each other, as appropriate to the calculation. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Units' In two-component data types, component labels are used to access the individual components. FFTerg = FFT( Ramp( 0,1,128) MagnitudeSquare = Sqr( FFTerg.M) Waveforms and texts can be indexed in order to access individual elements of a variable. Indexes are set in brackets, several indexes (when allowed by the data type) are separated by commas. The index of the first element is 1. Exactly one index may be specified for unstructured waveform and texts. The index allows access to a single sample or a single character. Wave = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) Wave[100] = 111; Index = 1 Wave[ Index] = Wave[ 100] The first and last value in the waveform now contain the value 111. Indexes may also be calculated. The following formulas are equivalent Wave[Index] = Wave[100] Wave[Index] = Wave[leng?( Wave)] In text variables, use the index to access an individual character. Dir = "c:\imc\dat" Drive = Dir[1] Dir[1] = "d" The variable 'Drive' contains "c", the variable 'Dir' contains "d:\imc\dat". Two-component variables can also be indexed. The first value of a complex waveform's magnitude is queried: FFTerg = FFT( Data ) Magnitude1 = FFTerg[1].M Here the result is a complex waveform with a length of 1, which is exactly the first value pair magnitude / phase in the waveform. MagnitudePhase1 = FFTerg[1] Variables can be partly changed by indexing an index which already exists. This also applies to the use of component labels. Only the variable's second data value is changed, all other values remain unchanged: var = Ramp ( 0,1,100) var[2] = 234 The variable is completely overwritten:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions var = FFT( Ramp ( 0,1,128)) The magnitude of a complex waveform is doubled, the phase set completely to zero: FFTerg = FFT( Ramp ( 0,1,128)) FFTerg.B = FFTerg.M * 2 FFTerg.P = Ramp ( 0,1,128) * 0 Indexing of new variables is not allowed: Delete var var[1] = 1 ; Error !!! Delete FFTerg FFTerg.P = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) ; Error !!! Invalid indexes also result in an error message. NotThere = Wave[ leng?( Wave) +1 ] AlsoError = Wave[0] Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Indexing Variables' If a variable's name contains special characters (such as spaces, semicolons, exclamation marks, '+', '-', ':' etc.), or begins with a digit, the name must be given inside of curved brackets: MY RESULT = FFT (123 Measurement) ; Wrong!!! {MY RESULT} = FFT ({123 Measurement}) ; OK

157

7.3

Data Groups as Function Parameters

Channels in data groups can also be used as function parameters or result variables. The channel name is separated from the group name by a colon. NewGroup:Wave = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) NewGroup:SinWave = sin( NewGroup:Channel1 ) Addressing via index is also allowed; a colon should precede the address. NewGroup:Channel1 = Ramp ( 0,1,100 ) C1 = NewGroup:[1] C1 = NewGroup:Channel1 The last two formulas each provide the first channel in the group. Value23 = NewGroup:[1,23] Value23 = NewGroup:Channel1[23] The last two formulas each provide the 23rd value of the first channel in the group variable 'NewGroup'. If a data group is directly transferred as function parameter, this function is executed in succession for all included channels. Individual results are sorted into a group. The program attempts to pass the names of the channels to the result. If several data groups are calculated together, the program uses the channel names of the data group found first. Example Group1:A = 1 Group1:B = 11.2 A group with two channels is created.

Group2 = Group1+ sin( Group1 ) A new group is derived from the first group and the channel names are adopted. The sine is calculated for each curve in the group and then added to the particular channel.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

158

Functions

Delete Group1 Group3:X = Group2:B Group3:Y = Group2:[1] A further group is created containing the channels from group 2 in the reverse order. The names of the channels are explicitly specified.

Group4 = Floor( Group3 + Group2 ) Delete Group3 Group4 = Group4 - 12

When adding two groups, channels with the same index are added. The Floor function runs over both channels. A constant is deducted from each channel.

7.4

Indirect Use of Text Variables

Text variables can be used in formulas is a special way. A text variable in pointed parentheses < TextVar > is replaced by its contents by the formula interpreter before calculation. Example Wave = "slope" Spectrum = DB(FFT ( < Wave > )) The formula interpreter first searches for the text variable 'Wave' in the variable list and replaces the text of the formula in the partial expression "Wave" with the textual content of the variables. Then the formula is calculated, here: Spectrum = DB(FFT ( slope )) The use of text variables in this way is useful only in sequences to specify variable or file names indirectly. Reference Refer to the chapter 'Sequences', section 'Use of Text Variables' for more information and examples about using text variables.

7.5

Error and Warning Messages

Every time a formula is executed, its syntax is first checked. The program checks for: invalid variable names invalid function names

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions mathematical signs in the incorrect position incorrectly positioned parentheses an incorrect number of parameters for a function use of invalid characters incorrect placement of assignment operator If there is an error in syntax, an appropriate error message is generated and the location of the error is marked in the formula. Once the error has been corrected, try again to execute the formula. Before a formula is executed, the program checks the content for semantic errors. Warnings or error messages could be generated. If an error message is generated, the formula cannot be executed until the error is corrected. A formula can be executed if a warning message appears Warnings are intended as valuable and important tips that something may be wrong and that the formula should be checked. Of course, warnings may also be ignored and even be suppressed using the "Options / Functions" dialog. Warnings are entered in the output box in the FAMOS main window. Error messages additionally appear in a message box and must be acknowledged. Error messages include: invalid data type as function parameter invalid combination of data types in function parameters waveform is not complex waveform is too short invalid parameter value waveform too long for FFT Warnings include: waveforms specified for a function are scaled differently function parameter has incorrect unit the length of a waveform is automatically shortened a numerical value cannot be sorted into histogram waveforms must be shortened or lengthened, since the length in set in the target or a function expects a parameter with a definite length Semantic errors may also occur during actual calculation, which occur from the intermediate results of unknown numerical values, scaling, etc. Calculation is canceled when: memory is insufficient for a temporary waveform (e.g. intermediate result in a formula) RAM has insufficient space Calculation can be continued when the following warnings are generated: division by zero magnitude of numerical values is too great value range of a function is exceeded If the valid value range has been exceeded, the results of calculation are generally set to zero. The value range is limited to -1035 ... -10-35, 0, 10-35 ... 1035.

159

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

160

Functions

7.6

Data Format of Results

FAMOS can manage data in various formats. The result format of mathematical functions depends on the actual function and the data format of the parameter. Some functions provide their results independent of the type of parameter. Other functions observe the data format of the parameter, for example the "Mirror" function for mirroring the values of a waveform. Otherwise the setups specified in "Extra/ Options/ Functions" are observed. The dialog is explained in the next section.

7.7

Options / Functions Dialog

Use this dialog to set options which are generally valid for all functions. This concerns generation of warnings, selection of the data format for results and the setups for executing Fourier transformation. Select "Options/ Functions" to open the dialog:

Dialog: Options/ Functions

Display When executing functions, generated warnings are shown in the output box in the FAMOS main window. If the options "No warnings" or "Important warnings" are activated, no warnings or only the important warnings appear. Result Data Type Almost all functions provide their results in a real data format, either in 4-byte format (float) or in an 8-byte format (double). If the option "Automatic" is selected, the result type is selected, depending on the data types of the parameters, which can record the result without data loss. For example, if two "float" waveforms are added together, the result will be the type "Float". Adding a "float" and a "double" waveform will result in the type "Double". If the option "Float" or "Double" is selected, the result is always generated in this format, unless the function itself stipulates the use of another data format. The accuracy of the "Float" format, with 7 significant decimal places, is sufficient for most tasks. Reference Chapter 'Variables', section 'Data Formats'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions FFT These setups affect the mathematical functions "FFT" and "Spec". Specify the window function to be used in the selection list. The base-2-algorithm used requires that the length of the waveform to be transformed is a power of two. If the option "Fill with zeros" is selected, the waveform is filled with zeros to the next power of two before transformation. Otherwise the waveform is truncated to the next smallest power of two. No error boxes for file functions If an error occurs when executing a FAMOS function, a box containing the error message is usually displayed and the return value / result is not generated. Any running sequence is canceled. When this option is selected, a return value is generated when using the file functions (function group "11> File functions"), which displays the error and the value can then be evaluated. The error box does not appear and the functions are "quiet". This option is useful in sequences where the program must react automatically to the various reasons for the errors. For example, a missing file must not necessarily be interpreted as an error, the program could simply change to another directory and search for the file there. Reference FAMOS Function Reference All of this dialog's control settings can be changed in a sequence by using the function 'SetOption(...)'.

161

7.8

Function Assistant
The Function Assistant offers the user support in creating the necessary formulas and in parameterizing the accompanying functions. The Function Assistant provides a parameterization dialog, which is specially adapted to each function. This dialog contains a short description and an Edit box or list box for each parameter, in which the current parameter value may be entered or selected. Once all the parameters have been entered, the function can either be executed directly or copied to the editor box. Such an assistant is available for each internal function and command ("Standard" index card in function list) and for most external kit functions. This option is especially useful for functions with several parameters and for functions whose execution is controlled by option parameters. While the option is specified by a number in the formula, the option can be selected from a text list in the Function Assistant. To call the dialog for paramterizing the desired function, there are the following possibilities: Highlight the desired function in the FAMOS main window's function list and type "SHIFT+F1" or click on the entry "Assistant" in the context menu. If the writing cursor in the input box is over a function name, the Assistant dialog also can be called by typing the combination of keys "SHIFT+F1" or by clicking on the "Assistant" entry in the context menu. If parameters are already entered in the function formula in the input box, these parameter values will appear in the corresponding boxes in the Assistant dialog as defaults. It is also possible to Drag&Drop a variable (from the variables list, from a curve window or from the Data Editor) onto a function entry in the function list. This also calls the parameterizing dialog. The variable name appears in the dialog as the first parameter, if possible. A typical parameterizing dialog looks like the following:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

162

Functions

Example Dialog Function-Assistant : Parametrization 'FiltHP'

The name of the current function is displayed in the title bar, under the name a brief comment. Following the name, input and list boxes for the return value and the function parameters are displayed. The program suggests a name for the result, and the list contains all current FAMOS variables. These lists are found in all parameters, where waveforms or general FAMOS variables can be used. In parameters where a set number of options is possible, select the desired option from the list. Parameters, in which a set number is expected, are assigned a simple input box. The name of a single value variable can also be entered here. The current formula is displayed in the status bar, as it would be generated from the setups in the dialog. You can see in the example how the parameter code (0) is taken from the option entry "Butterworth" and entered in the formula. If the dialog was called from an input box using the key combination <Shift>+<F1>, any parameters possibly specified are used and entered in the dialog. In parameter code 0, the corresponding entry "Butterworth" was selected in the list. In addition to the short help messages for functions, an overview about the functions of a formula line (e.g. from an unknown sequence) can be made. If no parameters can be identified in the formula line when the dialog is called, the dialog starts with the entries last used. Execute The formula is calculated immediately. Copy The formula is entered at the current cursor position, or instead of currently highlighted readout. Close The dialog is closed. You may continue to work in FAMOS when the dialog is open. The next time the dialog is called, the existing dialog is updated corresponding to the desired function.

7.9
7.9.1

imc Kit Interface

Introduction
imc offers several "kits", which provide additional functions for processing waveforms. These kits have a standard interface and can be used by various imc applications. They offer functions for classification of data, loading and storing special data formats or replaying waveforms via the Windows-sound output. These kits are special DLLs (Dynamic Link Libraries), which are accessed while an application is being used. They are equipped with a defined interface for parameter specification. The functions they provide

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions are referred to as external kit functions, as opposed to the internal functions available in FAMOS itself.

163

7.9.2

Registering Kits

To be able to use functions from an imc-kit DLL, the kit must be registered in FAMOS. The kit DLLs registered in FAMOS are linked dynamically during the progress of the program and the functions they provide can be used exactly like the functions available in FAMOS. Kits can come as part of a FAMOS package or in the form of a separate installation program. The respective installation program copies the necessary files to the FAMOS program folder and takes care of registering the kit with FAMOS. If you install the kits manually, please note that the kit DLLs must be located in the FAMOS program directory, which contains the file "FAMOS.EXE". Proceed as follows to register or de-register installed kits: Go to the "Extensions- Register Kits" index card in the dialog reached via menu Item "Extra"/ "Options", or use the corresponding command in the context menu of the "Kit" functions list.

Dialog "Register Kits"

The list indicates all Kits which are available and located in the FAMOS program directory or under "\Program files\imc\Shared". The kits which are shown with a check mark are currently registered in FAMOS. By simply clicking the mouse on the list entry (or SPACE, if using the keyboard), you can select or deselect the individual kits. Select "Cancel" to discard changes and exit the dialog,. By selecting "OK", the selected kits are registered in the FAMOS configuration settings, the DLLs are linked to the program and the dialog is exited. All the functions of the kits registered in FAMOS may be accessed from the "Kit" index card of the function list. Remarks Each kit registered in FAMOS occupies memory space and slows execution of the program. It is best to register only those kits actually required for your application.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

164

Functions

7.9.3

Calling External Kit Functions

After the kits have been registered in "Register imc-Kits...", the functions they include can be selected from the "Kit" index card of the function list.

Menu "Kits"

The "Kit"-list is operated the same way as the "Standard"-list of built-in functions. When one of the functions is selected, the corresponding help text appears in the Output window. Double-clicking on a function's entry copies it into the editor box along with its parameter mask. Some kits support the Function Assistant, which helps in setting the function's parameters. Naturally, it is also possible to enter the desired function's name in to the editor box "by hand".

7.9.4

Curve Kit

The Curve Kit is a component of the DLL "IM7CUDAM.DLL", which is always included in the folder "\Program files\imc\Shared" ("\Programs files" being the Windows default program folder). It is a standard feature of many imc-applications and therefore not a kit in the usual sense, but it also contains external functions. A normal installation procedure should result in this kit being installed automatically; otherwise, the menu item "Extra/ Options/ Extensions/ Register Kits" will establish access. This group contains various functions for the display and production of curve windows. For instance, you can specify the position and scaling for the window, add curve to a window, load configurations and much more. The remote control functions are significantly more efficient than the commands 'Show' and 'CurveSetup' provided by FAMOS. Reference The Curve Kit documentation describes the kit-functions in greater detail.

7.9.5

File Kit

The File Kit is also included in the FAMOS package and is automatically registered upon installation of FAMOS. The function group "File-Kit" offers a number of file management functions, for example, for listing all the files in a folder, and for copying, moving or deleting files.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions

165

7.9.6

Dialog Kit

The Dialog Kit is also included with the standard FAMOS package and is registered by default. The functions group "Dialogs" contains functions which can be used in the event sequences of user-defined dialogs. Reference Creation and use of dialogs is described in the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs'. A detailed description of the included Kit functions is presented in the 'Dialog Kit' documentation.

7.9.7

Report Generator Kit

The Report Generator Kit is located in the DLL "IM7DRKIT.DLL", which will be placed in the folder "\Program files\imc\Shared" by regular installation of the Report Generator. Otherwise, use the "Register Kits" dialog to establish access. The entry "Report Generator" will then be in the function list under the "Kit" index card. The function group contains a multitude of functions for the remote control of the Report Generator. For example, it might assist you in loading a report form, updating already present curve objects or tables with new data, or automating the printout of completed reports by means of a (macro) sequence. The remote control functions are significantly more efficient than the commands in the "D> Commands: DDE, etc." group provided by FAMOS.. Reference Exact descriptions of the kit's functions are to be found in the instructions for the Report Generator Kit.

7.9.8

Sound Kit

The Sound Kit ("IM7-SOUND.DLL") is included in FAMOS and can also be accessed using the kit interface. The sound kit has functions for converting waveforms into the Windows WAVE format and playing them back via sound board. If this kit is installed, the "Variable" menu has the additional option "Play variable". The selected variables are converted internally in a 16-bit mono-wave file and are played back if an appropriate device is present. Reference Installation information and a description of all functions in the sound kit are found in the Sound Kit manual.

7.9.9

Format Kit

The Format Kit is located in the "IM8FORM.DLL" library, which regular installation will place in the FAMOS-Program directory. You can make this kit accessible by means of the "Register Kits" dialog. Thereafter, the item "Format Kit" will appear under the "Kits" function list. . Along with special functions for certain data formats, this kit provides you with the functions "Msave" and "Bsave", which let you save files in multi-column ASCII-files or a configurable binary format, respectively.

7.9.10 Other Kits available

Spectrum package: Spectrum analysis with moving and overlapping windowing, as well as additional FFT-based analysis procedures, such as amplitude spectra, power density spectrum, Cepstrum, coherence, cross power density, transfer function. Class-counting package: Class-counting methods as per DIN 45667 (e.g. Level cross method, range method) and Rainflow-

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

166

Functions method. Order analysis package: Vibration analysis for rotating machinery. These kits are not included in the FAMOS package and must be ordered separately.

7.10

Standard DLL Interface

7.10.1 Introduction
An excellent characteristic of MS-Windows is its ability to use program libraries, known as DLLs. DLL is the abbreviation for "Dynamic Link Library". These libraries provide functions which can be called by other applications. Function libraries for program development are typical under DOS. The library functions are added to the program code during linkage and are therefore a basic component in the program. Unlike DOS libraries, the Windows-DLLs are linked during the program runtime when a function is needed. The name of the DLL and the name of the function need not necessarily be known to create the program. Another positive aspect is the fact that DLLs can be used by different programs at the same time. The Windows DLL requires space on the hard disk and in the memory only once, unlike DOS-DLLs. In addition, only those parts of a DLL actually used by the program are loaded from the hard disk to the memory during a program. MS-Windows itself consists mainly of DLLs, whose functions are called by the MS-Windows programs. These functions are described in the Microsoft SDK (Software Development Kit). FAMOS is equipped with a standard DLL interface, which allows the functions to be accessed from any Windows-DLLs.

7.10.2 Registering DLL's in FAMOS

If functions from DLLs should be called in FAMOS, they must be registered in FAMOS. The following information must be available for each function: DLL file name function name in the DLL function name in FAMOS number of parameters data type of parameters and return values. In addition to the DLL and function name, other information about the function is necessary. This information is needed to give the function parameter the form expected by the function. FAMOS must also know in which form the results will be returned by the function, in order to provide enough memory and to correctly interpret the returned value. Select menu item "Extra/ Options/ Extension: Register DLL functions" to register a DLL function in FAMOS.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions

167

Dialog: External DLL functions/ Overview

This dialog can also be called via the context menu, if the "DLL" index card is active. When the dialog is started for the first time, the list of registered functions is empty. As soon as external DLL functions are registered in FAMOS, they are displayed in the list. All functions shown in the list can be used in FAMOS. Entries in the list have the following form: DLLName:FctName EType=FamosName(Par1Type,.ParNType) DLLName: FctName: FamosName: EType: Par1Type... ParNType: Name of DLL where the function is located Name under which the function is exported from the DLL Name under which the function can be used in FAMOS Type abbreviation for event and parameter type in FAMOS. Meaning: vd: VOID, no return value, procedure tx: Character string, text ne: Waveform or single value List of Functions All declarations of external functions are stored in a declaration file. These declarations can be re-read the next time FAMOS is started. Different declaration files can be generated with various function declarations, which can then be used in FAMOS. This allows you to adapt FAMOS quickly to various tasks. The following menu appears after selecting the function list button:

Reading Function List from File

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

168

Functions Functions currently registered in FAMOS are removed and a new function list is read from a file and entered in the list. Use the Windows-standard dialog for file selection to select the desired file. The directory set under "Definition files" in the "Options / Folders" dialog is used as default directory. The standard name extension for declaration files is ".def". Saving Function List Functions currently registered in FAMOS are stored in one file. Use the Windows standard dialog "Save File" to select the directory and file name. The directory set under "Definition files" in the "Options/ Directories" dialog is used as the default directory. Declaration files stored this way can be reregistered later in FAMOS using menu option "Read Function List..". Unregistering (Dismissing) Functions All functions currently registered are removed using this option. The list is then empty. The name of the file being used is shown in the box next to the button "Function list". If no functions are registered or the currently defined list is not yet stored, "No DLL functions" appears. OK Selecting this option ends the dialog. If the current list has not yet been stored, a message appears. In closing the dialog, all specified DLLs are linked dynamically and the functions are listed in the function list under the "DLL" index card. The functions may now be used in FAMOS. If a DLL cannot be located, the corresponding error message appears. Delete Functions marked in the list are removed. New The definition dialog for a DLL function appears. A new definition can be made. Edit The registration dialog is called for functions selected in the list. The existing declaration can be changed.

DLL Name Enter here the name of the DLL without file name extension. The DLL must be in one of the following directories: current directory Windows directory

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions Windows/ System directory via the environmental variable "PATH" specified directory The DLL in question must be a 32 bit DLL. Function name in the DLL Enter here the name under which the DLL function is available to other applications. If you wish to write and integrate your own DLL's, note that this name may differ from the original name in the source text, depending on the programming language used, the way the functions are declared in the DLL, and the compiler and linker used. C-compilers generally prefix the function name with an underline and sometimes attach an indication of the total size of the parameters. Example: The function stdcall int dummy ( BYTE par1 ) is exported under the name " dummy@1 ". The function ccecl int dummy ( BYTE par1 ) is exported under the name "dummy". C++ compilers append even more characters to the name, which contain information on the amount and types of parameters, as well as about the type of the return value. To use such functions in FAMOS, you must either enter the entire name or instruct the compiler/linker to generate simple (so-called "undecorated") names. Example: By stating the original name in the C-linker's module definitions file, it's possible to arrange for the DLL to export the functions under their original names (in other words, without the preceding underline). Additionally, you can instruct a C++ compiler to refrain from "decorating" names by inserting the element "C" in the function declaration. extern "C" { float _stdcall Fct1( LPSTR lpsz ); float _cdecl Fct2( LPSTR lpsz ); } Function name in FAMOS The function is called in FAMOS under this name. The user may freely specify the name, usually the DLL function name. Note that the name should be unique. It may not be the same as that of internal functions, or begin with numbers. FAMOS does not differentiate between upper and lower-case letters. The name may have a maximum of 20 characters. Number of Parameters Specify here the number of parameters that the function expects. Entries for each parameter are preinitialized in the parameter list with standard values according to the information specified. The maximum number of parameters is limited to 15. Call Convention Specify here the convention for calling the function. This is determined when defining the function in the DLL, in programming language "C" with code words "_cdecl " or "_stdcall", in the program language PASCAL with the code words "pascal" or "stdcall". The various calling conventions differ in, among other things, the order in which the parameters are placed on the stack, and the manner in which the stack structure is restored after the function has been executed.

169

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

170

Functions For the FAMOS-DLL-interface, only the order in which the parameters are arranged matters. In general, C calling conventions apply to exporting DLL functions (32 bit DLL's). By contrast, functions exported from 16 bit DLL's are normally exported according to PASCAL calling conventions. C In C, parameters are stacked from right to left. This means when a function CC(P1, P2, P3) is called, first P3, then P2, then P1, and then the return address are stacked before the function CC is called. The Microsoft C-compiler is familiar with the code words "_cdecl" and "_stdcall", both of which assume parameters to be handled according to C calling conventions. The analogous code word in PASCAL programming language (also: "Delphi") is "stdcall". NOTE: The code word "PASCAL" or "_pascal" is still supported by many C-compilers, but only for considerations of compatibility; internally, they are usually adapted to _stdcall-convention. PASCAL Parameters are stacked from left to right in PASCAL. Take the function CC (P1, P2, P3). When called, first P1, then P2, P3, and then the return address are placed on the stack and then the function itself is called. This convention is used by the programming language "Pascal" (also "Delphi", if the function is established using the code word "pascal". Types Definitions for the return value and parameters are found in this list. To change definitions, select the corresponding entries and press "Edit" or double-click on the desired entry. All as 1. The setups for the entry marked first are copied to all following entries selected. Edit The dialog for defining parameters is called for the selected parameters; change individual settings in this dialog.

Dialog: External DLL functions /data types

A parameter or return value of a DLL function is declared in this dialog. Specify the function name and the edited parameter in the text box in the upper corner of the dialog. Data type in the DLL: Specify here which data type the DLL function requires for this parameter. Specification of data types follows the type designations used in the programming language "C".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions short ushort int, long uint, ulong char uchar float double text 2 bytes signed integer -32768..32768 2 bytes unsigned integer 0..65535 4 bytes unsigned integer -2.14e9..2.14e9 4 bytes unsigned integer 0...4.29e9 1 bytes signed integer -128..127 1 byte unsigned integer 0..255 4 bytes real (floating-point according to IEEE) 8 bytes real (floating point according to IEEE) A DLL function is transferred to a FAR-pointer at 255 bytes. Because text variables in FAMOS may have a maximum length of 255 bytes, they may be transferred to DLL functions. The data type in FAMOS must also be text. Specify 1 for the number of elements. Additional information about a waveform is necessary in FAMOS. To exchange simple waveforms with a DLL, the structure DLL_WAVE was defined, which contains the measurement values and additional information. If you are already familiar with dynamic data exchange, this structure will be familiar to you. It is called DDE_WAVE. The structure is declared in the file "dlltest.h", found in the directory "DLLIFC32". Always transfer as a pointer or handle. Only in result: no return

171

dsf

void

Access Provides information about transferring of the parameter or the return value. Parameters and return values can be transferred directly (one value) to the stack or as pointer or handle (one or several values, also >64KByte). Handles are here numbers which identify a memory block. Windows contains functions for accessing memory via the handles. Direct Pointer Handle Parameter transferred to stack , 1 value Parameter specifies address of data object in the global memory. A pointer is transferred to one or several values of the specified type. Parameter is the identifier of a global memory object. A handle is transferred to one or several values of a specified type. A pointer can be created for the transferred memory using the Windows function "Global Lock". The DLL function must then release the memory block by using the function "GlobalUnlock".

Number of elements The number of elements in direct access is always 1, otherwise the number of elements to be transferred from the particular data type. A '*' means that the length of the transferred curve defines the place. For example, if the DLL function expects double-values and a waveform with 20 values is transferred, a buffer with 20 values * 8bytes = 160 bytes is transferred. Type in FAMOS This option specifies which data type should be generated or transferred in FAMOS. Data Text Void A waveform or single value is transferred A text is transferred. Data type in the DLL must also be a text Only in result: no return

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

172

Functions Read only parameter (Selectable only in pointer or handle access ) The corresponding parameter is not changed by the function. DLL releases handle (Only in handle access ) The DLL releases the global memory object. Otherwise the memory is released after returning the function in FAMOS. Remarks Each registered DLL function occupies memory and slows execution of the program. Register only those functions actually needed for your application. When installing FAMOS you can determine whether to include examples for programming your own DLL's in the installation. If you choose to do so, the examples are located in "DLLIFC32". Installing the examples can be accomplished at a later occasion, also.

7.10.3 Calling external DLL functions

Once the DLL functions have been registered with "Options/ Extensions: Register DLL-functions", they can be selected from the function list under the "DLL" index card.

The "DLL"-list is operated the same way as the "Standard"-list of built-in functions. When one of the functions is selected, the corresponding help text appears in the Output window. Double-clicking on a function's entry copies it into the editor box along with its parameter mask. Example The Windows system DLL "user32.dll" has a variety of functions available to other applications, which are described in the Microsoft- SDK (Source Development Kit). They make up a part of the Windows-API (Application Programmer's Interface). The functions GetActiveWindow() and GetWindowTextA() are parts of the application, which determine a reference to the active window or its title. They are declared under Windows 95 as follows: UINT _stdcall GetActiveWindow() UINT _stdcall GetWindowTextA( UINT WindowHandle, far char* Title,UINT SpaceforTitle) Proceed as follows to use these functions: 1. Register the function GetActiveWindow() Call the overview dialog of registered functions (menu option "Extra/ Options/ Extensions: Register DLLfunctions") and then select the "New" button. This calls the declaration dialog for a function. The following information is given in the declaration dialog: DLL-Name: USER32 Function name: each GetActiveWindow Number of parameters: 0 Call: C

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Functions Double-click on "Return.." and the dialog for definition of the return value appears. Select the following setups: Data type in DLL: uint Transfer: direct Number: 1 Data type FAMOS: data Exit the last two dialogs with "OK". You are now in the overview dialog again and the function just defined is added to the list. 2. Register the function GetWindowTextA(..) Select the button "New" again. In the declaration dialog, the following setups are active: DLL-Name: USER32 Function name DLL: GetWindowTextA Name in FAMOS GetWindowText Parameter: 3 Call: C Now select all entries in the list and then the "Edit" button. In the parametrization dialog, set up as follows: Return value: uint, direct, 1, data 1. Parameter: uint, direct, 1, data 2. Parameter: text, Pointer, 1, text 3. Parameter: uint, direct, 1, data Exit the last two dialogs with "OK". You are now in the overview dialog again. 3. Store declarations The setups just made should be stored in one file. Select the button "Function list" and the option "Save as..." in the open menu. Exit the dialog by selecting "End". 4. Call Both functions are available via menu "External" in the submenu "USER32" and can now be called in FAMOS: Text="" GetWindowText(GetActiveWindow(),Text,255 ) The title text of that window active during function processing is determined. This is the small window with the stylized sprinter, displayed during each formula processing. After the formula is executed, the variable "Text" contains "FAMOS is active", which corresponds to the title bar of the FAMOS main window. Reference Microsoft SDK (Software Development Kit) instructions. After installing FAMOS, the Declarations-file "winfkt.def" can be found in the subdirectory "DEF", which also contains further declarations of Windows-internal functions. When installing FAMOS you can determine whether to include examples for programming your own DLL's in the installation. If you choose to do so, the examples are located in "DLLIFC". Installing the examples can be accomplished at a later occasion, also. Then you must select the option "Examples of DLL-interfaces".

173

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

174

Functions

7.10.4 Tips for users of previous FAMOS versions

If you are accustomed to working with a 16-bit version of FAMOS (<= Version 3.1) and are familiar with the general DLL interface, you should make note of the following: Use of "home-made" DLL's These must be converted to 32 bit DLL's. Not only will certain adaptations of the source code be required but it will need to be compiled again at least once by a 32 bit compiler/linker. Note also that the calling convention for the function may change (esp. from PASCAL to C). For example, the keywords "PASCAL" and "_pascal" can still be used with the Microsoft C compiler. However, these are internally redefined as "_stdcall", to conform to C calling convention. Therefore, the function declaration in FAMOS must be adapted. Under certain circumstances, even the name under which the function is exported from the DLL can change; see the topic "Function name in the DLL", in the section "Registering DLL's in FAMOS". Use of Windows system libraries The Windows system libraries' names are distinguished from their 16 bit counterparts by a '32' appended to their names (e.g.: "kernel32.dll", "user32.dll", "gdi32.dll"). The calling convention from "PASCAL" to "C" has also changed. When an old definitions file is loaded, these conversions are performed automatically and the user is informed by means of a message box. Also not that the names of many system functions which require text as parameters have been altered to end with a appended "A". For instance, the function "GetWindowText" is now exported under the name "GetWindowTextA". Therefore, the declaration in FAMOS for such instances must also be changed accordingly.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Function Reference

175

Function Reference
You find details about the functions in the separate manual: Function Reference.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

176

Sequences

Sequences
9.1 Introduction
A sequence, also called a macro, contains a series of formulas or commands which are executed in a definite order. Commands for sequencing control are available, e.g. loops and conditional branching can be realized in a sequence. FAMOS has a series of commands especially for use in sequences. They control execution of the program, reproduce the function of menu options or influence predefined setups, which are usually set up using dialogs. Sequences are created and processed line-by-line. The editor box in the FAMOS main window provides the necessary development environment to create, test, execute and save your sequences. It unites the functionality of a text editor with the ability to execute sequences either completely or step-by-step. Sequences can be parameterized, meaning that the sequence text can be composed containing placeholders which are replaced with updated parameter values upon being called. Special functions also allow the user to query numbers and texts while the sequence is being processed. Sequences can also be nested, meaning that one sequence can appear as a subroutine within another sequence. Sequences can be assigned to the "Favorites" list. This allows quick access to the sequences and can also store a help text for the function and the necessary parameters. Sequences and dialogs can be saved in a password-protected file format. This lets you prevent other persons from editing, reading or copying the sequences. Example FAMOS LOAD Slope SHOW Slope Root = Sqrt (slope) SAVE Root This sequence consists of 5 lines. The following tasks are performed during execution of this sequence: The FAMOS file format is set up. The file "SLOPE.DAT" is loaded and the variable "Slope" created. The variable created is displayed as a curve. A formula is calculated and generates the new waveform "Root". The new variable "Root" is saved.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

177

9.2

Sequences and the editor box

The editor box is the workspace in which sequences can be created, tested, executed and administered.

The figure shows a sequence named "Corcoef" [1], whose contents are currently being displayed. Another sequence [2], "Adtest", is also open and could be displayed by clicking on its index rider. To the left of the actual sequence text, some special symbols or buttons are visible, namely the "Execute"-button [3] and the identifiers for a bookmark [4] and a breakpoint [5]. In the text input box, you can enter commands in the usual manner, and the usual editing functions like copy, paste and cut are all provided. Note that each command must be on its own line, empty lines are also permitted. The commands for editing and running sequences can be called via the FAMOS main menu, submenu "Sequences", context Menu #1 (accessed by right-clicking the mouse on the title bar of the editor box, also referred to as the "title bar context menu"), which mainly contains commands for administering (Load, Save) and for running sequences, context Menu #2 (accessed by right-clicking the mouse on the text input area, also referred to as the "text box context menu"), which mainly contains commands for editing sequence text, the toolbar below the editor box title bar. Reference Basic operation of the editor box is already explained in the chapter 'User-Interface / Editor box'. Also refer to that chapter to learn of important editing options going beyond the usual text editor functionality; these mainly include: using the "Execute"-button to display the active line and to execute it (double-click or ALT +ENTER to set the active line, click on "Execute" or CTRL+ ENTER to run a line), switching of the sequence displayed using the mouse (click on rider) or keyboard ( [SHIFT] + CTRL +TAB), transferring of the names of variables and functions from the Variables and Functions list (by double-clicking in the list or using Drag&Drop), context-sensitive calling of help (CTRL+F1) and Assistant for functions (SHIFT+F1), parametertips, automatic indent formatting which reflects the sequence hierarchy structure,

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

178

Sequences bookmarks for quick location of sequence lines, insertion of predefined boilerplate text for algorithm structures finding and replacing of text. Various presettings concerning sequence display, editing and execution can be made in the dialogs "Extra / Options / Editor" and "Extra / Options / colors". Sequences can also be integral components of user-defined dialogs (so-called 'event-sequences'). When editing and testing event sequences, certain peculiarities must be observed, which are described in the section 'User-Defined Dialogs'.

9.3

Administering Sequences
The commands described below for creating, loading, and saving sequences can be found in the editor box title bar context menu, in the main menu "Sequence" and partly in the editor box toolbar.

9.3.1

Creating a new sequence

A new sequence, as yet empty can be made using the menu command "New" in the title bar context menu or by using the corresponding button in the toolbar.

the sequence is given the default name ("Unnamed" + running number) and is displayed in the editor box.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

179

9.3.2

Loading a sequence

To load an existing sequence, use the command "Load" in the context menu or the corresponding button in the toolbar.

A dialog appears from which the desired sequence file can be selected.

Dialog: Load sequence file

This dialog for selecting a file has a few special features. The dialog starts up displaying the sequence directory used. When FAMOS is started this is initialized according to the setting in the dialog "Extra / Options / Folders". The toolbar at the upper right has an additional button:

Clicking here with the mouse causes a small menu offering the last sequence directories used to appear. Selecting a menu entry is a quick way of switching directories. The comment box in the lower portion of the dialog shows whatever commentary exists for the currently highlighted sequence. Such commentary can be entered upon saving a sequence. When the dialog is closed by pressing <OK>, the selected sequence is loaded and displayed in the editor box. If you click in the toolbar on the arrow next to the Load-icon, a small menu offering the sequence files last used appears. Here you can select a file for loading directly. The same menu can also be accessed in the main menu "Sequence / Last sequences >". Reference Instead of a sequence-file, you can also open a dialog file (extension: *.dlg). Then in the editor box, the event sequences belonging to the dialog are indicated. At the same time, the file is opened in the DialogEditor so that it's possible to edit the dialog's graphical presentation. For details, see the chapter 'UserDefined Dialogs'.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

180

Sequences

9.3.3

Saving sequences

To save the active sequence in the editor box to a file, use the menu item "Save" or the corresponding icon in the toolbar.

If you wish to change the name or location of the sequence or comment, use the menu item "Save as...".

Dialog: Save sequence file

The dialog starts up with the current sequence folder. After FAMOS starts, this is initialized according to the setting in the dialog "Extra / Options / Folders". Just like the file dialog or loading sequences, this dialog also comes with an extra icon in the toolbar and a comment box.

Clicking on this icon opens a menu offering the last sequence folders used. Selecting a menu entry is a quick way of switching directories. In the comment box, any comment on the sequence desired can be entered. Typical comments would be a short description of the sequence along with the parameters needed to call it. In the dialog "Extra / Options / Editor", you will find the presetting "Save breakpoints and bookmarks ". If this option is activated, the positions of any breakpoints and bookmarks is saved along with the file and restored upon the next load command. Remarks The file comment and the settings for the breakpoints and bookmarks are saved in the file in a permanent file header in the form of comment lines. FAMOS versions older than Version 4.0 display this file header. Since it is actually commented out, the execution of the sequence is not affected, but the fact that these hidden lines are displayed may be confusing. So if the sequences you create are also to work with older FAMOS-versions, you should leave the comment box empty and also switch off the option "Save breakpoints and bookmarks".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

181

Write- / Read - Protection

You can also save sequences with read-/ write-protection. To do this, select in the dialog the file type. FAMOS-sequence (Protected) (*.seq) For details, see the segment "Write- and Read-Protection for Sequences and Dialogs". Note Instead of a sequence-file, you can also save a dialog file (extension: *.dlg). The complete dialog is always saved, including the event sequences belonging to it, and its appearance as defined in the DialogEditor. 9.3.3.1 Write- and Read-Protection for Sequences and Dialogs

When transferring sequences or dialogs to other FAMOS users, it is often desirable to protect them against unintentional editing, or even to prevent the display of the sequence codes generally. For that purpose sequences and dialogs can be saved in a password-protected file format. Such files provide only limited access unless a password is entered. Nevertheless, the code can be run without any restrictions (using a SEQUENCE-command or respectively, a Dialog()-function), so that the files can either be integrated into the user's own analysis routines, or run at the push of a button as a defined favorite. As always, such sequences and dialogs can also be opened via the FAMOS input box and then started via "Sequence"/"Run".

Protection types
There is a distinction between two protection types: Write-protection: Both data types can be opened and displayed using the FAMOS input box, but are protected against editing. All debug options in the input box such as running of single steps and breakpoints are also allowed. Typically used for distributing sequences within a company, while preventing the sequences from accidently being altered by the user. Read-protection: Both file types can be opened and run in the FAMOS input box, but the source code of the sequence(s) is not displayed. The FAMOS input box only posts a message prompting the user to enter a password for enabling the display. Typically used for passing sequences to external users without revealing the exact code and algorithms used. Introductory Comment Special feature: If a sequence begins with a comment (each line is headed by a semicolon), then this introduction is always displayed, independent of the Write-/Read-Protection. The sequence's author thus has a possibility to inform the user about the purpose and use of the sequence and about any parameters required.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

182

Sequences

Default password:
In the dialog "Extra"/Options" - "Editor", a default password can be specified. If a file is to be saved with password protection, the user must enter a password to obtain access, and the password specidied here is the default password. When a password-protected file is opened, the file password is automatically compared with the default password recorded here. If the two passwords match, the file is automatically enabled.

Saving protected files:

To save a sequence or dialog with password protection, click to select the option "FAMOS-sequence [protected]" or "FAMOS dialog file [protected]" in the respective file selection dialog under File type. After clicking on the button "Save", the following dialog appears:

Write-protection / Read-protection: Determines the type of access protection. Password: Sets the password. The default password recorded in "Extra"/"Options"- "Editor" is initially suggested. By clicking on the "Change" button, it is possible to enter a different password. Be sure to remember the password entered here - without it, you will no longer have access to your own files! OK The file is saved in accordance with the settings selected. Cancel Returns to the file selection dialog

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

183

Notes on passing protected files to others

When passing protected files to others, be aware that the recipient must be using the FAMOS version 5.0 Revision 7 or higher. Older FAMOS versions are not able to read this file format. Also, note that when passing on sequences with read-protection, any introductory comment is still visible. As the author of the sequence, it can be used to inform the user about the sequence's purpose and use and about any parameters required.

Opening protected files

FAMOS input box When a password-protected file is opened with the FAMOS input box, the file password is automatically compared with the default password recorded here. If the two passwords match, the file is automatically enabled. Otherwise, the file is initially opened with limited access rights. In the input box's toolbar, an new additional symbol ("Padlock") appears.

To unlock the file, click on this button. You are next prompted to enter the password. Once it has been entered correctly, the write-protection is canceled/ the sequence contents are displayed. FAMOS Dialog Editor When a protected dialog file is opened with the FAMOS Dialog Editor, the password entered is at first compared with the default password which was set under "Extra"/"Options"- "Editor". If the two passwords match, the file is automatically enabled and the user obtains complete access rights. Otherwise, opening of the file is only continued once the correct password has been entered.

9.3.4

Closing sequences

You can close any sequence no longer needed by accessing the menu item "Close" in the main menu "Sequence" or in the title bar context menu. If the current state of the sequence is not yet saved, you must first respond to a confirmation prompt before you can exit. Note When a dialog's event sequence is concerned, the complete dialog is closed. If the dialog is also being edited in the Dialog-Editor, it is close there, as well.

9.4

Testing and Running Sequences

The following sections describe how to test and run sequences in the editor box. Certain particular features apply to event sequences in dialogs; see the chapter 'User-Defined Dialogs' for details. Sequences saved with read-protection are not displayed after loading and therefore cannot be tested step-by-step. Note As a practical way to use sequences, they are generally not loaded explicitly into the editor box, but called directly using the SEQUENCE-command. This call can, for instance, be entered in the editor's default input box and then executed. It is more convenient (and especially sensible in connection with parameterless sequences) to place such a sequence call among the "Favorites" in the Functions list. Then you simply start your sequence with a double-click.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

184

Sequences The same goes for user-defined dialogs, as far as applicable. These are called by means of the function Dialog. The following commands and aids for testing and running sequences in the editor box are available.

9.4.1

Run

The current sequence is run completely, starting with the first line; any breakpoints set are ignored. If any errors occur during the processing of the sequence, the run is interrupted and the position pointer indicates the text line with the error. If an event sequence is concerned, the associated dialog is started over from the beginning.

9.4.2

Run line

The active line is run. Instead of selecting the menu item, you can simply click on the "Execute"-button next to the active line.

9.4.3

Start (Debug)

The current sequence is run completely, beginning with the first line. Breakpoints are observed, which means that running of sequence comes to a stop when a line having a breakpoint. If no breakpoint is set, the same thing happens as in the case of "Run". If an event sequence is concerned, the associated dialog is started over from the beginning.

9.4.4

Continue

Processing of the current sequence continues from the active line. This command is used to resume execution of a sequence after a breakpoint was observed or the correction of a defective command line was performed. Running of the sequence halts again at the next breakpoint or error located, otherwise processing of the sequence continues till the end.

9.4.5

Single step

The active line of the current sequence is run and then the next line is made active. This lets you test a sequence step-by-step and evaluate the results of each individual line. However, if the active line contains a call to a subsequence or dialog, the entire subsequence or dialog is processed.

9.4.6

Single step in subsequence

This is basically the same as for "Single step", except when it comes to calling a subsequence (SEQUENCE-command) or a dialog (function: Dialog) in the active line. In the former case, the subsequence is automatically loaded, displayed and the first line is activated. In the latter case, the dialog is opened and execution stops at the event sequence's first line. Then you can continue to work through the subsequence step-by-step.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

185

9.4.7

Response to errors

If an error is encountered during processing of a sequence, processing is halted. If the error occurs within a subsequence, it is automatically loaded and displayed in the editor box. The line with the error is activated and an error message is displayed which prompts the user to acknowledge it before disappearing. In addition, a detailed description of the error appears in the FAMOS output window. If possible, the line with the error can be corrected immediately and processing of the sequence can be resumed by using the command "Continue" (or even "single step"). After correction has been performed, the altered sequence or dialog should be saved. Reference Notes on possible error messages can be found in the chapter 'Functions', section 'Error and Warning Messages'.

9.4.8

Canceling / interrupting sequence runs

While a sequence or dialog is being processed, FAMOS cannot be operated; the sequence or dialog must first be completed or aborted. A running sequence or an active dialog can be distinguished by the change in the appearance of the FAMOS title bar.

FAMOS title bar during running sequence

The Windows taskbar's notification area contains an additional icon. Right-clicking the mouse calls a context menu which offers a command for interrupting the current run.

"Cancel" completely ends the sequence or dialog running. "Interrupt (upon next command)" interrupts the run before the next sequence line is processed. Under some circumstances, the sequence involved is loaded to the Editor box. In this way, the results of the previous sequence processing can be viewed, for example, and the processing can be resumed by means of the command "Continue" or "Single step". To interrupt processing of a sequence, just click on the title bar or use the combination of keys "CTRL"+"PAUSE". Please note that the sequence can only be interrupted between two command lines, not within a function in progress. If a time-consuming operation is currently running, for example a long FFT, it must first be completed before the sequence can be stopped. Sequences can also interrupt themselves by means of "breakpoints", which are described in the next section.

9.4.9

Breakpoints

Breakpoints are a useful aid in testing long sequences. If a sequence run is initiated by the commands "Start (Debug)" or "Continue", processing is interrupted in any command line containing a breakpoint. The user thus gets the chance to look at the results of

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

186

Sequences sequence processing up until then and can resume processing using "Continue" or "Single step", as appropriate. The position of a breakpoint is denoted by a red stop-symbol at the left of the corresponding row:

To place or remove a breakpoint, position the cursor in the desired command line and select the menu item "Toggle breakpoint on/off" in the text box context menu, or use the combination of keys "CTRL"+"B". To remove all breakpoints in the current sequence, use the menu item "Advanced / Delete all breakpoints" in text box context menu. Note When saving a sequence, the breakpoint positions can optionally be saved, too. See the dialog under "Extra / Options / Editor"; the option "Save breakpoints and bookmarks".

9.4.10 Sequence-Status
If the sequence is interrupted during execution, for instance, due to an error or breakpoint or because the sequence is being run in single step mode anyway, a dialog can be called via the menu item "SequenceStatus" in the title bar context menu, which provides various information on the status of sequence execution.

This dialog is mainly useful if processing of a sequence was stopped within a subsequence. In that case, you obtain information here about which sequence or dialog called the subsequence and which parameters were passed. This is especially good to know if the sequence was called using wildcard parameters, which implies that the sequence was called repeatedly. In this case you obtain, for instance, the number of the current sequence run and the parameter value transferred in this run.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

187

Dialog: Sequence-status

Call stack: Shows the name of the current sequence and the order in which this sequence was called by higher-level sequences. Number of parameters passed Number of parameters to be passed upon calling. Contents / Passed as Display of parameters actually passed. In the case of parameters with wildcards, the original, unexpanded parameter is additionally displayed. Current run Display of the current run and the total number of runs which are to be processed by means of expanding a wildcard parameter. Reference See the section 'Process Directories' in this chapter for more info on using wildcards

9.5

Sequence commands
FAMOS has several sequence-commands available especially designed for use in sequences. These commands control the program run, reproduce functions from menu options or influence preferences, usually set in the dialogs. The commands are divided into the following function groups in the "Standard"functions list: 1. Commands: Load, Save 2. Commands: Variables, Execute 3. Commands: DDE, Import, Export..., As with functions, Short-help is also available for commands. Commands can also be parametrized using the Function Assistant. Example A short sequence is shown, in which a single value named "s_val" is loaded, its factorial calculated, displayed and saved under the name "facto".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

188

Sequences

Editor box with sample sequence

The elements written in uppercase letters are sequence-commands. Sequence-commands have slightly different syntax than other functions. The parameters are usually separated from the command by a space rather than by a comma, and are not enclosed in parentheses. Commands can't be used in assignments, since they don't have return values. Sequence commands are mainly used for process control, for example, to define loops or conditions. Sequence commands for other purposes (e.g. File Management) are often only provided for the sake of compatibility with older FAMOS-versions, since they have been replaced by more powerful and userfriendly functions in the meantime. All commands can be abbreviated, but the first four letters are necessary for correct identification. Lower case and upper case letters are treated the same, so commands may be written in either or both. The following commands have the same meaning: SHOW SHOW show Show VAR vAR var Var

Available commands are listed alphabetically and by group in the next chapter.

9.6
9.6.1

Sequences with Parameters

Concept
Sequences can be written with set variable names: Load Slope Show Slope This sequence is suitable only for loading and displaying the variable Slope. If another variable should be used in the sequence, the variable name must be changed accordingly: Load Arc Show Arc It is more suitable to use general variable names in the sequence, which are then replaced by the current name each time the sequence is called. These names are specified as parameters when calling the sequence. There are nine general names available: PA1, PA2,..., PA9 These parameters are designated as formal sequence parameters. The observed sequence is rewritten using a formal parameter to Load Show PA1 PA1

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences

189

9.6.2

Call

Sequences with formal parameters cannot be called with menu option "Start" in the Sequence Editor "Run" menu. Use the command "SEQUENCE" to call such a sequence. The sequence must be stored, for example under the name SHOW. The sequence name is specified first, then the current parameters, which replace the formal parameters in execution of the sequence. After storing the sequence, enter the line SEQUENCE Show Slope in the editor box and then execute this line. The program then searches for the sequence file in the current sequence directory. A complete path name can also be specified: Sequence c:\imc\seq\SHOW.SEQ Slope The sequence SHOW is executed, and the format parameter PA1 is replaced by Slope at each occurrence. Slope is the first current parameter transferred to the sequence. It appears as if the sequence Load Slope Show Slope is executed. The following call is also possible: Sequence Show Arc

9.6.3

Multiple Parameters

An example of a sequence with several parameters is a sequence which multiplies two variables. This sequence should be stored under the name MULTI: PA3 = PA1 * PA2 For example, consider the following function call: Sequence MULTI Slope Slope Square When the sequence is called, PA1 is replaced by the first parameter specified, here Slope; in the same manner, PA2 is replaced by the second parameter specified. Finally, PA3 is replaced by Square, so that the following operation is executed: Square = Slope * Slope When sequences are called with the command "SEQUENCE", the number of parameters transferred is not checked. If the sequence MULTI is called with only two parameters, the third is not replaced by a current parameter and remains in execution as PA3. In calling Sequence MULTI the operation PA3 Slope Slope

= Slope * Slope

is executed. The variable PA3 is created and entered in the variable list under this name.

9.6.4

Comments

In creating sequences with parameters, the parameters should always be sufficiently documented. Use the command "COMMENT" (abbreviated COMM) or a semicolon to introduce a comment: Comm Sequence MULTI Comm Multiplication of 2 factors ;*** PA1 : 1. Factor ;*** PA2 : 2. Factor ;*** PA3 : Product PA3 = PA1 * PA2 ; Multiplication Remarks Sequences may also contain blank lines to improve their structure. Comments may be inserted in the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

190

Sequences same line to the right next to the assignment, in which case the comment must begin with a semicolon. Information about necessary parameters can also be stored as sequence commentary, which can be composed upon saving the sequence.

9.6.5

Process Directories

Often the user would like to use one sequence for a series of files. The operators "*" and "?" are available for this purpose. They are used to designate names which may contain (to a certain extent) any letters or characters. For example, the following files are present in the directory set for loading files SLOPE.DAT SINTEST1.DAT...SINTEST5.DAT In the following sequence EVALUATE, a file should be loaded. The maximum of the waveform should be determined and added to a list of the existing maxima: Load PA1 List = Join( List, Max( PA1 )) The following sequences may be called one after the other: Sequence EVALUATE SINTEST1 Sequence EVALUATE SINTEST2 ... This procedure is possible, but rather complicated. The following is more suitable: Sequence EVALUATE * ( or: Sequence EVALUATE *.dat ) The operator "*" is used to call the sequence EVALUATE for each waveform stored in the set directory. The sequence is called six times. The operator "*" may also be used at the end of a series of letters. This allows the sequence to be used for all files which begin with a specified series of letters. Sequence EVALUATE SIN* ( or: Sequence EVALUATE SIN*.DAT) calls the sequence for all files beginning with SIN. The operator "*" is used as in DOS and is defined and interpreted just as in DOS. It is useful to use the operator "*" only in parameters loaded from a file at the beginning of a sequence using the command "Load". Reference Please refer to the sections 'Use of Text Variables' and 'Dialogs During Execution of Sequence'. The operators '*' and '?' can be used with the LOAD command to load a series of files using one command. The functions contained in the group '13> File functions' (FAMOS Function Reference) are also available for loading files and are more efficient than the LOAD command. For processing directory structures, it is often better to use the File-Kit functions, since these offer better control of the sequence process.

9.6.6

Incrementing Numbers

If a sequence should be called several times to process files, it is recommended to store calculated results from the waveform of the current file with consecutive numbering. The following sequence, named HISTOGR, which determines and stores the histogram of a waveform: Load PA2 = SAVE Delete PA1 Histo( PA1, 0, 0) PA2 PA2

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences The histograms of all waveforms SINTEST1, SINTEST2,... should be filed as HIST1, HIST2,... The operator "#" is added to the name HIST. The desired result is achieved using the following call: Sequence HISTOGR S* HIST# The sequence is now called for each file contained in the set directory with a name corresponding to the specified S*. The first time the sequence is called, the file first in alphabetical order, here SINTEST1, is transferred as the first parameter; HIST1 is transferred as second parameter. The following call is created: Sequence HISTOGR SINTEST1 HIST1 Sequence HISTOGR SINTEST2 HIST2 ... If the sequence is called more than nine times, the operator "#" can be used several times: Sequence HISTOGR S* HIST### The following calls are created: Sequence Sequence ... Reference Please refer to the sections 'Use of Text Variables' and 'Dialogs during execution of sequence' Remarks Sequences can be nested up to 10 times. Sequences called may also contain parameters. The operators "*" or "?" should only be used in no more than one parameter. If the operator is used in different forms in different parameters at the same time, the sequence is called as often as the minimum number of appropriate file names. When loading files in FAMOS format, the name extension ".DAT" is used; in other data formats, the name extension must always be explicitly specified. However, a different extension can be specified in FAMOSformat. Reference Refer to the chapter 'Application Examples' for examples on using sequences. HISTOGR HISTOGR SINTEST1 SINTEST2 HIST001 HIST002

191

9.7

Use of Text Variables

Text variables can be used in sequences to specify command parameters indirectly. They are often used as an alternative to the operators "*", "?" and "#", and can increase the clarity and flexibility of sequences. Possible uses would be: consecutive numbering of created variables in loops. use of names of formal parameters (variable or file name) for naming variable and file names created in the sequence. analysis of transferred parameters (e.g. file names) and the resulting conditional execution of commands. increased clarity and maintainability of sequences. Text variables may contain a maximum of 255 characters. Text constants are written in quotation marks and may be assigned: Path = "c:\imc\dat" Several functions are available for processing text variables. These functions are found in the group "10> Text functions" NOTE: Use the operator <...> to access the content of text variables. The content of a text variable in brackets < text variable > is replaced in the command line by the formula interpreter and then the created command line is processed. Using this operator, it is possible to specify

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

192

Sequences command and function parameters indirectly. DatName= "c:\imc\dat\slope" LOAD <DatName> The formula interpreter checks whether a text variable with the name DatName exists. If the text variable is found, the construct <DatName> is replaced by the content of the variable; if it is not found, an error message is generated. In the example above, the following command is executed: LOAD c:\imc\dat\slope NOTE: If a formal parameter is written in quotation marks, the current parameter is interpreted as a text constant during execution of the sequence. If a sequence containing the lines z = "PA1" y = "PA2" is called with the first parameter as slope and the second parameter the numerical value 3, the lines are then read as z = "slope" y = "3" after replacing PA1 and PA2. Two text variables, z and y, are created which contain the texts "slope" and "3". Example The following sequence integrates the waveform, transferred as parameter, and stores the result under a new name. The name of the waveform created is formed from the first four letters of the name of the transferred waveform, followed by the label "_int". ; Name of sequence : Integr ; Parameter PA1 : File name LOAD PA1 Name = TAdd(TPart( "PA1",1,4), "_int") <Name> = Int( PA1 ) SAVE <Name> When the sequence is called, the file slope.dat is loaded. In line four, first the parameter PA1 is replaced and interpreted as a text constant, due to the quotation marks. The line is then read as Name = Tadd (Tpart("slope",1,4),"_int") Without the quotation marks, PA1 would generate an error message, because the function TPart(,,) requires a text variable as the first parameter and the variable slope is a 'normal waveform'. The text variable Name now has the content "slop_int". In the next line, <Name> is replaced by the content of the text variable Name. The line now reads: slop_int = Int( slope ) The variable slop_int is created and then saved in the next line. Calling the sequence with the parameter tst1 creates the variable tst1_int, which represents the integral of the waveform tst1. Text variables can also be used to increase the clarity and maintainability of sequences. For example, if you change directories several times in one sequence, it is possible to assign the directories at the beginning of the sequence. The same is true for recurring options. If the options or path names change, the sequence must only be changed in one place. Example LadPfad1 = "c:\work\run1" LadPfad2 = "d:\usr\reference\data" BinForm1 = "2 2 0 0 0 Bits 0 -1 1" BinForm2 = "4 20 0 100 Data" ... LDIR <LadPfad1> BINARY <BinForm1> LOAD vers01.dat ...

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequences LDIR <LadPath2> BINARY <BinForm2> LOAD reference.dat ... LDIR <LadPath1> BINARY <BinForm1> LOAD vers01.dat ... Using this method, text variables can be assigned complete commands in order to save typing: ChDir1 = "LDIR c:\work\test1" ... <ChDir1> Attention Please note that the command interpreter must find and replace the text variable before the line is executed, which increases the execution time of the sequence. Example The histograms of all waveforms SINTEST... should be stored as HIST001, HIST002,... . This task was solved in the section 'Repeated execution of a sequence' using the operators "*" and "#". If the names of the waveforms have the form SINTESTx (x is a number), use the following sequence: index = 1 WHILE index <=5 ;*** Create file name SINTESTx TxNumber = TForm( index, "f10" ) FileName = TAdd ( "SINTEST", TxNumber) ;***Load file in variable temp LOAD <FileName> temp temp = HISTO( temp, 0, 0) ;***Create file name HIST00x TxNumber = TForm( index+1000, "f10" ) TxNumber = TPart( TxNumber, 2, 3 ) FileName = TAdd("HIST",TxNumber ) ;*** Store SAVE temp <FileName> index = index +1 END If you try to load a nonexistent file, the sequence is canceled. Example A directory contains only files in the form *xxx.dat ( xxx : three-digit number ), which were created by a 4channel measurement device and stored with incrementing numbers (experiment 1 created files *001.. *004, experiment 2 *005..*008 etc. ). The x-offset of all files belonging to the fourth channel should be changed: ; Name of sequence : OffsetC4 ; Parameter PA1 : File mask ; Parameter PA2 : New x-offset LOAD PA1 TxNumber = TPart( "PA1",TLeng(PA1)-2, 3) isChan4 = 1- mod(TtoSv(TXNumber,"f"),4) IF isChan4 XOffset PA1 PA2 END SAVE PA1 The command SEQUENCE OffsetC4 test*.dat 0.1 changes the x-offset of the waveforms test004.dat, test008.dat ... to 0.1.

193

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

194

Sequences

9.8

Dialogs During Execution of Sequence

The following functions and commands are available to the user during execution: PAUSE BoxMessage BoxOutput BoxText? BoxValue? DlgFileName FsDlgSelectFiles FsDlgSelectDirectory Reference The functions are described in detail in the manual 'FAMOS Function Reference'. The description of the command 'PAUSE' is to be found in the section 'Sequence Commands' of this manual Example The following sequence asks for a file name and then loads the specified file. The loaded waveform is interpolated and the result displayed. The user queries the interpolation factor and the name of the result variable. The length of the resulting waveform is displayed. The user can either cancel or load the next file. while 1 TxFile=DlgFileName("c:\imc\dat", "dat", "", 0 ) if TLeng( TxFile ) > 0 Load <TxFile> var factor= BoxValue?("Interpolation factor ?",2, 0) TxName= BoxText?( "Result name ?","Interpol", 0) <TxName>= IPol( var, factor ) Show <TxName> TxMessage = TAdd( TAdd("Length of ",TxName),":") BoxOutput( TxMessage, leng?(<TxName>), "", 0 ) end Pause Load next file? End Reference The input and output boxes generated by the functions named have a fixed appearance which the user cannot influence. For this reason, they are best used for simple, standard applications. However, FAMOS offers the user the extra option of personally designing input and output boxes. Refer to the chapter 'UserDefined Dialogs' for details. Displays messages and gives the possibility to cancel the sequence Output of interactive messages Output of messages Retrieves box text Retrieves box value Select a file name Selects filenames or directories. Both functions are included in the File-Kit.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference)

195

Sequence Commands (Reference)

10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides an overview and a detailed reference of all sequence commands available in FAMOS. Many of the sequence commands have become obsolete in the wake of new functions added to each successive version of FAMOS. Such new functions are generally more efficient, flexible and user-friendly and should be implemented in preference to analogous, older commands. The descriptions of commands in this chapter will refer to such functions where appropriate. The functions' explicit descriptions are located in the manual 'FAMOS Function Reference'. The manual 'Curve Window / Report Generator' contains descriptions of function libraries for the remote control of curve windows and of the Report Generator ('Curve Kit', 'Report Generator Kit)'. The main uses of sequence commands are in directing the order of steps within a sequence (loops, conditions, subsequences or subroutines), in replicating the operation of FAMOS menu items and in specifying presettings. By positioning the cursor in the editor box, you can use <Ctrl> + <F1> to call a tooltip (just as with functions); or <Shift> + <F1> to call the Function Assistant for help in parameterizing the command.

10.2

Overview of Commands by Group

B> Commands: Load, Save Commands for file management: Load, Save, Set directories and format options.

ASCII ASCOption ASCSave Binary CurveSetup DSPLoad

Set ASCII format for loading Specify ASCII format for storing Save data in ASCII format Set binary format for loading Display in a curve window configuration Load a DIGISKOP(c)-file ((c) remes GmbH)

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

196

Sequence Commands (Reference) FAMOS FASLOAD FFTOption LDIR Load MDIR Save SDIR WFTLoad Set FAMOS format Load a file created with imc-File Assistant format or by means of an importing expansion library Set FFT settings Set directory for loading files Load file Set directory for loading and saving sequences Store variable Set directory for saving files Load a Nicolet WF file ((c) Nicolet Instrument Corp.)

C> Commands: Variables, Execution Commands for controlling execution and setting variable characteristics.

Delete Else End If Pause Rename Sequence Show

Delete variable Conditional execution End command Conditional execution Pause sequence for user inquiry Rename a variable Execute sequence Show variable

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) TimeCopy TimeSet While XDelta XOffset XUnit YUnit Copy trigger time Set trigger time Conditional loop Set sampling rate Set x-offset Set x-unit Set y-unit

197

D> Commands : DDE, Import, Export, etc. Commands for data exchange with other applications and for remote control of print layout.

Application Clipboard Control ExitSequence Export Import Layout Request

Start application or DOS program Send curve image to clipboard Send commands by DDE End sequence processing Export variable Import variable Remote control of Report Generator, loading/ printout of report, variable transfer Receive data by DDE

10.3

Alphabetical Overview of Commands

Application ASCII ASCOption ASCSave Start application or DOS program Set ASCII formats for loading Set ASCII format for storing Store data in ASCII format

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

198

Sequence Commands (Reference) Binary Clipboard Comment Control CurveSetup Delete DSPLoad ELSE End ExitSequence Export FAMOS FASLoad FFTOption IF Import LAYOUT LDIR Load MDIR Pause Rename Request Save SDIR Sequence Show TimeCopy TimeSet Set binary formats Send curve image to clipboard Introduce comment Send command via DDE Display a curve window configuration Delete variable Load a DIGISKOP(c)-file ((c) Copyright remes GmbH) Conditional execution in connection with 'IF' End command End sequence processing Export variable Set FAMOS format Load a file created with imc-File Assistant format Set FFT settings Conditional execution Import variable Remote control of Report Generator, loading/ printout of layout, variable transfer Set directory for loading files Load file Set directory for loading and storing sequences Pause sequence for user inquiry Rename a variable Receive data via DDE Save variable Set directory for storing files Execute sequence Show variable Copy trigger time Set trigger time

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) WFTLoad WHILE xDelta xOffset xUnit yUnit Load a Nicolet WFT file ((c) 1988 Nicolet Instrument Corporation) Conditional loop Set sampling time Set x-offset Set x-unit Set y-unit

199

10.4

Application

Function Start an application or DOS-program. Instead of the APPLICATION command, the function Execute (FAMOS Function Reference) should be used in newly created sequences. Declaration APPLICATION Mode Name Parameter Parameter Mode Name Parameter Description This command starts an application or a DOS program. You can supply a command-line parameter and specify the mode, in which to start the application in Windows. Modes NORMAL MAXIMIZED MINIMIZED Remarks Always start the DOS program via the .PIF-files. The command can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.". Example Application Normal Notepad.exe Application Maximized c:\windows\Notepad.exe Two methods of stating the Windows application "Notepad". Application Normal c:\windows\pif\dosprog.pif A DOS program "dosprog" is started by calling its .pif-file. Application started in normal size Application started and maximized Application started and minimized to an icon Definition Windows mode, in which to start application Name of the application to start command-line parameter of the application to start

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

200

Sequence Commands (Reference)

10.5

ASCII

Function Sets ASCII-formats for loading files Declaration ASCII or ASCII SkipRange Type Divider Number Comma String Parameter SkipRange Definition Single value Length of the range to be skipped; entered in values or bytes according to the parameter Type. Single value Indicates how SkipRange should be interpreted. A value of one means that the skip range represent a number of values; a value of zero means that the skip range is to be interpreted as bytes. Single value Indicates which nth values are to be read from the values in the file. Single value Indicates the number of values to be read. Zero means that all values are read until the end of the file. Single value Indicates whether a decimal comma should be used. A value of one means that a decimal comma is to be used, a value or zero means a decimal point. A string searched for in the file before the skip range and the numeric values are read. The string may not contain any spaces. If no string is specified, the file will read the skip range from the beginning of the file.

Type

Divider

Number

Comma

String

Description The file format for loading files is set to ASCII format. If no parameters are specified for the "ASCII" command, the currently defined ASCII format is selected. A completely new ASCII format is defined when parameters are specified. Remarks 1. You must either specify all parameters or none. It is not possible to just specify one or a few of them. Each parameter, with the exception of the string, may be a fixed numerical value or a single value (Sv) variable. The use of variables as parameters allows variable file formats to be read. 2. The "ASCII" command represents an automation of the dialog box "Options / File - Load/Import / ASCII". This dialog box is accessed by selecting the "Options" button in "Load file" when the ASCII format is selected. A detailed description and further examples are found in the Chapter ' File Management'. 3. For ASCII-Import, an alternative to this command is to use the imc File Assistant to create an import filter and to use the filter by means of the command FASLADEN or the function FileOpenFAS. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Load DATA.ASC The last ASCII format specified is set again; files were loaded in a different format, e.g. FAMOS format, since it was last used. Then the ASCII-file DATA.ASC is loaded. ASCII 0 0 2 0 0 Costs Load DATA.ASC One column is read from a file containing a table of ASCII values. The header of this table is "Costs". The first of the two columns is read. Vleng = 10 Data = 100 ASCII Vleng 1 1 Data 1 Load DATA.ASC 100 values are read from a ASCII file. A skip range with a length of 10 bytes is skipped at the beginning of the file. The numbers are read with a decimal comma. Reference Commands Binary, Load Chapter File Management, Functions FileOpenASCII, FileLineRead

201

10.6

ASCOption

Function Specifies the file format for storing files in ASCII format. Declaration ASCOption Parameter Number format 0 1 2 Decimal sign Exact 0 1 NumberFormat DecimalSign Exact Width Definition All values are saved in exponential display All values are saved in fixed-point display The shortest notation is selected for each value Decimal point Decimal comma withHeader withXValues

In number formats 0 and 1, the number of places after the decimal; in number format 2, the total number of significant places Value range 0..7 Minimum output width; if the width of the value is smaller than this parameter, the value is filled with zeros from the left Value range 0..99 0 1 No header A standardized header, containing significant characteristics for the variable, entered at the beginning of the file Y-values are written in a vertical column Each line in the file contains the x-value, then a tab and then the corresponding y-value

Width

WithHeader

WithXValues

0 1

Description The ASCII format for saving files (ASCSave, menu option 'File/Save' ) is specified here.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

202

Sequence Commands (Reference) Remarks 1. The command ASCOption effectively automates the dialog box 'Options / File -Save/Export / ASCII '. You can do this, for example, by selecting the 'Options' button in the 'Save file' dialog when the ASCII format is selected. Please refer to Chapter 'File Management'. for further information and further examples. The header is also described here. The parameters can be fixed numbers or single value variables. 2. Instead of the commands ASCOPTION and ASCSAVE, you can also use the function FileOpenASCII2. This offers much more flexible file export capability and can also be use to save multiple waveforms in multi-column ASCII files. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Reference Chapter File Management, Command ASCSave Functions FileOpenASCII, FileLineWrite

10.7

ASCSave

Function Saves data in ASCII format. Declaration ASCSave VarName ASCSave VarName FileName Parameter VarName FileName Definition Name of the variable to be saved File name ( or complete directory ), under which the variable should be saved ( optional )

Description The variable specified as a parameter is saved as an ASCII file; the variable can be a single value or a normal waveform. If no file name is specified, the variable is saved under its own name in the directory currently selected for storing variables. The standard file name extension is ".ASC". When the file name is specified, the variable is saved under this name. If a complete directory is specified, this is used for storing the variable. The filename may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. Remarks This command cannot be used to store complete data groups. Use this command to save individual channels. Storing texts is also not possible with this command; use the command FileLineWrite for saving texts. Instead of the commands ASCOPTION and ASCSAVE, you can also use the function FileOpenASCII2. This offers much more flexible file export capability and can also be use to save multiple waveforms in multi-column ASCII files. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example Data = Int(Data) ASCSave Data The variable Data is integrated and stored in the file "DATA.ASC". Hist = Histo( Data1, 10, 6 )

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) ASCSave Hist c:\data\histogr\hist001 Hist = Histo( Data2, 10, 6 ) ASCSave Hist c:\data\histogr\hist002 A histogram is calculated for each of the waveforms Data1 and Data2 and are stored in the specified directory under the names 'HIST001.ASC" and 'HIST002.ASC' in ASCII format. ASCSave Hist "c:\data\histogr\My Hystogram" The filename contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Command ASCOption Chapter File Management Function FileOpenASCII

203

10.8

Binary

Function Sets binary formats. Declaration BINARY or for real numbers BINARY Type Bytes SkipRange Number String or for integers BINARY Type Bytes Number Bits String Space

SkipRange Space Sign Minimum Maximum

Binary formats with real numbers (floating-point display) Type Single value Type = 1 real numbers in Intel format (80 x 86) Type = 3 real numbers in Motorola format (etc.) Bytes Single value Number of bytes in a real number Select between 4-bytes-, 6-bytes or 8-bytes-display. SkipRange Space Single value Length of skip range is bytes. Single value Indicates how many bytes should be skipped between the individual numbers to be read. Single value Indicates how many numbers are to be read. Zero means that all values to the end of the file should be read. A string searched for in the file before the skip range and the numbers are read. The string may not contain any spaces. If no string is transferred as parameter, the skip range is read from the beginning of the file.

Number

String

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

204

Sequence Commands (Reference) Binary formats with integers Type Single value Type = 2 integers in Intel format (80 x 86) Type = 4 integers in Motorola format (etc.) Bytes Single value Number of bytes in an integer Select 1-, 2- or 4-bytes display. SkipRange Space Single value Length of skip range in bytes Single value Indicates how many bytes should be skipped between the individual numbers to be read. Single value Indicates the number of numbers to be read. Zero means that all values up to the end of the file should be read. Single value Number of valid bits in an integer. Used in combination with minimum and maximum for scaling of integers. Sign Single value Indicates whether integers are to be interpreted as signed (two's complement display) or unsigned. A value of 1 means "signed", zero means "unsigned". Single value Real value of the smallest number displayable in the specified format, is a real number; also interpreted as the lower limit of the measurement range. Single value Real value of the largest displayable number in the specified format, is a real number; also interpreted as the upper limit of the measurement range. A string searched for in the file before the skip range and the numbers are read. The string may not contain any spaces. If no string is transferred as parameter, the skip range is read from the beginning of the file.

Number

Bits

Minimum

Maximum

String

Description The file format for loading files is set to binary format. The Binary command effectively automates the dialog box 'Options / File - Load/Import / Binary '. You can do this, for example, by selecting the 'options' button in the 'Load file' dialog when the binary format is set. Please refer to Chapter 'File Management'. for a detailed description and further examples. Remarks The currently set binary format is used when no parameters are added to the Binary command. If parameters are specified, a binary format is completely redefined. The parameter to be specified depends on the type of binary format to be read. If one parameter is specified, all parameters must be specified. Each parameter, with the exception of a string, may be a fixed numerical value or a single value variable. Using variables as parameters allows variable file formats to be read. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Example Binary Load DATA.BIN The binary format used is set again; files were loaded in a different format, e.g. FAMOS format, since it was last used. The file DATA.BIN is loaded. Binary 1 4 20 8 100 Data Load DATA.BIN The format for reading the following binary format is defined: the beginning of the file contains information about an experiment; the actual binary data are introduced by the string "Data:". Then real numbers in 4bytes display are read. The first 5 numbers (= 20 bytes) are skipped, and then only every third number (i. e.: 2 * 4 = 8 bytes space between the numbers) is read. 100 numbers are read; the waveform generated in FAMOS has a length of 100. Mini = -10.0 Maxi = 10.0 Bits = 12 Binary 2 2 0 0 0 Bits 0 Mini Maxi Load DATA.BIN All numbers are to be read from a file. The beginning of the file contains no information to be skipped, only numbers in as 12-bit values in 2-byte display are contained. These unprocessed data originate in an AD-converter, and have no sign. The measurement range of the converter is -10V to 10V. Reference Chapter File Management

205

10.9

Clipboard

Function Copies curve window contents to Windows Clipboard. Declaration Clipboard NameofVariable Description This command lets you copy a curve-graph into the Clipboard. From there it can be loaded into other Windows applications (word processing software, graphics programs, etc.). Remarks The command can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.". Example Clipboard slope The curve-graph of the variable "slope" is copied to the Clipboard. If the waveform wasn't yet displayed, then it will first be displayed in accordance with the valid presettings, then copied and the curve window subsequently deleted. Reference Documentation for the Curve Window / 'Clipboard'

10.10 Comment
Function Introduces a comment. Declaration COMMENT Comment text ; Comment text

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

206

Sequence Commands (Reference) Command; Comment text Parameter Comment text Description This command introduces a comment. All characters after this command are interpreted as a comment. This command is suitable to write comments for sequences. To increase legibility, a semicolon should be used to introduce a comment line. Comments introduced by a semicolon can remain in the same line even after a command or formula has been executed. COMMENT -- This is a short sequence, COMMENT -- which loads and displays a file. ; -- A parameter should be transferred. LOAD PA1 ; Load parameter SHOW PA1 ; Display parameter A waveform is loaded and displayed. The first three lines are comments. Definition Any text as comment

10.11 Control
Function Send a command to another application via DDE. Instead of the command 'Control', the function DDESend should be used when creating new sequences. Declaration Control Application Topic Command {Variable} Parameter Application Topic Command Variable Description FAMOS operates as a DDE-client, the application addressed as a DDE-server. The entries "Application" and "topic" cause FAMOS to select another DDE-capable application and request a conversation. If the request is complied with, FAMOS then supplies the name of the item desired. FAMOS waits until the server either transfers the data, whereupon the conversation is concluded, or denies the request. The variable specified in "Variable" now contains the data received. If the transfer wasn't possible, it contains the return value from the DDE-application addressed. Remarks The individual parameters for the Control-command may not contain space characters. FAMOS does not check the syntax of the "Command"-entry. Please perform a check of this entry yourself to ensure that it corresponds to the DDE-specifications of the application addressed. The parameter "{Variable}" is optional. FAMOS sends an error message, if DDE-application (server) addressed doesn't answer or the data request was denied. If the application (server) addressed is busy, FAMOS waits until it is free. Definition Name of the DDE-application addressed Designation of the DDE-topic DDE- command in accordance with the format-specifications of the Application optional single value; FAMOS variable for reception of return value

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) FAMOS-commands are case-insensitive (upper or lower-case letters are equally valid). However, some DDE applications do distinguish between upper and lower case. Have regard, therefore, for correct spelling The command can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import , Export etc.". Example Control Trans Timebase [dt=1.5e-3] "Trans" is the name of the receiving DDE application, "Timebase" the name of the topic. The DDEcommand is "dt=1.5e-3" in this case. No return value is requested. Control Trans Timebase [trigger][arm] RetVal 'Trans' is the name of the receiving DDE application, 'Timebase' the name of the topic. Two commands are being issued by Control simultaneously, and are written together. The return value of the DDE conversation is contained in the variable 'RetVal'. In this way, the value is made available for checking. Control Trans1 Timebase [hello] Control Trans2 Gain [100] Varying DDE servers can be addressed. Reference Command Request Functions DDEInq, DDESet, DDESend

207

10.12 CurveSetup
Function Displays a waveform in a curve window configuration. This command has been only been kept to maintain compatibility with previous versions of FAMOS. We strongly recommend using the more efficient Curve Kit commands when creating new sequences. Declaration CURVESETUP Variable FileName Parameter Variables FileName Definition Name of variable to be displayed Name of the curve file; complete DOS name possible

A waveform is displayed as a curve window in a predefined curve window configuration. The file with the curve configuration (*.ccv) must have been created in a curve window using the menu option 'Save' (Curve Window documentation). Remarks A complete DOS directory name can be specified when the file is not contained in the standard directory. Set the standard directory for curve configurations in the dialog "Options"/ "Directories". The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". The Report Generator remote control kit offers more effective functions. Refer to the chapter 'Functions'/ 'imc-Kits' for more information on registering and using this kit; information on this topic is also available in the Curve Window / Report Generator manual. Example CurveSetup Slope Config1 CurveSetup Slope Config1.ccv CurveSetup Slope c:\imc\ccv\Config1.ccv

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

208

Sequence Commands (Reference) (three options to load a curve window configuration and display in the configuration "Slope".) Reference Curve Manager manual, chapter 'Curve Window Presettings', remote controlling the curve window is described in the 'Curve Kit' documentation.

10.13 Delete
Function Deletes a variable. Declaration DELETE VarName Parameter VarName Description The variable specified as a parameter is deleted from the variable list. The wildcards character may be specified to delete a series of variables. The wildcard character '?' represents an exact character, '*' represents an undefined number of characters. Delete * All variable are deleted. Delete ?? All variables, whose name has exactly 2 characters are deleted. Delete *1a* All variables, in which the string '1a' is present (also at the beginning or end) are deleted. Delete a*:channel? All channels with the name 'Channel', followed by any character, are deleted from those data groups whose names begin with an 'a'. Remarks The corresponding function group is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example Var = 2 Save Var Delete Var A variable is created, saved and then deleted. Delete Group:Channel One channel in a data group is deleted. Reference Menu option: 'Variable / Delete' Definition Name of variable to be deleted

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference)

209

10.14 DSPLoad
Function Loads a DIGISKOP(c) file (Copyright remes GmbH) Declaration DSPLOAD Board Channel FileName VarName Parameter Board Channel FileName VarName Description A DIGISKOP(c) file group, defined by the remes company, is loaded in FAMOS. This DIGISKOP(c) file group consists of a *.DSP, *.PTR and *.DRD file, differentiated only by their file name extension. These files contain information and measurement values from 1 to 5 data acquisition boards and 1 to 160 channels per board. The desired file section is read using the parameters "Board" and "Channel". The parameter "Board" can accept values between 1 and 5, the parameter "Channel" values between 1 and 160. Remarks The file name can be a complete path name, including directory and file name extension, but may also be specified without. The file is then searched for in the directory from which FAMOS loads data. The file name extensions are selected automatically. The filename can also be specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example DSPLoad 4 1 DSCP DSPLoad 4 1 c:\dig\DSCP.DSP board4_1 In both cases, the first channel of the fourth board in read from the file group "DSCP.*" and entered in FAMOS under the name "board4_1". board = 4 Chan = 1 DSPLoad board chan DSCP data Two single values define the desired range of the file group "DSCP". The range is entered under the name "data". DSPLoad 4 1 "c:\My Data\DSCP.DSP" board4_1 The pathname contains spaces and must therefore be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Chapter 'File management' / 'DSP Format' Definition Single value - Indicates the board to be loaded (1...5) Single value - Indicates the channel to be loaded (1...160) Name of the file to be loaded Variable to be entered in the file section

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

210

Sequence Commands (Reference)

10.15 ELSE
Function Conditional execution, when IF condition is not true. Declaration ELSE Description Operations can be executed conditionally using the command ELSE in connection with 'IF'. The operations between the commands ELSE and END are executed when the specified condition for IF is not fulfilled. Remarks The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example LOAD Wave IF Max( Wave) > 5 Show Wave ELSE Delete Wave END A waveform is loaded. If the maximum of the waveform is greater than 5, it is displayed; if not, it is deleted. Reference Commands IF, END

10.16 END
Function Ends a command. Declaration END Description Ends a series of commands belonging to a condition or loop introduced by the commands IF, ELSE or WHILE. Remarks The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example Number = GrChanNum?( DataGroup ) index = 1 TooLow = 0 Meanvalues = Mean( DataGroup) WHILE index <= Number IF meanvalues:[index] > 2 Show DataGroup:[index] ELSE TooLow= TooLow + 1 END index = index+1 END The mean value for each channel in a data group is calculated. If the mean value is greater than 2, the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) channel will be displayed; otherwise a variable is incremented which records the number of channels with a smaller mean value. Reference Commands IF, WHILE, ELSE, ExitSequence

211

10.17 ExitSequence
Function Ends sequence processing Declaration EXITSEQUENCE [Option] Parameter Option Definition 0 or no specification: Sequence processing finished completely. 1: Skip to end of current sequence. In the case of a subsequence, processing is resumed in the calling sequence. 2: Skip to end of current sequence. In the case of a cyclical subsequence (called with parameters with wildcards), the system skips to the next cycle, otherwise processing is resumed in the calling sequence. Description Processing of the sequence is ended. Depending on the given option, only the running subsequence is completed (system skips back to calling sequence) or the entire sequence processing is terminated. Remarks The command is to be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.". Example A sequence is interrupted by user input: Stop = BoxMessage( "Evaluation", "Cancel evaluation?", "?4") IF Stop EXITSEQUENCE END Calling the following sequence with SEQUENCE Evaluation *.dat Results in the evaluation of all "*.dat"-files in the current folder which were successfully loaded in FAMOSformat. ; Sequence "Evaluation.seq" fh = FileOpenDSF("PA1", 0) IF fh < 1 EXITSEQUENCE 2 END ... ; Extensive analysis follows ... However, if the parameter for EXITSEQUENCE is changed to a 1, processing is stopped as soon as the opening of a file fails (e.g. because the file does not exist in FAMOS-format). Reference Command PAUSE

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

212

Sequence Commands (Reference)

10.18 Export
Function Exports a variable Declaration EXPORT VarName Parameter VarName Description The variable transferred as a parameter is exported. The variable itself remains unchanged. Once the export is successfully complete, the variable is available for import to other imc applications. Data can be exchanged between different imc applications using the commands Import and Export. Remarks The command is found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export, etc.". Example Load DATA DATA = Cut (DATA, 0 's', 10 's') Export DATA The waveform DATA is loaded, a section selected and then exported. Reference Menu option: 'Variable / Export' Curve Window Manual / 'Export' Definition Name of the variable to be exported

10.19 FAMOS
Function Sets the FAMOS format. Declaration FAMOS Description The file format for loading files is set to the FAMOS format. The format setting remains even after the program is ended. Remarks The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". To load files in FAMOS format you can also use the functions in group "13>File Functions". These are much more powerful, especially for loading files containing multiple waveforms. Example FAMOS Load DATA The file format for loading files is set to FAMOS format. The file DATA.DAT is loaded and entered in the variable list under the name DATA. Reference Chapter 'File management' / 'Loading Files'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Function FileOpenDSF

213

10.20 FASLoad
Function Loads a file whose format was defined by the user (by means of either the imc File Assistant or the import/ export expansion libraries). Declaration FASLOAD TxFileName, TxFormatName,TxVarName Definition Name of the file to be loaded (transfer as text constant in "" or as text variable) Format specifications (optional) This name is used only when the file contains exactly one data object. Otherwise, the name specified in the format definition is used (transfer as text constant in "" or as text variable) Description There are two ways of specifying the format in the parameter <TxFormat>: Import filter (File Assistant) The format is determined by an importation description file (an import filter) created by means of the imc File Assistant. Such an import filter file usually takes the extension ".fas". This file's name is then supplied as the parameter. Unless a complete pathname is provided, the system searches in the default definitions' folder ("Extra"/ "Options"/ "Folders"). Import/export expansion library The necessary functionality is provided by an import/export expansion library. Such libraries (Dynamic Link Library, DLL) are offered by imc or our distribution partners and can be seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS user's interface and function library. This means that FAMOS can be flexibly adapted to support additional file formats. One example is the DLL for importing and exporting the MATLAB file format which is included in the standard FAMOS package. The syntax of the parameter <TxFormat> is then as follows: "#DLLName|FormatName|Parameter>" DLLName states the expansion library's filename; the extension ".dll" can be omitted. FormatName states the name of the desired format (an expansion library can certainly support multiple formats). This can be omitted if the DLL provides only one format and thus needs no additional parameters. Examples FASLOAD "1.txt","#MyFormat.DLL" FASLOAD "1.txt","#MyFormat.DLL|Txt" FASLOAD "1.asc","#MyFormat.DLL|Asc|Header=yes" All specifications needed here are provided by the expansion library's maker. Remarks If the file name does not contain a complete directory path, the directory currently set for loading is used. Once FAMOS has been started, this path is found in the dialog 'Options/ Directories' and can be reset using the command LDIR.

Parameter TxFileName TxFormat TxVarName

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

214

Sequence Commands (Reference) A Wildcard can be entered in a file name in order to load a series of files. The Wildcard '?' stands for certain character, '*' stands for an undefined number of characters. The variable name is optional. It is used only when the file to be read contains exactly one data object. Otherwise, the variable names specified with the File Assistant are used. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". To load user-defined files, use the functions in the function group "13> File Functions". Example FASLOAD "Wave.dat", "Osci2311.fas", "Channel1" The file WAVE.DAT is read using the specified format description format and saved in FAMOS as a variable with the name "channel". FASLOAD "Data.mat", "MatLab_Imp.DLL" The file DATA.MAT in the MatLab -format is loaded. TxFormatFile = "myformat.fas" FASLOAD "c:\imc\*.*", TxFormatFile All files are loaded in the directory c:\imc . FASLOAD "a??.*", TxFormatFile All files whose names begin with an 'a' and consist of three characters are loaded in the current directory. Any file name extension can be used. FASLOAD "*a1*.dat", TxFormatFile All files with the extension 'dat', whose names contain the string '1a' (at the beginning or end) are loaded. Reference Menu option: 'File'/ 'Load...' Command LDIR Function FileOpenFAS

10.21 FFTOption
Function Makes FFT settings. Instead of the command FFTOPTION, the function SetOption should be used for newly created sequences. Declaration FFTOPTION Window Mode Parameter Window Mode Description This function allows the user to change the presettings for the FFT in a sequence. Use 'Window' to specify the window function. The 'Mode' parameter determines the way the waveform length is treated. Definition Single value - window function (0...4) Single value - determines length of waveform

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Window 0 1 2 3 4 5 Mode 0 1 Reduce waveform length to next power of two Increase waveform length to next power of two and fill with zeros Rectangular Hamming Hanning Blackman Blackman/Harris Flat-Top

215

Remarks The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example FFTOption 4 1 FFTRes = FFT( Wave ) A Blackman/Harris window function was selected. The waveform is extended to the next power of two and filled with zeros. Reference Menu option: 'Options / Functions'

10.22 IF
Function Conditional execution Declaration IF SvVariable IF Expression Parameter SvVariable Expression Description Operations can be executed conditionally using the command 'IF'. The series of commands is executed only if the single value specified as a parameter is greater than zero or the specified expression returns a value greater than zero. Otherwise, execution of the sequence is continued after the accompanying commands ELSE or END. A complex expression is allowed as the parameter, for example functions, indexed variables or complete Definition Single value Formula, comparison, etc.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

216

Sequence Commands (Reference) formulas. However, this expression must return a single value. Often, an arithmetical comparison operator or logical operation is applied here. WHILE( i+ 23 ) >= StDev( Waveform ) ... END WHILE (i>1) AND (i< 100) ... END Remarks The 'IF' command can be used in two forms. In the first, the 'IF' command is closed by "End". All operations between the introductory command 'IF' and the closing command "End" are executed only if the condition is fulfilled. In the second form, 'IF' is ended by the command ELSE, which is then ended by the command 'End'. All operations between the introductory command 'IF' and ELSE are executed only when the condition is fulfilled. Otherwise, all operations between ELSE and END are executed. One of the two series of operations is executed, depending on fulfillment of the condition. The condition is checked only once in each case. No loops are created. Conditions can be nested up to ten levels. Indent the operations slightly to optically separate the content of a condition from the remaining sequence and to separate the various levels of nested conditions or loops from each other. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example If Max(Wave) > 5 Show Wave Else Delete Wave End A waveform is loaded. If the maximum of the waveform is greater than 5, it is displayed; if not, it is deleted. If Wave[1] < 0 Wave[1] = 0 End When the first value in a waveform is less than zero, it is set back to zero. m = Mean ( Wave ) If m > 0.8 BoxOutput( "Mean value:", m, "", 0 ) End The mean value of a waveform is calculated. If the mean value is greater than 0.8V, an output box containing the mean value is generated. m = Mean ( Data ) IF (m < 0.1) OR (m > 0.9) BoxOutput( "Warning", "Mean value!", "!1" ) End The mean value of a waveform is calculated. If the mean value is outside of a given range, a warning is displayed. Reference Commands WHILE, ELSE, END

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference)

217

10.23 Import
Function Imports a variable Declaration IMPORT VarName Parameter VarName Description A variable is imported and entered in the variable list under a new name. It must have been exported by another imc application. The name of the exported variable is ignored. Remarks This command has no effect if no variable is exported. The commands Import and Export allow data to be exchanged between various imc applications. Note that, unlike the menu option Import, a variable name must be specified under which the imported variable is made available. Thus, the name of the exported variable is not used. The command is found in the group "D> Commands DDE, Import, Export, etc.". Example Import WAVE Maximum = Max (WAVE) Delete WAVE Show Maximum A waveform is imported under the name WAVE, its maximum is calculated and displayed. The imported waveform is no longer needed and is deleted. Reference Menu option: 'Variable'/Import' Curve Manager Manual, 'Export' Definition Name which contains the variable to be imported.

10.24 Layout
Function Remote control of the Report Generator. This command has been only been kept to maintain compatibility with previous versions of FAMOS. We strongly recommend using the more efficient Report Generator Kit commands when creating new sequences. Declaration LAYOUT PRINT LAYOUT Load FileName LAYOUT Object OTitle Variable Parameter FileName Otitle Definition Name of the configuration file to load Title (Name) of the Report generator object to be written to

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

218

Sequence Commands (Reference) Variable Description LAYOUT Print This function prints the current Print Layout. LAYOUT Load A configuration file is loaded to the Report Generator. If you set placeholders in the Report Generator, use this command to restore all placeholders. The Report Generator is started as an icon. The specification for the filename may also be a complete path name, if the desired configuration file is not in the default folder. The default folder for Report Generator files can be set either in the Report Generator itself or in the dialog "Options / Folders". LAYOUT Object A variable is passed to a Report Generator object. The desired object in the layout is selected by name. Variables can be passed to text or curve objects. Before transfer of a curve object, the waveform must be displayed in a curve window. Remarks The Report Generator Kit for remote control of the Report Generator has more efficient functions available. Information about registering and using the Report Generator Kit is found in the chapter 'Functions' / 'imc-Kits', as well as in the "Curve Window / Report Generator" manual. The command is found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export, etc.". Example LOAD Wave.dat SHOW Wave Txt = "Created by S.Smith" LAYOUT LOAD c:\imc\drb\Drb1.drb LAYOUT OBJECT Curve Wave LAYOUT OBJECT Name Txt LAYOUT PRINT A Report Generator mask is loaded. A curve and text object is transferred to the Report Generator and then the report is printed. Reference Chapter 'Application Examples' Chapter 'Functions' / 'imc Kit Interface' Report Generator Kit Manual' Variable to be transferred

10.25 LDIR
Function Sets directory for loading files. Instead of the LDIR command, the function SetOption should be used in newly created sequences. Declaration LDIR Directory

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Parameter Directory Description The directory for loading files is reset. After this command is executed, the new directory specified will be used to load files. The directory name may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. These commands can also be called without parameters (meaning: without specifying the folder). In that case, the folder set under "Options/Folders" is used as the current default. Remarks This directory remains valid until: either the LDIR command or the function SetOption is called again a file is called from another directory using the dialog box Load in the "File" menu or a new directory for loading files is defined using the dialog "Options / Folders". The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save" Example FAMOS Load WAVE1 LDIR C:\Experiment Load WAVE2 First the file WAVE1 and then the file C:\EXPERIMENT\ WAVE2.DAT is loaded from the current directory in FAMOS format. LDIR "c:\My Trials on 12-1-98" The directory name contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Command Load, function SetOption Definition Complete specification of a directory

219

10.26 Load
Function Loads a file. Declaration LOAD LOAD DatName DatName VarName Definition Name of file to be loaded Name under which the variable is to be entered in the variable list ( optional )

Parameter DatName VarName

Description The specified file is loaded in the currently set file format (FAMOS, BINARY or ASCII) and its data objects entered in the variable list. A complete file name, including the path, can be specified. If the second parameter is missing, the file name without directory and extension is used as the variable name.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

220

Sequence Commands (Reference) In FAMOS files created with the version 3.0, the variable names are stored in the file; the variables are then created under the same name after being loaded in FAMOS. When the second parameter is specified, exactly one data object is read from the file and stored under the specified name. Wildcards can also be specified in file names to load a series of files. The wildcard '?' stands for an exact character, '*' stands for an undefined number of any characters. Load c:\imc\*.* All files are loaded in the directory c:\imc. Load a??.* All files whose names begin with 'a' and consist of three characters are loaded in the current directory. Any file name extension can be used. Load *a1*.dat All files with the extension 'dat', whose names contain the string '1a' (at the beginning or end), are loaded. Remarks If the FAMOS data format is set, a file name extension must not be specified. The extension ".DAT" is automatically used. End a file name with a period if an extension is not desired. If no path is specified, the path set for loading files is used. Once FAMOS is started, this path is found in the standard directory in the dialog 'Options'/ 'Directories'. It can be changed using the command LDIR. The filename may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Use the commands DSPLoad or WFTLoad to load files in Digiskop- or Nicolet format. To load files defined with the imc File Assistant, use the command FASLoad. The functions in the group "13> File Functions" can also be used to load FAMOS files. These are much more powerful than the command LOAD, especially for loading files containing multiple waveforms. Example FAMOS LOAD c:\imc\dat\Wave var1 The file WAVE.DAT is loaded in FAMOS format and the resulting variable is entered in the variable list under the name "var1". ASCII LOAD DBAS.ASC The specified ASCII file is loaded and entered in the variable list under the name DBAS. BINARY LDIR c:\BINDATA LOAD *.BIN All files with the extension 'BIN' are loaded in binary format in the specified directory. LOAD "c:\imc\My Data\Data" The filename contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Menu option: 'File'/'Load...' Commands LDIR, Binary, ASCII, FASLoad Function FileOpenDSF

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference)

221

10.27 MDIR
Function Sets directory for loading and saving sequences. Instead of the command MDIR, the function SetOption should be used for newly created sequences. Declaration MDIR Directory Parameter Directory Description The directory for loading and saving sequences is reset. After this command is executed, this directory is used to load and store sequences. This concerns the command Sequence as well as the dialog for loading and storing sequences in the Sequence Editor. The directory name may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces.These commands can also be called without parameters (meaning: without specifying the folder). In that case, the folder set under "Options/Folders" is used as the current default. Remarks This directory remains valid until: either the MDIR command or the function SetOption is called again a sequence file is loaded from or stored in another folder or a new folder is defined using the dialog under "Options / Folders". The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example FAMOS SEQUENCE SEQ1 MDIR C:\MACRO SEQUENCE SEQ2 First the sequence SEQ1 and then C:\MACRO\SEQ2.SEQ is called from the current directory. MDIR "c:\My Trials on 12-1-98" The directory name contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Command Sequence Definition Complete specification of a directory

10.28 Pause
Function Pause sequence for user request. Declaration PAUSE Outputtext Parameter Outputtext Definition Any text to be displayed

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

222

Sequence Commands (Reference) Description The sequence pauses and a dialog box containing the buttons "OK" and "Cancel", as well as the specified text. This allows the user to view intermediate results in the sequence or stop the sequence. Select the "OK" button to continue executing the sequence; select the "Cancel" button to interrupt the sequence . Remarks The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". The BoxOutput function can be used alternatively to display user information. The functions BoxValue? and BoxText?' are available to enter texts or values by the user. Use the function BoxMessage for simple decision trees ('Yes/No'). To interrupt execution of the sequence for a specified delay time, you can use the function Sleep. Example Show x Pause First Step x = x + 1 Pause Continue calculation? x = x + 2 The original waveform x and the first intermediate result can be viewed. Reference Functions BoxMessage, BoxOutput, BoxValue?, BoxText?, DlgFileName, Sleep Command ExitSequence

10.29 Rename
Function Renames a variable. Declaration RENAME VarName1 VarName2 Parameter VarName1 VarName2 Description A variable is renamed. The old name is transferred as the first parameter, the new name as the second. Remarks If a variable with the desired new name already exists, this variable is deleted and the old variable is overwritten by the new name. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example Load Data Rename Data Calcu Show Calcu A waveform is loaded, renamed and displayed. Group:Channel1 = Data Rename Group:channel1 Show Group:MyData MyData Definition Old variable name New variable name

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) A channel is a data group is renamed and displayed. Reference Menu 'Variables' / 'Properties'

223

10.30 Request
Function Receive data via DDE. Instead of the command 'Request', the function DDEInq should be used when creating new sequences. Declaration REQUEST Application Topic Item Variable Parameter Application Topic Item Variable Description FAMOS operates as a DDE client, the application addressed as a DDE server. The entries "Application" and "topic" cause FAMOS to select another DDE-capable application and request a conversation. If the request is complied with, FAMOS then supplies the name of the item desired. FAMOS waits until the server either transfers the data, whereupon the conversation is concluded, or denies the request. The variable specified in "Variable" now contains the data received. If the transfer wasn't possible, it contains the return value from the DDE application addressed. The data can be single values, as well as data sets in ASCII or FAMOS DDE format. Remarks The individual parameters for the Control-command may not contain space characters. FAMOS sends an error message, if DDE application (server) addressed doesn't answer or the data request was denied. If the application (server) addressed is busy, FAMOS waits until it is free. FAMOS commands are case-insensitive (upper or lower-case letters are equally valid). However, some DDE applications do distinguish between upper and lower case. Have regard, therefore, for correct spelling. The commands can be found in the group "D> Commands: DDE, Import, Export etc.". Example Request Trans Timebase TB x "Trans" is the name of an imaginary, DDE-capable application, "Timebase" the name of the DDE-topic. The return value is written to variable "x". Request Trans1 Status Trigger SVtrig Request Trans2 Status Armoured SVarm Data can be requested from varying DDE-applications. After execution of this command the two single value variables contain information about the status of the "trans"-devices. For example, the variable SVTrig could be =1.0, if the "Trans1" trigger was tripped. Definition Name of the DDE application addressed Designation of the DDE topic Name of the variable requested Single value of normal waveform, name of the receiving FAMOS variable

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

224

Sequence Commands (Reference) Reference Command Control Functions DDEInq, DDESet, DDESend

10.31 Save
Function Saves variables in FAMOS file format Declaration SAVE VarName SAVE VarName FileName Parameter VarName FileName Description The variable specified as parameter is saved. If a file name is not specified, the variable is stored under its name in the directory currently selected for saving variables. If a file name is specified, the variable is saved under this name. When a complete path is specified, this path is used; otherwise the path currently set for saving files is used. The filename may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. Remarks The variable specified as parameter is saved. If a file name is not specified, the variable is stored under its name in the directory currently selected for saving variables. If a file name is specified, the variable is saved under this name. When a complete path is specified, this path is used; otherwise the path currently set for saving files is used. The functions in the groups "13> File Functions" can also be used to save files in FAMOS format. These are much more powerful than the command SAVE, especially for saving files containing multiple waveforms. Example Wave = Int(Wave) Save Wave The variable Wave is integrated and saved in a file. Hist = Histo( Wave1, 10, 6 ) Save Hist c:\wave\histogr\hist001 Hist = Histo( Wave2, 10, 6 ) Save Hist c:\wave\histogr\hist002 A histogram is calculated for each of the waveforms Wave1 and Wave2 and saved in the specified directory under the names 'hist001.dat' and 'hist002.dat'. Hist:N001 = Histo( Wave1, 10, 6 ) Hist:N002 = Histo( Wave2, 10, 6 ) Save Hist c:\wave\histogr\hist002 A data group consisting of 2 channels is created and stored under the specified file name. Save Data1 "c:\imc\My Data\Evalu.dat" The filename contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Definition Variable to be stored File name (or complete path) under which the variable should be saved (optional)

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Reference Menu option: 'File'/ 'Save individually...' Commands ASCSave, SDIR Function FileOpenDSF

225

10.32 SDIR
Function Sets directory for saving files. Instead of the command SDIR, the function SetOption should be used for newly created sequences. Declaration SDIR Directory Definition Complete specification of a directory

Parameter Directory Description

The directory for storing files is reset. After this command is executed, this directory is used to save files. This directory is used by the commands Save and ASCSave if a complete path name is not specified for the file. The directory name may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. These commands can also be called without parameters (meaning: without specifying the folder). In that case, the folder set under "Options/Folders" is used as the current default. Remarks This directory remains valid until: either the SDIR command or the function SetOption is called again a file is saved in another directory using the dialog box Save in the "File" menu or a new directory for saving files is defined using the dialog under "Options / Folders". The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example FAMOS LOAD wave wave = 2 * wave + 3 SAVE wave SDIR c:\experiment SAVE wave The waveform WAVE is loaded and changed and then saved in FAMOS format in the current directory. Then it is saved again under the name C:\EXPERIMENT\WAVE.DAT. SDIR "c:\My Tials on 12-1-98" The directory name contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Commands Save, ASCSave

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

226

Sequence Commands (Reference)

10.33 Sequence
Function Executes a sequence Declaration SEQUENCE FileName Parameter FileName Param1 ParamN Description A sequence is executed. The name of the sequence is a file name and is transferred as the first parameter. If the sequence to be executed expects parameters, these must be transferred as further parameters. The filename may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. Unless a complete path is provided along with the filename, the system searches for the sequence file in this order of locations: 1. The current working folder: This is the folder from which the calling sequence was opened. 2. Project folder: If a project is open, the system looks for it in the current project folder. 3. Default folder for sequences and dialogs: Once FAMOS is started, this directory is found in the standard directory set in the dialog 'Options/ Directories'. This directory can be changed using the command MDIR or the function SetOption. Please refer to the chapter 'Sequences' for more information about working with sequences, especially those with parameters. Remarks 1. The maximum number of parameters is 9. 2. When a sequence is active, the Windows taskbar's notification area contains an additional icon. Right-clicking the mouse calls a context menu which offers a command for interrupting the current run. [Param1 ...ParamN] Definition File name of sequence First parameter of sequence Last parameter of sequence

1. To interrupt, it's also possible to use the combination of keys "CTRL" + "Break". 2. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Sequence Series The sequence named Series is executed; it does not expect any parameters. Sequence Sum Wave1 Wave2 A sequence named Sum is executed. It calculates the sum of two waveforms. The waveforms to be

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) added are transferred as parameters. Sequence c:\imc\seq\Loadall.seq d*.dat A sequence used to load a file is executed for all files which begin with a "D" and have the extension ". DAT" . Sequence "c:\imc\My Sequences\Evalu.dat" Data1 The filename contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Chapter 'Sequences'

227

10.34 Show
Function Shows a variable. Declaration SHOW Var Parameter Var Description The variable specified as a parameter is displayed. If the variable is a waveform or data group, a curve window is opened (generated). If the variable is a text variable, it is displayed in a special text window. Wildcards can also be specified in order to display a series of variables. The wildcard '?' stands for an exact character; the wildcard '*' stands for an undefined number of any character. SHOW * All variables are displayed. SHOW ?? All variables are displayed whose names have exactly 2 characters. SHOW *1a* All variables containing the string '1a' (at the beginning or end) are displayed. SHOW a*:channel? All channels with the name 'channel', followed by any character are displayed from all data groups whose name begins with an 'a'. Remarks If a window already exists for this variable, it is brought into the foreground. The Curve-Kit for remote control of the curve window has more efficient functions available for displaying and configuration of the curve window Information about registering and using the Curve-Kit is found in the chapter 'Functions'/ 'imc-Kits', as well as in the Curve Window /Report Generator manual. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example Wave Show x Show = IPol(Wave, 3) Wave = Max(Wave) x Definition Variable to be displayed

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

228

Sequence Commands (Reference) A waveform is enlarged with spline interpolation and displayed. The maximum of this waveform is calculated and displayed. Reference Menu option: 'Variable'/ 'Show individually' Chapter 'Variables'/ 'Showing Variables' Curve Kit documentation

10.35 TimeCopy
Function Copies the trigger time. Declaration TIMECOPY SourceVar TargetVar Parameter SourceVar TargetVar Description The trigger time of the target variable is set to equal that of the source variable. The trigger time is stored in files in FAMOS format and is used for scaling the date and time of the x-axis in curve windows. Remarks The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Further functions for assigning, requesting and calculating with the date and time are found in the function group "18> Date, Time". Example TIMECOPY sDat tDat The variable "tDat" contains the trigger time of the variable "sDat". Reference Command TimeSet, Functions Time?, SetTime Definition Source variable Target variable

10.36 TimeSet
Function Sets the trigger time. Declaration TIMESET TargetVar Day Month Year Hour Minute Second Parameter TargetVar Day Month Definition Variable Single value; date: day Single value; date: month

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) Year Hour Minute Second Description The trigger time of the variable "TargetVar" is set according to the new time. Remarks The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". The trigger time is stored in files in FAMOS format and is used for scaling the date and time of the x-axis in curve windows. Further functions for assigning, requesting and calculating with the date and time are found in the function group "15> Date, Time". Example TIMESET TargetVar 1 3 1992 12 0 1 The trigger time of the variable "TargetVar" is set to '01.03.1992 12:00:01' Reference Command TimeCopy, Functions Time?, SetTime, TimeJoin Single value; date: year (4-places) Single value; time: hour Single value; time: minute Single value; time: second

229

10.37 WFTLoad
Function Loads a Nicolet WFT file (Copyright 1988 Nicolet Instrument Corporation). Declaration WFTLOAD Segment TBase FileName VarName Parameter Segment TBase FileName VarName Description A WFT file from the Nicolet Instrument Corporation is loaded in FAMOS. A WFT file can contain from 1 to 1024 segments and 1 to 3 time bases. The parameters "Segment" and "TBase" can be used to read a defined segment and time base. The parameter "Segment" can assume values between 1 and 1024, the parameter "TBase" between 1 and 3. The selected file section is loaded under the specification set in "VarName". The filename may also specified to contain quotation marks. This can be necessary, if, for instance, the path contains spaces. Remarks The file name can be a complete file name including directory and file name extension; it can also be specified without either of the two. The program then searches for the file in the directory currently used by FAMOS for loading files. The extension ".WFT" is selected automatically. Definition Single value - Indicates the segment to be loaded (1...1024) Single value - Indicates the time base to be loaded (1...3) Name of file to be loaded Variable in which the file section is to be entered

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

230

Sequence Commands (Reference) The command is found in the group "B> Commands: Load, Save". Example WFTLoad 4 1 WAVE0001 seg4 WFTLoad 4 1 c:\nic\WAVE0001 seg4 In both cases, the first time base of the fourth segment is read from the file "WAVE0001.WFT" and entered in FAMOS with the specification "seg4". seg = 4 bas = 1 WFTLoad seg bas WAVE01 wave Two single values define the desired range of the file "WAVE01". The range is entered as "Wave". WFTLoad 4 1 "c:\My Data\WAVE0001" seg420 The filename contains a space and therefore it must be written inside of quotation marks. Reference Chapter 'File management / WFT Format'

10.38 WHILE
Function Conditional loop. Declaration WHILE SvVariable WHILE Expression Parameter SvVariable Expression Description This command introduces a conditional loop. This loop is executed as long as the single value specified as a parameter is greater than zero or if the specified expression returns a value greater than 0. Otherwise, the loop is not repeated and the sequence is executed according to the command "END". A complex expression is allowed as the parameter, for example functions, indexed variables or complete formulas. However, this expression must return a single value. Often, an arithmetical comparison operator or logical operation is applied here. WHILE( i+ 23 ) >= StDev( Waveform ) ... END WHILE (i>1) AND (i< 100) ... END Remarks A loop is a command to initiate a sequence of operations; this sequence of operations is repeated while the defined condition is fulfilled. When the condition is not fulfilled, the loop is not executed. The operations in the sequence are then processed further. The loop must be ended using the command END. All operations between the accompanying command WHILE and the closing command END form the sequence of operations executed each time the loop is executed. The loop is executed only when the condition is fulfilled at the start, i.e. when the sequence meets the command WHILE the first time. When the condition is fulfilled, all operations are executed until the Definition Single value variable Formula, comparison, etc.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference) corresponding 'End' command is found. At this point, the sequence goes back to the position with the command WHILE, and the condition is rechecked. When the condition is not fulfilled, the sequence goes back beyond the command "End" and resumes execution from this position. Loops can be nested up to ten levels. Indent the operations somewhat in the sequence to optically separate the content of a loop from the remaining sequence and to separate the various levels of nested loops or conditions from each other. The comparison for equality ( = ) should be used with caution in calculated expressions. FAMOS calculates internally in a real numbers format. The last places could become inaccurate if calculation is executed, so that a comparison of two apparently equal numbers will be interpreted incorrectly. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example i = 5 Factor = 1 While i Factor = Factor * i i = i - 1 End Show Factor Delete i This loop is run through five times, for the values i = 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. A factorial of 5 is calculated and displayed. The loop index is then no longer needed and is deleted. WHILE StDev(Wave) > 0.2 Wave = Smo5(Wave) END SHOW Wave A waveform is smoothed until the standard deviation is no longer greater than 0.2. Reference Commands IF, END

231

10.39 Xdelta
Function Sets the sampling rate. Declaration XDELTA Variable DeltaX Parameter Variable DeltaX Definition Variable whose x-axis is to be redefined Single value Distance between two adjacent points in x-units

Description The divisions of the x-axis (sampling rate) are redefined. Remarks The unit of the x-axis remains unchanged. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

232

Sequence Commands (Reference) xUnit Volt s xDelta Volt 60 The variable "Volt" first receives the x-unit "s", then the distance between two points is defined to "60", so that the new sampling rate is 60 s . Reference Command xUnit Functions xDel, xDel? Menu 'Variables'/ 'Properties'

10.40 Xunit
Function Sets the x-unit. Declaration xUNIT VarName xUnit Parameter VarName xUnit Description The unit of the x-axis of a waveform is redefined, i.e. the waveform is assigned a new x-unit. The waveform is the first parameter, the unit is the second. The unit is specified without quotation marks. If there is no second parameter, the unit of the x-axis is deleted. Remarks In complex waveforms, only the unit of the first component is changed. In xy-waveforms, the unit of the xcomponents is set. The function SetUnit can also be used to assign units. The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example ASCII Load Wave h=Histo (Wave) xUnit h V The unit of the x-axis in a histogram is set to "V". This information was not available in the ASCII file. xUnit Wave After this command is executed, the variable has no unit on the x-axis. Reference Commands yUnit, xDelta Functions SetUnit,Unit? Menu 'Variables'/ 'Properties' Definition Name of variable to be assigned a new unit New x-unit

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Sequence Commands (Reference)

233

10.41 Xoffset
Function Sets the x-offset. Declaration XOFFSET Variable Offs Parameter Variable Offs Definition Variable whose x-offset is to be redefined Single value Distance of the first data point from zero in x-units

Description The x-offset of "Variable" is set to a new value. Remarks The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example xUnit Temp s xOffset Temp 10 First the x-unit "s" is assigned to the variable "Temp". The command following has the effect that the first data point of the variable "Temp" lies at "10 s". Reference Commands xUnit, xDelta Chapter 'Variables'/ 'Properties' Functions xOff, xOff?

10.42 Yunit
Function Sets the y-unit. Declaration yUNIT VarName yUnit Parameter VarName yUnit Description The unit of the y-axis in a waveform is redefined, i.e. the waveform is assigned a new y-unit. The waveform is the first parameter, the unit is the second. The unit is not specified in quotation marks. If there is no second parameter, the unit of the y-axis is deleted. Remarks The unit of a single value is interpreted as the y-unit. In complex waveforms, only the unit of the first component is changed; in xy-waveforms, the unit of the y-component is set. Definition Variable containing the y-unit New y-unit

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

234

Sequence Commands (Reference) The command is found in the group "C> Commands: Variables, Run". Example yUnit Wave A The unit of the y-axis in the waveform "Wave" is set to "A". yUnit Wave Now the variable "Wave" no longer has a unit on the y-axis. Reference Command xUnit Functions SetUnit,Unit? Menu 'Variables'/ 'Properties'

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor

235

Data Editor
11.1 Introduction
The integrated Waveform Editor allows you to display, compare and change waveforms in a table. In addition to the standard edit functions such as copy, cut and paste, there are several special functions available for processing data. Waveforms can be displayed with reference to trigger instant and sampling rate. This makes it easier to find and evaluate events occurring at the same time. The integrated search function allows you to find values which lie within or outside of predefined interval. The curve window and table display can be linked so that they both display the same position in the waveform. This allows you to "roll through" a waveform and observe the current section in the curve window as well as in the table window. Use the Waveform Editor to edit existing waveforms by adding, appending or deleting values. Completely new waveforms may be generated, which can then be used as reference curves or as parameter sets for mathematical functions.

11.2

Start

Start the Waveform Editor using menu item "Extra / Waveform Editor", the button in the tool bar or the <F10> function key. If variables are selected in the list when the Editor is started, these are displayed in the first table window.

11.3

Interface Elements

The main window's editor has a menu- and toolbar [1]. Along with various buttons which provide quick access to selected menu commands, the toolbar also has an input box [9]) for entering or editing values. At the bottom edge is a status bar [7] which displays either status info or brief descriptions of the menu item currently selected. The main window's workspace displays table windows [2]. Starting the editor generates a table window of maximum size. If desired, additional tables can be created and positioned wherever the user wishes. A table window's workspace consists of the table header [3] showing the names of the variables currently

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

236

Data Editor being displayed, a scaling column [6], and the data columns [4] containing the values.

11.4

Context Menus

Many menu items are more readily accessible via the context menu. By right-clicking the mouse on the table header, the corresponding column is activated and the context menu depicted below appears.

The same items can be found under the heading "Column" of the main menu. By right-clicking the mouse in the core of the table, a different context menu is called, which offers items for use in editing the current selection

These items are also available in the menu "Edit.

11.5

Opening and Closing Table

A table window is created and displayed immediately when the Waveform Editor is started. Open new tables using menu item "Table / New", or the corresponding button in the tool bar. Icon: To close an active table window, use menu item "Table / Close", the key combination <Ctrl> + <F4>, or the system menu in the table window.

11.6

Activating Tables and Columns

When several tables are open, activate the desired table by clicking with the mouse on the table or by clicking above the "Window" menu in the main window. Use the key combination <CTRL> + <F6> or <CTRL> + <SHIFT> + <F6> to go through the list of open windows either forwards or backwards. Each table has an active column (column head displayed in negative) which contains the active input cell. Select the active column by clicking on the head or by horizontal movement of the input cell.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor

237

11.7

Showing a Variable

If variables where selected in the variable list when the Waveform Editor is started, they are displayed immediately in the first table. To display further variables, double-click on the head of the desired column or use the menu item "Column / Insert Waveform". A list appears in which one or several variables can be selected from those presently available. The selected variables are then displayed in the table starting from the active column.

Waveform Editor, Dialog: Show Variable

The same presettings are valid for displaying channels in groups and components in this list as for the variable list in the FAMOS main window (menu item Extra / Options / Variable list" ). If a variable is already displayed in a column which should be assigned a new variable, it is deleted from the table and the new variable is displayed in the column. Drag & drop can also be used to "drop" variables from the variable list in the main window or from the curve window above the column head, which are then displayed starting from this column. "To release a column, i.e. to end the display of the variable in this column, activate the column and use menu item "Column / Clear column. You may also close the table and continue working in a new, empty table. XY-Waveforms For the display of XY-waveforms you can specify whether to display both components of the data set by default or whether to display only the y-values. The setting is performed in the dialog "Display / Options", on the index card "Various".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

238

Data Editor

Waveform Editor, dialog: Display / Options / Various

Both components The x-component is displayed in the active column, the y-component in the adjacent column to the right. Only y-component The y-component is displayed in the active column. The option is the sensible one in cases where several waveforms, all having the same (non-equidistant) time stamp, are being displayed alongside each other; the x-component (= time stamp) is the same in any case and it can be displayed in the scaling column at left. Segmented Waveforms Whenever a segmented waveform is selected for display in the Waveform Editor, the dialog depicted below, which allows you to specify details of the display, automatically appears.

Waveform Editor,: dialog Configure Display, segments

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor All Segments All segments of the Waveform are displayed. If the option "Tile" is activated, the individual segments are listed in separate columns one beside the other. Otherwise, the values of the entire waveform is displayed in one continuous column, each event after the last. Segment Number This input box becomes accessible when the option "All Segments" is deactivated. The ("serial") number or "index" of the particular segment desired (a number between "1" and the total amount of segments in the waveform) is entered here. Multi-Event Waveforms Whenever a multi-event waveform is selected for display in the Waveform Editor, the dialog depicted below, which allows .you to specify details of the display, automatically appears.

239

Waveform Editor,: dialog Configure Display, events

All Events All events of the Waveform are displayed. If the option "Tie" is activated, the individual events are listed in separate columns one beside the other. Otherwise, the values of the entire waveform is displayed in one continuous column, each event after the last. Event Number This input box becomes accessible when the option "All Events" is deactivated. The ("serial") number or "index" of the particular event desired (a number between "1" and the total amount of events in the waveform) is entered here.

11.8

Inserting and Deleting Columns

Menu item "Column / Delete Column" erases an entire column from the display. The columns located to the right of the deleted column are shifted to the left in order not to leave an empty column in the deleted column's stead (this contrasts with the effect of "Column / Clear Column"). The menu item "Column / Insert New Column" inserts a new, empty column to the left of the active column; the columns following are shifted to the right.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

240

Data Editor

11.9

Positioning the Input Cell, Scrolling and Marking

In order to enter or change a value, the active input cell must be positioned on the specified value. Click with the mouse on the cell or use the direction keys to change the position of the input cell. The active input cell is highlighted in the color of the buttons, usually gray. The section of the table currently visible can be changed by moving the input cell with the direction keys or by using the scroll bars in the table. The section is changed so that the input cell is always visible. The vertical scroll bar always refers to the position of the active column. The inner arrow key causes scrolling around a cell, the middle direction key around 1/100th of the total length of the displayed waveform; the outer direction keys are positioned at the beginning or the end of the waveform in the active column. The direction keys have the following meanings: One cell in the specified direction HOME END PAGE PAGE CONTROL+ HOME CONTROL + END CONTROL + PAGE CONTROL + PAGE 1st value in the active column Last value in the active column 1st page up 1st page down 1st column Last column 1st page left 1st page right

Use menu item "Edit / Go to" to go directly to a value or "Edit / Search" to search for values in a specified range. To mark a section of the table, drag the mouse across the desired range (hold down the left mouse button) or use the arrow keys and press <SHIFT> at the same time. Several columns can be selected only when the table is in the basic display mode (menu item "Display/ No time comparison"). To completely mark an active column, use menu item "Column/ Highlight Column".

11.10 Entering and Changing Individual Values

In order to enter or change a specified value, the active input cell must first be positioned on this value. Click with the mouse on the desired cell or move the input cell with the arrow keys. To enter a new value or overwrite an existing value, simply enter the new value using the keyboard. The table changes from the "Ready" mode to the "Input" mode (see status bar). Confirm the entry with <Return> or a direction key, if the next value is to be entered in the adjacent cell. <Esc> cancels the entry and the "old" value is restored in the cell. The "Change" mode must be active in order to change an existing value. Click on the input box in the tool bar or use the key combination <Ctrl> + <F2>. The value in the input box may then be changed in the usual way. Confirm changes by selecting <Return>, reject changes with <Esc> . The buttons found to the left of the input box may be used as an alternative to the keys. The table then returns to the "Ready" mode. The differences between the three input modes are emphasized in the following:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor Ready: Input: Change: The direction keys move the input cell. Change to INPUT mode by pressing a number or letter key. Overwrite the content of a cell. The direction keys end the input mode and reposition the input cell. Change the content of a cell in an input box in the tool bar. The direction keys move the cursor in the input box.

241

11.11 Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete

All of these options are accessed by selecting menu item "Edit". Apart from "Delete", the buttons in the tool bar can be used. Cut The current marking is cut out of the displayed waveforms and inserted in the clipboard. This marking contains at least the current input cell and can be extended (<SHIFT>+ direction key, drag the mouse). Copy Select this option to copy the current marking to the clipboard. Paste Values cut or copied to the clipboard using "Cut" or "Copy" are inserted in front of the active input cell. The length of the waveform increases. Remarks The commands Cut, Copy and Paste use a basic text format when exchanging values in the Clipboard, which stores numbers by line and separates columns by a space. This format can be created or imported by many other Windows applications. To transfer data to other applications using the Clipboard, use menu item "Edit / -> Clipboard". The actual format (e.g. separators between columns) can be predefined using menu item "Display / Options" . If you wish to transfer number series to the Report Generator, please refer to the section 'Transfer to Report Generator'. Delete Select this option to delete the marked cells from the displayed waveforms, which shortens the length of the waveforms.

11.12 Insert Values

Enter a defined number of pre-initialized values in front of the active input cell using "Edit/ Insert Values".

Waveform Editor,: Dialog: Insert Values

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

242

Data Editor Enter in the dialog the number of values you wish to insert. Specify the values in the input boxes "Initialize.." and "Add..". If a zero (0) is entered in "Add..", a series of constant values is inserted; a value not equal to zero (0) results in a ramp with the specified slope. If the waveform in which values are to be inserted has two components, specifications must be made for both components, since the length of the components must always be the same.

11.13 Creating a New Variable

Move the input cell over an empty column to the first position. The first value in the waveform can now be entered or use "Paste" or "Insert Values" to insert a series of values. The new waveform is given a default name (de_+ current number ) and also appears in the variable list in the main window. The name, as well as all other characteristics of the waveform can be changed in the dialog "Properties" (menu item "Column / Properties / Charact.").

11.14 Go To...
Go to a value with a predefined index (position in waveform) in the active column. The input cell is then positioned on the desired value.

Waveform Editor: Go To... dialog

11.15 Value Search

Search in the active column for values fulfilling specified conditions using menu item "Edit/ Search", beginning at the current input cell.

Waveform Editor: Search dialog

Specify search conditions and direction in this dialog. The following may be selected from the list as condition: Value smaller than: Value greater than: Sought value < default Sought value > default

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor Value equal to: Value in interval: Value not in interval: Sought value = default Default1 < value < default2 Value < default1 OR Value > default2

243

Start the search by selecting the button "Search". If a value fulfilling the conditions is found, the input cell is positioned at this value; otherwise a message box appears.

11.16 Copying a Selection to Clipboard

Select "Edit/ ->Clipboard" to transfer data to other applications via the Clipboard. The current format can be specified using "Display/ Options". If you wish to transfer number series to the Report Generator, please refer to the section 'Transfer to Report Generator'.

Waveform Editor: Display Options/ Clipboard

Column Separator Choose between a tab, a space or a freely definable character string. For example, EXCEL requires a tab as separator. Scaling Column The scaling column is stored in the clipboard when this option is selected. Header Specify here whether the header (name of the variable) should be stored. Decimal Comma FAMOS uses a decimal point when displaying numbers. Specify here if a decimal comma should be used. Otherwise, numbers and the scaling column are filed in a manner analogous to the representation currently set in the table window. Example The marking below is to be copied to the clipboard using menu item "Edit"/ "Clipboard" .

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

244

Data Editor

Options: separators " ; ", no header, no scaling 362.7 ; 0.00122074 362.8 ; 0.00122074 362.9 ; 0.00122074 363 ; 0.00122074 363.1; 0.00122074 Options: separator tab, header, scaling and decimal comma 10.06.93 10.06.93 10.06.93 10.06.93 10.06.93 E0_6_113.X 19:24:22 19:24:22 19:24:22 19:24:23 19:24:23 362,7 362,8 362,9 363 363,1 E0_6_113.Y 0,00122074 0,00122074 0,00122074 0,00122074 0,00122074

11.17 Show Curve

Use menu item "Column/ Show Curve" to open a curve window in which the variables in the active column are displayed. Icon: Drag & drop can also be used to display a table column in an existing curve window. Move the mouse in the beginning of the desired column, click to the left, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse over the desired curve window. Release the mouse button there. The variable is displayed in the following form, depending on the position of the mouse when it is released: above/below a coordinate system: a new coordinate system is created and the variables are displayed in the new system. within a coordinate system: the variables are displayed with a new axis in this coordinate system. on one y-axis: the variables are displayed in this coordinate system with reference to the y-axis.

11.18 Characteristic Values

Select menu item "Column / Properties" to call a dialog in which the characteristics of the variable in the active column can be viewed and changed. The dialog can be also be called in the main window using "Variable/ Properties". Icon: Reference The dialog is described in detail in the chapter 'Variables', section 'Showing and Changing Characteristics

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor '.

245

11.19 Height and Width of Cells, Font

Set the desired font for the table window using menu item "Display/ Font". Select the desired font from the list which appears in the dialog and specify the font size. The cell height complies with the set font. It is automatically set somewhat larger than the selected font size. The cell width can be defined separately for the scaling and data columns. Set the width in the dialog "Display/ Options" (info about column width in the cardfiles "Data" and "Scale") or change the column width using the mouse. Move the mouse in the heading line on the separating line between 2 columns; the mouse cursor changes its shape. Shift the position of the separating line while holding down the mouse button. To set the scaling column, move the mouse on the separating line to the first data column.

11.20 Configure Scale Column

The following three menu items affect the display of the scaling column: "Index", "x-value" and "Time" in the menu "Display", one of which is always active (labeled with a checkmark). Index Indices (positions in waveform) for the values shown in the active column are displayed in the scale column. Single values are numbered consecutively, beginning with one. X-value The x-value for the values shown in the active column are displayed in the scale column. In normal waveforms, the x-value is calculated from the x-offset of the first value in the waveform and the x-distance of two consecutive values. In xy-waveforms, this is the accompanying value in the x-component of the waveform. Time The time is displayed for the values shown in the active column. In displaying time, the trigger time of the waveform is used and assumes that the x-axis of the waveform is scaled in seconds. Time is displayed according to the set date and time format in Window Control Panel. The display in the scaling column is also affected by the dialog "Display/ Options", index card "Scale".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

246

Data Editor

Waveform-Editor: Display Options/ Scale

Column Width Specify the width of scaling columns here, based on the middle width of a character in the set font. The column width may also be changed in the table window directly by clicking with the mouse in the table head on the separating line between the scale column and first data column and holding the mouse button down. The separating line can now be shifted. Format Specify here whether numerical values should always be displayed in exponential notation, decimal notation or automatically. In this case, automatic means that the shortest display is automatically selected, depending on the value. Precision The numbers in the text box specify the number of significant positions to be generated in the 'automatic' display mode. Otherwise, they correspond to the number of positions to be specified after the decimal point. Alignment Specify here the alignment of numbers within the scale column. Time Format This setup is important only if time display is selected in the scale column. Show Date When this option is selected, both date and time are displayed; otherwise only time is displayed. Seconds Specify here how precisely the time should be resolved. Fractions of seconds are readjusted after the time, separated by a comma.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor

247

11.21 Configure Data Column

The display of numerical values in the data columns is affected by the dialog "Display/ Options", file card "Data".

Waveform-Editor: Display Options/ Data

Column Width Specify the width of scaling columns here, based on the middle width of a character in the set font. The column width may also be changed in the table window directly by clicking with the mouse at the head if the table on the separating line between two data columns while holding down the mouse button. The separating line can now be shifted. Format Specify here whether numerical values should always be displayed in exponential notation, decimal notation or automatically. In this case, automatic means that the shortest display is automatically selected, depending on the value. Precision The numbers in the text box specify the number of significant positions to be generated in the 'automatic' display mode. Otherwise, they correspond to the number of positions to be specified after the decimal point. Alignment Specify here the alignment of numbers within the data columns.

11.22 Display Modes

The display mode is set using menu items "No time comparison", "Relative time-correct" or "Absolute time-correct" in the "Display" menu. One of these options is always active (labeled by a checkmark). The corresponding buttons in the toolbar can also be used. No Time Comparison Icon: This is the standard setup in the Editor. Waveforms are listed ignoring the x-scaling. Individual cells all

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

248

Data Editor have the same height. Relative Time Comparison Icon: Waveforms are displayed so that adjacently shown samples have the same x-value. Individual waveforms are shifted in the columns according to their x-offset. Differing sampling times (or xdelta) cause the cell height to vary in the columns. The normal cell height (corresponding to the set font) are used as a reference for the smallest x-distance occurring in the waveforms currently displayed in the table. This prevents numbers from overlapping in the output. This mode is useful only when the sampling times and offsets of all displayed waveforms are in the same order of magnitude. Select this mode only if several waveforms should be compared with reference to their x-axes (ignoring trigger time). The Editor is clearly much slower in this mode than in the basic display mode. Selecting several columns at the same time is not possible; not every waveform or combination of waveforms can be displayed in this mode. For example, xy-waveforms can be displayed only if their x-axis is monotonous, because otherwise, values would have to be plotted one over the another. The ratio of offset and sampling time may not exceed a specified value, because individual positions of numerical values in the table could no longer be resolved against one another. In such cases, an error message is generated and the table returns to the basic display mode. Absolute Time-Comparison Icon: Unlike display mode "Relative Time Comparison", the trigger time of the waveform is taken into account. Waveforms are displayed so that adjacently shown samples have the same time base. Individual waveforms are shifted in the columns according to the sum of trigger time and their x-offset. Differing sampling times (or x-delta) cause varying cell height in the columns. The normal cell height (corresponding to the set font) is used as reference for the smallest x-distance occurring in the waveforms currently displayed in the table. This prevents numbers from overlapping in the output. This mode is useful only when the sampling times and trigger times of all displayed waveforms are in the same order of magnitude. Select this mode only when several waveforms should be compared in terms of their relative positions in time. The Editor is clearly much slower in this mode than in the basic display mode. Selecting several columns at the same time is not possible; not every waveform or combination of waveforms can be displayed in this mode. For example, xy-waveforms can be displayed only if their x-axis is monotonous, because otherwise, values would have to be plotted one over the another. The ratio of offset and sampling time may not exceed a specified value, because individual positions of numerical values in the table could no longer be resolved against one another. In such cases, an error message is generated and the table returns to the basic display mode Example Three waveforms are displayed in the table which have the following characteristic values: Channel1 X-offset (pretrigger) in seconds X-delta (sampling time) in seconds Trigger time 0 0.1 2:09:00 Channel2 0 0.25 2:09:01 Channel3 0.5 0.3 2:09:00

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor When menu item "Display / No time comparison" is active (selected), the table looks like this:

249

Waveform Editor, table in display mode "No Time Comparison"

Display follows without reference to time, the scaling column (here in absolute time) complies with the active column in the example "Channel 1". When menu item "Display / Relative time comparison" is active, the table looks like this:

Waveform Editor, table in display mode "Relative Time Comparison"

The differing sampling times and the offset of the third channel are regarded. The scaling column (display x-value) is not dependent on the active column. The proportion of cell height corresponds to the rate of the sampling times. When "Display / Absolute time comparison" is active, the table looks like this:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

250

Data Editor

Waveform Editor, table in display mode "Absolute time comparison"

Explicit consideration is given to the differing trigger time of channel2. The scaling column (if displayed in absolute time) is not dependent on the active column.

11.23 Scroll-Linking of Tables and Curve Window

Tables and curve windows can be linked so that scrolling in one also scrolls in the other. This is done relative to the x-coordinate. The following example illustrates how to create a scroll-link: Load one of the example waveforms, e.g. slope.dat and display it in the new table window. Display the waveform in a curve window. Zoom in to a portion of near the y-axis (i.e. x = 0) so that the beginning of the curve is visible. Click in the toolbar on the button and hold the mouse button down. Drag the mouse across the curve window and then release the mouse button. The actual link position is shown in the Waveform Editor by a horizontal line in the table, in the curve window by a vertical line. It is at exactly this position that the table and curve window have the same xvalue. If you scroll down in the table, the curve window moves with the table. Likewise, scrolling in the curve window also scrolls the table.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor

251

Waveform Editor, linked table and curve window

Now open another table window and display a waveform in this window. Insert this waveform using the same procedure as before in the linked window. It is irrelevant which window is scrolled, the linked window is constantly updated according to the current position. This allows any number of tables and curve windows to be linked with one another. Linking can also be executed from the curve window using the corresponding button in the communicator toolbar (call using the context menu: click with the right mouse button in the window, option Communicator). A table or curve window is removed from the linked windows by clicking again on the appropriate button in the table or curve window. In a table with several waveforms, the scaling of the active column is used as a reference. All linked windows should use the same display mode (relative scaling or scaling over an absolute time).

11.24 Printout
The printing function in the Waveform Editor operates by way of the imc Report Generator. A selected section is first transferred to a standard form and then printed out. The advantage of this manner of proceeding is that the appearance of the printout can, by simply changing the form settings, be adapted and customized to fulfill to your particular wishes and requirements. The printout function, then, is a convenient tool for representing lists of numbers as a visually appealing table on paper. For more intricate reports, which incorporate tables, texts and graphs, the preferable course would be to

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

252

Data Editor manually layout a report form first and subsequently supply it with the applicable data (number series, texts, curve graphs etc.) by means of remote control functions or drag & drop. Accessing menu item "Table / Print.." calls the dialog depicted below, which lets you select the printout region and specify the appearance of the printout.

Waveform Editor, dialog: Print

Selection Specifies the region to print out. All The entire table content is printed out. The longest data set included determines the overall length of the printout. The rightmost occupied column determines the width, in other words, the number of columns in the printout. With Scale Column The scale column is included in the printout. Template Enter the name of the form here which is to be used as a template for the printout. Normal installation of FAMOS provides the "DEFORM.DRB"-file as the default form. To adapt this form to your requirements, load it into the Report Generator, change it and save the new form under a different name. The name of the new form can be entered into this input box. Unless you supply the complete directory path, the program will search the preset default directory for report files (specified via "Options / Directories"). Please observe the following when defining your own template form: The actual table data are transferred to a table object which must be designated as "TABLE1". The number of rows and columns in this table is indicative of the number of pages required for the printout. The title specified is transferred to a text object which must be designated as "HEAD1". The specified footer must be called "FOOT1". It is also possible to assign place holders for the title and footer texts, which are furnished with particular

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor data on the occasion of the printout. The following place holders are predefined: &p &t &d current page number current system time current system date

253

Transfer and Printout If this option is activated, the table is transferred in the background to the Report Generator and printed out. If the Report Generator wasn't already open, it will be closed again upon completion of the printout. If more that 5 pages will be needed to accomplish the printout, a message will appear, prompting you to confirm the procedure. Transfer and show Report If this option is selected, the Report Generator will display a preview of the finished document following transfer

This allows you to verify that the printout reflects your wishes and, if necessary, to edit it before ultimately approving printout. The printing procedure can be executed page by page or on the whole document at once; it can also be interrupted as desired.

11.25 Transfer to Report Generator

For manually transferring lists of numbers from the Waveform Editor to the Report Generator there are two principal possibilities: data transfer via the Windows Clipboard and the use of drag & drop.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

254

Data Editor

11.25.1 Drag & Drop

This transfers only the actual numerical values, in other words not the title in the header, or the footer. Transferring a Column To transfer the content of a whole column, left-click the mouse on the column header, move the mouse while holding its button down- to over the Report Generator and release the button where you wish the column to be. Transferring a Highlight To transfer the current, highlighted selection (also multiple columns) to the Report Generator, press <Ctrl> and at the same time the left mouse button with the mouse pointer over the highlighted area. Then proceed as described above. How the data are handled upon being inserted depends upon the mouse's particular position at the release of the button: 1. Over a Text Object: The place holder for real numbers (#f, #e) are replaced with the current numerical values. 2. Over a Table Object: Starting at the current mouse position and proceeding downward and -with multiple columns highlighted in the Waveform Editor- to the right, the cells of the table are furnished with numerical values. The numerical notation reflects the notation set for the table object and can be changed retroactively via the Propertiesdialog for the table object. 3. Other: A new table object is created. The number of rows and columns is determined automatically by the dimensions of the highlighted region in the Waveform Editor and from the maximum amount feasibly displayable. The height of the cells is determined by the default font for table objects. All other properties' (numerical format, font) initial settings are taken from the valid default settings for table objects, as well, and can be changed subsequently.

11.25.2 Copying and Pasting

You must highlight the region of interest and access either menu item "Edit/ Copy" or "Edit/ -> Clipboard" to copy it to the Clipboard. "Copy" The command "Copy" places only the highlighted region into the Clipboard. "->Clipboard" "->Clipboard" makes the inserted data reflect the valid settings in the dialog "Display / Options", filecard "Clipboard". This means that you can, for example, transfer the column header and the scale column along with the data. Please note that a "Tab" serves to indicate the separation between columns, the option "decimal comma" may not be activated. You now can either create a new table object in the Report Generator or furnish an existing table with new values Creating a new table object To crate a new table object, use the Report Generator menu item "Edit / Paste As.." or the command "Paste Here As.." from the context menu. In the dialog which then appears, select "Table". The number of rows and columns is then determined automatically from the content of the Clipboard and the maximum number feasibly displayable. The height of the cells is determined by the default font for table objects. All other properties' (numerical format, font, frame, background) initial settings, as well, are taken from the valid default settings for table objects in the Report Generator, and can be changed subsequently. The numerical notation set for the table is ignored, as the data has been transferred in text format. The numbers are displayed just as in the Waveform Editor.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data Editor Updating an existing table object First select a table object, in order to update it. If you wish only to change a part of the table, highlight the cells concerned. Then access menu item "Edit / Contents / Paste" from either the menu bar or the context menu. The numerical notation set for the table is ignored, as the data has been transferred in text format. The numbers are displayed just as in the Waveform Editor. Reference See manuals for 'Curve Window' and 'Report Generator'.

255

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

256

DDE Interface

DDE Interface
12.1 Overview
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) is a fixed protocol used to communicate both data and instructions between Windows applications. The type of data and instructions exchanged is therefore applicationoriented. DDE can be integrated easily into macro-languages, making it possible to automate processes involving the use of several programs. Communication begins when the first program, the client, informs another program that it would like to commence with a transaction. This second program, the server, then decides whether or not it is able to carry out this transaction. When this is possible, the transaction is executed. When transferring instructions, the target application, the topic and the instruction itself must all be specified in the declaration. When transferring data, the target application, the topic, the item to be set or requested and the data format must all be specified in the declaration. The actual data is then sent in a global memory object. The available topics as well as the topic and data element syntax are to be taken from the documentation associated with the target application. When data is to be transferred, a suitable format understood and supported by both sides should be chosen. Although the supported formats may vary according to the application, nearly every DDE capable Windows application supports a simple text format, enabling at least an interaction on this basis. FAMOS supports DDE-Poke (sending of data), DDE-Request (requesting of data) and DDE-Execute (sending of instructions) both as a client and a server. One can therefore send data and instructions to FAMOS as well as requesting FAMOS to send it to another application. Supported data formats include, in addition to the text format, a special imc format allowing simultaneous transfer of waveform data with characteristic waveform values.

12.2

FAMOS as DDE Client

When using FAMOS to transact with other applications, FAMOS acts as a client and the other applications as server. A transaction can be started directly using appropriate functions and control commands as well as from a dialog box. Use the dialog box to first test DDE-calls in dialog before building DDE-functions with the tested parameters directly into a sequence. A description of the dialog procedure and its commands is described below.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

DDE Interface

257

12.2.1 DDE Client Dialog Box

The dialog box is called from the menu "Extra / DDE...".

Transaction The drop-down menu is used to determine the mode of communication. The other input field entries change depending on this selection. Application In the input field, type the name used to access the other application over DDE. This is often the name of the application itself but with some programs this can be freely specified by the user. Topic DDE transactions are always assigned a topic name. The topic "SYSTEM" should be supported by all DDE-capable applications. Other topic names depend on the application. MS Word for Windows, for example, starts a new topic with every newly opened document. Control command This input field is only active when "Send command" is selected from the transaction drop-down menu. The command syntax must correspond to the required syntax of the target application. One can also often use macro instructions from the target application directly as commands. Element This input field is only active when data is to be transferred. Supply the name of the target application data element which is to be either requested or set. FAMOS variable This input field is only active when data is to be transferred. Supply the name of the FAMOS variable used to either poke or request data. Execute This begins a DDE transaction using the parameters as set in the dialog. An error message appears if a transaction is not possible. The most common error message "Conversation could not be established" indicates either that the DDE partner could not be found (server name incorrect or application not started) or that the chosen topic/element combination is not supported by the partner application. Quit The dialog is closed. Please note, however, that it is also possible to continue working in FAMOS with an opened dialog box. Options This calls up a dialog with various DDE settings for FAMOS. Section 3 in this chapter describes these settings in detail.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

258

DDE Interface

12.2.2 Send Control Commands

This instructs other applications to execute certain control commands. The following settings cause EXCEL to open a new table: Transaction: Application: Topic: Control command: Send command EXCEL SYSTEM [NEW]

The "Descend" function or the "CONTROL" command can also be used.

12.2.3 Send Data (FAMOS)

This sends a waveform to another application using the special imc-DDE-format. This is supported by other imc-applications. Transaction: Send data (FAMOS) Application: FRAME Topic: VARS Element: FamosWave Variable: FamosVar The global variable "FamosWave" in the imc program generator "Frame" is updated with the current content of the FAMOS variable "FamosVar". The "DDESet" function can also be used.

12.2.4 Send Data (Text)

A FAMOS waveform is converted to the DDE text format and then sent to the partner application. The text format is supported by most DDE-capable Windows programs. The parameters determining the manner in which numerical values get converted to text can be set in the "Options"/ "DDE" ("Options" button) dialog. It is particularly important to choose the correct separator character for separating adjacent numerical values. For example, sending numerical values to EXCEL using tab separators causes the values to be entered row-wise. However, using the combination of "Carriage Return / Line Feed" (ASCII 0x0d/0x0a) causes the numerical values to be entered to the table column-wise. Transaction: Send data (Text) Application: EXCEL Topic: TAB1 Element: R1C1:R1C100 Variable: FamosVar In EXCEL, the first 100 values of the waveform "FamosVar" are sent to the first row. A tab separator must be inserted between values and a comma is used as the decimal point. The "DDESet" function can also be used.

12.2.5 Send Text

This sends the contents of a FAMOS text variable to another application: Transaction: Send text Application: EXCEL Topic: TAB1 Item: R1C1 Variable: TxHello The contents of the "TxHello" text variable is sent to the upper left cell of the EXCEL table "TAB1". The "DDESet" function can also be used.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

DDE Interface

259

12.2.6 Request Data

FAMOS makes a request for the contents of a data element in another application. In its first attempt, FAMOS makes the request for data in the imc format. When not supported by the partner application, however, the request is remade using the text format. Transaction: Request data Application: EXCEL Topic: TAB1 Element: R1C1:R100C1 Variable: FamosVar In EXCEL, the first 100 values from the first column in table "TAB1" are requested and copied to the variable "FamosVar". The length of the variable depends on the number of successfully read values. The "DDEInq" function or the "REQUEST" control command can also be used.

12.2.7 Request Text

The content of a data element from another application is requested and, when successful, copied into a FAMOS text variable. Note that a FAMOS text variable may have a maximum length of 255 characters. Transaction: Request text Application: EXCEL Topic: TAB1 Element: R1C1:R1C1 Variable: FamosVar The contents of the upper left cell in an EXCEL table "Tab1" are requested and a FAMOS text variable "FamosVar" is created. The "DDEInq" function can also be used.

12.3

''DDE Settings'' Dialog

This dialog is can be accessed from the menu option "Extra / Options / Miscellaneous-DDE" or from the "Options" button in the DDE client dialog described above. One can set various preferences here controlling the behavior of FAMOS during DDE transactions.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

260

DDE Interface

Numerical format When numerical data is to be transferred using the text format, this group is used to govern the conversion of numbers to text. Numerical notation One can choose between having results always displayed in exponential or decimal notation or having them displayed automatically. The latter toggles between decimal and exponential display, always using the shortest possible form. Precision This setting determines the number of significant digits in the "automatic" setting or the number digits following the decimal when using the text format. Decimal comma When marked, a comma is used as the decimal character. Otherwise a decimal point is used as is customary in FAMOS. EXCEL, for example requires the use of a decimal comma meaning that the text "1.23" will not be recognized as a number. Separator This determines the type of separator used in separating adjacent numerical values from one another. One can choose between using a tab, an empty space or a freely defined character combination. For example, sending numerical values to EXCEL using tab separators causes the values to be entered row-wise. However, using the combination of "Carriage Return / Line Feed" (ASCII 0x0d/0x0a) causes the numerical values to be entered to the table column-wise. The following non-printable character symbols can be used in the input field: \n Line feed, hexadecimal 0x0A \r Carriage Return, hexadecimal 0x0D

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

DDE Interface \t Tab Latency time This value determines the maximum time that FAMOS waits before ending an unsuccessful transaction. When the error message "Latency time" appears while transferring large amounts of data, this value is to be increased. Server name This supplies the name other applications use in addressing FAMOS for DDE transactions. This name has been preset to FAMOS in the initial settings and should only in exceptions be changed.

261

12.4

FAMOS as DDE Server

When FAMOS is addressed from an another application in a DDE communication, FAMOS becomes the DDE server and the partner application becomes the DDE client. In order to have access to FAMOS by DDE, the correct FAMOS server name must be used. This is preset to FAMOS in the initial settings and can only be changed by the Options dialog described above.

12.4.1 Sending Instructions

When sending a command (DDE-Execute), the topic name SYSTEM is to be used. One can transfer any instructions which can also be executed in the FAMOS editor box. This can include, for example, mathematical formulas or sequence calls (SEQUENCE command). To quit FAMOS, send the command "[Exit]". Reference An alternative to sending FAMOS-files by DDE is to call FAMOS using command line parameters. This works even if FAMOS has already been started before the moment the call is made; in that case, the command is forwarded to the already open instance of the program. Example for Microsoft Visual Basic: Private Sub Command1_Click() Shell "c:\imc\Bin\FAMOS.exe /S crash.seq /X" End Sub FAMOS isinstructed to run the sequence "crash.seq". After it is run, FAMOS is closed. An overview of available command line parameters is presented in the section "Introduction: Starting with parameters".

12.4.2 DDE Info Request

The following items can be requested in the SYSTEM topic (DDE Request). These requests always return a text string. Every DDE-capable application should support these predefined items in order to enable other applications an insight into the DDE capabilities of the program. SYSTEMS Returns a list of all available items in SYSTEM-TOPIC. These are. "SYSTEMS TOPICS FORMATS STATUS" TOPICS Returns a list of all DDE topics supported by FAMOS: "SYSTEM VARS TXVARS" FORMATS Returns a list of all data formats recognized by FAMOS: "TEXT FamosWave"

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

262

DDE Interface "FamosWave" is the name given to special imc-format used to exchange data. STATUS Returns either "BUSY" (FAMOS cannot execute DDE transaction at the given moment) or "READY" (DDE is now possible).

12.4.3 Sending and Requesting Data Variables

Data variables can be passed to FAMOS (DDE poke) or requested from FAMOS (DDE request) from another application. Use VARS as the topic name. When performing a DDE poke, supply a new variable name for the transferred waveform data and when performing a DDE request, supply a variable which already exists. The predefined item TOPICITEMLIST contains a list of all presently existing waveforms. Channels in the data groups are specified in the usual way: GroupName:ChannelName Either the imc-DDE-format ("FamosWave") or the text format can be used. Two-component data (complex, X-Y data) cannot be transferred in parallel. The numerical format parameters used in text data request are set in the dialog "Options DDE". The format used when sending data in text format is open. Both periods and commas are allowed as a decimal point. All non-numbers (except 'e' for exponent, + , - ) are ignored.

12.4.4 Sending and Requesting Text Variables

Text variables can be passed to FAMOS (DDE poke) or requested from FAMOS (DDE request) from another application. Use TXVARS as the topic name. When performing a DDE request, use the names of the text variables for the item names and, when performing a DDE poke, supply an appropriate variable name. The predefined item TOPICITEMLIST contains a list of all presently existing text variables. Channels in the data groups are specified in the usual way: GroupName:ChannelName The data format is the TEXT format.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Browser

263

File Browser
13.1 Overview
The File Browser is designed to provide quick and easy access to needed measurement files. In principle, it is a shortcut for the "File / Load" procedure. The File Browser is particularly useful in situations where multiple measurement value files, all having the same name, are located in different, consecutive directories. Many modern measurement systems generate such a directory structure, especially for consecutive measurements adhering to a fixed configuration (multi-shot-operation). Reference Practical examples for the use of the File Browser are to be found in the chapter 'Tutorial'. The File Browser is a permanent element in the FAMOS Plug-in window, and cannot be uninstalled, in contrast to other FAMOS Plug-ins. In the default configuration, the Plug-in window and with it the File browser is minimized, i.e., only the title bar with the label "Files / Plug-ins" is visible at the upper right of the FAMOS main window. If you wish to work with the File browser, you can quickly maximize the Plug-in window by pressing the corresponding button on the Plug-in window's title bar. The File browser is often used to get a quick overview of a whole series of measurement files without having to perform calculations at the same time. In such a case, the function list, and the editor and output boxes aren't needed at all. The quickest way to achieve such a setup is to select the menu item "Window / Load configuration / Variables list | File Browser".

Alternatively, you can click on the arrow button next to the "Customize FAMOS workbench" icon, and in the pop-down menu which appears, select the split window view shown below:

The main components of the File Browser are a directory tree and a file list which indicates the files located in the currently selected directory. The border between the two lists can be shifted, using the mouse.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

264

File Browser At the top there is a toolbar offering commands affecting the current selection in the folder or file list, as well as a combo box which indicates the current folder or can be used to change it. The right edge of the Plug-in window's title bar additionally indicates the currently selected file format and display filter.

13.2

The Folder List

At the File Browser's first call, it displays only that path in the directory tree which leads to the set default folder for loading files (adjustable via menu item "Extra / Options / Folders"). Double-clicking on a directory's entry toggles between "On" and "Off" for a listing of that folder's subdirectories. Instead of double-clicking, you can select (mark) the desired directory and then press <Enter>. Right-clicking the mouse on the directory tree calls a context menu, which offers the following operations:

Update List: Re-reads the directory structure. This is generally not necessary, since FAMOS normally recognizes changes to the directory structure independently, and updates the list accordingly. Only Working Directory Path: Causes the path to the set default directory for loading files to be shown. This is what occurs, in any case, when FAMOS is first started. Show All Subdirectories: The entire branching structure stemming from the currently active directory is presented. The current selection in the folder list highlights the current folder and thus also determines what is displayed in the adjacent file list. If the option "Show current directory in toolbar" is activated in the dialog under "Extra / Options / File browser / Display" (also accessed via context menu in the file list), a combo box indicating the current path appears in the toolbar. To change to another folder, you can enter a different path in this box and confirm using ENTER, or you can select from the list one of the entries for the last folders used. Making a selection in the directory list can also be accomplished with the help of the arrow buttons:

in the toolbar. These provide a convenient method of switching between directories on the same level. The buttons on the left side allow you to change to the next or to the last directory in the indicated direction and on the same level. The two buttons on the right commence automatic directory-scrolling. The dialog on the "Extras" filecard of the "Options / File Browser / Additional options" dialog (accessible via context menu, item: "Display Options") lets you specify how long to pause between automatic directory changes. The dialog also lets you identify a directory at which to stop scrolling. The automatic mode is discontinued when either the last directory on the given level has been reached, or the button in the toolbar is pressed again. The use of these arrow buttons for comparing data stored in various directories is described in greater detail in the section 'Response to Change of Directory". Using the appropriate setting, the current directory can be deleted. See 'Deleting Files with the File Browser'.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Browser

265

13.3

The File List

The file list indicates the files belonging to the current directory. The current directory, in turn, is the directory currently shown selected (highlighted, marked) in the directory list adjacent at left. Loading files When you double-click on a file's entry in the list, the program starts trying to load the file according to the currently set format. If multiple file entries are selected, then <ENTER>, or, the analogous button in the toolbar, or the appropriate item from the context menu will all commence loading of the selected files (if these haven't already been loaded). Further information on this topic can be found in 'Loading Files with the File Browser'. Additional settings concerning the display of lists can be performed using the context menu (called by right-clicking the mouse in the file list).

Update list Re-reads the directory structure. This is generally not necessary, since FAMOS normally recognizes changes to the directory structure independently, and updates the list accordingly. Delete files With the appropriate presettings, the currently selected files can also be deleted; see the section "Deleting files with the File Browser" for details. Options... Opens the corresponding dialog for making presettings. It can also be called via the main menu "Extra / Options / File Browser". File format and -filter For selecting the file format and display filter; see the next section. Options ... Format If applicable, calls the respective configuration dialog for the file format set.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

266

File Browser

13.4

Display options

The dialog under "Options / File browser | Display" offers a variety of options for determining the display in the File list. The dialog is called via the File list context menu command "Display options" or via the item in the main menu, "Extra / Options, File browser | Display".

Dialog: Options / File Browser / Display

Show current directory in toolbar If this option is active, a combo box appears in the File Browser toolbar, in which the current folder is indicated and can be changed. Automatic update If this option is active (default setting), the file and folder lists are automatically updated if the directory structure changes (e.g. due to the creation, renaming or deletion of files or folders). This process can require lots of time and impede working with FAMOS, in particular if network drives are involved. In this case it is recommended to switch this option off and update the lists manually, if necessary (command "Update list" in the corresponding context menu). Show in file list The information indicated can, by placing a check-mark in the pertinent box, be made to appear with the listing of the file or directory. Subdirectories If this option is selected, the subdirectories are indicated in the file list along with the files. Regardless of the sorting mode used, the subdirectories are displayed above the files. Sort in file List The sorting of the entries in the file list proceeds in the manner indicated by the option chosen here. Sorting by size places the largest files at the head of the list. Sorting by time or date places the newest

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Browser files a the head of the list. Alternatively, you can change the sorting order by clicking on the corresponding column header in the file list. Use this ... symbol for files You can assign a special symbol to accompany a file's entry in the file list, for ease and speed of finding. FAMOS-files If this option is activated, all files in the FAMOS file format are denoted by this symbol. This does not cause entire files to be checked but only the first bytes of a file. All imc applications which save measurement data to files (e.g.. MUSYCS, -MUSYCS) use this format. If you are not particularly concerned with files in this format it is advisable to deactivate this option, as it slows down the processing of the File Window. Filter This option causes the entries of all files which correspond to the specified name template to be accompanied by a special symbol. The template may incorporate the characters "*" and "?" as wildcards, to be employed in the usual manner ("*" = any number of any characters"?"). Multiple filters may be specified; they must then be separated by semicolons. Examples

267

Additionally, a display filter can be specified, which determines what kind of files can be displayed. For this purpose, select the command "File format and filter" from the File list context menu.

Along with the file format, it's also possible to specify a display filter. Thus, for example, you can have only such files which interest you displayed in the list while other files (e.g. configuration files etc.) are ignored. In the filters, it's possible to use the wildcards '*' and '?' in the usual way. Multiple filters can be specified with a semicolon separating them. Examples

The selected file format and display filter are also indicated in the Browser's title bar.

13.5

Loading Files

13.5.1 Overview
The main purpose of the File Browser is to simplify the sequence of tasks: Select files -> Load files ->Display waveforms Of course one could accomplish this using the dialog called via menu item "File / Load". But that method isn't very convenient whenever you have multiple files stored in various directories, which you wish to

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

268

File Browser display in succession and compare. The File Browser can be used to best effect if a group of measurement value files, destined for the above mentioned processing, are saved under the same name and in different, consecutively placed directories. Many modern measurement systems generate just such a directory structure, especially involving consecutive measurements adhering to a fixed configuration. Reference Practical examples for the use of the File Browser are to be found in the chapter 'Tutorial'.

13.5.2 Specifying and Configuring a File Format

Just as for loading with the "File / Load" dialog, it is necessary to have a specified format for the files. The dialog for making these settings is called via the context menu command "File format and filter". The format selection list in this dialog contains listings of all known file formats. Along with the standard, included internal file formats, any formats previously defined by the user with the help of the File Assistant are also indicated in the list. If the format selected is configurable, the corresponding dialog can be called via the context menu (rightclick the mouse in the file list, select item "Options FAMOS Format..). The format and its settings can also be specified in the format list in the dialog called via "Load File" and the options dialog which can be accessed from there by pressing <Options>. Further information about the file formats available, as well as about the settings' dialogs involved, is to be found in the Chapter 'File Management'.

13.5.3 Options for Loading with the File Browser

After having specified the format for measurement value files, you can make settings which govern how FAMOS proceeds once the files have been loaded. Such settings will only come into effect if you use the File browser to load files; not through the use of the "File/ Load" dialog. Among other things, you can determine whether the display of the waveform should occur immediately and also how the naming of the loaded waveforms should be done. Make the important settings in the "Load" dialog (opened by selecting "Extra / Options/ File Browser / Load" or using the file list context menu command: "Load Options...").

Dialog: Options / File browser / Load

The waveform-loading process is controlled by the settings in this dialog as follows: Channel naming: The loaded waveforms are designated by default by their original names in the files (FAMOS-format), or, if no name is given in the file (ASCII, BINARY-format), by the name of the files themselves. Optional settings are available to prefix or append the current filename or the current directory name.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Browser This option is sensible for cases where you intend to compare multiple channels all bearing the same file name. Since FAMOS requires channels' names to be unambiguous, The last channel loaded would otherwise write over the previously present channel with the same name. Show automatically in previous curve window With this option active, after loading is completed all curve windows are checked for a waveform bearing the same original name as the waveform just loaded. If a curve window displaying such a waveform is present, the newly loaded waveform is displayed together with the old occupant waveform in that curve window. This option is only sensible if the active option for "Channel naming" is either "Append directory name to end" or "Precede with directory name". Example Suppose that in the beginning a waveform "Channel1", belonging to directory "D1", is loaded. Its name is now "D1_Channel1". Next, a waveform from directory "D2", also called "Channel1", is loaded; its name is now "D2_Channel1". With the above option set, a search begins for a channel named "*_Channel1" (* = any name). "D1_Channel1" is promptly found and so "D2_Channel1" is drawn in the curve window with it, for ease of comparison. Show after loading If this option is active, and the loaded waveform isn't already being displayed, a new curve window is opened and displays the waveform.Regardless of the particular option activated, the display in a curve window is always updated to depict a waveform with given name and in the current directory. This can lead to a waveform being replaced in its curve window by another waveform, if the directory is changed and the new directory also contains a waveform with the expected name. It can also occur that a curve window is open but "empty", if the current directory contains no waveform bearing the name that the curve window was created for. The same can happen as a result of loading a curve configuration. An empty curve window signifies that the curve window is ordered to display a waveform not currently present in FAMOS. As soon as a waveform by the pertinent name is loaded to FAMOS, it will immediately be displayed. Loading Waveforms Temporarily / Permanently Temporary refers to files which are automatically deleted (from FAMOS) when the current directory in the directory list is changed. They also are deleted as soon as their file entry is no longer the current entry in the file list. This allows you to gain a quick overview of measurement data files stored in various directories without the files accumulating in the FAMOS variables' list, which might necessitate deleting them manually later on. A special symbol distinguishes temporary files in the variables list.

269

Permanent waveforms, by contrast, remain accessible in a FAMOS session until they are removed from the variables list via menu item "Delete". This is the appropriate setting in cases where you wish to compare waveforms belonging to different directories. Temporarily loaded waveforms can be subsequently declared permanent (menu item "Variable/ Permanent").

13.5.4 Selecting / Deselecting Files for Loading

Select the files of interest using the mouse. The <Enter> key, the corresponding button in the toolbar, or the appropriate item in the context menu all cause the current selection to be loaded. If only a single file is involved, it is sufficient to double-click on its entry in the list. Button in the toolbar: FAMOS will attempt to load the files in accordance with the currently set format. If an error occurs and the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

270

File Browser file cannot be loaded, an error message will appear in the status bar in the main window. Otherwise, the waveforms contained in the files become accessible in FAMOS, and are indicated in the variables list. A loaded file is distinguishable in the file list by a symbol (oscilloscope icon) with a yellow background. Names of files which feature the "loaded" symbol are recorded internally. On the occasion of a change of directory, the names of files in the new directory are compared with the recorded names. If the new directory contains files with names identical to those of already loaded waveforms, the waveforms are automatically reloaded to reflect the data in the corresponding files of the current directory. In other words, the waveform in a loaded file can be expelled and replaced by a different waveform having the same filename when the directory is changed. The files containing waveforms thus deleted from FAMOS correspondingly appear without the yellow background in their symbol in the file list: Waveforms characterized by the "temporary" property are deleted in any case, as soon as their files are "deselected".

13.5.5 Response to Change of Directory

If the current directory in the directory list is changed, then waveforms having the temporary property are removed from the variable list. In addition, a new loading operation is attempted for all files recorded as "loaded". The list of "loaded" files is thus compared with the list of files belonging to the current directory, and any coincidence of filenames leads to replacement of data in "loaded" files. If, for example, you wish to view a collection of waveforms stored under the filename "Channel1.DAT" in several directories, it is sufficient to load just one of the files and then change the directory. If a new directory contains a file of the same name, the loaded file is updated to reflect the waveform in the current directory. For such applications the arrow files in the toolbar come in very handy.

These provide a convenient method of switching between directories on the same level. The buttons on the left side allow you to change to the next or to the last directory in the indicated direction and on the same level. The two buttons on the right commence automatic directory-scrolling. The dialog on the "Extras" filecard of the "Options File Browser / Additional options" dialog (accessible via context menu, item: "Display Options") lets you specify how long to pause between automatic directory changes. The dialog also lets you identify a directory at which to stop scrolling. The automatic mode is discontinued when either the last directory on the given level has been reached, or the button in the toolbar is pressed again. Reference Section 'Additional options' in this chapter.

13.6

Deleting Files

It is possible to delete files from within the File browser. This function removes selected file from the pertinent data carrier. Be certain when doing this that you no longer require the affected data! Please give consideration to the fact that deleting a directory automatically entails deletion of all its subdirectories and their content. To delete selected files you can use the pertinent button in the toolbar or the corresponding item in the context menu (accessed by right-clicking in the file list).

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

File Browser Icon: These only respond if the deletion operation is permitted at all by the program. To secure this option, it is necessary to activate the appropriate setting in the dialog "Options / File browser", filecard "Delete". The option concerned is "Off" by default. Other settings affecting deletion can also be performed in this dialog. For instance, an optional deletion-password can be established, or prompts for confirmation of the deletion command can be ordered. Reference Section 'Additional options' in this chapter.

271

13.7

Additional options

The menu item "Extra / Options / File browser | More options" opens a dialog for making presettings concerning automatic scrolling and deletion of files.

Directory Scrolling These options affect the behavior of the File Window when you use the arrow buttons to "explore" in the directory tree. Delay Determines the time (in seconds) between changes of the directory during automatic scrolling. Stop at The arrow buttons allow you to jump to the next directory on the same level in the direction indicated. This setting specifies when the last directory in the relevant direction is to be considered as already reached. Current level -1 The end of the scrolling process is reached when the next directory in the direction indicated is at least one place higher in the hierarchy than the current directory. In the example below, only the subdirectories "Shot1" and "Shot2" would be accessible via the arrow buttons if this were the valid setting. Current level -2 The end of the scrolling process is reached when the next directory in the direction indicated is at least

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

272

File Browser two places higher in the hierarchy than the current directory. In the example below, the subdirectories "Shot1" to "Shot6" would all be accessible via the arrow buttons if this were the valid setting. |----Labtests | |--------Exp1 | | |-----Shot1 <<< current directory | | |-----Shot2 | |--------Exp2 | | |----Shot3 | | |----Shot4 | |--------Exp3 | |----Shot5 | |----Shot6 |----Tmp Delete The following options configure direct deleting using the File Browser. Allow deleting Deletion is only possible if this option is activated. Otherwise, the corresponding menu item and button in the toolbar are not operable. In this way, data are protected from accidental loss due to incorrect operation in the surface environment. Delete Password For additional security against deletion of files by accident or by unauthorized operators, a password can be established which is inquired before deletion of files is executed. If this option is set to "active", an additional dialog appears in which to declare the (consisting of at least 4, and at most 8 characters). Deactivation of this option can also only be performed after correct response to the password inquiry. Change Here you can replace a previously established password. Confirm This option causes a confirmation inquiry to appear, which must be replied to in the affirmative, before deletion is actually executed.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Project Management

273

Project Management
14.1 Concept
Small analysis and presentation tasks can often be accomplished with the help of a single FAMOS sequence. However, for more complex tasks, that usually is not enough. The necessary algorithms are often distributed among a number of sequences and dialogs which may, for instance, be called consecutively from a "main sequence". Additionally there may be predefined curve configurations providing curve windows with a particular appearance, as well as templates for the Report Generator, which are later filled in with updated measurement results and curve plots. Thus, accomplishing a task may require an entire collection of files which must be jointly administered, edited and transferred. The collection of files and settings necessary for solving a particular assignment is referred to as a FAMOS project. All files and settings belonging to a project are saved to a joint folder, the so-called project folder. This makes it very easy to administer (for instance, create a backup copy of) and transfer the project (for instance, to run it on a different PC) - it's sufficient to create a copy of the folder. A project can also be "executable". For this purpose, the folder must contain a sequence with the name " Autostart.seq" or a dialog named "Autostart.dlg". Then the project can be run by starting this sequence or dialog, respectively. A special case of a general FAMOS project is the "current session". This enables you to save the project's current state (for instance, the contents of the variables list, the curve windows and sequences open) before exiting FAMOS, so that the next session can follow as seamlessly as possible on the last.

14.2

The Project Explorer

The Project Explorer is the control center for administering FAMOS projects. From here, you can create, open, run and delete projects. To call the Project Explorer, use the menu item "Project: Project-Explorer".

The tree diagram on the dialog's left side is a representation of your system's directory structure. Navigation within the tree diagram is analogous to the operation of the Windows Explorer. When the Project Explorer is started, the FAMOS default folder for projects is the active selection. This default can be edited under menu Extra: Options: Folders. The right side of the dialog (project list) presents the project subfolders contained in the folder selected. FAMOS project folders are denoted by a special symbol: .

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

274

Project Management

14.3

Creating a new project

To create a new project, first start the Project Explorer (menu item "Project: Project-Explorer"). Begin by selecting in the tree diagram the folder in which you wish the project subfolder to be created. If creating a new project is permitted in the currently selected folder, a new entry "<New Project>" appears in the project list. Note: If this entry is missing, it means that no new project can be created in that folder. This can be the case, for example, if the parent folder is itself a project folder (projects cannot be nested). Double-clicking on the entry <New project...> or pressing the button with that caption calls an additional dialog, by which you can set the project's name..

Under Name, enter the desired name for the project. This name is identical to the name of the project folder to be created. The same rules apply for the name's syntax as for a folder name, so that characters like "< ? > : \ /" aren't permitted. Also, no other folder of the same name may already exist. Under Location, you can edit the location in which the project is saved. Once a valid name and location are entered, the resulting complete directory path is indicated at the bottom of the dialog. The new project is then created once you click on the OK button. This means in particular that: 1. The project folder is created. 2. The file "Default.FamosPrj" is created in the project folder. This so-called project file contains the settings valid for this project. 3. The files "Desktop.ini" and "FamosProject.ico" are created. These ensure that the Windows Explorer display the FAMOS project icon for the folder. 4. The file "Autostart.seq" is created. This "start sequence" for the project is called when the project is run. The sequence is originally initialized to output a default message and must be adapted according to your needs. Once the folder and files have been successfully created, the new project is loaded.

14.4

Loading and running a project

To open an already existing project, select the desired project in the Project Explorer's project list and click on the button <Open project>. When a project is opened, the following actions are carried out. The opened project's name appears in pointed brackets in the FAMOS main window's title bar. The settings saved for the project are applied. These can include: Variables Curve windows

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Project Management Input box contents Sequences/ dialogs which are open in the Editor box Project favorites. These are displayed with the title as an additional sub-group in the "Favorites"window. The default folders for sequences/ dialogs, curve configurations (*.ccv) and reports (*.drb) are reset as the project folder. If you click the button <Run project> in the Project Explorer, the project is opened as previously described. Next, a check is made of whether the project folder contains a sequence with the name "autostart.seq" or a dialog "autostart.dlg". If yes, the sequence or dialog, respectively, is run. To open or run a project recently active, you can also use the menu item "Project: Last projects". "Executed" projects are denoted by a special symbol (exclamation mark) in the menu. To run a project already loaded, the following options also exist: Menu item "Project: Execute": Runs the currently open project. Project favorites: Under the project favorites, you will find the automatically generated entry "Project <...> start". Note that in order to load the project favorites, it has to be activated with the project properties. To open and run a project in a single step, these possibilities are also provided: FAMOS command line parameter "/P project path" Example: The command line FAMOS.exe /P "c:\imc\prj\MyProject" Starts FAMOS and runs the project specified. Additionally, the switch "/X" can be combined with "/P". By this means, FAMOS is closed again after the project is run. This enables you, for instance, to create shortcuts for commonly needed projects. Favorites: You can also create entries in the Favorites list, in order to start projects directly. To do this, the option "Project" must be activated in the Favorites' properties, and the complete project path must be specified.

275

14.5

Special Characteristics of an Active Project

The project's name is displayed in the FAMOS title bar in pointed brackets. A project folder's main significance is as a repository of all files (meaning sequences, dialogs, reports, curve window configurations) which affect the project. This is supported by special features and the operation technique of FAMOS, as described below.

14.5.1 Opening files relevant to a project by command

For an active project, the response of the following commands or functions for opening project-relevant files is different: SEQUENCE Dialog() RgDocOpen() CvConfig() CvGlobaleEinstellungLaden() Unless the complete path for the file to be opened (1st parameter) is supplied, the system searches for the file in the following folders in order:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

276

Project Management In the current working folder (determined by the sequence or dialog under which work takes place) In the current project folder In the pre-defined default folder for the respective file type (set via "Extra: Options: Folders" and functions or commands such as SDIR, SetOption, RgSetDir). When working within a project, it's best not to supply the functions mentioned above with the complete filenames; otherwise, your projects may not be ready to run if they are copied to a different location. If a sequence requires the current project path, use the function GetOption(): MyProjectPath = GetOption("Dir.CurrentProject")

14.5.2 Saving project-relevant files by command

For an active project, the response of the following commands or functions for saving project-relevant files is different: RgDocSave() RgDocExport() KvSicher() Unless a complete path is specified for the file to be saved (1st parameter), the project folder is used.

14.5.3 Manual opening of project-relevant files

If you manually open a sequence, dialog, curve configuration or report which doesn't belong o the current project folder, you are prompted to confirm whether to add the file to the current project (i.e. import it to the project).

If you click No, the selected file is open unchanged. On the other hand, if you select Yes, the selected file is copied to the project folder and the newly created copy is loaded. You can thus easily import already existing files to a project.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Project Management

277

14.5.4 Manual saving of project-relevant files

If when manually saving a sequence, dialog, curve configuration or report, the path you specify doesn't match the project folder, you are prompted to determine whether it should be saved in the project folder instead.

If you choose "No", the file is saved under the path originally selected. Conversely, if you choose "Yes", the file is saved to the project folder instead.

14.6

Project properties

You have the option to set additional properties for the current project. The menu item "Project: Properties" calls the following dialog:

Variables: Saves the complete contents of the variables list. All variables are saved together in a file in the project folder. When you open the project, this file is automatically reopened. Open curve windows: The configurations of all open curve windows are saved. When you open the project, the curve windows are displayed once again in the same position. Open sequences: The path names of the sequences currently open in the Editor window are saved. When the project is opened, the system attempts to re-load the sequences and to display them. Project favorites: The project has its own group of favorites with the name "Project favorites: <Project name>". Favorites created within this group by the user are automatically saved along with it and adopted in the list of Favorites when the project is opened.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

278

Project Management

Window layout: The position and configuration of the FAMOS main window, and, if they're open, of the Data Editor, Dialog Editor and the Report Generator, are saved. Input window contents: The editor input window's complete content is saved. Data-Browser With this option the state of the Data-Browser is saved (window positions and opened panels). Only the path to the panel files is stored not the actual panel files. Option "Reset FAMOS before loading project" With this option, the same command as in "File -> Restart" will be performed before loading the project. The variable list is emptied, i.e. all variables are deleted.. All open sequences are closed. Directories for loading and storing files are reset to the Default set-up.

14.7

Save, Close, Delete

To save the current project, use the menu item "Project: Save". The files and settings belonging to the project are saved in the project folder according to the project components set in the project properties. To close the active project, use the menu item "Project: Close". If appropriate, a confirmation prompt may appear to ask you whether to save relevant changes to the project. To get rid of a project no longer needed, you can use the button <Delete project> in the Project Explorer. The entire project folder along with all subfolders is deleted. Alternatively, you can simply delete the folder by way of the Windows Explorer or any other file manager.

14.8

Current/ Last session

A special case of a general FAMOS project is the "current session". Using the menu item "Project: Save current session", you can save the project's current state. This would encompass, for instance, the contents of the variables list, the curve windows and sequences open, the arrangement of the various FAMOS workspace windows and the input window contents. The menu item " Open last session " then lets you restore the session, so that the next session can follow as seamlessly as possible on the last.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs

279

User-Defined Dialogs
15.1 Introduction and Terminology
During a sequence's run-time, communication with the user is often necessary; for instance, the user could be prompted to make an entry to be used in the subsequent processing of the sequence, or could be presented with preliminary results to view. For this purpose, such functions as BoxValue? (for entering a value), BoxText? (for entering a text) or BoxOutput/BoxMessage (for displaying text) can be used in FAMOS. The input or readout windows generated by such functions have a fixed appearance which the user cannot influence. Therefore, they are only suitable for simple, routine applications. FAMOS offers the user the additional option of freely defining input/ output windows. Such a window, serving the purpose of interacting with the user, will be referred to below as a "dialog". To create a dialog, it is necessary both to determine its appearance (for instance its size, color and button caption) and to define its function (what is to happen when the user presses the button).

15.1.1 Design
The dialog's design determines its visual appearance. This includes the dialog window's size and position, as well as the types and locations of any embedded controls and display elements. Examples of such dialog elements include buttons, text input boxes, lists, images, curve displays and tables.

The illustration shows a typical dialog with a menu and a toolbar [1], various dialog elements [2] (buttons, input box and curve window) and a status bar [3]. For designing the dialog, the FAMOS Dialog Editor is provided. Using this, all aspects of the dialog's graphic appearance can be set. This mainly encompasses the number, positions and types of dialog elements included, and their properties. Here you can supply the dialog with a button (softkey), for example, and then set that button's caption, size and color. Operation of the Dialog-Editor is described in detail in the section 'The Dialog-Editor'.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

280

User-Defined Dialogs

15.1.2 Programming
If, for instance, the user presses a button in the dialog, FAMOS' reaction to this push of the button must be defined. Toward this end, a sequence must be written in normal FAMOS syntax. While a dialog is running, a variety of events can occur, for example the previously mentioned push of a button, or selection of a menu item, or changing of the selection in a list, and much more. To each event, it's possible to assign a sequence (event-sequence) to be carried out. Creation and testing of such sequences, as well as of any other sequences, are accomplished through the use of the Sequence Editor in the FAMOS main window.

The figure above shows a dialog in the FAMOS Sequence Editor. On the left side, the events belonging to the dialog are listed, on the right side, the sequence code for the currently selected event is displayed. The information on the dialog's appearance is saved along with the associated event-sequences in a dialog file, which has the file extension ".DLG". For the purposes of editing and testing dialog files, they can be opened by either the Dialog Editor or the Sequence Editor. To call an already prepared dialog from within a sequence, use the FAMOS function Dialog. This function belongs to the function group '10) Options, Dialogs..'. The expansion-kit "Dialogs" is of particular value for creating user-defined dialogs in FAMOS. This kit is included in a proper installation of the software ("Kits" tab in the FAMOS function list). The "Dialog-Kit" contains functions for controlling the dialog during runtime. These include functions for querying and setting the current contents of control elements. A description of the Dialog-Kit functions is provided in the FAMOS online help under "Kits"/"Dialogs".

15.2

The Dialog-Editor

The Dialog-Editor is used to set a dialog's appearance, structure (in other words, the dialog elements it contains), as well as its main properties.

15.2.1 Calling the Dialog-Editor

There are a variety of ways to start the Dialog Editor: Selecting the menu item "Extra: Dialog - Editor" or the corresponding button in the FAMOS toolbar. Opening a dialog file in the FAMOS Editor window (menu item "Sequence : Load"), or selecting the corresponding button in the Editor window's toolbar). When the cursor in the Editor window is positioned over the function name Dialog, the Editor's context menu (opened by right-clicking the mouse) contains the additional item 'Dialog-Editor'. This starts the Dialog Editor and opens the dialog which is specified by the function's first

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs parameter. After starting the editor, the working window appears at the same position as at the end of the last session.

281

15.2.2 Main window

The picture below shows the Dialog Editor's main elements:

Below the menu- and toolbar [1], you see the dialog window [2]. Each dialog [3] currently under construction is displayed in its own separate dialog window. This is the actual workspace where you set the dialog's size and place the elements which it contains. By right-clicking the mouse over the dialog, you call a context menu [4]. The context menu's contents depend on where the mouse pointer is positioned when you call it. The toolbox [5] lets you select new dialog elements to add. The available elements are organized in groups which each become active when you click on their respective buttons. A description of the available dialog elements is provided in the chapter "Dialog element". The panel "Menu" is a special feature used to define the dialog's menu- or toolbar; see the section "Menu- and " for details. The Properties-Explorer [6] lists the properties of the object currently selected (for instance a dialog element). To change a property, simply click on the readout of its current value on the right side of the table. Then, depending on the type of property, an input box, selection list or a dialog will appear, which you can use to change the property as desired. In the lower portion of the Properties-Explorer, a brief explanation of the currently selected entry's meaning is displayed. The toolbox and the Properties-Explorer can be moved around by first gripping their title bars with a click of the mouse and then using the Drag&Drop technique; they can be "docked" at another point or positioned to float alone freely. Double-clicking on the title bar of a free-floating window causes it to be redocked.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

282

User-Defined Dialogs

15.2.3 Creating, opening and saving a dialog

To create a new dialog, use the menu item "File: New. The dialog initially bears a default name ("Dialog" + running number) which can be edited as desired upon saving. An existing dialog can be opened using the menu item "File: Open". The Editor note which dialog you last worked on. An easy way to re-open such a document is to click on its name where it appears in the lower portion of the "File" menu. Once this has been accomplished, a new working window opens and the dialog is displayed. When a dialog is displayed, the associated sequence code is automatically loaded into the FAMOS Sequence Editor. Conversely, opening a dialog file in the Sequence Editor also causes the dialog to be displayed in the Dialog Editor. To save a dialog, use one of the appropriate menu items in the "File" menu of either the Dialog- or Sequence Editor. The complete record of how the dialog is defined - in other words its graphic appearance and its sequence code - is saved.

15.2.4 Changing a dialogs size

At a dialog's right and lower edges there are black squares, so-called "Grips". These can be "grabbed" by the mouse, and dragged by moving the mouse while holding down its button, in order to alter the dialog's size.

15.2.5 Adding dialog elements

First select the desired dialog element from the toolbox. Then click the mouse with its pointer at the position within the dialog window where you wish the new element's left upper corner to be, hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse to demarcate the element's desired dimensions. Once the mouse button is released, the new element is created in the area outlined. Depending on what type of element is involved, another dialog may appear, in which you must specify fundamental properties for initializing the element. Another way of creating dialog elements is by adding them from the Clipboard. By using Copy/Paste, it is possible to create copies of one or more elements.

15.2.6 Selecting dialog elements

In order to edit (for example, move, change properties of, or copy) one or more dialog elements, they must first be selected. A selected element is distinguished by black squares at its corners and edges. These squares are known as "Handles". Besides indicating the object's selection status, these grips serve to change the size or shape of dialog elements.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs When multiple elements are selected, one of them is defined as the so-called reference object, distinguished by solid black grips, while the other selected objects' grips only consist of a black frame. The reference object is relevant to the commands in the "Format" menu. In the picture above, 3 elements are selected, and the button "Load File" is the reference object. Single selection There are a variety of possibilities for selecting a single object: If it's not yet active, select the selection tool from the main window's toolbar. Then click the left mouse button on the desired element. By clicking the right mouse button over an element, it is selected and the associated context menu is called. Group selection There are different ways to select a group of elements. Such a group can then be jointly moved, copied or deleted. You can demarcate an area using the mouse, within which all elements are then selected. To do this, first select the selection tool from the toolbar, if it's not yet active. Then left-click the mouse over one corner of the selection area desired and drag the mouse while holding down its button to where you intend the selection area's opposite corner to be. During this operation, the currently valid area will be denoted by a dashed line. All elements are then selected which overlap (even partially) the area demarcated. The selection can be cancelled using the right mouse button or [ESCAPE]. To add an element to an existing selection, click on it while holding down the [CTRL]-key and while the selection tool is active. To remove an element from an existing selection group, click on it while holding down the [CTRL]-key and while the selection tool is active. To change the reference object, click the left mouse button again on an already selected element while holding down the [ALT]-key. If you're unable to click the mouse over a certain element because it's covered by another object, first place the other object in the background using the menu command "Format: Arrange: To Back".

283

15.2.7 Dialog element properties

Besides its position and size, each dialog element is distinguished by a number of other properties which determine its appearance and behavior. First, select the desired element in the dialog. The Properties Explorer then shows the available properties for the particular element.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

284

User-Defined Dialogs

To change a property, simply click on the readout of its current value on the right side of the table. Depending on the property's type, an input box, selection list or dialog then appears, which you can use to change the property. Most properties' designations are self-explanatory. Any peculiarities are listed in the section "Dialog elements" of the respective property's description. In addition, there are a number of default properties which most elements feature: Name Every dialog element has a name which must be unique within its respective dialog. The name (in contrast to the "caption") isn't visible to the user. It serves to identify an element for the Dialog-Kit functions, to which it is supplied as the first parameter. When an element is created, a default name is at first formed based on the element's type and a serial number; this name can be subsequently changed at any time. However, when changing a name, note that it may already be used in event sequences and thus may need to be changed there as well. A name may only consist of letters, digits and underlines; spaces, for example, are not permitted. Caption and text formatting Many dialog elements come with a text to display, which is specified using the standard property "Caption ". Additionally, its font can be determined by means of the property in the group "Text-formatting" regarding its type, size, style and color. A special feature in this matter is the setting "auto". This means that the value of the corresponding dialog setting is applied. For example, in order to increase the font size for all of a dialog's elements, you don't need to adapt the font for every single element. It's enough to change the dialog's property "font size" then all dialog elements with the font size = <auto> automatically "inherit" the setting. Image An important property of many dialog elements is the image displayed. Examples include buttons or menu items, which show a picture in addition to the text in order to clarify the element's function. If you click over the entry for "Image" in the Properties Explorer, the following dialog for selecting the desired image appears.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs

285

FAMOS already provides a variety of images in the usual standard sizes 16x16 pixels (e.g. for menu elements/toolbar or list entries) as well as 32x32 and 48x48 (e.g. for buttons), which are organized in various groups for the sake of greater clarity. First select the desired size in the tree diagram and then the appropriate subgroup. In the image preview on the right side, you will find all the associated images. The desired image can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse or by using the arrow keys. Naturally, it's also possible to import image files from outside sources. One typical application, for example, is the display of a company logo. Toward this end, click on the entry "Files" to expand in the tree diagram at left, and select the desired file from among the entries which then appear. The following formats are supported: Bitmap (*.bmp), Enhanced Metafile (*.emf), Windows Metafile (*.wmf), JPEG, PNG, GIF and TIFF. Subfolders which don't contain any image files in any supported format aren't displayed. Please note that some applications require a certain image size. For menu elements, a size of 16x16 pixels is required. If the checkbox "Transparent" is marked, the image appears transparent. All pixels in the image's background color are replaced by the color of the background behind the image (i.e. the background color of the dialog or menu, for example). The image's background color is defined as the color of the top left pixel. Data-linking and Input Validation Some dialog elements can be linked directly to a FAMOS variable (property: "Data-linking: Variable Name"). This means on the one hand that the element always displays the variable's current state. Changes of the linked variable are recognized automatically, and the display updated accordingly. Remark Important: A variable to be linked with a dialog element must either already exist before the dialog is called or be created and initialized in the event-sequence "Dialog Init". For variables created later, the linkage isn't in effect. Conversely, changes made by the user to the dialog element are adopted by the variable. At what moment the changed value is written to the variable is determined by the property "Data-linking: Apply". In general, the available selections are "auto" (i.e. adoption immediately upon entry by the user) or "On command". The latter means that adoption of changes is controlled either by the function DlgApplyData or upon pressing a button with the special function "Apply". Additionally, a data type can be assigned to some dialog elements ("Data-linkage: Data type"). The data type determines on the one hand the formatting of the current value's display, and on the other hand can

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

286

User-Defined Dialogs be used to verify the appropriateness of the user's input. The group "Input Validation" also serves the purpose of validating the entries made by the user. If the dialog element is for entering numeric values, you can use this group to define the permitted value range. If the user enters a number outside of the permitted range or if the entry cannot be converted into a number, a message box provides notification of this.

15.2.8 Moving dialog elements

In order to be able to move objects with the mouse, the selection tool must be activated (denoted by the status of the corresponding toolbar button). Moving an object Left-click the mouse over the object and while holding down the button, drag the object to the position desired. Moving groups of objects First select the desired group of objects (see the section "Selecting dialog element"). Then left click the mouse on the reference object (or, with the [SHIFT]-key pressed, on any selected object) and keep the mouse button pressed down. While the button is pressed down, it's possible to move the group of objects to the desired position. Instead of the mouse, you can also use the arrow keys, in order to move the current selection in the desired direction. Remark When the grid with snap function (menu item "View: Options") is active, the edges of the objects are forced to align with the grid points. The objects don't move smoothly with the motion of the mouse, but "hop", rather.

15.2.9 Aligning elements with each other

In order to achieve neat arrangements of multiple elements (e.g. all with left justification, all same width), it's convenient to begin work with the grid activated (menu item "View: Options"). There's also the possibility to arrange a number of objects in relation to a reference object. Begin by selecting the desired elements and specify the reference element in relation to which the other elements are to be located. One way to do this is to click on all the elements in sequence while holding down the [SHIFT]-key. The reference element is denoted by making a final click on it (after it had already been clicked) while still holding down the [SHIFT]-key. See the section "Selecting dialog element" to learn additional ways to select object groups and to set the reference object. In the menu "Format", the following commands are available: Alignment: Left, Top, Bottom, Right, ... to Center

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs All selected elements are aligned to the respective edge or center line of the reference object. Their size doesn't change. Alignment: To grid All edges of the selected elements are forced to move to the closest grid point. Same size All selected elements are adjusted to the same height or width as the reference element. The position of the element's left upper corner remains unchanged. Same Distance After alignment, all elements are equally far from each other in the specified direction. Centered After alignment, all elements are centered with respect to the specified direction, meaning that they are all equally far from the dialog's outer edge.

287

15.2.10 Elements overlapping each other

The individual dialog elements are drawn in a fixed order. Elements drawn later can overlap ones already present either partially or completely. To control the order in which elements are drawn, and thus in what way they overlap each other, the commands in the menu "Format: Arrange" are provided. The same commands are also in the element's context menu. The element to change must be selected previously. To front The selected dialog element is moved to the foreground. It is on top of all other elements and can't be covered by any other element. To back The selected dialog element is moved to the background. It is beneath all other elements and can't cover any other element.

15.2.11 Changing the size of elements

To change the size of an element, it must be selected as the only one. Also make sure that the selection tool is activated. When an element is in the selected state, its edges have black squares, so-called "grips". If you move the mouse over such a grip, the mouse cursor changes to a standard WINDOWS cursor for changing the size of or moving a window. Then you can left-click the mouse ("grab the grip") and while keeping the mouse button down, drag the element's edge or corner to the position desired. When the grid with snap function is active, the elements' edges are forced to adhere to the grid points. Therefore, the size doesn't change smoothly as the mouse move, instead, the edge or corner "hops" to the next grid point.

15.2.12 Deleting elements

To delete one or more elements, they must first be selected. To do this, select the command "Delete" from the "Edit" menu or from the element's context menu. Alternatively, you can use the command "Edit: Cut" or the corresponding toolbar button. In contrast to deleting, in this case the selected elements are removed to the Clipboard.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

288

User-Defined Dialogs

15.2.13 Clipboard
The "Copy and Paste" method, using the Clipboard is a convenient way to make duplicates of existing elements in the same dialog, or even to exchange elements between dialogs. Once you have selected the desired elements, select either of the commands "Cut" or "Copy" from the menu "Edit" or from the element's context menu, or the corresponding toolbar buttons. With "Cut", the previously selected elements disappear. To insert the copied or cut element, use the menu item "Edit: Paste". Since the dialog element names must be unique, the pasted elements are assigned default names. All other properties remain unchanged.

15.2.14 Grid
For convenience in positioning the dialog elements, you can have a grid displayed. To configure the grid, select the menu item "View: Options". In the Properties explorer, the available settings are indicated. Show grid Sets whether to display the grid. Snap functions When this is activated, the elements' edges are forced to adhere to the grid points. The snap function also applies if the grid isn't visible. Horizontal/ Vertical distance Determines the distance between grid points in the respective direction.

15.3

Programming

15.3.1 Principles
Along with the design of a dialog, which determines the dialog's appearance, the sequence code associated with the dialog (and thus the dialog's behavior while being run) must also be defined. When a dialog is run, events occur in consequence of which an associated sequence is also run. Examples of events include starting the dialog (in the associated sequence, necessary variables can be generated and dialog elements initialized), or pushing a button (in the associated sequence, a calculation could be performed, for example). To run a dialog, use the function Dialog from the function group '10> Options, Dialogs, DDE...'. The dialog is closed when the command DlgCloseDialog from the Dialog-Kit is called within an event sequence (this could happen, for example, as a reaction to pressing a button with the caption 'OK'). Only after the end of the dialog does the function Dialog return. Let's consider the following simple example: A dialog consists of only 2 buttons, one for carrying out a certain calculation, and the other for closing the dialog.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs

289

The dialog additionally has a title bar with a system menu, so that it can also be ordered to close by means of the key combination [ALT+F4] or by a click on the "Exit"-button in the title bar (which initiates " Dialog Close").

The function Dialog loads the specified dialog file and forms the dialog, without displaying it. Subsequently, the event 'Dialog Init' is triggered. Here, variables can be generated or dialog elements initialized. After processing the initialization sequence, the dialog is displayed, and the system waits for further events. In the example, only three possible events could occur: The user presses the button "DoIt". In the associated event sequence, a calculation could be carried out, for instance. After the sequence is run, the system waits for further events. The user presses the [OK] button. In order for the dialog to be subsequently closed, the associated event sequence must contain the command DlgCloseDialog. The user presses the Exit button in the title bar or the combination of keys [ALT+F4]. The associated event-sequence "Dialog Close" must also contain the command DlgCloseDialog. This command is entered automatically when the dialog is created. A call of the command DlgCloseDialog leads to the dialog being closed. For this purpose the dialog is first hidden and then later the event 'Dialog End'. Here, for example, no longer necessary variables can be deleted. After the sequence is run through, the dialog is permanently deleted and the function Dialog returns. The return value in this case corresponds to the parameter passed to the function DlgCloseDialog .

15.3.2 Editing event-sequences

The event-sequences have the same syntax as "normal" FAMOS-sequences and are also created and tested using the sequence editor in the FAMOS main window. For information on the principles of operating the Sequence Editor, refer to the chapter "Sequences". When a dialog is opened for editing (no matter whether by the Dialog-Editor or the Sequence-Editor), the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

290

User-Defined Dialogs working window is divided into a tree diagram list of events on the left side, and the actual editing box on the right side. In the editing box, the sequence assigned to the currently selected event is the one shown.

For a better overview, the event list is organized into various groups: General: Events triggered by the dialog itself. Buttons: Buttons have only one event ("pressed"), which is triggered by pressing the button. For a simple assignment, the button's caption is displayed, followed by the button's name in square brackets. Menu/ Toolbar: Menu items or toolbar buttons also have just one event ("Selected"). The menu item's caption is displayed, followed by the name in square brackets. Additional dialog elements: For each other dialog element (which is neither button nor menu), a separate group with the element's name is displayed, and the events supported by this element are listed. The picture above shows the list box "List" with the two assigned events "Selected" and "Double-clicked". Events to which no sequence code was yet assigned are displayed in a gray typeface. The output box in the FAMOS main window shows a short help text about the currently selected event. A double-click of the mouse on a dialog element in the Dialog-Editor brings the FAMOS main window into the foreground and selects the first event sequence belonging to this element.

15.3.3 Testing and running dialogs

In comparison to "simple" sequences, there are certain differences and particularities: The menu items "Run" and "Start (Debug)" don't refer to the currently displayed event sequence, but to the entire dialog. If the running of the dialog is interrupted (e.g. due to a syntax error in an event-sequence or due to a breakpoints), many operations in FAMOS are disabled- for example, in this state, no other sequence can be started. The run running of the dialog must previously be explicitly quit by menus of the "Stop"-button in the toolbar. To cancel the run of a dialog, use the sequence context menu in the notification area of the Windows taskbar.

"Cancel" completely cancels the running of the dialog. "Interrupt (upon next command)" interrupts the running of the dialog before executing the next

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs line in the sequence. This is especially helpful for testing dialogs while the dialog is "idling", in other words, waiting for the next event to occur. After selecting this menu item, the dialog remains at first in the waiting state, but upon the occurrence of the next event (e.g. push of a button), it interrupts the associated event-sequence before executing the first line. To call an existing dialog within a sequence, use the FAMOS function Dialog. This function can be found in the function group '10) Options, Dialogs..'.

291

15.4

Dialog Elements

The dialog elements available are briefly described below. Most of them are standard Windows controls whose functioning we assume to be familiar.

15.4.1 Button
Virtual switch which causes a certain action when clicked.

Notes on designing Along with a caption which is as descriptive as possible, an image is often displayed on the button as well, which gives the user a clue as to its function. Function keys As an alternative to clicking with the mouse, it's possible to set a combination of keys in order to achieve control from the keyboard. Special function "Apply" If this special function is activated, then when the button is pressed, the data are adopted by all affected dialog elements. This means all dialog elements which either are linked to a variable or for which input validation was set. The associated event-sequence is only called once the input validation was successful for every element. A typical case is for an [OK]-button in a dialog with several input boxes for each of which a permitted value range has been set. When the [OK]-button is pressed by the user, a check is first made of whether the current entries are all valid. Only in that case, the button's event sequence is called, after which the dialog is typically closed. This special function thus saves the trouble of explicitly validating/ adopting the data in the event sequence by means of the function DlgApplyData. Notes on programming Events: "Button pressed": Triggered when the user clicks the mouse over the button, or presses the corresponding combination of keys. Important functions: DlgSetText - Changes the text displayed DlgEnable - Disables operation

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

292

User-Defined Dialogs

15.4.2 Text box

Element for outputting text

Notes on designing The decisive property is, of course, the text to be displayed. Text boxes can be linked with FAMOS variables; see the section "Data-linking" for details. Notes on programming Events: None. Important functions: DlgSetText - changes the text displayed Data-linking A text box can be linked to a FAMOS variable in order to display its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. If in addition to this a permanent text (property: "Caption") was included with the design, the numerical value is combined with the text. If the text includes the placeholder %1, the number value is inserted at the placeholder's position. Otherwise, the value is appended to the text. Example: Let a linked variable have the value 3.14. Caption "" (empty) "The mean value is " "The mean value is %1 Volt: " Display 3.14 "The mean value is 3.14" "The mean value is 3.14 Volt"

The formatting of the number value for the display is independent of what data type is specified ("Datalinking: Data type"). Integer Real number The value is rounded to the next integer. Readout always without exponent. The value is displayed in the numerical format "real" with up to 6 decimal places. Depending on the numerical value's magnitude, either fixed- or floating point numerical format is selected. If the value is equal to 0, a 0 is returned, otherwise always 1 Readout as a date Readout as a date and time Readout as a time

Bool Date Date+Time Time

Remark: The last 3 formats only make sense if the value is expressed in imc time format. Use the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs functions of the function group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them. Example The following dialog contains on the right side 6 text boxes with various data types which are all linked to the same variable. The variable contains the current system time (found by means of the function TimeSystem?).

293

The variable linkage is "read only", meaning that any change of the text box's contents, for example by means of the Kit function DlgSetValue, isn't adopted by the linked variable.

15.4.3 Single-line edit box

Element for entering and displaying short texts or numbers.

Notes on designing Single-line input boxes can be linked with variables. Additionally, a permitted value range can be specified, against which entries by the user will be checked. For details, see the section "Data-linking". A unique feature of this element is the property "Operation". This controls how the element responds to entries made to it. "Default": "Normal" input box behavior. "With input confirmation": Inputs must be explicitly verified by the user by means of the [ENTER]-key, or rejected using the [ESCAPE] button. To call the user's attention to this special behavior, the input box appears slightly shifted over, as soon as it gets the input focus (e.g. after clicking the mouse on it):

To the user, it appears as if a separate input box was opened. It is only closed once the input has been confirmed with [ENTER], and its contents are adopted. Conversely, clicking the mouse outside of the input box, or clicking on [ESCAPE] closes the window and rejects any entries made. If the input box is linked to a variable or if an input validation is defined, and if the property "Apply" is set to "automatic", this is the mode to be recommended, since in this case the moment in time at

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

294

User-Defined Dialogs which the entries are adopted is exactly defined. "Auto": If the input box is linked to a slider control, the mode "With input confirmation" is implemented. Otherwise, it's always "Default". Notes on programming Events: None. Important functions: DlgSetText, DlgGetText, DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue - Set and get the input box contents. Data-linking An input box can be linked to a FAMOS-variable in order to display or edit its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. The formatting of the number value for the display is independent of what data type is specified ("Datalinking: Data type"). Integer Real number The value is rounded to the next integer. Readout always without exponent. The value is displayed in the numerical format "real" with up to 6 decimal places. Depending on the numerical value's magnitude, either fixed- or floating point numerical format is selected.

If the user changes the input box's contents, then the system checks before adopting the new content whether it can be converted to the data type specified. In the group "Input Validation", it's additionally possible to define a permitted value range. If the user enters a number outside of the permitted range, or if the input can't be converted to a number, the user is notified by a message box.

The property "Data-linking: Apply" determines when the content of a user input is to be validated and adopted by a linked variable. "Auto": Validation and adoption happens automatically upon user entry. When an entry is finally completed is recognized as follows, depending on the prevailing value of the property " Operation":

"Operation" = "Default": Entry only applied at the moment that a dialog button is pressed or a menu item is selected.

"Operation" = "With input confirmation": The input is adopted as soon as the user explicitly verifies the entries using the [ENTER]-key. This is the recommended mode, since the moment at which the data are adopted is evident to the user.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs "On command": Validation and adoption only happen upon calling the function DlgApplyData or upon the special function button "Apply" being pressed.

295

15.4.4 Multi-line edit box

Element for entering and displaying multi-line texts.

Notes on designing An input box can be linked to a text variable in order to display/ edit its current value. In this case, be aware that the length of text variables is limited to 255 characters. Notes on programming Events: None. Important functions: DlgSetText, DlgGetText: Set and get the input box contents Notes on operation Input boxes each have a context menu (called by right-clicking the mouse over the box). This menu contains, among other things, commands for copying and pasting text via the Clipboard.

15.4.5 Check boxes

This element serves the purpose of activating or deactivating a setting or option. A click on it toggles its state from "On" (the box has a checkmark or X inside) to "Off" (empty box) or vice versa.

Notes on programming Events: "Element changed": Generated each time the element is clicked. Important functions: DlgGetValue, DlgSetValue: Sets and gets the element's state Data-linking A checkbox can be linked to a FAMOS variable, in order to display/ edit its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. When the variable is changed, the checkbox is activated, if the variable's (rounded) value is 1. If the (rounded) value is 0, the checkbox is deactivated. For all other values, the element's state remains

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

296

User-Defined Dialogs unchanged. If the checkbox's state is switched (by clicking on it, or by the action of a Kit function), the new state (number 0 or 1) is written to the variable. The moment at which the writing takes place depends on the property "Apply": "Auto": The variable is updated immediately whenever the element is changed. "On demand": The variable is only updated when the function DlgApplyData is called or when the special function button "Apply" is pressed. Notes on operation If the checkbox currently holds the input focus (distinguishable by a dashed-line frame around the caption), the [SPACE]-key can be used to switch its state.

15.4.6 Groupbox
This element consists of a labeled frame. It's used to organize multiple logically related dialog elements under a joint heading.

15.4.7 Image
This element serves to display a (small) picture. It can be used, for instance, to display a company logo or something similar. The image is set permanently when the dialog is designed and cannot be changed during runtime.

15.4.8 Slider control

A virtual slider control is often used when the user is to be offered to ability to select a value out of a defined value range. Toward this end, a knob can be slid along a linear scale. The actual value set depends on the knob's position and the definitions for the scale's end values.

Notes on designing A slider control can be oriented either horizontally (the scale is horizontal with the minimum at left) or

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs vertically (the scale is vertical, with the minimum on the bottom). The orientation is determined automatically by the control's shape: if its width is greater than its height, the orientation is horizontal. The properties "Range Minimum" and "Range Maximum" set the corresponding numerical values for the lower and upper ends of the slider, respectively. The property "Small steps" applies whenever the user operates the control using the arrow buttons. A typical value would be 1% of the value range. The property "Large steps" applies whenever the user operates the control by means of the keys [PGUP] or [PGDN]. A typical value would be 10% of the value range. An additional special property of this control is "Synchronized with dialog element". Here, you can enter the name of a text box or single-line input box to be linked to the slider control. Such an element then always displays the value currently set by the slider. If it's an input box, the linkage works in both directions - if the user changes the value in the input box, the slider is adjusted to the corresponding position. Notes on programming Events: "Element changed": generated once the user has changed the current value. Important functions: DlgSetBarRange: Sets the value range DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue: Sets and gets the current value Data-linking: A slider control can be linked to a FAMOS variable, in order to display/ edit its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. If the value lies outside of the slider control's value range, the closest scale end value is indicated. Conversely, when changes made on the slider are written to the variable depends on the property "Apply ". "Auto": The variable is updated after every change (already when "dragging" the slider knob). "On demand": The variable is only updated upon a call to the function DlgApplyData, or upon clicking the special function button "Apply". Notes on operation When the slider control holds the input focus (distinguishable by a dashed-line frame around the caption), the keyboard can be used as follows: POS1 END ARROW KEYS PGUP PGDN Positions the knob at the left/lower end of the slider Positions the knob at the right/upper end of the slider Moves the slider control in the corresponding direction by the value set in the property " Small steps". Moves the slider control in the corresponding direction by the value set in the property " Large steps".

297

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

298

User-Defined Dialogs

15.4.9 Datepicker
The calendar element serves to display and set the date.

Notes on designing The property "Format" affects the display format. "Date (short)": Short format, e.g. "12.07.2005". "Date (long)": Long format with weekday, e.g. "Thursday, July 28, 2005" Under "Range Minimum" and "Range Maximum", you can set what the permitted value limits are. User entries lying outside of the range defined here aren't accepted. Data-linking A calendar-element can be linked with a variable for the purpose of displaying/ changing its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. A linkage only makes sense if the variable concerned is expressed in the imc time format. Use the functions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them. The moment at which a date entered by the user is written to the variable depends on the value of the property "Apply": "Auto": The variable is updated immediately when the change is made. "On demand": The variable is only updated upon a call to the function DlgApplyData, or upon clicking the special function button "Apply". Notes on programming Events: "Element changed": generated once the user has changed the current value. Important functions: DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue: Set and get the current value. The number value is transferred in the imc time format. Use the functions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them. Notes on operation Along with direct entry of the date through the digit keys, the following additional possibilities are available: Clicking on the arrow button at the right of the input box (keyboard operation: [ALT]+ "ARROW DOWN") opens a dedicated calendar window for easily selecting the date. In the element's basic, "shut" state, it's also possible to click on individual components of the date (e.g. the year) and use the arrow keys to make adjustments.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs

299

15.4.10 Timepicker
The time element serves the purposes of displaying and entering the time.

Notes on designing Under "Range Minimum" and "Range Maximum", you can set what the permitted value limits are. User entries lying outside of the range defined here aren't accepted. Data-linking A time-element can be linked with a variable for the purpose of displaying/ changing its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. A linkage only makes sense if the variable concerned is expressed in the imc time format. Use the functions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them. The moment at which a time entered by the user is written to the variable depends on the value of the property "Apply": "Auto": The variable is updated immediately when the change is made. "On demand": The variable is only updated upon a call to the function DlgApplyData, or upon clicking the special function button "Apply". Notes on programming Events: "Element changed": generated once the user has changed the current value. Important functions: DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue: Set and get the current value. The number value is transferred in the imc time format. Use the functions belonging to the group "18> Date, Time" for creating and processing them. Notes on operation Along with direct entry of the time using the digit keys, it's also possible to select individual components of the time (e.g. hours) and to use the arrow keys or the arrow buttons at the right edge of the control to "scroll" through the available values.

15.4.11 Listbox (single selection)

Listboxes with single selection are used to give the user the option of selecting exactly one entry from a list of available entries.

Notes on designing: The property "List-Entries" defines the contents which the list shows when the dialog is started. By clicking in the Properties-Explorer, you access an edit box in which you can enter the initial content desired.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

300

User-Defined Dialogs

To add a new line, use the [ENTER]-key. To apply the changes which were made, use the combination of keys [CTRL]+ [ENTER], and to cancel, the [ESCAPE] key or the corresponding button at the bottom of the edit box. Notes on programming Events: "Element double-clicked": Generated when the user double-clicks the mouse over an entry. "Entry selected": Generated when the current selection is changed by an action of the user (click of the mouse, arrow keys). Important functions: DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem Inserting and deleting entries DlgGetText: Gets selected entry DlgGetSelectedItem, DlgSelectItem: Gets or edits index of the current selection If the list only contains numbers, the function DlgGetValue can also be used to get the currently selected number. Data-linking: A listbox can be linked to a FAMOS variable. The FAMOS-variable's value is the index of the currently selected entry. A value of 1, for instance, means that the first list entry is selected. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. The moment when a changed selection is adopted by the linked variable depends on the value of the property "Apply": "Auto": The variable is updated immediately when the change is made. "On demand": The variable is only updated upon a call to the function DlgApplyData, or upon clicking the special function button "Apply".

15.4.12 Listbox (multiple selection)

Listboxes with multiple selection capability are used to give the user the option of selecting one or more entries from a list of available entries.

Notes on designing Creating list entries is accomplished analogously to the case of 'Listbox (single selection)', described above.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs Notes on programming Events: "Element double-clicked": Generated when the user double-clicks the mouse over an entry. "Entry selected": Generated when the current selection is changed by an action of the user (click of the mouse, arrow keys). Important functions: DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem: For inserting and deleting entries DlgGetItemText: Gets an entry's text DlgGetSelectedItemCount, DlgIsItemSelected, DlgSetItemSelection: Gets and sets the selection Notes on operation To add an entry to the current selection or to remove one from the current selection, click on the entry while holding down the [CTRL]-key. To select a series of entries, first click on the first entry in the series and then on the last entry in the series while holding down the [SHIFT]-key. Alternatively, you can use the [ARROW]-keys while holding down the [SHIFT]-key.

301

15.4.13 Droplist
Similarly to listboxes, droplists are used to give the user the option of selecting exactly one entry from a list of available entries.

Since the actual selection list only pops down on demand, these elements are mostly used when trying to conserve space in the dialog, or when there are a large number of entry alternatives. Notes on designing Creating list entries is accomplished analogously to the case of 'Listbox (single selection)', described above. Notes on programming Events: "Entry selected": Generated when the current selection is changed by an action of the user (click of the mouse, arrow keys). Important functions: DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem: Inserting and deleting entries DlgGetText: Gets selected entry DlgGetSelectedItem, DlgSelectItem: Gets or edits index of the current selection If the list only contains numbers, the function DlgGetValue can also be used to get the currently selected number Data-linking: A droplist can be linked to a FAMOS variable. The FAMOS-variable's value is the index of the currently selected entry. A value of 1, for instance, means that the first list entry is selected. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

302

User-Defined Dialogs The moment when a changed selection is adopted by the linked variable depends on the value of the property "Apply": "Auto": The variable is updated immediately when the change is made. "On demand": The variable is only updated upon a call to the function DlgApplyData, or upon clicking the special function button "Apply".

15.4.14 Combobox
A combobox is a combination of the single-line editbox and a droplist. It is used whenever the user is supposed to have a large selection of already available alternatives, but also the option of making a freely specified entry.

Notes on designing Creating list entries is accomplished analogously to the case of 'Listbox (single selection)', described above. Notes on programming: Events: None. Important functions: DlgInsertItem, DlgDeleteItem: For inserting and deleting entries DlgSetText, DlgGetText, DlgSetValue, DlgGetValue - Setting and getting the content of the editbox. Data-linking: A combobox can be linked with a variable for the purpose of displaying/ changing its current value. If the variable is a data set, the data set's most recent value is always accessed. The formatting of the number value for the display is independent of what data type is specified ("Datalinking: Data type"). Integer Real number The value is rounded to the next integer. Readout always without exponent. The value is displayed in the numerical format "real" with up to 6 decimal places. Depending on the numerical value's magnitude, either fixed- or floating point numerical format is selected.

If the user changes the input box's contents, then the system checks before adopting the new content whether it can be converted to the data type specified. In the group "Input Validation", it's additionally possible to define a permitted value range. If the user enters a number outside of the permitted range, or if the input can't be converted to a number, the user is notified by a message box. The property "Apply" sets when the entries made by the user are validated and adopted in a linked variable. "Auto": Validation and adoption of the entry occurs immediately when another entry is selected from the list. If entries in the input box are edited, they are only applied once a dialog button is pressed or a menu item is selected.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs "On command": Validation and adoption happen only when the function DlgApplyData is called, or upon clicking on the special function button "Apply".

303

15.4.15 Treeview
This element is used to display data in a hierarchical branching diagram. A filing system diagram would be an example of this.

Notes on designing: To initialize the tree diagram with items, proceed as follows: Select the tree diagram To add an item to the end, double-click on the gray entry "New item" To add an item after an existing item, select it first and then in the context menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse) select the menu item "New item" or "New Child Item"

To delete an entry or to change its indent (distance to the left edge), there are also corresponding items available in the context menu. Using the Drag&Drop technique with the mouse, you can re-position an item vertically in the hierarchy. To change a line's properties, first select the desired line. In the Properties Explorer, you can then change the caption and image. For changing the caption it's also possible to double-click the corresponding line. Each line can be assigned its own image. Please note that all the images must be of the same size! Notes on programming Events: "Element double-clicked": Generated when the user double-clicks the mouse over an item's caption (to the right of the image). In keyboard operation, the [ENTER]-key is also interpreted as a double-click. "Item selected": Generated when the current selection is changed by an action of the user (mouse click, arrow keys). Important functions: DlgInsertTreeItem - Inserts items DlgSelectItem / DlgGetSelectedItem - Sets/ gets the selection

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

304

User-Defined Dialogs DlgGetItemText - Gets an item's caption Notes on operation The buttons [+] and [-] expand or collapse braches, respectively. The [ENTER]-key has the same effect as double-clicking on the caption of the selected entry and also triggers the event "Double-clicked".

15.4.16 Tableview
The Tableview offers tabular display of data. Optionally, the user can have the opportunity to directly edit the contents of individual cells at runtime.

One example of an application would be a list of data sets; the first column contains the data set's name and the following columns contain additional information such as the size, sampling interval and data type. The amount of columns is set permanently during the designing phase and cannot be changed during runtime. A table's maximum size is 128 columns x 1024 rows. Note: This element is quite unsuitable for displaying large amounts of measured data in tabular form. Instead, use a curve window in tabular mode. Notes on designing For all of the following actions, the corresponding table element must be selected. Setting the column-/ row header text Move the mouse to the upper edge of the column header / to the left edge of the row header. The cursor's shape changes to: Click the mouse and enter the desired text, then hit [ENTER] to confirm entries or [ESCAPE] to reject them. Setting the column width There are 3 different modes available for determining the column width: Optimum width: Full visibility: Fixed: The column widths are automatically adjusted so that all cell contents are completely visible, without being truncated. If the sum of all the column widths is greater than the table's width, a horizontal scroll bar is automatically added. The available table width is divided equally among the columns. This can cause the cell contents to appear truncated during runtime. The column width set during the design phase is retained. In order to change the column width during runtime, move the mouse over the dividing line between two column headers. The cursor changes its shape to: By means of the Drag&Drop technique, the column borders can now be shifted. The width of the column with the row headers is always set automatically, so that all the texts it contains are completely visible. Column-specific properties Some properties can be set for each column individually. These include the colors, for instance, or the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs data format and whether the user has permission to edit cells. To change these properties, first move the mouse to the desired table column's upper border. The cursor's shape changes: Then, click on the mouse. The selected column appears in hatching and the corresponding properties are displayed in the Properties Explorer.

305

Notes on programming Events: "Item selected": Generated when the user changes the row selected in the table. "Element changed": Generated when the user changes the content of a table cell. The table column must possess the property "Cells editable". Important functions: DlgInsertItem: Adds table rows DlgSetCellText, DlgSetCellValue, DlgGetCellText, DlgGetCellValue: Sets and gets cell contents Data-linking Each column can be set to have its own data format. This is only used for formatting the output if a numerical value is assigned to the cell by means of the function DlgSetCellValue or by user input during runtime. The formatting is accomplished in a manner analogous to that for Text box. Notes on operation If the property "Cells editable" was assigned to a column of the table, the user can edit the cells contents while the dialog is up. After double-clicking on the desired cell, an edit box appears in which the desired changes can be made. The key [ENTER] causes entries to be adopted, [ESCAPE] cancels them. If the table column is assigned a special data format, the new entry is only accepted if the format matches.

15.4.17 Curve Window

Curve windows which are used to display measured data in FAMOS and other imc applications can also be adopted as dialog elements.

Notes on designing

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

306

User-Defined Dialogs To set up a curve window, select the group "Curve Window" from the toolbox and then select the desired display mode. The display mode can be changed at any later time. The waveforms to be displayed can be configured either during the designing phase or can be specified using Kit functions during runtime. For details, see the section "Selecting waveforms to display" below. To configure the curve window, use the context menu (accessed by right-clicking the mouse).

Double-clicking on an axis calls the dialog for setting the respective axis. When the dialog is saved, the complete curve configuration (which can include the display mode, axis scaling, names of the waveforms displayed, etc.) is saved along with it. If you wish to use the mouse to change the curve window's position, click the mouse over the symbol (in the upper right or lower left corner), and use the Drag&Drop technique to move it to the position desired. Clicking the mouse once on the symbol additionally calls the standard context menu for dialog elements ("Cut", "Copy" etc.). To learn about the configuration and operation of the curve window, see the online help for the Curve Window or refer to the FAMOS manual (Volume 3: "Shared Components"). Notes on programming Events: None. Important functions: To govern the curve window, use the functions belonging to the "Curve"-Kit. This is included when the program is properly installed ("Kits" page in the FAMOS functions list). The curve element's name must be supplied as the first parameter of all these functions. Beispiel Adding the waveform "Data" to the curve element "Curve1" (with its own y-axis, scaled from 0 to 100):

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs

307

Selecting waveforms to display Case 1: The names of the waveforms to be displayed are fixed; for example, while the dialog is up, the variables "Data" and "Result" should always be displayed. Procedure: Create waveforms in FAMOS with the desired names, never mind the contents. Configure the curve window in the Dialog-Editor as desired (context menu: "Configuration": "More waveforms.."). When the dialog is saved, the curve configuration thus made is also saved. When the dialog is loaded at runtime, the system checks whether waveforms whose names match the names in the curve configuration exist . These are then automatically displayed. Case 2: The names of the waveforms to be displayed are variable, while the basic curve window structure (display mode, amount of waveforms displayed) is fixed. Procedure: While designing, created the necessary amount of waveforms with self-explanatory names, such as "Placeholder1", "Placeholder2"... and then proceed as in Case 1. Then you use the function CvReplaceChannel (from Curve Kit) to fill the placeholders during runtime with the actual waveforms to be displayed. CvReplaceChannel("Curve1", Data, "Placeholder1") Case 3: The composition and structure of the curve window aren't yet known during the design phase. Procedure: Use the functions from the Curve-Kit like CxYAxis, CvXAxis, CvAttrib etc., in order to build up the curve window "from scratch" during runtime. Notes on operation Like in the design mode, here, too, all configuration and operating capabilities (context menu, doubleclicking on axes) are available. Operation of the imc curve window is extensively described in the online help for the Curve Window, as well as in the FAMOS manual (Volume 3: "Shared Components...").

15.4.18 Menu- and Toolbar

Dialogs can have a menu bar, which always appears at the dialog's upper edge directly below the title bar. Especially for more complex applications, a well-structured menu provides a convenient overview and total access to the available actions. To each menu item, its own event sequence is assigned, which is run when the respective menu item is selected.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

308

User-Defined Dialogs

Dialogs with a menu bar can also have a toolbar directly under the menu. Here, the items can be called directly via a corresponding icon button. Typically, menu commands which are used often are placed in the toolbar as well in order to provide quick access. Notes on designing Creating a menu To create a menu or to add or remove items, use the "Menu" page in the toolbox. A representation of the current menu appears in tree diagram form.

Here, the top-level menu positions appear as the root items in the tree diagram, which, when expanded, show their respective submenus. All menu positions at which an additional entry would be possible have a placeholder in gray typeface called "New item". To add a new item, simply double-click on such a placeholder and enter the desired menu text in the edit box which appears. To delete an item, open the context menu (right mouse click) and select the command "Delete". By means of Drag&Drop you can change an item's position. To do this, click on the entry to be moved and drag it to the desired position while holding the mouse button down. Changing properties ("Appearance: Image") To display the properties for a menu item, click either on the menu item (or the toolbar button assigned to it) or on the corresponding item in the menu editor. In order to also place a menu item on the toolbar, set the value of the property "Toolbar" to "Yes". You can also use the property "Shortcut key" to set a combination of keys, which then initiates the same menu command. Images assigned to the menu items must have the fixed size 16x16 pixels. Notes on programming Events: "Menu item selected": Generated when a menu item is selected or if the corresponding toolbar button is pressed. Important functions: DlgEnable: Disables menu items

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

User-Defined Dialogs

309

15.4.19 Status bar

The status bar is always shown on the dialog's bottom edge and generally serves the purpose of displaying the application's current status or the status of an operation. A typical use is to display a short help text for the menu item which has been selected.

Notes on designing If your dialog has a menu, it's a good idea to supply a short help text for the menu items under their property "Infotext", which explains the menu item's function. If the user then selects a menu item at runtime, this text is automatically displayed in the status bar. Notes on programming Events: None. Important functions: DlgSetText: Changes the status bar's text. The function's first parameter must be set to the fixed name "#Status". Beispiel DlgSetText("#Status", "Please wait...") ; ...performing long calculation... DlgSetText("#Status", "Finished.")

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

310

Data-Browser

Data-Browser
When capturing data, it is common for the same measurement quantities to be repeatedly measured in successive trials: at a test station, measurements of different test objects are made in succession under identical conditions on type tests, the same test object is subjected to multiple measurements each under different test conditions In any case, large amounts of data can soon accumulate, which must later be viewed, compared, presented and possible also documented and printed out. The Data-Browser is a tool for quick and easy viewing of measured data. The Data-Browser supplements the curve window functions with flexible assignment of measurement channels. The Data-Browser's panels combine the properties of dialogs (active elements, variable binding - see User-Defined Dialog (Dialog-Editor) and reports (optimized for printout - see Report-Generator). To get a quick introduction to the Data-Browser, see the chapter Quick-Start. To start the Data-Browser, use the menu item Extra -> Data-Browser, the combination of the keys "CTRL+F11", or the corresponding toolbar button in the main window:

16.1

Basic concepts and terms

The Data-Browser's user interface consists of these fundamental components. Presentation with Panels For display and documentation of measured data, so-called panels are used. A panel contains one or more pages. You can arrange a variety of display elements on a page. Typical elements include curve windows, tables and text boxes. It is also possible to position interactive elements such as buttons and input boxes for text in the forms. Such interactive elements can either start sequences or be linked directly with FAMOS variables (data binding). Panels thus combine the properties of dialogs (active elements, variable linkage - see user-defined dialogs) and reports (optimized for printout - see Report-Generator). Design Mode / Run Mode To create or edit panels, you switch the Data-Browser to Design Mode.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

311

In this mode, there are additional tools available: Toolbar for selecting the panel elements Editors with which to determine the panel element properties In Design Mode, the elements of the Toolbox can be moved to the current page by means of Drag&Drop. Alternatively, you can also use the "Edit" menu item "Insert Element". Panels designed in this way (file extension: *.iform) can later be loaded during the run and either automatically or manually "filled" with the current measured data. You can use the input boxes and buttons, and print out the presentation of data, as well as save them in a variety of formats such as Adobe Acrobat PDF, PNG, BMP . Data selection The files of measured data must first be opened. To do this, use the Files list, with which you can load either individual measurement files or even whole folders at the push of a button. After loading the files, you will see the Measurements and Channels lists. Next, select the channels to be edited from among the many opened data; refer to Data selection.

16.1.1 Data selection

The Data-Browser solves two commonly occurring situations. Multiple channels often have the same name. Using the FAMOS curve window alone, the only way to simultaneously edit or view multiple files with the same name is to first rename them or to take similar steps (e.g. explicit merging to data groups). Display elements such as curve windows are normally designed in such a way that the data to be displayed can be specified using their (channel-) names. In the presentation, either the channels currently desired must be renamed, or replaced in the curve window. The Data-Browser's flexible data exchange method easily solves these tasks. Data selection is governed by two principles: Assigning the channels to measurements Selection/Numbering

16.1.2 Assigning the channels to measurements

When opening files of measured data, the associated channels are automatically assigned to a "Measurement". The measurement's name can be derived from, for example, the name of the file of measured values (for multi-channel files), from the name of the folder to which the files belong; see File List options. The term "Measurement" is not necessarily the actual result of a physical measurement, but groups related measured data (channels) together . The measurement's name is a component of the resulting variable name in FAMOS, so that even identically named channels belonging to different measurements are uniquely designated. Such a combined variable name in FAMOS has the following syntax:
ChannelName @ MeasurementName

e.g.
Temperatur_01 @ Experiment0001 Temperatur_01 @ Experiment0002

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

312

Data-Browser

SensorX @ MiddleCenter SensorX @ BottomCenter

An example for assigning the channels can be found in chapter Quickstart, Dragging a channel onto the page.

16.1.3 Selection/Numbering
The names of measurements and channels recorded in FAMOS are displayed in separate list boxes and can be selected by the user. To each measurement and each channel one contains, it is possible to assign a unique number. Curve windows and other display elements for measured data can now be configured in such a way that references to the current selection can be entered in these lists instead of concrete channel names. For example, the curve window can display instead of the concrete variable name
Temperatur_01 @ Experiment002

a general reference in the form

Channel #1 @ Measurement #2

(read: 1st channel selected of the 2nd measurement selected) or instead:

"Temperatur_01" @ Measurement #2

(read: channel named "Temperatur_01" from the 2nd measurement selected). Which particular channel is displayed in the curve window is determined by the current data selection state, i.e. by the selection in the pertinent lists. This means you can design panels with which it is possible to switch quickly between different data, without having to change the panels or the display elements they contain. Details on numbering are found in chapter Numbering and Locking.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

313

16.2

Elements of the main window

The image below shows a default Data-Browser screen. Most objects can be freely placed, which means that the screen can also look totally different. To obtain this default screen, use the menu command " View"-> "Layout" -> "Layout reset".

Elements of the main window (default layout)

Panel At the upper edge you see the tabs for the panels. The main window may have one or more panels. Each panel can contain one or more pages. See also Menu: Panel Page In the middle you see the page. Each page can take the form of a Report or a Dialog. Reports are preferable for the purpose of printouts. They use the curve window's color settings for the printout. Dialogs use the color settings for the on-screen display. See also Menu: Page Files list With the Files list, you can select and open measurement files. See also Files list Measurements list, Channels list With the Measurements List, you can select one or more measurements. In the example shown, the measurement names are derived from the folder names. See also Measurements and Channels lists.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

314

Data-Browser The measurements and channels are numbered. The Toolbox and the Properties window are positioned on the right hand side by default.

16.2.1 Toolbox
The File List, Measurement List, Channel List, Toolbar and Properties are together known as the Tool Window. All tool windows can be freely positioned (by means of Drag&Drop in the overview). The menu command View -> Layout -> Layout reset can be used to return the window arrangement to its original state. Example

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

315

The tool windows can be positioned as desired

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

316

Data-Browser

16.2.2 Files list

File List

Using the Files list, you can select the measured data. The next sections discuss how to load a single file , load multiple files or how to load all of a folder's measurement files.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser 16.2.2.1 Load a single file Using the File List simply open the folder where the file is located and double-click on the filename.

317

Opening a file: Double-click on the file

A single file can also be loaded using this symbol in the measurement list:

This opens an ordinary Windows dialog for opening files.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

318

Data-Browser

16.2.2.2 Load multiple files

Opening multiple selected files: Selecting the button in the toolbar

To load multiple files at once, proceed as follows: Select the files that you want to load. You must use the keyboard as described in table "Key combinations for making selections". Then select the symbol from the toolbar as seen in the picture above.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser 16.2.2.3 Load a whole folder

319

Opening all files in a folder: Click on the arrow icon to the left of the folder name

Making this selection opens all measurement value files which are in the folder and which conform to the file format set. 16.2.2.4 File list options The File List toolbar has buttons for the Options:

Click on the button and the following dialog appears:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

320

Data-Browser

File format options

File format This is where you set the file format for the opening procedure (with the associated name extension(s). The File List then only displays such files which have the extensions selected here. The particular list of file formats depends on what import/export filters are installed. Expand groups The waveforms or texts contained in the data groups are expanded upon loading.

Options for measurement name

Measurement name Here you select how the measurements' names are generated from the data selection.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

321

16.2.3 Measurements and Channels lists

Although the Measurements and Channels lists are independent tool windows and thus can be positioned separately, they are normally used in conjunction for selecting the data (creating references).

The Measurements list contains the names of all measurements available. When loading files, a name is automatically generated for the measurement, to which the associated channels are assigned. The measurement's name may be formed, for example, from the file name or the name of the folder to which it belongs; see File list options. The names of the channels opened are adopted in the Channels list. Channels list

The Channels list contains the names of all files currently loaded. The user can make the selection for the data selector here. The method for choosing and numbering the channels is the same as for the Measurements list. If multiple channels have the same name, the amount of duplicates is indicated after the name (in square brackets). 16.2.3.1 Numbering and Locking Numbering for the data selection The main task of both lists is to set the numbering (reference) of the measurements and channels. If the name of a channel or measurement is selected, the associated number in the Measurements list or Channel list is displayed in the numbering column at left (gray background). Normally the numbering follows the current state of highlighting in the respected list, which the user can change by means of the mouse or arrow buttons.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

322

Data-Browser

The picture shows that the numbering in the list follows whichever entry's name is selected in the list. Select multiple entries If you wish to select and number multiple entries, you must use the keyboard. See the table "Key combinations for making selections". Example

Click on the entry "Sensor_X", which is thus assigned the number 1. Locking the numbering

Keep the "Ctrl" key pressed and click on the names "SensorX" and "SensorY" in succession. This assigns the numbers 1 and 2 to these channels, respectively.

The numbering can be locked. This preserves the current numbering order, even if the highlighting in the list is subsequently changed. Locked entries are distinguished by an extra padlock symbol next to the number.

Locking a single entry by clicking in the numbering column

Locking of ALL selected entries with the padlock symbol

Unlocking numbering To activate/deactivate the lock on an entry, left-click the mouse on the numbering column. Alternatively, use the corresponding toolbar button, which will take effect on all currently highlighted entries:

Unlocking all selected entries

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser 16.2.3.2 Example of numbering/locking Example Scenario: A curve window was configured to display the 1st and 2nd channels of the 1st selected measurement:
Channel #1 @ Measurement #1 Channel #2 @ Measurement #1

323

The current measurement "MiddleCenter" contains the channels "Sensor_X", "Sensor_Y" and " Sensor_Z". In the curve window, the procedure is for the first channel (the reference channel) to be successively compared with each of a number of other channels. 1) Click on the entry "Sensor_X", which is thus assigned the number 1. The curve window then shows this channel.

2) Click in the same line in the numbering column at left. The padlock symbol appears, indicating that the entry is locked.

Locking the numbering of the entry #1

3) Click on the first channel to be compared ("Sensor_Y"). Since the number 1 has already been assigned and locked, it is assigned the next free number (2), and is displayed in the curve window along with the reference channel.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

324

Data-Browser 4) Highlight (by mouse click or using arrow keys) the other channels to be compared in succession. The display in the curve window changes accordingly, while the reference channel stays the same.

16.2.3.3 Sorting In order to keep an overview of multiple entries, the lists can be sorted (either by number or name) as well as filtered.

Measurement list sorted by number

Measurement list sorted by name

16.2.3.4 Filtering With an activated filter, there is an extra input box at the bottom edge of the list, in which you can set the filter conditions for the names to be displayed. Then the only measurements/channels displayed are those adhering to the corresponding name pattern.

Measurement list unfiltered

Measurement list filtered (Measurement names beginning with "Mid")

You can use the Joker characters '*' (to stand for an unknown amount of characters) and '?' (standing for exactly one character). No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase spelling. Example The (unfiltered) channel list contains the entries "v_01", "v_02", "v_01", "v_100", "u_02" Filter
*

Display
all

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser
V* V_?? *02 v_01, v_02, v_100 v_01, v_02 v_02, u_02

325

16.2.3.5 Remove measurement To remove measurements from the list, use the corresponding toolbar buttons ("Remove selected measurements" or "Remove all measurements"). Channels belonging to the respective measurements will also be removed.

Remove highlighted measurements (here: "TopRight" and "TopLeft")

Remove all measurements (all nine measurements

16.2.3.6 Rename measurement Right-click the mouse over a measurement's name. A context menu including the item "Rename measurement" appears. Now you can directly edit the name in the Measurements list. 16.2.3.7 Key combinations for making selections Action Clicking a node while holding the CTRL key pressed Clicking a node holding the SHIFT key pressed Pressing the SHIFT+UP/SHIFT +DOWN key combinations repeatedly Clicking a node while holding the CTRL and SHIFT keys pressed Pressing the CTRL+SHIFT+UP/ CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN key combinations Effect Toggles the node's selected state while preserving the previous selection. Selects all nodes between the clicked node and the previously focused node/nodes. The previous selection is cleared. Enables end users to select a continuous range of nodes. When starting such operations, the previous selection is cleared. Selects the range of nodes between the one clicked and those previously focused. The previous selection is preserved. Enables end users to select a continuous range of nodes. The previous selection is preserved.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

326

Data-Browser

16.2.3.8 Drag&Drop from the Measurements/Channels lists The easiest way to select channels and measurements for display on the panel is to use the Drag&Drop technique. Click the left mouse button over the object which you wish to drag and hold the mouse button down. Next, move the mouse to the position in the page where you wish to deposit it, and release the mouse button. An example of Drag&Drop is also presented in the section Dragging a channel onto the page. An important advantage offered by the Data Browser is the flexible assignment of messages and channels to the data displayed in the curve window or in other panel elements. The Drag&Drop method simplifies two common cases in operating the program: fixed channel name, changing measurement name ("test series"). the channel name and the measurement name change. The first case is accomplished by applying Drag&Drop from positions 1, 2 or position 5. The second case is accomplished by applying Drag&Drop from position 4 (assignment by numbers only) Positions There are five positions from which it is possible to apply the Drag&Drop action to objects, as shown in the image below:

Die fnf Positionen fr den Start der Drag&Drop Aktion

1: The measurement list's numbering column 2: The measurement list's name column 3: The channel name in in the measurement list 4: The numbering column in the channel list 5: The channel name in the channel list Which channels and measurements are used depends on the selection and numbering in the lists. How the measurements and channels are formed depends on the position from which the Drag&Drop action is

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser begun. Step by step instructions Before applying the Drag&Drop procedure, select or respectively number the desired channels and measurements. Next, select the appropriate position at which to drag the selection onto the page. The selection for the position determines which data are displayed in the curve window or other panel elements. Position 1 or Position 2 Each measurement selected (denoted by a colored background) in the measurement list is combined with the channels in the channel list which are numbered (if the measurement includes any). The associated name is formed from the name in the channel list (e.g. "SensorX") and the measurement's number (e.g. "Measurement #1"). If you start at position 1 (or position 2) in the image above, the resulting names will be as follows:
SensorZ @ Measurement #1 SensorZ @ Measurement #2 SensorX @ Measurement #1 SensorX @ Measurement #2

327

Note that the selection of the names from the channel list only depends on the numbering and not on the current selection. Position 2 with SHIFT + Drag&Drop At this position, additionally pressing the <SHIFT>-key causes the objects to be named differently. Specifically, the names are formed from fixed measurement names (e.g. "MiddleCenter") and fixed channel names (e.g. "SensorX"). In the image above, if you use <SHIFT> + Drag&Drop from position 2 to the page, the following names will be formed:
SensorX @ MiddleCenter SensorZ @ MiddleCenter SensorX @ MiddleRight SensorZ @ MiddleRight

Position 3 The channel name and the measurement name are adopted unchanged. Neither the selection or numbering in the channel list play any role. If you click in the image above on "SensorY" in the measurement list (position "3"), then this entry is selected. Then if you drag it to the panel, the following name will be formed:
SensorY @ MiddleCenter

By means of key combinations, it is also possible to select and drag multiple channels. It is also possible to combine channels from multiple measurements (select by means of <Ctrl>+click). Position 4 Here, all channels selected in the channel list are combined with whichever measurements from the Measurements list are numbered. The name is formed exclusively from the measurements numbers and channel numbers. If you start at position 4 in the image above, the following names will result:
Channel #1 @ Measurement #1 Channel #1 @ Measurement #2

If you previously also select "SensorZ" in the Channels list using Ctrl+click, and then start at position 4 or at SensorZ's numbering, the following names will result:
Channel #1 @ Measurement #1 Channel #2 @ Measurement #1 Channel #1 @ Measurement #2

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

328

Data-Browser
Channel #2 @ Measurement #2

Position 5 Here, all channels selected in the channel list are combined with whichever measurements from the Measurements list are numbered. The name is formed from the fixed channel name (e.g. "SensorX") and the measurement number. If you start at position 5 in the image above, the following names will result:
SensorX @ Measurement #1 SensorX @ Measurement #2

16.2.4 Data Bindings (References)

Note You can only use this tool window in Run Mode and not in Design Mode. If this tool window is not indicated, use the command: "Reset Layout" from the Menu: View. Description Panel elements such as curve window, tables and text boxes can be linked with data in Design Mode. These panel elements are displayed during execution (Run Mode). The "Available Data" are displayed on the left side of this tool window (Data Bindings). On the right side ("Bindings") you can see the data referenced in the active panel. It can happen that referenced data in the panel do not exist, because they currently have a different name or do not exist in the loaded measurements. With this tool window you can replace the missing links with currently existing data, without the need to change the links in Design Mode. If referenced data do not exist, a red "X" will appear in the "Status" column, as seen here:

Example On the left side select the data to be displayed. On the right side select the desired target (for displaying in the panel):

The picture above shows the status before updating. On the left "SensorY" "MiddleCenter" is selected and on the right "Channell#1 @ Measurement #1". "SensorX @ MiddleCenter" is displayed. Now click on the button in the center (magnifier symbol) or doubleclick the dataset to be displayed ("SensorY" "Middle Center"). Thus the binding is updated accordingly.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

329

The picture above shows the status after updating. In the list of Bindings (second row, second column) you see, that "SensorY @ MiddleCenter" is displayed. Filter Additionally you can filter the data display (filtersymbol on top of the left window). If you click this symbol, input fields will appear at the lower border for filtering of channel- and measurement names . The same wildcards are possible as described in chapter Filtering.

-> Display link of one page or of all pages You can choose to show the bindings of the current page only, or the bindings of all pages. To do so, click on the page symbol at the top right corner, as seen here:

16.3

Toolbox

The toolbox is only displayed when in Design mode and contains the various tools for displaying data, as well as tools for labeling and for interactions with FAMOS sequences(variables). Adding elements The easiest way to add an element is by moving one from the toolbox to the page using the Drag&Drop technique. When you release the left mouse button, the element is created in its default size and is selected. You can adjust its size and position later. You can also add elements by selecting one of the items from the menu "Edit" -> "Insert Element". Copy elements Elements placed on the page can be copied by an easy method: Click on the element you wish to copy. The element is thus selected. Then hold down the Ctrl-button. Now you can use the Drag&Drop technique to place a copy of the element on the page Element properties Depending on its type, an element may have a large number of properties. Use the the Properties window located at the lower right of the standard view. The following table indicates which properties categories are associated with which elements: General Label Image Table X X X Layout X X X Appearan ce X X X X X Databindi ng X Text X Structure

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

330

Data-Browser Line Pushbutton Editbox (single line) Editbox (multiline) Entering values in Run Mode Applies to Label, Editbox (single line), Editbox (mult line), Button, Tablecell: Elements with data bindings can be assigned values in Run Mode. The text for these elements can not only be entered in the Property window, but also by doubleclicking on the particular element. After doubleclicking an overlapping input field will open, where you can enter the required text. Close the input field with the key combination <Alt>+<ENTER> or by clicking outside the input field. Expert Mode In the menu "View"-> "Options", you can select the "Expert mode". This provides a display of all adjustable element properties. Otherwise, only the most important properties are displayed, in the interest of greater clarity. Pointer The pointer is not actually a tool, strictly speaking. The pointer allows you to select one or more elements by clicking on them. To select multiple elements, you must additionally use the keyboard, as described in the table "Key combinations for making selections". You can also select elements by dragging the mouse pointer to capture a rectangular region inside of which all elements are then selected. X X X X X X X X X X X X

16.3.1 Curve Window

Curve window toolbox

This toolbox contains the various curve window display styles. Details on the use of these options are presented in the documentation on the Curve Window.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

331

16.3.2 Standard

Toolbox of standard elements

Using these options, you can fill reports with texts, pictures, and interactive elements (buttons, input boxes). 16.3.2.1 Label As described under Quickstart, not only permanent text can be displayed, but also the content of a variable from the FAMOS sequence associated with this panel (Databinding).

Label (example)

If you assign a permanent text to the label (in this example "Temp. (C)"), then this text is also displayed if you set up a data binding with a FAMOS variable. With this procedure, the assigned text and the text resulting from the variable are linked. For the example above, if the variable takes the value "450", the

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

332

Data-Browser label displays: Temp. (C): 450 The string set as the property "Text" when designing the label is always prefixed to the variable's value (here: "450"). If you don't wish to prefix any string, you must delete the string under (the property) "Text" (in this example "Temp. (C)").

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser 16.3.2.2 Image

333

Image (example)

You can use this element to display a picture. To do this, select the file containing the picture in the Properties window under "Appearance"/ "Image" (highlighted in the picture above). Files of a variety of graphics formats can be displayed. The picture can also be magnified/reduced in various ways.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

334

Data-Browser

16.3.2.3 Table

Table (example)

Table objects can be used to display sequences of numbers, as well as for structuring texts easily. Therefore, a table can be considered a higher order of object, of which text is a particular subtype. Each cell of a table possesses the same properties as a text object. Attributes such as content, font, orientation, frame and background can be defined separately for every cell. Aside from the content of the various individual cells the distinguishing feature of a table is its dimension, i.e. the number of its columns and cells. The width of columns and the height of rows can be set arbitrarily. The number of columns and rows determines the amount of cells. Element cells can be combined or conglomerated to larger cells. Due to the great variety of special editing operations which can be performed on tables, they have a distinct context menu.which is accessed by right-clicking the mouse over a table object. Bei double-clicling on a table cell, the text (Property "Text") can be entered in-place. If you select a single cell, then the "Properties" window offers to define databinding. About databinding: see example in QuickStart and chapter Label.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser 16.3.2.4 Line

335

Line (example)

The line can have any of a variety of symbols (arrows) at each end. The line thickness is entered as a numerical value in mm (e.g. "0.25" "0.5", "1" etc.).

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

336

Data-Browser

16.3.2.5 Pushbutton

Pushbutton (example)

If you create a button, then the associated event is available in the main FAMOS window. You can therefore design the sequence to react to a click on the button.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser For details and examples, look in the main FAMOS window's help window, as shown in this picture:

337

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

338

Data-Browser

16.3.2.6 Editbox (single line)

Editbox (single line) with data binding

You can link the single-lined edit box with a FAMOS variable by means of the databinding. The variable always reflects the editbox's current contents. There is no event reflecting a change of the content.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser 16.3.2.7 Editbox (multi line)

339

Editbox (multi-line)

Element for displaying and entering of multiline text.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

340

Data-Browser

16.4

Databinding

The elements Label and Editbox (single line) from the Standard toolbox can each be linked to a variable. Label can be used to display (read) a variable's actual contents. Using the Edit box (single line), you can interactively set (write) a variable's value. In the Properties window, you enter the variable's name as the property Variable name (group "Databinding"), as the following example illustrates for the label:

The text after the "Result" is linked with the variable "myVar"

Analogously, the enter a variable's name in the input box, whose value you wish to enter (edit) while running the panel. This enables you to influence how the FAMOS sequence runs. See Creating a sequence/ opening a panel for an example sequence which assigns a value to the variable. Extended Variable-Names Instead of a fixed variable name you can also refer to the current selection of the Mmeasurements and Channels list. For that purpose there is a dropdown selection list next to the input field, which you can use to compose the extended variable name.

Choosing a fixed channel name from the first selected measurement

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

341

Choosing the first selected channel from measurement no. 1

Entering values in Run Mode "Editbox (single line)" elements with data bindings can be assigned values in Run Mode. To do so click on the element and entered the required values using the keyboard. After clicking an overlapping input field will open, where you can enter the required text. The value will be taken over to the bound variable after pressing the <ENTER> key. To cancel the input press the <ESCAPE>-key. After that the element will be displayed in the normal fashion.

16.4.1 Placeholder
Supported by: Labels Tables Placeholder identifiers are bracketed in the characters <..> Hierarchical name structure:
<ROOTOBJECT.PROPERTY>

Purpose: easy expandability + clarity Previously defined root IDs: PAGE PANEL VAR SYSTEM page-specific infos, e.g. page number panel-specific infos, e.g. page number, filename... properties of the linked variables, e.g. value, units... System-Infos, e.g. current time

Short Names Placeholders which are used very frequently receive an extra (short) alias name. These names are not case-sensitive.

Table of placeholder names

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

342

Data-Browser Definition Page number Page number Value of the linked variable Current date Current time Full name PAGE.NUMBER PANEL. PAGECOUNT VAR.VALUE SYSTEM.DATE SYSTEM.TIME Alias PAGE VALUE Updating upon switching to Run Mode (*) upon switching to Run Mode (*) upon switching to Run Mode load panel, print, export, switching to Run Mode like SYSTEM.DATE

(*) = practically never, since not alterable in runtime mode

16.5

QuickStart

The following is a simple example for the purpose of gaining basic familiarity with the Data-Browser quickly.

16.5.1 Starting the Data-Browser

Start the Data-Browser from the main FAMOS window via the menu item Extra -> Data-Browser, or the combination of keys "CTRL+F11" or the corresponding button in the main window's toolbar. After starting you can decide which panel to open and wether to create a new report.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

343

After starting the Data-Browser

For this example, please select the entry "New (Report, Portrait)".

16.5.2 Loading data

Files list

Now search in the Files list for the folder in which FAMOS was installed (typically "C:\imc"). There, open the subfolder "Dat\Vibration" and then click on the blue arrow next to the folder "MiddleCenter".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

344

Data-Browser This opens all the channels in the folder "MiddleCenter". The measurement is automatically assigned the number 1 and the first channel also receives number 1, as seen in the picture below:

Files list, Measurements list, Channels list after loading "MiddleCenter"

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

345

16.5.3 Dragging a channel onto the page

Drag&Drop from the Channels list

Now drag & drop the numbered box (the number 1 with the blue background) from the Channels list to the page. In the picture you see that a channel name of the form "Channel #1 @ Measurement #1" is being generated. You get a different result of you drag and drop the box "SensorX" with the blue background. When you release the mouse after having dragged it, a context menu for selecting the curve window display style appears. Select "Standard":

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

346

Data-Browser

After dropping, a context menu appears containing entries for the curve window elements

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

347

16.5.4 Curve window

As you see, instead of "Channel #1 @ Measurement #1" , the assigned channel "SensorX @ MiddleCenter" is displayed.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

348

Data-Browser

16.5.5 Selecting other channels

Now click on the channel "SensorY" and you will see in the curve window "SensorY @ MiddleCenter" (click on the name as seen in the picture and not on the numbering column).

Click on SensorY

-> The curve window shows SensorY

Now click on the channel "SensorZ" and the curve window shows "SensorZ @ MiddleCenter".

Click on SensorZ

-> The curve window shows SensorZ

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

349

16.5.6 Adding a label/ binding to a variable

Now add a label under the curve window. To do this, drag the label from the Standard toolbox to beneath the curve window (steps 1,2 and 3, Drag&Drop as shown by the dashed line).

Step 4: next delete the preset text "Label1" (highlight with the mouse and press Delete). Step 5: next click in the Properties window on the box Variable name and enter "myVar" (without quotation marks). This binds the label to a variable named "myVar" (Databinding)

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

350

Data-Browser

16.5.7 Creating a sequence/ opening a panel

Next go to the main FAMOS window. Depending on the previous setting, you may need to use the menu item "Window" -> "Load Configuration" -> "Default", in order to be able to see the window for "Files/ Plugins". There you will see for "Form1" (the form's name in the Data-Browser) the available events:

Main FAMOS window Sequence for the form "Init"

Enter the sample code shown above, for the event "Init", into the sequence. The example assigns a string indicating the current date and time to the variable. Now go back to the Data-Browser and close the Design mode (click on the button). You will be prompted to choose whether to save the altered panel "Panel1". Choose "Yes". Now use the Data-Browser menu item "Panel"-> "Re-Open". You then see the curve selected and below it the label with the date and time at which the panel was opened:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

351

Form with curve window and Date/Time from the FAMOS sequence

Click on the Channels list's numbering column in order to see other channels in the curve window ("SensorY", "SensorZ"). This concludes our quick tour of the Data-Browser.

16.6

Menues

The following provides an overview of the menus in the FAMOS Data Browser.

The main menu contains the following entries: Panel Edit Page View Some functions can also be called with the Toolbar.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

352

Data-Browser

16.6.1 Menu: Panel

This menu contains functions for loading and saving/closing panels, as well as for printing. New Creates a new panel. Open Opens an existing panel. Select the panel from the list of files. Re-Open Only available in the panel's run mode. Save Only available in Design Mode. Save as Only available in Design Mode. Save as PDF Saves the panel currently opens fun Close Closes the panel currently open. If the panel has been edited, a dialog appears for saving or rejecting changes. Close All Closes all open panels. If one or more panels was altered, a separate dialog appears for saving or rejecting the changes. Page Setup This function lets you set the default page layout for all newly created panels. For individual open pages, you can set the page layout separately using "Menu: Page -> Page setup" . Print Preview Closes the Data Browser. Dialogs for saving/rejecting changes, like for the command "Close All", appear. In conclusion, the Data Browser window is closed. Print as PDF file.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser Prints the currently selected panel. Exit Closes the Data Browser. Dialogs for saving/rejecting changes, like for the command "Close All", appear. In conclusion, the Data Browser window is closed. Print Preview Print Preview opens a separate window, in which various viewing options can be used (one or more pages in an overview, various zooming levels). For selecting a page, there is an input box at right and above. Print Druckt das aktuell ausgewhlte Panel. Exit Closes the Data Browser. Dialogs for saving/rejecting changes, like for the command "Close All", appear. In conclusion, the Data Browser window is closed.

353

16.6.2 Menu: Edit

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

354

Data-Browser This menu contains functions for editing elements. Most of the functions are only available in Design Mode.

16.6.3 Menu: Page

Note: These functions can also be accessed via the context menu: to do this, right-click the mouse over the tab with the page's name. Insert Page Adds a new page after the last page. Import Page / Export Page Pages can also be saved individually as a file (= exporting) or loaded from a file (= importing). Page Setup Report If you have created a panel as a report (for the printout), then you will see a dialog for setting up the printout layout (paper size, margins etc.). Panel If you have set up a page as a dialog (for on-screen observation), then a dialog for setting the onscreen size and the background color is shown. More commands The menu "Page" contains more commands: Export as a PDF Export as a graphic Copying to the Clipboard (only possible in the run mode) Not in the menu Renaming pages Double-click on the tab with the page's name (e.g. "Page 1"). Now you can directly change the name at this point.

Changing the page order The arrangement (order) of pages can be rearranged by dragging and dropping the tabs.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

355

16.6.4 Menu: View

Here you will find functions for selecting the various main window elements (File Browser, measurements list, channel selection list, data references, Properties box). Layout An existing layout can be saved (Save Layout) or be loaded from a file (Load Layout). With Reset Layout, the layout's original configuration is restored. Options -> Display This opens a dialog for the options. Clicking on the button "Display" calls the dialog below:

Display options

"Automatic toolbar for curve widgets" If this option is set, and you click on an element in the curve window, the toolbar automatically appears, and can be freely positioned in the curve window, as shown below:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

356

Data-Browser

Automatic toolbar for curve widgets

16.6.5 Menu: '?'

This menu opens Online Help for Data Browser.

16.7

Toolbar

This is an overview of the toolbar buttons:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Data-Browser

357

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

358

Application Examples

Application Examples
The following chapters contain some application examples of FAMOS. Low-Pass Filter, First Order This example shows how complex transfer functions can be analyzed in FAMOS without measured data. Analysis Using the "Smo" Function Realize a digital smoothing filter using the "Smo" function. Transfer Function Calculation The input and output data of a dynamic system are measured to determine the transfer function. Error Correction with a Fitted Line The relative error for a voltage calibrator with an output voltage range of -30 V to +30 V, is determined over the entire range. Correlation Coefficient The correlation coefficient is a significant indicator for assessing the degree of linear dependence between signals. AC Power Calculation Determines apparent power S and the reactive power Q, along with the power factor Lambda for a load with inductive component. Tolerance Test A number of transducers are sinusoidally excited and the resulting voltage is measured. Histogram Test for ADC The histogram test is used to judge the quality of the AD converters implemented in the DSOs, transient recorders and similar data-acquisition systems. Convolution, Digital Filter Digital filtering of a signal can be interpreted as convolution. Analysis Using the "Chrct" Function The FAMOS function "Chrct" is available to compensate a sensor output signal using its characteristic. Digital Filter Filtering of waveforms with digital filters freely defined by the user with the function "DFilt". Report Generator This example explains the design and integration of layouts using a small application

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

359

17.1

Low-Pass Filter, First Order

This example shows how complex transfer functions can be analyzed in FAMOS without measured data.

A low-pass filter, first order should be calculated, where R = 300 kOhm and C = 0.33 mF. The complex transfer function G(jw) is calculated as:

With wg = 1/RC, the following equation results:

Using a conjugated complex extension, G(jw) can also be expressed as a real and imaginary part. The result:

Another way to express this complex function is with the magnitude and phase of the function G(jw):

The angular frequency OMEGA (=w) is to increase from 0 to 100 Hz in steps of 1 Hz. The cut-off frequency OMEGA_G (= wg) is 10 Hz. Step 1 Create a waveform, which increases from 0 to 100 in steps of 1. OMEGA = Ramp(0, 1, 100) creates a waveform of 100 values with a sample rate of 1; i.e. both the x- and the y-values range from 0 to 100. Select F4 (or click on menu option "Show" in the "Variable" menu) to display the curve.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

360

Application Examples

Step 2 Assign the unit "1/s" Select OMEGA in the variable list, and then menu option "Variable/Properties...". Enter the unit '1/s' in the "Y-Unit" input box. OMEGA now appears with the desired dimensions. The x-axis does not require units, because in this example it merely indicates that 100 discrete values are contained in the waveform.

Step 3 Define OMEGA_G as a single value. FAMOS can also process single values as variables. A single value variable OMEGA_G with the unit "1/s" is created using the assignment OMEGA_G = 10 '1/s'

Step 4 Calculate the magnitude as a function of frequency according to the equation (4) : Magn = 1 / SQRT(1 + SQR( OMEGA / OMEGA_G )) Add the x-unit "1/s". Since magnitude represents a ratio in this example, the y-unit is not necessary.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

361

Step 5 Calculate the phase PHASE = - atan( OMEGA / OMEGA_G ) The phase is represented in radians. Convert to representation in degrees using the predefined constant "InDegr", located in the group "A> Constants, predefined Variables". PHASE = PHASE * InDegr Once the x-unit has been added, the following representation appears:

Step 6 Display phase and magnitude Phase and magnitude can be displayed in a window. Select menu option "More waveforms" from the context menu in the curve window MAGN. Select the waveform PHASE in the dialog which appears. Double-click on the x-axis in the window to set logarithmic scaling by selecting menu option "Logarithmic" under the option "Scale" in the axis-settings dialog. Set the scale to "dB". Then close the axis dialog and select the menu option "Grid" in the "Configuration" menu. The following window appears.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

362

Application Examples

Step 7 Create a polar plot To create a polar plot, magnitude and phase must be transformed to a complex function, represented in magnitude and phase or real and imaginary parts (equations (3) and (4)). The function G(jw) is created with: G = Compl( MAGN, PHASE ) Display the curve and select the menu option "More waveforms" from the "Configuration" menu. Select "G.m" in the left-hand list and then the option "Waveform" in the "Component" selection box. A grid may be added to improve display.

Remarks The number of grid lines can be set using menu option "Display" in the "Configuration" menu. To change the colors, use the menu item "Options: Colors". Alternative methods of calculation The complex transfer function G(jw) can also be calculated directly According to the equation (1) the following is valid:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples G = 1 / Compl( 1, OMEGA / OMEGA_G) The function "Compl" combines both transferred parameters to form one complex waveform in the form "Real- and Imaginary part", as long as both parameters have the same unit. In this case, neither parameter has a unit. The single value 1 is expanded automatically to a complete real part. When G is display using the F4 key, the real part of G appears.

363

You can also use the menu option "More waveforms" in the curve window's context menu to display the imaginary part G.I as well, resulting in the graph above.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

364

Application Examples

17.2

Analysis Using the "Smo" Function

The function "Smo" (FAMOS Function Reference) realizes a digital smoothing filter. The filter characteristic is investigated in depth in this analysis. Quantities of interest are for cut-off frequency, transfer function, filter order, step-function response and unit impulse response. Step 1 A test waveform with the highest possible constant amplitude spectrum is created for use as a stimulus for the filter. White noise fulfills this condition, as does a simple, short impulse. The waveform should have a constant value of zero, but should contain an impulse with height 1 at the middle. The waveform length is set to 1024, so that an FFT can be performed later. Execute the following operations in succession: Impulse = Set( Ramp( 0, 1e-3, 1024)*0 , 0.512, 1) xUnit Impulse s A sampling time of 1 ms is selected. Select F4 to show the waveform Impulse.

Step 2 Filter the created test waveform. The waveform duration is greater than 1s, so a filter time of 200 ms can be selected. Filt = Smo( Impulse, 0.2's') Select F4 to show this waveform.

Step 3

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples The impulse response of a filter is the reaction of a filter to a unit impulse at t = 0 . Because the impulse in the test waveform occurs later, the impulse response must be shifted in the x-direction by this time difference. The following formula yields the impulse response: ImpResp = Xoff( Filt, -0.512 's')

365

The impulse response is symmetrical around the axis t = 0. Step 4 The step response of a filter is the reaction of a filter to the unit step at t = 0 . It can be calculated as the integral of the impulse response. The unit should be corrected. StepResp = Int( ImpResp ) / 1 's' The step response is formed from parabolic parts of second order.

Step 5 The transfer function of the filter is determined by dividing the spectra of the filtered and the original test waveform. First open the dialog under "Extra / Options / Functions". Here, set the FFT window function to "Rectangular". In the ideal case here, - the signal length is a power of two - no other window functions need to be selected. By selecting another window function, the result would be distorted slightly. Transfer = FFT(Filt) / FFT(Impulse) Display the transfer function by pressing function key F4. The result appears to be almost zero, since initially only the magnitude of the transfer function is represented. Select a double logarithmic representation for the transfer function. First select the menu item "Configuration: Axes..." and then select the item "Transfer.M" in the axes list. Set the "Scale" option to "dB".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

366

Application Examples Then select the x-axis in the axes list, and then under "Scale" the "Logarithmic" representation. Close the dialog box. Then select menu item "Configuration: Grid" to overlay the curve with a grid.

Step 6 Enlarge the window displaying the magnitude of the transfer function. Select "Measure" from the menu "Edit" in the curve window. A measurement value window with a crosshair appears. Drag the crosshairs in the asymptotically decreasing range of the transfer function (in the right-hand curve section), using the left mouse button. Position the crosshairs on two maxima located somewhat apart, and then select "Slope per decade" from the lower list box. The measurement value window now indicates a slope of approximately -40dB/decade. Because the transfer function with filter order decreases at 20dB/ decade, the filter order must be 2.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

367

Step 7 To determine the cut-off frequency of the filter, drag one crosshair to the left until the measurement window displays 3dB. The corresponding frequency (x-value) can be read in the measurement window. Execute the following operations to automatically determine the cut-off frequency: CuttoffFr = Pos( Transfer.M, idB(-3) ) Display this single value by pressing F4; the cut-off frequency lies at 3.2 Hz. The function "idB" converts decibel to linear values, since the magnitude of the spectrum 'Transfer.M' is in linear form. The "Pos" function determines the first occurrence of a value in a waveform.

Step 8 To view the phase of the transfer function alone in a window, display the entries "Transfer.M" and "Transfer.P" in the variable list by selecting "Show components". Select "Transfer.P" (phase) and press F4. Note that the phase has only values of 0 or 360 degrees. Both values have the same meaning. Use the following operation to set the phases at 360 degrees to phases of zero: Transfer.P = mod ( Transfer.P, 359.98 ) A phase of zero can be expected only if there were no inaccuracies in calculation.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

368

Application Examples

Remarks The transfer function can also be calculated directly as spectrum of the impulse response. This series of operations is available as the sequence TESTSMO.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

369

17.3

Transfer Function Calculation

The input and output data Ue(t) and Ua(t) of a dynamic system are measured to determine the transfer function. The input and output data are measured currents and are called "U_IN" and "U_OUT" respectively. Both "u_out.dat" and "u_in.dat" are found in FAMOS sample data files.

The transfer function G(jw) of this system can be expressed in the frequency domain by G(jw) = Uout(jw)/Uin(jw) The spectra Uout(jw) and Uin(jw) can be calculated from the time signals uout(t) and uin(t) using Fourier transformation. ua_spec = FFT(u_out) ue_spec = FFT(u_in) Magnitude and phase of the transfer function then result from: g_spec = ua_spec / ue_spec The result g_spec is a complex function and represents G(jw). Use the formula: g_spec = Pol( Rect(g_spec)) to obtain the phase between -180 and +180. If g_spec is represented in dB and the frequency axis is displayed logarithmically, the following graph results:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

370

Application Examples

Using inverse FFT, the weighting function g(t) can be represented in the time range: g = iFFT (g_spec) The dialog under "Extra / Options / Functions" contains a selection of other window functions. Window functions can be used to process waveforms to eliminate Steps at the beginning and end of a waveform, which arise from periodic concatenation. In the following example, the rectangular window was selected. The range 0..0.3 ms is displayed in the curve window.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

371

17.4

Error Correction with a Fitted Line

The relative error for a voltage calibrator with an output voltage range of -30 V to +30 V, is determined over the entire range. The error is expressed in percent.

This systematic measurement error can be corrected using a correction table or a mathematical description of the measurement curve. A straight line is fitted between the data points so that the mean square distance of the measurement curve to the regression lines is minimal. The waveform "calib.dat" is found in the example files. The required linear fit can be determined using the following formula: line = LFit(calib) In addition to the graphic display of the linear fit, illustrated in the graph with the measurement curve, FAMOS also supplies the determined linear fit equation. In this case, the equation is: f(x) = - 8.028E-5[1/V].x - 0.00139[%]

This equation can be entered to the calibrator directly after measurement for correction of measurement results. For an ideal comparison of the two curves in the same window, the second curve (right or second y-axis) is scaled "Like previous axis".

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

372

Application Examples

17.5

Correlation Coefficient

The correlation coefficient is a significant indicator for assessing the degree of linear dependence between signals. It provides a quantitative description of the similarity of two signals. The correlation coefficient is a normalized quantity: A value of +1 means complete dependence between the signals, i.e. they are proportional to each other and their signs are always the same. A value of -1 indicates a completely inverse dependency, i.e. the signals are proportional, but their signs differ. The correlation coefficient is defined as follows:

c = (Suivi) / (Suiui Svivi)0.5 Here the u i values represent numeric values of one waveform, the vi values represent the values of
the other waveform. To calculate the correlation coefficient c, several sums of the products of all elements of the waveforms u and v are calculated. It is important that neither u nor v have a DC offset! If they do, subtract this value before computing the correlation coefficient! The SO2-concentration of the air was measured over a long period of time. These measurement values make up one waveform. During the same period of time, the SO2-concentration was predicted using mathematical models. These values make up the second waveform. The reliability of the prediction methods are to be evaluated. A value of 0 means that both signals are statistically independent of each other on average. In the present example, a large correlation coefficient (e.g. > 0.6) would indicate a successful prediction. A very small value (e.g. < -0.6) means that the prediction was the opposite of the measurement. Step 1 The two waveforms are called "SO2" and "Predict".

To compute the correlation coefficient, a number of summations must be made of all values in a waveform. The integral function "Int" can be used to add values if the sampling time of the waveforms is 1. In the first step, two temporary waveforms are created with a sampling time of 1 and the mean value

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples subtracted Execute both of the following operations in succession: u = Xdel(SO2 - Mean(SO2) ,1 ) v = Xdel(Predict - Mean(Predict),1 ) Step 2 According to the equation for the correlation coefficient, the values of waveforms u and v are multiplied and then added together with the function "Int". The end value of the integrals is the sum. Coef = Value( Int ( u * v), 1E20) ) / Sqrt( Value( Int(u * u), 1E20) * Value( Int ( v * v), 1E20) ) The end value is always returned by the function "Value" if its second parameter is set to a sufficiently large value (e.g. 1020 ). Note that the required sums can also be determined by multiplying mean values by the waveform lengths. Step 3 The temporary waveforms "u" and "v" can now be deleted from the variable list. Display the correlation coefficient. Execute the following three operations in succession: Delete u Delete v Show Coef As an alternative to these operations, select the corresponding options in the "Variable" menu.

373

Automatic calculation The calculation of the correlation coefficient is saved in the sequence "CorrCoef", which transfers three parameters when the sequence is started: Sequence CorrCoef Coef SO2 Predict The sequence is: x1_ = Xdel( PA2 - Mean( PA2 ), 1) x2_ = Xdel( PA3 - Mean( PA3 ), 1) PA1 = Value( Int(x1_* x2_), 1E20) / Sqrt(Value(Int(x1_* x1_), 1E20) * Value (Int (x2_* x2_), 1E20)) Delete x1_ Delete x2_ Show PA1 Sequence execution is equivalent to the three steps above. Remarks The correlation coefficient can also be determined with the "CCF" function. Note that for CCF, the waveforms must have no DC offset the waveform lengths must be equal to a power of two or they will automatically be truncated by the CCF function. The first value of the cross-correlation function is the correlation coefficient. However, calculation using CCF is not recommended, since it takes significantly more time and extremely long waveforms cannot be processed with the CCF function.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

374

Application Examples

17.6

AC Power Calculation

CURRENT and VOLTAGE are true power P, apparent power S and the reactive power Q, along with the power factor Lambda. These quantities are related to each as follows: The instantaneous power is the product of voltage and current at any instant of time

p(t) = u(t) . i(t)

The average mean value of the instantaneous power is the true power P:

The true power is the power which is converted to heat in an ohmic resistor. The product of the true RMS of the voltage and the true RMS of the current is called apparent power S S = U . I The reactive power is defined as: Q = Root ( S2 - P2 ) The power factor Lambda is defined as the ratio of true power to apparent power: Lambda = P / S Next, load the FAMOS example waveforms current and voltage and display them in curve windows:

These waveforms were measured on 50 Hz mains. Both of these are periodic quantities which appear to be roughly sinusoidal. The power can only be computed over an integer multiple of periods. In this example, the power is to be computed over four periods. Use the "Cut" function to extract the signal sections over four periods (4 x 20 ms = 80 ms = 0.080 s): CURRENT = Cut( CURRENT , 0's', 0.08's') VOLTAGE = Cut( VOLTAGE, 0's', 0.08's') The cut sections are as follows:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

375

It is also possible to cut a section out of a curve usng the measurement cursors. Select the beginning and end of the curve using the cursors and then choose "Export curve section". Note that this method is not as precise as using the "Cut" function. The actual power P is computed as the mean value of the product over an integer multiple of the period. Since we have used 4 periods, the true power can be computed as follows: P = Mean(CURRENT * VOLTAGE) The other quantities can be computed from: S = RMS(CURRENT) * RMS(VOLTAGE) yUnit S VA Q = Sqrt(S * S - P * P) yUnit Q VA Lambda = P / S The units for true power are Watts (W). The units for reactive and apparent power are VAR (Volt-AmpereReactive) and VA (Volt-Ampere), respectively.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

376

Application Examples

17.7

Tolerance Test

A number of transducers are sinusoidally excited and the resulting voltage is measured. This voltage is to be used to evaluate the transducers. The following procedure should be used: The voltage generated by the transducers follows a curve with positive and negative deviations from the ideal. Tolerance bands are positioned around the ideal curve. As long as the measured voltages stay within these tolerance limits, a transducer is judged acceptable. However, when the voltages leave the tolerance band, the transducer fails the quality control test. The ideal voltage curve is created as a waveform with a sampling rate of 20ms - identical to the measurement: SINE = 3 'V' * sin( Ramp(0, 20E-6, 403) * 2340) xUnit SINE s The waveforms to be analyzed are called: SINTEST1.DAT SINTEST2.DAT SINTEST3.DAT SINTEST4.DAT SINTEST5.DAT The upper and lower limits of the tolerance bands result from a predefined tolerance: Tol = 0.8 'V' LowLim = SINE - Tol UpLim = SINE + Tol

To determine whether the signal leaves the tolerance band, the temporary variables are calculated TooLarge and TooSmall. Load SINTEST1 TooLarge = Max (SINTEST1 - UpLim) TooSmall = Max (LowLim - SINTEST1) When the variables TooLarge and TooSmall are greater than zero, the tolerance band was left. This can be formulated as a condition in a sequence: If TooLarge OR TooSmall Show SINTEST1 End The condition TooLarge > 0 is checked in the first line. If the condition is true, the operations between the "If" command and the "End" command are executed. In this sequence, the waveform is only displayed

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples when the condition is true. The sequence for the condition TooSmall > 0 is analogous. Note: The SINTEST1 in the sample files lies within the tolerance band and thus will not be displayed. A general sequence is to be created which can be used to check for compliance with tolerance bands. A sequence with parameters is used so that the names of the files to be tested and the tolerance band itself can be specified for each sequence call. This sequence can then be used to test for various tolerance band widths for various waveforms. The parameters of this sequence are: PA1 waveform to be tested PA2 tolerance PA3 reference waveform First the waveform to be tested, PA1, is loaded, and the variables TooSmall and TooLarge are calculated using the tolerance, P2 and the ideal reference waveform: Load PA1 TooLarge = Max( PA1 - ( PA3 + PA2 )) TooSmall = Max(( PA3 - PA2 ) - PA1 ) The following lines calculate a variable equal to 1 when the waveform leaves the tolerance band, and otherwise has a value of 0: Beyond = 0 If TooLarge OR TooSmall Beyond = 1 End The sequence will check whether the variable "Beyond" is set; if so, the waveform PA1 saves the data of the failed test in the directory currently selected for storing. The directory for storing files should therefore not be the same as the directory for loading files. Use the "Directories..." index card in the "Options" menu. Then the waveform with the unsatisfactory data is assigned to the variable 'Bad' and displayed: If Beyond ; -- Error, so save and display Save PA1 Bad = PA1 Show Bad End Finally the temporary variables created only for use in this sequence are deleted from the variable list: Delete P1 Delete TooLarge Delete TooSmall Delete Beyond The entire sequence text (under the name "Toltest.seq") is available in the sample sequence folder: ; -- Sequence TOLTEST ; -- Determines, whether a waveform lies ; -- within a tolerance band ; -; -- Is called from the TOLERANCE sequence ; -- with three parameters ; -- Saves all unsatisfactory waveforms ; -; -- PA1 : waveform to be tested ; -- PA2 : tolerance ; -- PA3 : reference waveform ; -Load PA1 TooLarge = Max( PA1 - ( PA3 + PA2 )) TooSmall = Max(( PA3 - PA2 ) - PA1 ) Beyond = 0 If TooLarge OR ToSmall Beyond = 1

377

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

378

Application Examples End ; -- Error, so save and display Save PA1 Bad = PA1 Show Bad End Delete PA1 Delete TooLarge Delete TooSmall Delete Beyond Now the sequence can be called. Execute the following operations, which in turn are also saved as sequence: ... ; -- Creates a reference waveform and checks ; -- a series of waveforms for compliance to a ; -- tolerance band. ; -SINE = 3 'V' * sin ( Ramp (0, 2e-5, 403) * 2340) xUnit SINE s Tol = 0.8 'V' Sequence toltest sintest* Tol SINE ... The sequence is available under the name TOLERANCE. The sequence TOLTEST can be called with the "Sequence" command, followed by the name of the sequence to be executed. Then the parameters for the function call are specified. The formal parameters of the sequence ( PA1 , PA2 and PA3 ) are replaced by SINTEST*, TOL and SINE when the function is called. Use the input editor box to enter the commands. The '*' character is used to process all files whose names begin with SINTEST, one after the other. The sequence will be called automatically for every file which fulfills the condition. To solve the sample problem, perform the following: Set the directory for saving files to a directory other than the one for loading files. Enter the command 'Sequence TOLERANCE'. The first five test files are checked automatically. Two of them do not meet the tolerance conditions and are stored in the specified directory.

17.8

Histogram Test for ADC

The histogram test is used to judge the quality of the AD converters implemented in the DSOs, transient recorders and similar data-acquisition systems. This test determines the existence of preferred codes and missing codes. For a known function (e.g. sine function), the probability density function is specified. This indicates which codes will occur and how often. For a sinusoidal input quantity, the probability density p(u) at a maximum value is equal to:

p(u) = 1 / ( p . ( 2 - u2 ) 0.5 )
Discrete measurement values, as occurring in a transitional recorder, can be characterized by histograms.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

379

Histogram of an ideal 8 bit AD-converter

This illustration shows the relative frequency of occurrence for each of the 256 code bins of an 8 bit device. "Missing Codes" are indicated by an empty code bin in the histogram. One of the most important features in the histogram test is the determination of differential non-linearity. This is determined by the ratio of the events occurring within a code bin to the expected number of occurrences in an ideal system:

DN..differential non-linearity. Pideal can be measured for each code; Pideal is derived theoretically from the integral of the probability density:

The number of code bins for a system with n bits is 2n, and the class width can be selected as 2/2n . The voltage uc is expressed by: uc = c . class width - Thus Pideal (c) becomes:

The number of samples to be recorded depends on the resolution of the converter used and on the statistical accuracy required. The sequence ADCDISTR.SEQ can be used to calculate these formulas. The sequence looks like this: c = Ramp (0, 1, PA1 ) Distrib = 1/pi*(asin((k+-( PA1 /2-1 ) )/( PA1 /2)) -asin((k-( PA1 /2))/( PA1 /2))) xUnit Distrib "Codes" Delete k Show Distrib This sequence has a parameter which designated the number of codes which occur, e.g. 256 codes for

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

380

Application Examples an 8 bit AD-converter. The sequence is called as follows: Sequ ADCDistr 256 Once this command is entered in the editor box and executed, the variable 'Distrib' is calculated. This variable represents the ideal distribution Pideal(c) . It shows the values in the various code bins as relative values. This means that the sum of the values in all classes would be one. The sum can be calculated according to Sum = Mean(Distrib) * Leng?(Distrib) Example: n = 3; k = 0, 1, ..., 7 For the edges c = 0 and 7:

Execute the sequence ADCDISTR.SEQ , for this example by entering the following line in the editor box: sequ ADCDISTR 8 If 10000 samples of a sine function were recorded, 2301 samples should occur in each of the classes 0 and 7 for an ideal ADU with negligible differential non-linearity. Multiply the waveform DISTRIB by 10000: Distrib = 10000 * Distrib Double-click on the y-axis and select the option "Bar" under the "Sample" menu.

Distribution of a system under test To determine the differential non-linearity of the measurement system, data recorded with the system under test are required. A high-quality sine generator must be available. Use a low-pass filter between the generator and the measurement system if necessary. Set the generator so that the AD converter can operate over its full range. Record as many finely-sampled periods of the sine wave as possible with the system to be tested. Record substantially more values than the AD converter has codes, e.g. at least 10000 values for an 8 bit AD converter with 256 code bins. Save the recorded test data and load them into FAMOS. Cut an integer number of periods from the waveform, (see also the 'AC power calculation' section in this chapter). If no waveform is recorded, use the predefined test waveform ADSINE. In the case of the waveform ADSINE, over 10000 values were sampled over several periods:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

381

To calculate the differential non-linearity, the distribution function is executed first: OK = Histo(ADSINE*(256/20)+128,1,0)/Leng?(ADSINE) xUnit OK "Codes" Here OK is the normalized distribution of the converter to be tested. The waveform ADSINE, ranging from -10 V .. 10 V, is transformed to the range of the code bins by multiplying by 256 (number of bins), dividing by 20 (span) and then adding 128 (to eliminate negative values). Another option is to use the "Scale" function to generate an appropriate value range. The middle parameter of the histogram function is the width of a code bin set to a value of one. The number of code bins is to be determined automatically, so the third parameter of the histogram function is set to zero. Alternatively, a fixed number of 256 code bins could be specified. Finally, the histogram is normalized to the length of the sinusoidal test waveform to allow direct comparison of the histogram with the theoretical distribution. The x-unit is then adapted and the following operations are used to calculate the differential non-linearity: OK = Cut( OK, 0, 255 ) Sequ ADCDistr 256 DiffNLin= OK / Distrib - 1 To divide both histograms meaningfully, they must be defined fir the same x-range. Use the "Cut" function to select only that part of the test histogram which corresponds to the ideal distribution waveform.

Only the best converters have a differential non-linearity significantly less than 1 LSB.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

382

Application Examples

17.9

Convolution, Digital Filter

Digital filtering of a signal can be interpreted as convolution. Convolution in the time domain indicates a multiplication in the frequency range. The "FFT" (FAMOS Function Reference) function can be used to transform a waveform to the frequency domain; use the "iFFT" (FAMOS Function Reference) inverse function to transform the waveform back to the time domain. This example uses the waveform SQUARE. The waveform has a length of 1024 and contains several periods of a rectangular signal. If the length of the waveform is not a power of two, use the function "Red2" to change it to a power of two.

The waveform should be filtered with a first order low-pass filter. The weighting function of this filter should be defined with the following equations: WEIGHT = exp( -Ramp(0, 1.8e-5, 1024) *2000) WEIGHT = WEIGHT / Mean (WEIGHT) xUnit WEIGHT s

Convolution of the waveforms SQUARE aand WEIGHT yields the filtered waveform FILTERED after the following equation: FILTERED = IFFT(FFT (SQUARE) * FFT(WEIGHT) ) . Note that the rectangular window must be set for FFT (see the dialog "Options/ Functions..").

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

383

By changing the weighting function, the filter effect can be altered. A low-pass with a higher cut-off frequency (producing less filtering) results when the reference value in the e-function is set smaller, for example WEIGHT = exp( -Ramp(0, 1.8e-5, 1024) * 5000) WEIGHT = WEIGHT / Mean(WEIGHT) xUnit WEIGHT s Note that the weighting function is normalized to produce a mean value of one. This prevents changes in the mean value of the signal during filtering.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

384

Application Examples

17.10 Analysis Using the "Chrct" Function

Physical measurement quantities cannot usually be directly measured. Such quantities (e.g. acceleration, displacement, etc.) they are converted to an electrical quantity (e.g. voltage, charge, etc.) using a sensor of some type. These very often have non-linear measurement "characteristics", i.e. the electrical output signal is not transformed one-to-one from the input signal. The FAMOS function "Chrct" (FAMOS Function Reference) is available to compensate a sensor output signal using its characteristic. To correct a waveform, first the sensor characteristic has to be known. This can be defined either mathematically or entered directly into FAMOS. It is assumed that the function can be described by a relatively simple curve. For example, a characteristic could be defined as follows: Half = Ramp( 0, 0.01, 1001) * 1'A' xUnit Half A Half = Cut( Half, -10, 20) In this example, we are simulating the characteristic of a typical diode to illustrate usage of the "Chrct" function.

We now want to apply this characteristic to the FAMOS example waveform adsine. This waveform should first be loaded and scaled: Load adsine xUnit adsine s yUnit adsine A Show adsine

Now the waveform can be processed using the characteristic. Correct = Chrct( ADSINE, Half) The negative half-waves were rectified to simulate a typical diode charcteristic (rectifier).

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

385

Values which lie between individual points of the characteristic waveform always occur during correction. In this case, the "Chrct" function automatically linear-interpolates between the relevant characteristic points. For extremely non-linear characteristic curves, the error can be reduced significantly by having as many points in the characteristic file as possible. The maximum length of a characteristic file is 16384 points.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

386

Application Examples

17.11 Digital Filter

The FAMOS filter function "DFilt" (FAMOS Functionreference) allows filtering of waveforms with digital filters freely defined by the user. The "DFilt" function expects a waveform to be filtered and a coefficient vector. The coefficient vector must consist of a equal number of numerator and denominator coefficients. Any unnecessary coefficients must be set to zero. Note that first the denominator and then the numerator coefficients are expected. In the following, a few simple filters are demonstrated along with their results. First a step function is to be created: Step = Ramp( 0, 1, 51) * 0 Step2 = Step + 1 Step = Join( Step, Step2) Step = Join( Step, Step2) Delete Step2 Show Step The step function will now be processed by various filters. Three coefficient vectors are created for this purpose. Enter the vectors using the Waveform Editor or use the following formulas: a) ParamT = Ramp( 0, 1, 4) * 0 ParamT[1] = 1 ParamT[2] = -0.9 ParamT[3] = 0 ParamT[4] = 0.1 b) ParamI = Ramp( 0, 1, 4) * 0 ParamI[1] = 1 ParamI[2] = -1 ParamI[3] = 0 ParamI[4] = 1 c) ParamM = Ramp( 0, 1, 4) * 0 ParamM[1] = 2 ParamM[2] = 0 ParamM[3] = 1 ParamM[4] = 1 These parameters define a low-pass digital filter, an integrator and a simple averaging section, according to the definition of the "DFilt" function. These filters can be applied to the variable Step. The results are displayed in a curve window. Lowpass = DFilt( Step, ParamT) Integrat = DFilt( Step, ParamI) Mean_ = DFilt( Step, ParamM)

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

387

All filters are first-order filters. It is apparent that averaging occurs over just two values, and that the filtered waveform follows the variable Step very quickly. The filter coefficients of a low-pass filter can also be displayed as follows (from a) ):

This is a causal filter without inverse amplification, where the input values u are only slightly weighted. Use a z-transformation to obtain information about the damping behavior. The maximum damping is determined from the following equation:

If the value z = -1 (unit circle), the maximum damping is set to:

For the averaging filter section used here (coefficient waveform c), only the evaluation of the input values is of interest. This is a sliding averaging over two values:

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

388

Application Examples

The integration waveform (coefficient b) consists of the following:

Reference Further evaluation options, for example frequency analysis, are found in this chapter in the section Analysis Using the 'Smo' Function. In many cases, filter coefficients are taken from tables according to the requirements for the filter. Here are a few examples based on The FAMOS example waveform slope can used as test waveform. The following command is used to reduce the sampling frequency to 10 kHz. Slope = xDel( Slope, 0.0001) For a Chebychev low-pass filter of second order, with 3 dB ripple and a cut-off frequency fc= 100 Hz, the coefficients of the following equation result:

Transformation into the form (5) required by the "DFilt" function yields:

The coefficient waveform has been determined. ParamT = Ramp( 0, 1e-4, 6) * 0 ParamT[1] = 1 ParamT[2] = -1.937 ParamT[3] = 0.94 ParamT[4] = 6.923e-4 ParamT[5] = 2*6.923e-4 ParamT[6] = 6.923e-4 Now the waveform "SLOPE" has been filtered and can be displayed together with "FiltSlope". FiltSlope = DFilt( Slope, ParamT )

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

389

It is more relevant to observe the spectra of these waveforms in double logarithmic representation. Set the window function 'Blackman-Harris' under "Extra/ Options/ Functions", deactivate the option "Expand with zeros" and execute the following operations: SSlope = Spec( Slope ) SFiltSlope = Spec( FiltSlope)

The low-pass character of the filter is quite apparent. To determine the transfer function of the filter, it is excited with the unit pulse: EImpuls = Ramp( 0, 1e-4, 1024) * 0 Eimpuls[1] = 1 G = 1024 * FFT( Dfilt( EImpuls, ParamT ) Select window function "Rectangle".

Measure the 3 dB frequency by selecting menu option "Edit/ Measure", placing the left crosshair on the left range of the transfer function and then moving the right crosshair until "yr-yl" -3dB. Read the frequency

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

390

Application Examples listed at "xr". It is approximately 100Hz. Now select "Slope per decade" instead of "yr-yl" and shift both crosshairs to the decreasing part of the transfer function. The result is approximately 40 dB per decade, due to the filter order (20 dB / order). The damping of approximately 0.927 in the pass range depends on the selected filter coefficient and can be confirmed by calculation. By setting the selected coefficients (5) and setting z = 1 (unit circle), the same portion becomes:

The slight deviation between the measured and calculated values is due to the limiting of the pulse response. Finally, a further example with specified coefficients should be displayed. A band-pass filter with a resonant frequency fr = 1 kHz is to be generated. A quality of 100 is required. The coefficient waveforms consists of the following values:

Calculation into the form (5) required by the "DFilt" function yields:

The coefficient waveform is initialized as follows. ParamB = Ramp ( 0, 1, 6) * 0 ParamB[1] = 1 ParamB[2] = -1.572 ParamB[3] = 0.9429 ParamB[4] = 2.855e-2 ParamB[5] = 0 ParamB[6] = -2.855e-2 The Waveform Editor can also be used to create coefficient waveforms. Filter the waveform "SLOPE" and calculate the spectrum of the filtered waveform by using the following operations: FiltSlope = DFilt( Slope, ParamB ) SFiltSlope = Spec( FiltSlope ) The following curve is the result in double logarithmic display (y-axis in dB):

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

391

The transfer function shows the filter behavior more clearly. G = FFT( FiltSlope) / FFT( Slope)

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

392

Application Examples

17.12 Report Generator

The following section explains the design and integration of layouts using a small application. Step 1: Create Layout The menu option "Report Generator" in the "Extra" menu is available for creating and processing print layouts. Use this option to start the imc-Report Generator.

FAMOS: Report Generator

Reference Manual 'Report Generator' The document should contain a date, a value table and a curve display. Select "Text" in the "Object" menu. Press and hold down the left mouse button to change the shape of the range in which the date should be entered in the layout. After the mouse button has been released, a dialog appears for defining the text object. Enter the text "Date" and the place holder "#d", which will be replaced by the current date when the document is generated.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

393

Select "Title" in the "Options" menu and enter "Date" in the input box which appears. In subsequent remote-controlled operations the object will be identified by this name. Define the text font in the "Options/ Font" filecard; the size should be approximately 24. Close the dialog with "OK". Now the value table will be created. Select "Object/ Table" and place the table in the upper right part of the working area.

A dialog for designing the table object promptly appears. Enter "2" as the number of columns and "6" for the number of rows in our example. Now access the filecard "Font" and enter a size of approx. 24. On the filecard "Number", enter "Floating point" for the numerical notation and "1" for the decimal places. These settings govern the display of numerical values which have been transferred.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

394

Application Examples

Now enter an arbitrary name for the table, by which it can later be identified, on the "Title" filecard. For the purposes of this exercise we choose "Table". On the filecard text enter an arbitrary text, say, "0.0". This simply serves as an aid in estimating the row height needed. Close the dialog with <OK>.

Now correct the row-height to provide sufficient room for the text to appear in full in the cells. To do this, first make the table object the current selection by clicking on it (black squares then appear at the corners and midpoints of its frame), then left-click the mouse on the bottom edge and pull it downward, until the text is readily visible. Now the text needs to be centered within the cells; also, a heading for the table is lacking. Double-click on the table object to call the familiar properties dialog and access the filecard "Alignment". Activate the option "Centered" under "Horizontal" and close the dialog with <OK>. To create a heading for the table object first click on it to make it the current selection, then double-click on the upper left cell to "mark" it. The cell appears in color-negative (highlighted) and the properties dialog reappears. Now, however, settings made in this dialog will not affect the table as a whole, but pertain rather to the selected cell. Access filecard "Text" and enter "Real Part". Now press the screen button which features a right-pointing arrow. This causes the upper right cell to be marked. Enter "Imaginary Part" as the text here and close the dialog with <OK>.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

395

Finally, we wish to give the table headers a gray background. To do this, mark the two top cells and again access the dialog "Edit / Properties". On the filecard "Frame" a color list is available under "Pattern", for selecting the filling color. A curve window with a frame should be inserted below the table by selecting menu options "Object / Curve" and "Frame". Assign the title "Curve1" to the curve window using the dialog called by menu item "Edit / Properties". On the filecard "Position" activate the option "Relative to curve object frame". The following layout is thus created:

Now save the document under the name "Porsche1" by selecting menu option "File / Save as...". Close the Report Generator. Step 2: Update layout with current values and print A report is to be printed out based on the waveform "Porsche.dat" and using the layout template created above. The display of the curve will proceed according to the tutorial curve configuration "Porsche.ccv" which is included with FAMOS. You now have two principal choices for how to furnish the report template with the curve graph and

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

396

Application Examples numerical values belonging to the "Porsche" waveform. You can either perform the updating of the report manual, using Drag&Drop, or use the remote control functions for the curve window and the Report Generator. The latter method is more sensible whenever you have a recurring documentation procedure which can be automated by writing a sequence. Updating with Remote Control Functions In order to remotely control the curve window and the Report Generator, the Curve Kit and the Report Generator Kit must both be installed in FAMOS. Their presence is indicated by the accessibility of the submenus "Curve" and "Report Generator" in the "Kit" menu in FAMOS. If these aren't present, see the chapter 'Functions', section 'imc Kits' for more information about registering the necessary supplemental libraries. First load the waveform: LOAD porsche.dat The waveform is then displayed, employing the desired configuration. CvConfig ( Porsche, "Porsche.ccv" )

Now the Report Generator is started and the previously created and saved layout is loaded. RgDocOpen("Porsche1", 0) Place holders used in creating the layout are now replaced by values. First the date should be inserted. The place holder #d for date in the text object "Date" is updated the first time data are transferred to the object.. RgTextSetData( "Date", 0, 0) Values are added to the table using the following operations: RgTableSetColumn( "Table",1,2,porsche.r,0) RgTableSetColumn( "Table",2,2,porsche.i,0) In each column, starting from the second row and continuing to the end of the table, the values of the specified data set are transferred, in this case, the first five. Finally, the curve displayed in the curve window "porsche" is entered in the layout. RgCurveSet( "Curve1",porsche,0) To view the layout, double-click on the Report Generator icon placed automatically at the bottom of the screen.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Application Examples

397

You can now use: RgDocPrint(0 ) to print out the report for the "Porsche" waveform. It would make sense to assemble the above series of commands to a sequence. By using formal parameters, this sequence can be employed on any waveform.

The call: SEQUENCE DSHEET.SEQ AUTO2.DAT would, for example, load the data set "auto2.dat", display it, transfer it into the report template whose designing was demonstrated above, and finally print it out. Remarks The series of commands used here is similar to the sequence "Dsheet.seq" included in FAMOS. Manual Update via Drag & Drop Load the waveform "Porsche.dat" into FAMOS using menu item "File/ Load". Next, display the waveform using "Variable/ Show". Use the menu command "<> / Load" at the curve window and select the configuration "Porsche.ccv". Start the Report Generator, and load the report document designed above using the command "File/

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

398

Application Examples Open". Double-click on the curve object in the document and then on the curve window. This transfers the curve graph. If the FAMOS variables list doesn't contain the individual components of Porsche (Porsche.R. Porsche.I), select "Show Components" from the context menu (accessed by right-clicking in the variables list). Then select (highlight) both components. Left-click the mouse over the leftmost third of the entry in the variables list (mouse pointer changes into a hand-cursor), and move the mouse while keeping its button pressed to the 2nd cell in the 1st column of the table object, then release the mouse button. By the same method the "date" place holder can be updated; any arbitrary variable can be dragged and dropped onto this object. Finally, use menu item "File / Print" in the Report Generator.

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Appendix

399

Appendix
18.1 Concepts and Abbreviations
' (single quote) ^ (power) ALT Application BACKSPACE Browser Check-mark Click The single quotation mark is entered in Windows by pressing the ' key and then the SPACEBAR or SHIFT and #. The exponent sign is entered in Windows by pressing the ^ key and then the SPACEBAR. Keyboard key used to change the function of another key; usually held down while another key is pressed. A program which runs under Windows Keyboard key used to delete the last character entered; labeled with an arrow pointing left or with BS, generally located above the ENTER or RETURN key. Program for navigating through filing / directory organization structures. Small mark displayed next to certain menu options to indicate that the corresponding option is activated. Short press of the left mouse button, i.e. short selection and immediate release; in some cases it is required to hold down the button after clicking. The right and left mouse buttons can be switched in the control panel. Abbreviation for "Component Object Model". Microsoft software standard designed to simplify communication between processes and programs. COM defines its own object-oriented interface for this purpose. Special menu adapted to particular object and offering commands which affect the same object. Usually called by right-clicking on the object, but sometimes via SHIFT+F10 or some other special key. Keyboard key used to enter control characters; usually held down while another key is pressed. This is the keyboard delete key: the character located at the marked position or to the right of the cursor is deleted; usually labeled with Del. The four keyboard keys labeled with arrows in all four directions; used to move objects or the cursor on the screen; also called cursor keys. Windows file container which may hold files and/or other directories; used to add structure to hard disks and diskettes. Also known as "Folder". Clicking the mouse button twice in quick succession; the speed can be specified in Windows (Control Panel/ Mouse). Direction key with arrow pointing downward A method of moving objects with the mouse. Click on an object and move the mouse while keeping its button down to move the object; release the mouse button over the desired new location for the object. Program or program component for entering or editing data (often text). Keyboard key used to move the cursor to the right edge of the screen. Keyboard input key, sometimes labeled as Return, Enter, CR or an arrow pointing down and then left. Keyboard key, sometimes labeled with Esc; used to cancel commands or interrupt operations. Function keys are available as a block at the top or the left of the keyboard, usually labeled with F1, F2,...; used to execute commands. Keyboard key used to move the cursor to the left edge of the screen.

COM

Context menu

CTRL DELETE Direction keys Directory Double-click DOWN Drag&Drop

Editor END ENTER ESCAPE Function key HOME

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

400

Appendix Kit LEFT Mouse cursor OLE In FAMOS, the name of special extension libraries providing additional functions which can be called in formulas or sequences. Direction key with arrow pointing left. Mouse cursor; in Windows usually an arrow, moved across the screen with the mouse. Abbreviation of "Object Linking and Embedding". A method of shared use of information where data from a source document are linked to or embedded in a destination document. If the embedded data are selected in the destination document , the source document is reopened so that the data can be processed using the appropriate functions in the original environment. A special implementation of the interface standard COM (which see). Characteristic assigned to a function; called an argument in mathematics. Directory Keyboard key which moves the image displayed one page downward; labeled with PgDn and an arrow pointing downward. Keyboard key which moves the image displayed one page upward; labeled with PgUp and an arrow pointing upward. General term for an auxiliary program extending an application's functionality. In FAMOS, it means an expansion module having its own user interface, which can be seamlessly integrated into the FAMOS main window. Command to undo the zoom, shows entire page. Direction key with arrow pointing right. Keyboard key used to switch between upper and lower case characters, located twice on every keyboard for the right and left hands; is usually held down while other keys are pressed. Keyboard key which inserts a space; the longest key. Keyboard key used to indent in word-processing programs, used in Windows to move to the next control in a dialog; tabulator function. Direction key with arrow pointing upward. A series of numerical values which belong together and have a combined meaning, e.g. a series of temperatures measured in succession. Enlarges a section of a window; opposite function is Unzoom.

Parameter Path PgDn PgUp Plug-in

Rezoom RIGHT SHIFT

SPACEBAR TAB UP Waveform Zoom

18.2

Constants and Predefined Variables

sRms e InDegr InRad sMax sMaxPos sMin Root-mean-square of a data set or waveform Euler's constant e Constant for converting radians to degrees Constant for converting degrees to radians Maximum of a waveform X-coordinate of the maximum of a waveform Minimum of a waveform

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Appendix sMinPos PI PI2 StDev X-coordinate of the minimum of a waveform Circle constant pi (P) 2 x circle constant pi (P) Standard deviation of a waveform

401

18.3
A

Units
Ampere Candela Kelvin Kilogram Meter Second Electric current Light intensity Temperature Mass Length Time

Supported SI Units

cd K kg m s

Additionally Supported SI Units

Unit C Name Celsius Definition Temperature Conversion 1 C = 1 K for temperature differences 1 C = 1 As 1 F = 1 As/V 1 H = 1 Vs/A 1 Hz = 1 1/s 1 J = 1 Nm = 1 Ws

C F H Hz J lm lx mol N Ohm Pa S

Coulomb Farad Henry Hertz Joule Lumen Lux Mol Newton Ohm Pascal Siemens

Electric charge Electric capacity Inductivity Frequency Energy Light flux Illumination Amount of substance Force Electric resistance Pressure Conductivity

1 lx = 1 lm/m2

1 N = 1 kgm/s2 1 Ohm = 1 V/A 1 Pa = 1 N/m2 1 S = 1 A/V

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

402

Appendix T V W Wb Tesla Volt Watt Weber Magnetic field strength Voltage Power Magnetic flux 1 W = 1 VA 1 Wb = 1 Vs 1 T = 1 Vs/m2

Additional units and pseudo-units recognized by FAMOS

dB Degr Empty % Rad Percent Radian Decibel Degrees Not a unit, logarithmic representation Angle, range 0 ... 360 Not a unit Not a unit Angle, range 0 ... 2*Pi

18.4

Maximum Values
Maximum number of drives for temporary files Max. waveform length (in Bytes) Maximum formula length Maximum number of variables Maximum length of a variable name Maximum text length (text variables, units, comments) Maximum nesting depth in a formula Maximum nesting depth in a sequence (macro) Largest possible number (magnitude) Smallest possible number (magnitude) 5 2.1 *109 255 characters 32000 255 characters 255 characters 10 20 1035 10-35

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Index

403

Index
-## (operator in sequences) 190

-<<...> (text variables) 158

-AAbsolute Time Comparison:Waveform Editor actual power 374 add grid 359 aligning (dialog elements) 286 Application:sequence command 199 applications 359 arithmetic mean:waveform 68 arrow buttons in toolbar 264 ASCII format 88 ASCII:save options 200, 201 ASCII:sequence command 200 ASCII-export templates:administration 100 ASCII-export templates:defining 101 ASCII-format (export template) 99 ASCII-format 3.2 compatible) 110 ASCOption:sequence command 201 ASCSave:sequence command 202 247

-** (sequence parameter) 190 *:wildcard in file name 213, 219 *:wildcard in variable names 227

-..I (component abbreviation) 128 .P (component abbreviation) 128 .Y (component abbreviation) 128

-//C (establishing a registry key) 20 /C (start parameter) 20 /D (start parameter) 21 /E (start parameter) 22 /F (start parameter) 21 /L (start parameter) 21 /P (command line parameter) 274 /S (start parameter) 22 /S (Startparameter) 22

-Bband-pass 386 Baumansicht (dialog element) 303 BINARY file 91 binary format 91 binary format:signed integers 91 binary format:unsigned integers 91 Binary:sequence command 203 bookmarks (Editor box) 35, 44 breakpoints 44, 185

-;; (beginning of comment) ; (semicolon) 189 154, 205

-?? (sequence parameter)( 190 ?:Help menu 51 ?:wildcard in file name 213, 219 ?:wildcard in variable names 227

-Ccalculations:example 68 change size (dialog element 287 Charact. dialog:scrolling 138 characteristic file 384 check boxes (dialog element) 295 Client (DDE) 256 clipboard (dialog-editor) 288 Clipboard:sequence command 205

-~~:special characters (in text constants) 130

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

404

Index Curve Setup:sequence command 207 curve window:adding more waveforms 64 Curve window:Close curve windows! 50 curve window:copying to Clipboard 205 curve window:loading a configuration 50 Curve Window:Measure 60 curve window:More Curves in Window 64 curve window:Optimize 50 curve window:phase spectrum 71 curve window:scaling 71 curve window:zoom 59 customizing:user interface 54 cut-off frequency 364

Column menu (Waveform Editor):charact. values 244 Column menu (Waveform Editor):Clear column 237 Column menu (Waveform Editor):Delete Column 239 Column menu (Waveform Editor):Insert New Column 239 Column menu (Waveform Editor):place variable 237 Column menu (Waveform Editor):Show Curve 244 command line parameters 19 commands 187 commands:DDE Export 195 commands:Load Save 195 commands:overview ordered alphabetically 197 commands:overview ordered by group 195 commands:sequence 189 commands:Variables Execution 195 comment 99, 189 comment:on sequence file 179, 180 Comment:sequence command 205 compatibility dialog (DSF-format) 82 complex transfer function 359 complex waveforms:curve window 71 conditional execution 215 Conditional loop 230 Configure display:Waveform Editor 237 constants 147 constants:predefined constants 147 context menu:(File Window) 264 context menu:Editor box (input space) 31 context menu:Editor box (title bar) 31 context menu:Functions list 29 context menu:Variables list 25 context menu:Waveform Editor 236 Control:sequence command 206 convolution 382 copying to Clipboard:curve window 205 correlation coefficient 372 cross-correlation function 372 cubic splines:curve window 64 Current session 49 cursor icons:File Browser 270 curve configuration:default directories 122 Curve Kit 164, 227

-Ddata formats:conversion 144 data formats:digital 133 data groups 126 data groups:channel index 131 data groups:colon 131 data groups:variables 145 Data Manager options 151 data types 126 data types: complex waveforms 128 data types:data groups 131, 157 data types:digital 133 data types:normal waveforms 126 data types:text variables 130, 154 data types:TimeStamp-ASCII 130 datepicker (dialog element) 298 DDE 199 DDE Options:dialog 259 DDE:Call Client dialog 48 DDE:commands 223 DDE:DDE client 257 DDE:FAMOS as a client 256 DDE:Poke 256 DDE:Request 256 DDE:Request data 259 DDE:Request text 259 DDE:requesting data from FAMOS 262 DDE:requesting text variables 262 DDE:Send control commands 258 DDE:Send data 258 DDE:Send text 258 DDE:sending data to FAMOS 262 DDE:sending instructions to FAMOS 261

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Index DDE:sending text data to FAMOS 262 DDE:Server name 259 DDE:text format 259 DDE:text separator 259 DDE:Timeout 259 DDE:topic SYSTEM 261 DDE:topic TXVARS 262 DDE:Transaction 257 DDE-client:dialog 257 DDE-interface 256 decimal comma 110 decimal notation 110 decimal point 110 default directories 122 default directories:curve configurations 122 default directories:definition files 122 default directories:load data files 122 default directories:Report Generator 122 default directories:save data files 122 default directories:sequences 122 definition files:default directories 122 DELETE 145, 208 delete (dialog elements) 287 Delete:sequence command 208 Delete:Variable menu 42 deleting files 270 dialog element:Baumansicht 303 dialog element:check boxes 295 dialog element:date picker 298 dialog element:group box 296 dialog element:image 296 dialog element:Klappliste 301 dialog element:Kombinationsfeld 302 dialog element:Kurvenfenster 305 dialog element:Listenfeld (Einzelselektion) 299 dialog element:Listenfeld (Mehrfachselektion) 300 dialog element:menu 307 dialog element:multi-line edit box 295 dialog element:slider control 296 dialog element:status bar 309 dialog element:Tabelle 304 dialog element:text box 292 dialog element:time 299 dialog element:toolbar 307 dialog: Options File Browser:file format and display filter 266 dialog: Save template 100 dialog:(EXCEL) export templates 113 dialog:Arrange windows 54 dialog:cancel running 290 dialog:DDE Options 259 dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Data 101 dialog:Define export template (ASCII):File header 101 dialog:Define export template (ASCII):General 101 dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Miscellaneous 101 dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Preview 101 dialog:Define export template (ASCII):Scaling 101 dialog:Define export template (XLS):Data 114 dialog:Define export template (XLS):File header 114 dialog:Define export template (XLS):General 114 dialog:Define export template (XLS):Miscellaneous 114 dialog:Define export template (XLS):Scaling 114 dialog:Define favorites 52, 74 dialog:Defining export templates (XLS) 114 dialog:design 279 dialog:Editor box options 36 dialog:elements 279 dialog:Enter title for configuration 55 dialog:event-sequence 280, 288 dialog:event-sequence edit 289 dialog:export templates (ASCII):administering 100 dialog:export templates (ASCII):defining 101 dialog:Formula-Assistant 161 dialog:Open (sequence) 179 dialog:Options / loading FAMOS files 82 dialog:Options:Data Manager 151 dialog:Options:File Browser:Display 266 dialog:Options:XLS Import 95 dialog:Page setup (Editor box) 38 dialog:Print 39 dialog:programming 280 dialog:Save as (sequence) 180 dialog:setting colors 37 dialog:test and run 290 Dialoge:Ausfhrung abbrechen 185, 226 dialog-editor 280 dialog-editor:calling 280 dialog-editor:change element size 287 dialog-editor:clipboard 288 dialog-editor:delete elements 287 dialog-editor:dialog:add elements 282 dialog-editor:dialog:change size 282 dialog-editor:dialog:create 282

405

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

406

Index Drag&Drop:Functions list 29 Drag&Drop:Variables list 25 Drag&Drop:Waveform Ed. -> Rep. Gen. 253 Drag&Drop:Waveform Editor 237, 244, 254 drives for temporary files 151 DSP (DIGISKOP) format 85 DSPLoad:sequence command 209

dialog-editor:dialog:opening 282 dialog-editor:dialog:save 282 dialog-editor:element-properties 283 dialog-editor:element-properties:caption 283 dialog-editor:element-properties:data-linking 283 dialog-editor:element-properties:imgage 283 dialog-editor:element-properties:input validation 283 dialog-editor:element-properties:name 283 dialog-editor:element-properties:text-formatting 283 dialog-editor:elements aligning 286 dialog-editor:front back 287 dialog-editor:grid 288 dialog-editor:move elements 286 dialog-editor:select elements 282 dialogs:during execution of sequence 194 differential non-linearity 378 Digiskop format:DSPLoad function 209 digital filter 386 DIN-EN-ISO-9001 13 Directories dialog:defaults 122 directories:defining defaults 122 directories:edit 190 directories:entry in sequence 194 directories:save 225 directories:sequences 221 directory (File Browser):change 270 Display menu (Waveform Editor):cell size 245 Display menu (Waveform Editor):font 245 Display menu (Waveform Editor):Options 243, 245, 247 Display options:Clipboard (Waveform Editor) 243 display options:complex waveforms 71 Display options:Data (Waveform Editor) 247 Display Options:Scale (Waveform Editor) 245 Display Options:Various (Waveform Editor) 237 display:single value 67 display:spline 64 distribution 378 DLL-functions:register 166 DLL-interface 166 DLL's:use in FAMOS 172 dongle 19 dongle:troubleshooting 17 double 133 DP 128

-Eedit directories 190 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Clipboard 243 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Copy 241 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Cut 241 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Delete 241 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Go To... 242 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Insert Values 241 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Paste 241 Edit menu (Waveform Editor):Search 242 Editor box 24, 56 Editor box:active line 34 Editor box:bookmarks 35, 44 Editor box:Breakpoints 44, 185 Editor box:calling online help 34 Editor box:calling the Function Assistant 34 Editor box:context menu (input space) 31 Editor box:context menu (title bar) 31 Editor box:Continue (sequence) 184 Editor box:creating new sequences 178 Editor box:editing text 32, 44 Editor box:execute-button 34 Editor box:Find 44 Editor box:Find next 44 Editor box:Insert-/Overwrite-mode 33 Editor box:loading sequences 179 Editor box:options 36 Editor box:overview 31 Editor box:Page preview 44 Editor box:Page setup 38, 44 Editor box:parameter-tip 34, 36 Editor box:Print 39, 44 Editor box:Print preview 39 Editor box:Run active line 184 Editor box:Run line 44 Editor box:saving sequences 180 Editor box:setting colors 37 Editor box:Single step (sequence) 184 Editor box:Single step in subsequence 184

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Index Editor box:Start sequence (Debug) 184 Else:sequence command 210 End:FAMOS main window 41 END:sequence command 210 error messages 158 events:Waveform Editor 237 event-sequence (dialog) 288 event-sequence (dialogs) 280 examples for applications 359 Excel file format 95, 112 execute-button 34, 62 Execute-button (Sequences) 62 ExitSequence:sequence command 211 export templates (ASCII):definition 101 export templates (ASCII):options:Data 101 export templates (ASCII):options:General 101 export templates (ASCII):options:Miscellaneous 101 export templates (EXCEL):administering 113 export templates (XLS):administering 113 export templates (XLS):definition 114 export templates (XLS):options:General 114 export templates (XLS):options:Miscellaneous 114 export templates:administering (ASCII) 100 export templates:ASCII 99 export templates:options:Data (XLS) 114 export templates:options:File header (ASCII) 101 export templates:options:File header (XLS) 114 export templates:options:Preview (ASCII) 101 export templates:options:Scaling (ASCII) 101 export templates:options:Scaling (XLS) 114 export templates:placeholders 101, 114 Export!:Variable menu 42 Export:sequence command 212 exporting variables 146 external DLL functions:use of 172 External kit functions:call 164 Extra menu 48 Extra menu:DDE 48, 257 Extra Menu:Dialog-Editor 48 Extra menu:File Assistant 48 Extra menu:Filter Design 48 Extra menu:QuickView Window 48 Extra menu:Waveform Editor 69, 235 Fae40111_Overview2.htm 263 Fae50102_Extra_Menu.htm 48 Fae50102_Introduction.htm 24 Fae50103_Specifying_Directories.htm 57 Fae50103_Starting_FAMOS.htm 56 Fae50105_Text_Variables.htm 130 Fae50106_The_Format__Kit.htm 165 FAMOS:file format 212 FAMOS:installation 18 FAMOS:introduction 17 FAMOS:sequence command 212 FAMOS:starting 19 FAMOS-format 82, 99 FASLoad:sequence command 213 Favorites 28, 29, 74 Favorites:organizing 53 Favorites:overview 51 Favorites:Properties 52 FFT 364, 369 FFT:inverse 369 FFT:options 160, 214 FFTOption:sequence command 214 File Assistant:FASLoad 213 File Assistant:starting 48 File Browser 41, 56, 263 File Browser:arrow buttons in toolbar 264 File Browser:channel naming 268 File Browser:cursor icons 270 File Browser:deleting files 270 File Browser:directory change 270 File Browser:file list 265 File Browser:load files 267 File Browser:Options/ Delete 270 File Browser:permanently/temporarily loaded channels 268 File Browser:select files for loading 269 File Browser:show after loading 268 File Browser:sort file list 266 file management 79 File menu (File Browser):delete 270 File menu (main window) 41 File menu (main window):End 41 File menu (main window):Load 41, 58, 80 File menu (main window):Restart 41 File menu (main window):Save 69 File menu (main window):Save individually 41, 98 File menu (main window):Save together 41, 98 file saving:ASCII 99

407

-FFae40111_Display_options.htm 266

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

408

Index function:iFFT (example) 382 function:Int (example) 372 function:IPol (example) 62 function:Join (example) 386 function:Max (example) 67 function:Mean (example) 68 function:overview of groups 175 function:Pos (example) 72 function:Ramp (example) 386 function:Red2 (example) 382 function:Show 227 function:Smo (analysis of function) 364 function:Spec (example) 70 function:xDel (example) 386 Function-Assistant:calling 34 Functions list 56 Functions list:calling online help 29 Functions list:conditions 29 Functions list:context menu 29 Functions list:DLL group 28 Functions list:Favorites group 28, 29 Functions list:Kit group 28 Functions list:overview 28 Functions list:Standard group 28 Functions list:symbols 28

file saving:ASCII (3.2 compatible) 110 file saving:ASCII options 110 File Window:context menu 264 File Window:load files (example) 75 file:comment 99 File-Kit 164 filter 386 Filter Design:starting 48 filter effect 382 filter order 364 float 133 Folders 57 Format Kit 165 format:ASCII 88 format:ASCII (3.2 compatible) 110 format:ASCII (export template) 99 format:BINARY 91 format:DSP (DIGISKOP) 85 format:FAMOS 82, 99 format:WFT (Nicolet) 86 format:XLS 95, 112 Formula Assistant:entering parameters 161 Formula Assistant:introduction 161 Formula Assistant:starting 29 formulas 154 Fourier transformation 369 frequency 378 frequency domain 369 function box 24 function groups:10> DDE I/O 175 function groups:7> Scaling Sorting... 175 function groups:B> Load Save 195 function groups:C> Variables Execution 195 function groups:D> DDE Export 195 Function Settings 160 function:CCF (example) 372 function:Comment 205 function:Compl (example) 359 function:Cut (example) 378 function:DFilt (analysis of function) function:external (DLL) 166 function:FFT (example) 382 function:idB (example) 364

-GGo To... :Waveform Editor 242 grid (dialog-editor) 288 group box (dialog element) 296 Group:Variable menu 42 groups 126 Guarantee of Year 2000 conformity

13

-Hhardlock 19 hardlock:help 17 hardlock:troubleshooting harmonic 70 Help menu:? 51 Help menu:Info 51 histogram 378 386 17

-IIF:sequence command 215

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Index image (dialog element) 296 imc customer support - hotline 12 imc Kits 154 Import:sequence command 217 Import:Variable menu 42 Important Notes 13 importing variables 146 Insert Values:Waveform Editor 241 Insert-mode (Editor box) 33 installing FAMOS 18 interpolation:example 62 IPol (function):example 62 Load file:DSP format load file:FAMOS binary 219 85

409

Load File:FAMOS format 82 Load File:Options 82 load file:user-defined (FAS) 213 Load File:WFT (Nicolet) format 86 Load File:WFT Options 86 load file:XLS 95 Load:File menu 41, 80 Load:sequence command 219 low-pass 359, 382, 386

-Kkilo:unit prefix 148 Kit interface 154 Kits 162 Kits menu:Format Kit 165 Kits:call 164 Kits:class-counting package 165 Kits:Curves 164, 227 kits:File-Kit 164 kits:Format Kit 165 Kits:order tracking 165 Kits:registration 163 Kits:Report Generator 165, 207, 217 Kits:Sound Kit 165 Kits:spectrum package 165 Klappliste (dialog element) 301 Kombinationsfeld (dialog element) 302 Kurvenfenster (dialog element) 305

-Mmacro 176 magnitude 70 Make Permanent:Variable menu 42 Max (function):example 67 Mdir:sequence command 221 Mean (function):example 68 mean value:waveform 68 Measure:Curve Window 60 measurement units 148 memory management 151 menu (dialog element) 307 menu item:Extra:Options 48 menu item:File:Last files 41 menu item:Help:Find 51 menu item:Project:Close 49 menu item:Project:Execute 49 menu item:Project:Project-Explorer 49 menu item:Project:Properties 49 menu item:Project:Save current session 49 menu item:Sequence:Close 44 menu item:Sequence:Continue 44 menu item:Sequence:Edit 44 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Breakpoint on/off 33 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Copy 33 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Cut 33 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Paste 33 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Redo 33 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Select all 33 menu item:Sequence:Edit:Undo 33 menu item:Sequence:Find 33, 44 menu item:Sequence:Find next 33, 44 menu item:Sequence:Format automatically 33, 44 menu item:Sequence:Inser boilerplate 33

-LLayout Print:sequence command 217 Ldir:sequence command 218 Limited Warranty 14 linear fit 371 Listenfeld (Einzelselektion) (dialog element) 299 Listenfeld (Mehrfachselektion) (dialog element) 300 Load curve configuration 50 Load Curve Configuration:description 207 load file 58 Load File:Channel Selection 82, 85 load file:default directories 122 load file:DSP (Digiskop) 209

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

410

Index Options:colors 37 Options:Data Manager 151 Options:Editor box 36 Options:Favorites 52 options:FFT 160 Options:File Browser:Display 266 Options:File Browser:file format and display filter 266 Options:File-Load:ASCII 88 Options:File-Load:Binary 91 Options:File-Load:XLS 95 Options:Page setup (Editor box) 38 Options:Variables list 27 output box 24 output box:description 40 Output window 56 overlapping (dialog elements) 287 overview of functions by group 175 Overwrite-mode (Editor box) 33

menu item:Sequence:Insert boilerplate 44 menu item:Sequence:Load 44 menu item:Sequence:New 44 menu item:Sequence:Page setup 38, 44 menu item:Sequence:Print 39, 44 menu item:Sequence:Print preview 39 menu item:Sequence:Replace 33 menu item:Sequence:Run 44 menu item:Sequence:Run line 44 menu item:Sequence:Save 44 menu item:Sequence:Save as 44 menu item:Sequence:Single step 44 menu item:Sequence:Single step in subsequence 44 menu item:Sequence:Start (Debug) 44 menu item:Sequence:Status 44 menu item:Start (Sequence-Editor) 184 menu item:Variable:Show 59 menu item:Window (Sequence-Editor) 206 menu item:Window:Close curve configuration 50 menu item:Window:Curve window list 50 menu item:Window:Customize configuration 50 menu item:Window:Default 50 menu item:Window:Load configuration 50, 55 menu item:Window:Load curve configuration 50 menu item:Window:Optimize curve window 50 menu item:Window:Save configuration 50, 55 menu item:Windows:Arrange windows 54 milli:unit prefix 148 More Waveforms...:in curve window 64 move (dialog elements) 286 multi-event waveforms:Waveform Editor 237 multi-line edit box (dialog element) 295

-PPage setup (Editor box) 38 parameters:at FAMOS' session start 19 parameters:formal 376 parameters:in quot. marks 191 parameters:sequences 188 Pause:sequence command 221 permanent variables 146 permanently loaded channels 268 phase 359 phase spectrum:curve window 71 placeholders:in export templates 101, 114 placeholders:printout of Editor box 38 Plug-in 154 Plug-in box 41 Plug-in window 56 point:decimal point or comma 110 polar plot 359 Pos function:example 72 power factor 374 predefined variables 147 Print preview (Editor box) 39 Print:Editor box 39 printing:Waveform Editor 251 Probability density function 378 Product improvement 16 project:close 49, 278

-Nname:variable 222 New Name:Load dialog 80 No Time Comparison:Waveform Editor non-linearity differential 378 notation:decimal 110 num. format:Waveform Editor 245, 247 247

-OOptions menu:Directories 122 Options/File Browser:Load 268

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Index project:create 274 project:delete 278 Project:Execute 49 project:project-favorites 277 Project:Properties 49 project:save 278 Project-Explorer 49 properties (dialog elements) 283 Properties dialog:example 61 Properties: Variable menu 42 semicolon 189 Sequence menu 44 Sequence:# (operator) 190 sequence:? (operator) 190 Sequence:bookmarks 35, 44 Sequence:Breakpoints 44, 185 sequence:calling 189 sequence:change 74 Sequence:Close 44 sequence:commands 187 Sequence:Continue 44, 184 sequence:create 72 sequence:default directories 122 Sequence:Edit 44 sequence:edit directories 190 sequence:execute 73, 226 Sequence:Find (text) 44 Sequence:Find next (text) 44 sequence:getting values or text 194 sequence:incrementing numbers 190 sequence:interrupt 221 sequence:interrupting execution 185 sequence:introduction 176 sequence:layout 392 Sequence:Load 44, 179 sequence:nesting 190 Sequence:New 44, 178 Sequence:Page preview 44 Sequence:Page setup 44 sequence:parameter in quot. marks 191 Sequence:Print 39, 44 Sequence:protection 181 sequence:response to errors 185 Sequence:Run 44 Sequence:Run active line 184 Sequence:Run line 44 Sequence:Save 44, 74, 180 Sequence:Save as 44 SEQUENCE:sequence command 226 sequence:sequence-status 186 Sequence:Single step 44, 184 Sequence:Single step in subsequence 44, 184 Sequence:Start (Debug) 44, 184 Sequence:Status 44 sequence:TESTSMO 364 sequence:use of text variables 191 sequence:with parameters 188, 189 Server (DDE) 256

411

-QQuality Management 13 QuickView Window:opening 48

-RReadme (help file) 17 relative frequency 378 Relative Time Comparison:Waveform Editor 247 Rename:sequence command 222 Report Generator 217 Report Generator Kit 165 Report Generator:default directory 122 Report Generator:examples of layouting a document 392 Report Generator:Kit 207, 217 Request:sequence command 223 requirements:system 18 Restart:FAMOS 41 RI 128

-SSave file 98 Save File:FAMOS 69 Save File:FAMOS format 98 save files to:default directories 122 Save Individually:File menu 41 Save Together:File menu 41 Save:sequence command 224 scaling:y-axis 71 scroll-linking:tables and curve windows 250 Sdir:sequence command 225 Search:Waveform Editor 242 segmented waveforms:Waveform Editor 237 select (dialog elements) 282

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

412

Index transfer function trigger time set 228 364, 369

Server name (DDE) 259 setting default folders 57 Show Together: Variable menu 42 Show Variable (Waveform Editor) 237 Show:sequence command 227 Show:Variable menu 42 signed integers:binary format 91 single value window 67 single value:curve window 67 SI-units 148, 154 Slider control (dialog element) 296 Software License 14 Sound Kit 165 Spec (function):example 70 special characters:in text constants 130 spectrum 70, 364 spline:curve window 64 spreadsheet:Waveform Editor 235 start application 56 starting FAMOS 19 status bar (dialog element) 309 status line 24 symbols:in the Functions list 28 symbols:in the Variables list 124 syntax color coding 37 SYSTEM (DDE-topic) 261 system requirements:for FAMOS 18

trigger time:copy 228 Tutorial 56 two's complement 91 TXVARS (DDE-topic) 262

-UUngroup:Variable menu 42 units 138, 148 units:assignment 359 units:with exponents 148 unsigned integers:binary format update-info (help file) 17 user interface:customizing 54 user interface:FAMOS 24

91

-Vvalue search:Waveform Editor 242 Variable menu 42 Variable menu:Delete 42, 70, 145 Variable menu:Export 42, 146 Variable menu:Group 42 Variable menu:Import 42, 146 Variable menu:Make Permanent 42 Variable menu:Play 146, 165 Variable menu:Properties 42, 61 Variable menu:Show 42 Variable menu:Show Together 42 Variable menu:Ungroup 42, 145 Variables list 24, 25, 56, 124 Variables list:context menu 25 Variables list:Drag&Drop 25 Variables list:operation 25 Variables list:Options dialog 27 Variables list:symbols 124 Variables menu:Show together 135 variables:[..] (index) 132 variables:deleting 70 variables:drag & drop 136 variables:Export 212 variables:Import 217 variables:indexing 132, 154 variables:names 125 variables:new name 80

-TTabelle (dialog element) 304 Table menu (Waveform Editor):Close 236 Table menu (Waveform Editor):New 236 temporary files 151 temporary variables 146 text box (dialog element) 292 text variables 158 text variables:operator <...> 158, 191 text variables:use in sequences 191 time (dialog element) 299 TimeCopy:sequence command 228 TimeSet:sequence command 228 TimeStamp-ASCII-waveforms 130 tolerance 376 tolerance band 376 tolerance limit 376 toolbar 24 toolbar (dialog element) 307

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1

Index variables:permanent 146 variables:permanent (File Browser) 268 variables:predefined variables 147 variables:rename 222 variables:save 224 variables:Save (ASCII) 202 variables:save together 98 variables:show 59, 135, 227 variables:temporary 146 Waveform Editor:READY mode 240 Waveform Editor:scroll-linking 250 Waveform Editor:Search values 242 Waveform Editor:segmented waveforms 237 Waveform Editor:Show Curve 244 Waveform Editor:show variable 237 Waveform Editor:start 235 Waveform Editor:time scale 245 Waveform Editor:transfer to Rep. Gen. 253 Waveform Editor:vertical scroll-bar 240 Waveform Editor:x-scale 245 Waveform Editor:XY data 237 waveform:create a 359 waveforms:value table 235 weighting function 369 WFT (Nicolet) format 86 WFTLoad:sequence command 229 WHILE:sequence command 230 wildcards:in file name 213 window functions 369 Window menu 50 Window menu:Load curve configuration 135 working with different configurations 20

413

-Wwarnings 160 warnings:output 40 Waveform Editor 235 Waveform Editor:cell size 245 Waveform Editor:CHANGE mode 240 Waveform Editor:charact. values 244 Waveform Editor:column width 245, 247 Waveform Editor:context menu 236 Waveform Editor:Copy 241 Waveform Editor:copy to Clipboard 243 Waveform Editor:create variable 242 Waveform Editor:Cut 241 Waveform Editor:Delete 241 Waveform Editor:Delete Column 239 Waveform Editor:display modes 247 Waveform Editor:display of XY waveforms 237 Waveform Editor:Display options 243 Waveform Editor:editing values 240 Waveform Editor:entering and changing values 240 Waveform Editor:Extra menu 69 Waveform Editor:font 245 Waveform Editor:Go To... 242 Waveform Editor:index 245 Waveform Editor:input cell 240 Waveform Editor:INPUT mode 240 Waveform Editor:Insert New Column 239 Waveform Editor:Insert Values 241 Waveform Editor:marking 240 Waveform Editor:modes 240 Waveform Editor:multi-event waveforms 237 Waveform Editor:num. format 245, 247 Waveform Editor:open table 236 Waveform Editor:Paste 241 Waveform Editor:positioning and scrolling 240 Waveform Editor:Print 251

-XXdelta:sequence command 231 XLS-export templates:definition 114 XLS-format 95, 112 Xoffset:sequence commands 233 Xunit:sequence command 232 XY data:Waveform Editor 237

-YYunit:sequence command 233

-ZZoom:curve window 59

FAMOS Users Manual - Version 6, Rev. 1